JP2024009195A - Game board - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game board characterized in performance means for a game board represented by a pinball game machine (Pachinko game machine) and a rotary drum game machine (slot machine).

SOLUTION: First performance means 2 may start executing first operation after displaying a first image in a certain performance (an SP ready-to-win performance), the first image includes a first mode (a vibration performance-related image 1 shown in Fig. 29(b)), and a second mode (a vibration performance-related image 3 shown in Fig. 29(b)) differing from the first mode, a degree of expectation toward execution of a jackpot game is higher when the first image in the second mode is displayed than when the first image in a first mode is displayed, the first performance means 2 can execute second operation (fourth vibration operation) executed based on storage of reservation of a predetermined count, and the second operation is shorter in operation time than the first operation.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

COPYRIGHT: (C)2024,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine typified by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the playing area of the game board is equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which game balls fall, as well as winning holes, starting holes, and variable winning holes through which game balls can win. Common. When a game ball wins in these games, the player is given benefits such as paying out prize balls (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Some of these game machines are equipped with presentation means.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-200302

However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement regarding the performance means.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine with unique presentation means.

The first game machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
a first performance means capable of executing the first action;
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means;
a display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first presentation means;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of performing a certain effect while performing the fluctuating display,
The first performance means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain performance,
The second performance means is capable of performing a second action,
The display means may display a second image regarding the validity determination result after displaying the first image,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image,
The second image is also a different image from the decorative pattern image,
a first case in which the first action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
a second case in which the first action is performed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
There is a third case in which the first action is not performed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image;
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. and
The first image has a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started;
It is characterized by

A second game machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
a first performance means capable of executing the first action;
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means;
a display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first presentation means;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of performing a certain effect while performing the fluctuating display,
The first performance means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain performance,
The second performance means is capable of performing a second action,
The display means may display a second image regarding the validity determination result after displaying the first image,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image,
The second image is also a different image from the decorative pattern image,
a first case in which the first action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
a second case in which the first action is performed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
There is a third case in which the first action is not performed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image;
The first effect means ends the first action after the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. can be,
The first image has a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started;
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine with unique performance means.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front side (player side). 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine 100. FIG. An example of a display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, in which (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 2, and (c) shows a decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flow chart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt. 3 is a flowchart of processing, and (c) is a flowchart of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt. 3 is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. It is a figure which shows an example of transition from a normal stage to a buttocks stage step by step. 13 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12 in a step-by-step manner; FIG. It is a diagram showing an example step by step from entering the sea zone to the sky zone and hitting the jackpot. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in a step-by-step manner; FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs during final display of a decorative pattern, but the power is immediately restored. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example in which power is immediately restored even though a power outage occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a relationship between a pattern of variable display and a display time of a temporary stop display. It is a figure showing an example of decorative pattern change display after the number of reservations of special figure 2 increases to four. It is a figure which shows an example of an event pre-read notice step by step. 21 is a diagram showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 20; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in a step-by-step manner. It is a figure which shows the modification of the event pre-read notice step by step. It is a diagram showing an example in which the game state changes. (a) is a diagram showing a table related to the role-playing object vibration effect A, and (b) is a diagram showing a table related to the role-playing object vibration effect B. It is a figure which shows the case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed and the case where it is not performed, respectively. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step by step another example continuing from FIG. 26(3). It is a figure which shows step by step another example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed. (a) is a diagram showing a pattern determination table for the role object vibration production A, (b) is a diagram showing an image type determination table for a vibration production related image 2hg' of a modified example, and (c) is a diagram showing a propriety judgment suggestion. It is a figure which shows the image type determination table of an image. After SP reach development, after the rainbow-colored vibration effect related image 3 is displayed, the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is executed, and the validity judgment suggestion image 3 is displayed step by step. FIG. The example shown in FIG. 30 is a step-by-step example in which the timing at which the vibration action of the role object vibration performance A (vibration performance pattern 2) is executed is opposite to the timing at which the validity judgment suggestion image 3 is displayed. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows step by step an example in which the vibration effect related image 1 of a normal color is displayed as a vibration effect related image after SP reach development. It is a timing chart of decorative symbol fluctuation display that hits the jackpot after SPSP reach. This is a timing chart of a decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the player loses even after reaching the SPSP reach. It is a diagram showing a table regarding button vibration effects. It is a figure which shows an example of a button vibration effect step by step. (a) is a diagram showing a table related to background effects, and (b) is a diagram showing a table related to mini character effects. It is a figure which shows an example of mini-character production step by step. It is a figure which shows step-by-step an example in which a role object vibration effect B and a mini character effect are performed. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the production button 136, (b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the upper button 1910 arranged on the operation key unit 190, and (c ) is a diagram schematically showing the amount of operation of the operating lever 137. 13 is a diagram showing a table summarizing button-related images related to the effect button 136. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a table summarizing lever-related images related to the operating lever 137. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of the operation performance, the type of development performance, and the expectation level of jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the determination table of the introduction performance that is started during normal reach. . (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of operation performance and the expectation level of jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the cut-in performance performed during SP Reach 1 and the expectation level of jackpot. , (c) is a diagram showing a determination table for the introduction effect that is started during SP reach 1. (a) is a diagram showing a gold cut-in image, and (b1) to (b4) are diagrams showing introduction effect pattern 3. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of operation performance and the expectation level of jackpot, and (b) is a diagram showing a determination table of the introduction performance that is started during SP reach 2. 5 is a timing chart showing each of four specific examples (A) to (D). 47(A) is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(A) step by step. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(B) in stages. FIG. 47C is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(C) step by step. 51 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 50; FIG. 47(D) is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(D) step by step. 53 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 52. FIG. 47(A) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 47(A) step by step. FIG. 47(B) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 47(B) step by step. FIG. It is a figure which shows the situation when the front frame door 106 is opened while the operation performance is being performed. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a diagram explaining the configuration of a variable prize winning device. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display pattern of a pachinko machine, (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special drawing 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special drawing 2, and (c) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special drawing 1. An example of a decorative pattern is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display pattern of a regular pattern. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for deciding whether or not it is correct, (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for special figure 1 determination, and (e) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the distribution table for special figure 2 determination. It is a figure showing an example of the contents, (f) is a figure showing an example of the contents of the special figure deviation 1 variation pattern table, and (g) is a figure explaining the transition of the variation pattern table of the special figure 1. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a normal time deviation variation pattern selection table, (a-1) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a normal time reach and loss variation pattern selection table, and (b ) is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a time saving/time saving fluctuation pattern selection table, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a time saving/c time saving fluctuation pattern selection table, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a time saving/c time saving time fluctuation pattern selection table. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table for a change variation pattern in a crisp time, and (d-1) is a diagram showing an example of a selection table for a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is reached or lost in a crisp time. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. FIG. 10C is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. It is a figure which shows step-by-step an example of the performance concerning the decorative pattern variation display centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 72 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71. FIG. It is a diagram showing step by step an example of a performance in a jackpot game centered on a decorative symbol display device. It is a figure which shows step-by-step an example of the production|presentation in the electric support state (a time saving state) centering on a decorative pattern display device. 75 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 74. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of the performance before and after the power is shut off. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect before and after power cutoff step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect before and after power cutoff step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect before and after power cutoff step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect before and after power cutoff step by step. It is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect after transition to and end of crispy time. It is a figure which shows step-by-step an example of the production|presentation regarding the decorative pattern variable display centering on a decorative pattern display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of such a performance after the transition to the revival time and after the end. It is a figure which shows another example of an effect before and after power cutoff step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step how an example of the advance notice performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. It is a figure which shows step by step how an example of the advance notice performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. It is a figure which shows step by step how an example of the advance notice performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. FIG. 1 is a front view of an enclosed type pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side). 3A and 3B are diagrams showing gaming machines according to a modification of the present invention, in which (a) shows a casino machine 2000, and (b) shows a mobile phone 3000 equipped with a storage unit that stores electronic data that implements the present invention; (d) shows a portable game machine 4000 that is equipped with a storage unit that stores electronic data that implements the present invention, and (d) shows a home that is equipped with a storage unit that stores electronic data that implements the present invention. (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine seen from the back side. (a) is a schematic front view of the game board seen from the front side (player side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board arranged on the game board. FIG. It is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. An example of a display pattern of a pachinko machine, in which (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 2, and (c) shows a decorative pattern. An example is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display pattern of a normal pattern. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a distribution table. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart, and (c) is a flowchart of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit of the pachinko machine, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. 92 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of a presentation centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a display mode of a hold icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91. FIG. It is a figure which shows the decoration body with which the 2nd effect movable body 8 is provided. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of an effect in which the display mode of a variable icon and the display mode of a background in displaying a reach title are related. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of a zone effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device. It is a diagram illustrating step-by-step an example of a performance in which a super reach is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206 are related. It is a diagram showing step by step an example of a performance in which the display mode of the pending icon and the display mode of the decoration provided in the second performance movable body 8 are related. 109 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a performance similar to the performance in which the second performance movable body 8 shown in FIG. 108 operates. (a) is a diagram showing a title background color determination table of Reach, (b) is a diagram showing a luminescence color determination table of the light emitting unit 71, and (c) is a diagram showing a lord's kimono color determination table. . 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, viewed from the front side (player side). It is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front side (player side). 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine 100. FIG. An example of a display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, in which (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern of special pattern 2, and (c) shows a decoration. An example of a symbol is shown, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal symbol. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flow chart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt. 3 is a flowchart of processing, and (c) is a flowchart of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing in the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt. 3 is a flowchart of processing, (c) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of an accessory ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of a dip switch board. (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game state after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112. It is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which the time-saving game state ends a little before the time-saving game state ends and shifts to a non-time-saving game state. 124 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 123 in a step-by-step manner. 125 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which the length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 124. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 125. FIG. It is a figure which shows step by step an example when there is no pullback period. (a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not met, and (b) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is met. It is a diagram showing a list of songs to be selected after a predetermined condition is satisfied at least once. FIG. 123 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 123(h) and showing step-by-step an example different from the example shown in FIG. 123. It is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the first reservation icon h21 among the reservation icons of the special symbol 2 is in a golden display mode at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is finished. It is a figure which shows step-by-step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 in a state where the music selection display MC is displayed. It is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that is started without a predetermined condition being satisfied. It is a figure which shows an example of a music reach step by step. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time saving state. 1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, seen from the front side (player side); FIG.

Hereinafter, a game machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating drum game machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 57 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 1 to 57, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 57, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 57.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and is provided with a main body open sensor 104S that detects when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening 116. A clerk at the gaming parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. Note that in this embodiment, a device whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes an upper tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for ejecting game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, A ball ejection lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box), and a ball discharge lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128, into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box); A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of the various performance devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and A button lamp 138 that causes the button 136 to emit light, a control lever 137, a lever lamp 139 that is built into the control lever 137 and causes the control lever 137 to emit light, and a ball for the card unit (CR unit) installed at the game parlor. A ball lending operation button 140 for issuing lending instructions, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit. Equipped with. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided. The operation key unit 190 is provided with a determination button 1930 between an upper button 1910 and a lower button 1920, and this determination button 1930 may function as a second effect button. The upper button 1910 is operated to increase the volume of the speaker 120 or the light intensity of the frame lamp 122, and the lower button 1920 is operated to decrease the volume of the speaker 120 or the light intensity of the frame lamp 122. It also functions as an operation means for adjusting the volume and light intensity.

The production button 136, the operation lever 137, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the enter button 1930 shown in FIG. 1 are all in the initial position before being operated. That is, when the production button 136, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the enter button 1930 are operated (pressed) from a state in which their respective operation surfaces (upper surfaces) are in their initial positions, the operation surfaces are lowered. Further, the operation lever 137 is in a vertical state at its initial position, and when operated, becomes an inclined state. That is, the direction of the cross is to fall toward the front, to the back, to the right, or to the left. It also falls in diagonal directions between the directions of the cross.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110, while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, releases the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The ball firing handle 134 is provided on the opposite side to the side where the hinge portion 112 is provided. Further, the operating lever 137 is provided closer to the ball firing handle 134 than the production button 136. When the front frame door 106 is opened, if it is provided on the hinge part 112, it will easily interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed next to it, but if it is provided on the ball firing handle 134 side opposite to the hinge part 112. If the pachinko machine 100 is installed next to it, it will be less likely to interfere with the pachinko machine 100 installed next to it.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the gaming area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 3.

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 4). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 receives a predetermined amount of Based on the fulfillment of the condition, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158 that stores processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 constituting a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that accommodates a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls). 4) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error when operated by a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls (see FIG. 4). A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the launch board 174 (see FIG. 4), and a power switch that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices and turns the power on and off by the operation of a gaming clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A CR interface section 606 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode allows setting at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities. can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the near side sometimes referred to as the front or front, and the back side sometimes referred to as the back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas other than the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as non-gaming areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. Below the gaming area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol retention lamp 216, a first special symbol retention lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 is provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performances, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and in this embodiment is configured with 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment are configured with 7-segment LEDs.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation games are held until a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do so. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, special symbol variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). This makes it possible.

Also provided are a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-hand hitting indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the time-saving game state is in which the fluctuating display time of the normal map is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is easy to open for a long time. The right-hand hitting display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state and can obtain benefits by hitting the right hand. The high probability medium lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrance openings, for example, general winning openings 226a, 226b, a regular symbol starting opening 228, a first special symbol starting opening 230, and a second special symbol starting opening 232. , a variable winning opening 234 is provided.

One or more general winning holes 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning hole placed on the left side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226a, and the general winning hole placed on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226b. When a ball enters the general winning hole 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and, assuming that the ball has won in the general winning hole 226a, drives the payout device 152 and awards a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls). When the ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that it has won a prize in the general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls ( For example, one ball is discharged onto the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The players can freely take out the balls discharged onto the upper tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. In this embodiment, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 226a and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226a are provided on the left side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226b are provided on the right side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. The balls that entered the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one installed in The ball that has passed through the normal figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general prize winning port 226a, 226b. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, it drives a payout device 152, which will be described later, and selects a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of balls as prize balls from the upper tray 126. At the same time, the first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure fluctuation game. The ball that entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting hole 230, when the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting hole 230. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of the special figure 2 is started in priority to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification is sometimes referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine"). has been done.

The second special figure starting port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric tube), is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230, and is equipped with a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and when the wing member 232a is closed. It is impossible for a ball to enter the inside, and when a winning pattern is won in the normal pattern variation game and the normal pattern display device 210 stops displaying the winning pattern, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of balls into the upper tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time, a special figure fluctuation game using the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that enters the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the regular game starting hole 228 (due to a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the regular game starting hole 228 when the game ball is hit to the left. . Therefore, while playing left-handed, there is no chance of winning the normal figure variation game, and therefore, there is no opening or closing of the blade member 232a in principle. On the other hand, if the ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the normal pattern starting port 228, so the blade member 232a may open and close due to winning in the normal pattern fluctuation game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the left hand, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the right hand.

The variable winning hole 234 is called a big winning hole or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one variable winning hole 234 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable prize opening 234 is equipped with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and when the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and when the special pattern variable game is won, the special pattern display device stops the jackpot pattern. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable prize opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls into the upper tray 126 as prize balls.

In this embodiment, the variable winning hole 234 and the general winning hole 226b are integrally formed in the ball entry unit U1, and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V passing switch VC. The V passing switch VC opens upward and allows the game ball to pass from top to bottom. This V passing switch VC detects passing game balls. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and is moved forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334. When the V-shutter VS is in a forward state (corresponding to a closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passage switch VC, and when the V-shutter VS is in a backward state (corresponding to an open state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passing switch VC. It becomes possible to pass through the passage switch VC. The game ball that enters the variable prize opening 234 and passes the ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front side, then rolls to the V shutter VS, and passes through the V passing switch VC, and sometimes does not pass through. There are cases where the player is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 (see FIG. 4), and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that there is a V winning prize.

In this embodiment, from the start of the jackpot game until a specific round (for example, the final round), the V-shutter VS maintains a closed state (advanced state), and in the specific round, the V-shutter VS opens (retreats). , V prizes can be won. If it is possible to obtain a V winning prize, the control state shifts to the special pattern high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and if it is not possible to obtain a V winning prize, the control state shifts to the special pattern low probability state after the jackpot game ends. It remains as it is. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls, etc. that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and controls the firing rod and The ball is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball-hitting direction conversion member 236, game nails, etc., and enters the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) and starting. If you win a prize at the opening (1st special pattern starting port 230, 2nd special pattern starting port 232), or without winning in any winning port or starting port, or by just passing through the regular pattern starting port 228, you will be out. Reach 240. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect passage of a game ball received in the ejected ball receiving port. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, and are passed through a predetermined ejection path. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, an upper performance device 2 is placed at the top of the game area 124, a lower performance device 3 is placed at the bottom, and side performance devices 4 are placed at the left and right sides, respectively. In the case of this embodiment, these presentation devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using FIG. 4. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also receives signals output from various sensors 320, including a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor that detects game balls passing through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and a lower tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular symbol display device 210, and a various status display section 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of ordinary drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, as a normal electric accessory. Various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting opening 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, a driving means for driving the V shutter VS, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected thereto. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

Note that when the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230 at that timing, and transfers the latched value to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230. Store in value storage register. Furthermore, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (eg, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control section, which will be described later), is started.

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. Note that the gaming machine frame lamp 452 also includes the button lamp 138 and lever lamp 139 shown in FIG.

In addition, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and for controlling the drive of various (upper, lower, side) production devices 2 to 4, etc. A drive circuit 422 for the output, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the production devices 2 to 4, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects presses of the production buttons 136 and various buttons constituting the operation key unit 190. , outputs a detection signal from a lever sensor 427 that detects the operation of the operating lever 137 to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (Video Display Processor) that reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 receives a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 connects the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500 with each other. Although power at a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5(a) to 5(d), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and general symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped. We will explain the types of special and regular maps.

The special pattern 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, and the ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the one segment in the center as a "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1 variable display). play a variable game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the one segment in the center in the "special figure 2 variable display" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 After lapse of time, the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in a row.

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 5(a), three types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure c" are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols ("special pattern a" and "special pattern b") are prepared as the stop pattern mode of the special pattern 1. "Special pattern a" is a 3-round (R) variable probability jackpot symbol that is expected to be obtained with variable probability, and "special pattern b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol with no chance of obtaining variable probability. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, variable probability acquisition (transition to the special pattern high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when the third round which is the final round of the jackpot game starts, the V shutter VS opens (retreats) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. It becomes possible. If the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS (if the V prize is won), after the jackpot game ends, the control state will shift to the special pattern high probability state, and the shifted special pattern high probability state will indicate that the jackpot game is It is maintained until the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times after the end. In this embodiment, once the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time for it to remain open, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that it is a planned jackpot (the same applies to "Special Map A" and "Special Map B" described later). On the other hand, when special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the third round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, is entered, and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. There is nothing to do (V winnings cannot be won), and after the end of the jackpot game, the control state remains in the special figure low probability state. In this way, the transition to the special pattern high probability state requires V winning, but the transition to the regular pattern high probability state is started on the condition that the jackpot game ends. In other words, if you hit the jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, you will move to the normal pattern high probability state, and the transferred normal pattern high probability state will be the same even if the symbol fluctuation display of the special pattern is special pattern a after the jackpot game ends. This is maintained for 120 times in the case of special symbol b, and 50 times in the case of special symbol b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of losing symbol ("special symbol c") is prepared as a stop symbol mode of the special symbol 1.

FIG. 5(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 2. This Figure 5(b) shows four types of special patterns from "Special Pattern A" to "Special Pattern D", and two of these special patterns are jackpot patterns ("Special Pattern A" and "Special Pattern D"). Figure B"). "Special pattern A" is a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol that is expected to be obtained with a probability variation, and "Special pattern B" is a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol that is planned to be obtained. In other words, if special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state and the general figure high probability state, and after the jackpot game ends, the special figure This state is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 120 times. For special pattern B, if you win a V prize in the second round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state shifts to the special pattern high probability state and the general pattern high probability state, and after the jackpot game ends, the special pattern symbol This state is maintained while the variable display is performed 120 times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of losing symbols ("special pattern C" and "special pattern D") are prepared as stop pattern modes of the special pattern 2. "Special pattern C" is the same general losing pattern as "special pattern c", but "special pattern D" is a special pattern called a time-saving pattern, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot in the special symbol variation game is performed by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol to be stopped is determined by a software random number lottery. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game during a specific period, it is determined whether or not you have won the "sudden time saving" by lottery of hardware random numbers, and if you win the "sudden time saving", the second special figure will be displayed. The “time saving symbol” is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the state shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The general figure high probability state is called a time-saving gaming state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-time-saving gaming state by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot, etc. Refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electronic support state" is only a state related to general cards, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to general cards and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is a time-saving gaming state and a state with high probability of winning. In a state with a high probability of a common figure, it is easier to win a variable game of a common figure compared to a state with a low probability of a common figure (a certain probability of a common figure). For example, the probability of winning a regular figure variable game is 1/100 in a regular figure low probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in a regular figure high probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure variable game is shorter than in the non-time-saving game state (general figure variable short). For example, in the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is 10 seconds, but in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 2 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (the electric chew opening period is extended). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases) compared to the non-time-saving game state. For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game mode for one winning to the normal figure starting port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game mode (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds again). open). By extending the opening period of the electric chute and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of the ball entering the special map 2 starting hole 232 increases. Note that the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-time saving game state is maintained. This is because, especially in jackpot games, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time-saving gaming state", the period during jackpot gaming is excluded.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the normal pattern change, normal pattern change short, extension of the electric chew open period, and increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened are performed, but at least one of these is not performed. For example, the player may be in a state where the advantage is high and the time-saving gaming state may be established. In this case, even if you change what is executed in the time saving game state of a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving, which will be described later, among the following: normal drawing fixed change, normal drawing changing shortening, electric chew opening period extension, and electric chew opening frequency increase. good. For example, in the case of a time reduction, all of the following are carried out: ``Puzu definite change'', ``Puzu change shortening'', an extension of the electric chew opening period, and an increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened; It is only necessary to execute one or two of extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened. Alternatively, if either one of an extension of the electric chew release period or an increase in the number of electric chew openings, which increases the probability of a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, is performed, the time saving game state may be set. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 starting opening 232 changes between the difficult winning state where it is difficult for game balls to enter and the easy winning state where it is easy for game balls to enter. This special figure 2 starting opening 232 is in a winning easy state for a longer period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in this embodiment, when "Tokuzu A", "Tokuzu A", and "Tokuzu B" are stopped and displayed, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the special symbols are displayed 120 times. The time-saving gaming state (general pattern high probability state) is maintained until the game is played, and the game shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state (general pattern low probability state) at the 121st time. In addition, when "special pattern b" is stopped and displayed, after the end of the jackpot game that is played after that, the time-saving gaming state (normal pattern high probability state) is maintained until the variable display of the special pattern is performed 50 times, and the 51 At the second time, the game shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (normal pattern low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot symbols of all the special symbols are set to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the non-time-saving gaming state may be maintained without shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, small winning symbols may be prepared in addition to the jackpot symbols, and in the small winning game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. When activated, the open state is maintained for only 0.1 seconds at most. In addition, when the door member 234a is opened for a small win, for example, when the door member 234a is opened for the first time, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this happens, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small winning game, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, it returns to the control state before the start of the small win game.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 13 types of decorative patterns in this embodiment, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 13". The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230 or the special pattern 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, or the special pattern 2 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the starting port 232, each of the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208 In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... "Fluctuating display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 is for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, a stop pattern mode that is a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed.

When reporting a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special pattern b"), decorative symbols with the same number are located in the left symbol display area 208a and right symbol display area 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b. stops displaying the combination of decorative patterns in which the decoration 13 is located (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 13-decoration 1", "decoration 2-decoration 13-decoration 2", etc.). On the other hand, when notifying a variable probability jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map A", 10R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map A", 2R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map B"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "Decoration 3 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a losing pattern of "special pattern c" or "special pattern C", a combination of decorative patterns other than the combinations of decorative patterns described above (for example, a loose pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. (eyes) to stop display. Furthermore, when suddenly winning a time saving prize, three "decorations 11" are displayed side by side instead of a combination of "decorations 1" to "decorations 10".

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a preview effect in which the background displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background corresponding to the zone. There are multiple types of execution start timings for the zone production, and there are cases where the execution start timing is when the decorative pattern starts changing. When the empty zone performance is started at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, three "decorations 12" are displayed side by side at the timing when the previous decorative symbol variation display ends. Hereinafter, "decoration 12" may be referred to as a zone entry symbol. Note that the zone performance may include a performance in which three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side. That is, in this case, the execution start timing of the zone effect is the timing when three zone entry symbols are displayed side by side.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "fluctuating display of decorative patterns" to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the decorative patterns may be referred to as the variable display of decorative patterns. The variable display of decorative patterns is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of the ordinary symbol. There are two types of stop display modes of common symbols in this embodiment: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the general pattern starting port 228, the general pattern display device 210 lights up all seven segments and lights up one segment in the center. Perform a "fluctuating display of common figures" (fluctuating common figures game) that repeatedly lights up. Then, after the variable time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the losing symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5(d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "fluctuation display of a common symbol" until the stop display of the stop symbol mode of a common symbol may be referred to as a variable display of a common symbol.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described using FIG. 6. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, and a special figure symbol determination random number. Further, this RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. Furthermore, the RAM 308 stores the number of special symbols on hold, special symbol winning random numbers, various judgment (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the reserved number of special symbols storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage section for special symbols that is divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) in which the start of the winning/failure judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary figures is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are made into one set and these starting information are stored one set at a time in each area in order of winning (in order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that in this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power cutoff (before power cutoff), and if it is not returned to the state before power cutoff (when the basic circuit 302 of main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state will return to the state before the power cut (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 was operated by a clerk at the game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the RAM clear switch 180 has been operated). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115). If it is determined that the setting is correct (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio/setting display 196 flashes "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments on the setting monitor are incremented, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor are showing "6". When it does, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select any one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, and by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. Thereafter, after the settings are finalized, the setting values can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output. good. Further, in this embodiment, the settings are set in six stages, ie, settings 1 to 6, but settings other than the six stages may be used, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Good too.

Further, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side, ( Step S115; No), the process moves to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and if this power status information does not indicate suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (e.g. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0). (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Note that in this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command described later, is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the regular figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, respectively, are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger for main control. 2. Starts timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area partitioned for each sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read from the previous detection signal storage area divided into sections, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage areas partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two days ago, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). information indicating that the ball enters the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the second special drawing starting hole 232, or the ball enters the regular drawing starting hole 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that there has been a win in these winning holes 234, 226 and these starting holes 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first starting hole sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting hole 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there has been a winning at the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winnings at the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, the processing branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning to the first special symbol start opening 230. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, then it will be determined whether or not it matches the entered award determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the general figure winning random number value and the Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating the winning random number has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random number winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it also determines that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and stopping display of symbols on the regular symbol display device 210, a symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined prize-winning presentation time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end presentation period, etc. Update timer.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 234, 226 or the starting holes 230, 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read, add 1, and set in the original prize ball number storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, multiple types of starting information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage section provided in the RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of reservation).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. is power-on information (if it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 repeatedly turns on and off. Performs lights-off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of common symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on and off so that the normal symbol display device 210 has a display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the losing symbol. Controls the lighting/extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the symbol A shown in FIG. 5(d)) or the losing symbol (the symbol B shown in FIG. 5(d)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the general figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds). With this setting, the fixed and displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is set to open the blade member 232a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of a timer for managing the blade opening time provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening/closing drive solenoid (332) of the blade member 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general figure inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on as described later. If this general figure loss flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set the normal pattern inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a common map related lottery process is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general pattern fluctuation game and the second special pattern starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general pattern is inactive), and the pending general pattern fluctuation game is not controlled. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern fluctuation game is a win or a non-win by a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area mentioned above. A winning flag is set in the RAM 308 if the winning is determined. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a random value of the general figure timer, and based on the acquired random value of the general figure timer, the general figure display device 210 selects a normal figure from among a plurality of variable times. One time during which a figure is displayed in a variable manner is selected, and this variable display time is stored as a general figure variable display time in a general figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in the storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Subsequently, special figure pre-reading processing (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information for each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and variation time before the validity determination process, and performs the preliminary determination. The result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed depending on the state of the special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special figure display device 214 is turned on and Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off the lights. By performing this control, the second special figure display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a loss flag, a special symbol probability variation flag, and a regular symbol probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, is special pattern A shown in Figure 5(b), special pattern B when the 2R jackpot flag is on, special pattern C when the loss flag is on, and special pattern when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on. D. Control the lighting/extinguishing of the 7-segment LED that constitutes the second special figure display device 214 so that each of the modes shown in FIG. . By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a loss symbol (special symbol C), and a time-saving symbol (special symbol D). ) to confirm the display of one of the symbols.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time savings stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings, and if the result of the subtraction is from 1 to 0, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 2 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 settings To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. Then, information indicating the winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 standby time management provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for keeping the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of the various solenoids 332), and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special pattern 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with variable probability (10 rounds for special pattern A, 2 rounds for special pattern B), the V shutter is activated for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the VS (a part of the various solenoids 332), and an open period is stored in the storage area of the V shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be displayed. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening/closing the V-shutter VS ( A signal for keeping the V-shutter VS in a closed state is output to some of the various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, data is stored in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and won a winning prize (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)). Information indicating the V winning performance period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 2 standby time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag will not be turned on.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member 234a a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round excluding the first time) and starts at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member 234a ends, a predetermined ending performance period (for example, 3 seconds ) In other words, in order to set the decorative symbol display device 208 to wait for a period during which the image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed, the effect is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the waiting period.

In addition, if the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (120 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the time saving number (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the regular figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time reductions (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON.

The time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player because the time from ending the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to starting the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, the state is in a high probability state (probability variation). In the high probability state of common symbols, the probability of winning in the common symbol fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the regular figure high probability state, compared to the regular figure low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the high-probability state of a common figure than in the low-probability state of a common figure. The state in which any of these ``Fuzu definite change'', ``Furuzu change shortness'', and ``Electric tulip expansion'' is set is called the ``den support'' (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the regular game ball is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls will enter the variable prize opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many game balls will enter the special pattern 2 starting hole 232 during the jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that there is a case where the number of game balls that can be acquired during a jackpot is increased and the game becomes more gambling.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inactive setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process during the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the first special figure display device 212 is turned on and Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off the lights. By performing this control, the first special figure display device 212 performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a loss flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, if the 3R jackpot flag A is on In this case, the first special pattern is set so that the special pattern a shown in FIG. The 7-segment LED constituting the display device 212 is controlled to turn on and off, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special figure 1 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 displays any one of the 3R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), and the losing symbol (special symbol c). Confirm display.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time savings stored in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings, and if the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol for which the fluctuation display is to be stopped is special figure 1. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 1 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 settings To set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. Then, information indicating the winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing special figure 1 standby time provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for keeping the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of the various solenoids 332), and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3rd round), the solenoid for opening/closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in an open state is output to some of the various solenoids 332), and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening/closing the V-shutter VS ( A signal for keeping the V-shutter VS in a closed state is output to some of the various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, data is stored in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the V passing switch VC and won a winning prize (V winning presentation period (for example, 3 seconds)). Information indicating the V winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 1 standby time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag will not be turned on.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first round) and starts at the timing when it is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern display device 208, information indicating the performance standby period is stored in the storage area of the performance standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the player to wait for the period during which the image informing the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed. Set. In addition, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (120 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver number (120 times) provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (50 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver number (50 times) provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on flag. In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process, the regular figure probability fluctuation flag is never set to on.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is stored in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Also here, the special drawing related lottery process for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related drawing processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special drawing related drawing processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) is performed (step S229). ) is performed (step S231). The special drawing 2-related lottery process is for the special drawing 2 in which the variable game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, the status of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive, and the special drawing 2 is on hold. The starting condition is that the number of variable games is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The special drawing 1 related lottery process is for special drawing 1 where the variable game of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is not being performed, the status of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is both inactive, and special drawing 1 is on hold. The starting condition is that the number of variable games is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start conditions of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the start conditions for the games are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game starts to fluctuate first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the reservation of the special figure 1 variable game are not performed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the judgment of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting hole 232. , is given priority over the notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting slot 230. In this exemplary embodiment, a special pattern variable game with a high degree of advantage (in this example, the special pattern 2 variable game) is played with priority over a special pattern variable game with a low degree of advantage (in this example, the special pattern 1 variable game). For this reason, it may become easier to create a difference in the advantageousness of the gaming states.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most past stored) pending position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Figure 2 (a set of winning random numbers and special drawing 2 random numbers) is obtained, and based on the special drawing 2 winning random number in the obtained special drawing 2 starting information, etc., using the validity judgment table stored in the ROM 306. A decision is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss (judgment of validity). In addition, in determining whether the special drawing 1 is correct or not, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 using the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined validity judgment result. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the results in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined result of the determination, the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of determination of the validity, the acquired random value for determining the special symbol fluctuation time, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and Subtract 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You can do it like this.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special pattern 2 variable game with a high advantage is started with priority over the special pattern 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the reservation of special pattern 2 is prioritized and consumed over the reservation of special pattern 1. As an example, the special pattern 2 priority fluctuation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special pattern 2 fluctuation game with a high advantage, and the reservation of special pattern 1 is changed to the special pattern 2 fluctuation game. It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is consumed with priority over reservation. In addition, without prioritizing either the highly advantageous special pattern 2 variable game or the low advantageous special pattern 1 variable game, the special pattern variable game related to the reservation of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 will be entered into the starting opening prize. It may also be a starting opening winning order variation that starts sequentially. In the starting opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of special map 1 and special map 2, so compare with priority fluctuation where the upper limit number of reservations is 4 for each of special map 1 and special map 2. In some cases, it may be possible to raise the upper limit on the number of reservations.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is assumed that the lottery process or variable game regarding the suspension of the other special figure is not performed depending on the state of one special figure, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update A plurality of special symbols may be changed at the same time by performing processing and special symbol related lottery processing independently for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In addition, in the case where a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special symbol, or the lottery results of each special symbol are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special symbols are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command types (in this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information command, Bits 0 to 10 consist of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol fluctuation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in special drawing related lottery processing, etc., and symbol fluctuation stop (rotation start) command is included. In the case of a command (rotation stop), it includes the values of various jackpot flags and loss flags, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence or absence of a prize in the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in the variable winning opening 234, etc. including. In the case of a prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage section. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308, selected in the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information stored in the RAM 308 indicating the values of various jackpot flags, loss flags, etc. is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figures that are on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure that is on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-described big winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described big winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase process, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (advance notice information, fake Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal figure display device 210 and the first special figure display device are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. 212, display data to be output to the second special figure display device 214, various status display section 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it becomes HALT state.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 8(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, button/lever control processing is performed. In the button/lever control process, the operation of the operation means such as the production button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 is detected, and according to the detection result, the production data updated in step S309 is transferred to the production button 136 or the operation key. Processing is performed to change the performance data according to the operation of the unit 190 or the operation lever 137.

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command to the various performance devices 2 to 4 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 9(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 9B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 9C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 9D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 10(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 10(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the variable winnings during the jackpot game) It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls won by winning into the variable winning a prize opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) that are obtained due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the number of winnings due to the opening of the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable prize winning opening 234). This refers to the percentage of game balls (number of game balls acquired).

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, if it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous accessory ratio is displayed blinking, and then A security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the emitted light color may be changed. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 10(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be explained, although some parts overlap with what has been explained so far.

FIG. 11(a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming status after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. The probability of hitting the jackpot with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the probability of hitting the jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/315, and the probability of hitting a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/90. When setting 3 is selected, the probability of jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/310, and the probability of a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special pattern low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special pattern high probability is 1/87. When setting 5 is selected, the probability of hitting the jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/300, and the probability of hitting a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the probability of jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/295, and the probability of a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/84. The higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

Further, the probability of winning a common figure with a low probability of a common figure is 1/100, whereas the probability of winning a common figure with a high probability of a common figure is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11(a), in special map 1, the breakdown of special map a and special map b is equal (50% each), and in special map 2, the breakdown of special map A and special map B is equal. is 7:3.

In addition, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V passage switch VC (when the probability variable operation region is ON), it becomes a probability variable, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the variable probability operation area is OFF), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state will be , is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third and final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass the V passing switch VC. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special pattern is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. In special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. Regardless of whether it is special pattern A or special pattern B, if the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC (when the probability variable operation region is ON), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be special pattern high probability normal pattern. A high probability state is entered, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the variable probability operation area is OFF), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state will be , is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times.

In addition, after the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state or the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, it shifts to the normal state (special pattern low probability general pattern low probability state). The time saving that starts after the jackpot game is called a time saving.

FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to fire the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In other words, in the special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state, even if the ball enters the normal pattern starting hole 228, there is almost no chance of winning the normal pattern fluctuation game, and the player should not play right-handed. The ball should be fired toward the left side (hitting the ball left-handed). Note that the normal state refers to a non-time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state such as the special pattern low probability general pattern high probability state or the special pattern high probability general pattern high probability state, it is easy to win the general pattern fluctuation game, so in order to aim for the general pattern starting opening 228, It is recommended to fire the game ball toward the right side area where the normal figure starting port 228 is provided. In other words, as shown in the breakdown in Figure 11(a), the probability of winning a jackpot (special pattern a) with a probability variation in special drawing 1 is 50%, whereas in special drawing 2, the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability variation is 50%. The probability of winning the jackpot is 100%. Further, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after the jackpot game is 50 times in special figure 1, but always 120 times in special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous for the player with special drawing 2 than with special drawing 1, the player should aim for a jackpot with special drawing 2 by placing the prize into the second special drawing opening 232. . Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right area (hit the ball to the right).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (hitting to the right) toward the right area of the gaming area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided. Become. FIG. 11(b) shows that after the end of the jackpot game, there are cases where the time-saving game state is maintained 120 times and cases where it is maintained 50 times.

In addition, in FIG. 11(b), when the special symbol does not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 950 times in the special symbol low probability state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state), In other words, if the special symbol loses 950 times in a row, the time-saving gaming state will be maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 1100 times. The period in which the time-saving gaming state is maintained as a result of a predetermined series of special figure losses is called play time, and this time-saving is called b-time saving. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once after the power is turned on and before the first hit, and once the jackpot has been hit, the shift can only be made once before the next jackpot is hit. Therefore, if the special figure is lost 950 times in a row in the b time-saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time-saving game state, the previous b time-saving game state is continued, and the 1100 times the special figure is lost. If it continues, the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state). Note that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state b, also includes the number of consecutive losses in the time-saving gaming state a and the time-saving gaming state c, which will be described later.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b), the time-saving symbols may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is called c-time saving. This time-saving symbol is used to hold the remaining Tokuzu 2 (hereinafter referred to as "Special 2 remaining") at the end of the time-saving gaming state (Tokuzu high probability regular symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability regular symbol high probability state). In the symbol variation display of special drawing 2, which is performed as a result of the symbol (sometimes referred to as "pending") being consumed in a non-time saving gaming state, c time saving may be won. If you win the time-saving prize c, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3), and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "decoration 11" (time-saving decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 5(c). ) will be stopped and displayed in a row. Then, while the special pattern symbol variation display is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern high probability state) is maintained. In other words, the game shifts to the c time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. The probability of winning a sudden time reduction is 1/90. In addition, when the time-saving game state that started after the jackpot game ends, the special figure 2 remaining is on hold, and when the 950th special figure loss starts in a row, the special figure 2 when the time-saving game state ends. In addition to the remaining reservation, there is a possibility that the player suddenly wins the time saving again when the special drawing 2 balance is reserved at the time when the time saving game state that was started after suddenly winning the time saving game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol may be won even in the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability general pattern high probability state, and the b time saving game state. Also in this case, the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 3). However, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. . In this embodiment, in order to give priority to the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the time saving gaming state b over the c time saving gaming state, the second special pattern display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the time-saving game state (c) will not be entered.

Furthermore, if you hit right in the non-time saving game state and win the regular figure fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100 and win the second special figure starting opening 232 (Electric Chew), you may also win c time saving. There is a transition to the c time-saving gaming state without being invalidated. That is, not only the remaining special figure 2 pending, but even a new special figure 2 pending may be shifted to the c time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special symbol start opening 232 (electronic chew) in the non-time-saving gaming state. For example, even if a game ball enters the normal pattern starting hole 228, the general pattern fluctuation game may not be won, or even if the general pattern fluctuation game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be changed. It may be an open pattern in which it is extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting opening 232 (electronic chew).

In addition, the condition for transition to the time-saving gaming state b is satisfied by all losses in the c-time-saving gaming state (950 consecutive special drawing losses), and the transition from the c-time-saving gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is satisfied. In some cases.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 even in the special symbol high probability regular symbol high probability state, the special symbol low probability regular symbol high probability state, and the b time-saving game state. But it may stop appearing. In other words, except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state, it may not be displayed in a stopped state.

Next, a specific example of how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, multiple types of stages are prepared. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of transition from the normal stage to the buttocks stage. In this example, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state), and left-handed playing is recommended.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1) displays a background (white background with no pattern) representing a non-time-saving gaming state.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1) is provided with a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and also informing the number of reservations, and the upper left area displays the number of reservations of special symbol 1. An area is provided, and an area for displaying the number of reserved special drawings 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, in the upper right corner, a notification area (fourth symbol) for the special symbol 1 is provided, and in the lower right corner, a notification region (fourth symbol) for the special symbol 2 is provided. It should be noted that a notification area during symbol change for common symbols and a display area for the number of pending symbols for common symbols may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 220. It is consistent with the number of reservations indicated by . In addition, in the symbol change notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a jackpot, it will be stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a loss, it will be displayed as "x". Stop display. In addition, while the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner, the "-" display may blink, and it may be possible to recognize that the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. This blinking display of "-" of the fourth symbol may be referred to as a fourth symbol fluctuation display.
In addition, the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is also the same as the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and this display mode corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display and stop display of special figure 2. changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol, and changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, you can receive a preview notice and a notice regarding the symbol change display in progress. You may go. The fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 39. Further, the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 and the mini symbol may be displayed by a display means (for example, a sub-liquid crystal display device, a lamp, etc.) different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1), a variable display of decorative patterns is performed. That is, the downward fluctuation, which is the direction of fluctuation, is occurring at high speed. Furthermore, a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mini-symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and are stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In other words, the fluctuating display of the mini symbols (mini symbol fluctuating display) is performed in response to (synchronizing with) the fluctuating display of the special symbol, and the execution state of the fluctuating display of the special symbol changes depending on the fluctuating state of the mini symbol. It is now possible for people to be notified (suggested) of this. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display and also displays the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display and also displays a mini symbol variation display.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed. The variation icon shown in FIG. 12(1) is round, patternless, and green. On the drawing, the fact that the icon is green is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (the same applies hereafter). The fluctuation icon suggests the expected level of jackpot in the symbol fluctuation display currently being performed by the display mode. That is, the variable icon has a function as a normal notice depending on the display mode. The green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 25%.

Note that the expectation level of a jackpot is the expectation level that a jackpot game will be executed, and in the following explanation, it may also be referred to as the reliability level of a jackpot.

In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-time-saving gaming state, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations of the special figure 1 is represented by the number of reservation icons of the special figure 1 in addition to the number of lit special figure 1 reservation lamps 218 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the startup information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information as a second hold icon, etc. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, hold icons are displayed side by side, and hold icons closer to the variable icon display area 280 (left side hold icons) have older winnings.

In FIG. 12(1), three special map 1 reservation icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the special map 1 reservation icon display area 281, and the first reservation icon h11 is a round patternless and It is a white display mode. On the drawing, the fact that the icon is white is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the left (the same applies hereafter). Further, the second hold icon h12 is a round, patternless, red display mode. On the drawing, the red color of the icon is represented by diagonal cross hatching (the same applies hereafter). Furthermore, the third pending icon h12 is a round, patternless, and green display mode, which is the same as the display mode of the variable icon. The pending icon indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the pre-read preview depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the jackpot in the symbol variation display that is performed after the reservation represented by the reservation icon is exhausted. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. Note that it may be suggested that the jackpot expectation level is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the first place. In the following description, if the display mode is the default display mode, the explanation to that effect may be omitted. Moreover, the red display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 50%. Note that the green display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 25%, as explained in the display mode of the fluctuating icon.

In FIG. 12(2), a pseudo-continuous effect has started in the variable display of decorative symbols. Pseudo-continuous display is a variation display mode of decorative symbols in which the variation start and temporary stop display of decorative symbols is executed multiple times in one variation display of a special symbol, and the display of the result of a one-time judgment (lottery). This is a fluctuating display of decorative patterns that makes it appear as if the results of the judgment have been displayed multiple times. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(2), a pseudo-continuous pattern (decorative pattern written as "NEXT") suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and the left pattern is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped in the area 208a, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the high-speed fluctuation in the variable display of decorative patterns, it is not possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is, but in the temporary stop display, it is possible to confirm what kind of pattern the decorative pattern is. In the temporary stop display, the decorative pattern oscillates and moves at an extremely low speed. On the other hand, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the 4th symbol/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol of special symbol 1 is being displayed in variable fashion continues to be displayed. .

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(3), the display screen is blacked out and the decorative pattern is no longer visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. In this figure 12 (3), the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol of special symbol 1 is being displayed in a variable manner continues to be displayed. .

Eventually, the blackout ends and the decorative patterns begin to change again. FIG. 12(4) shows the situation immediately before the blackout ends and the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous performance starts. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(4) displays the characters "x2" indicating that the blackout has ended and the second variation has started. Further, when the blackout ends, in FIG. 12(2), "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b where the pseudo-connection pattern was temporarily displayed. That is, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the combination of decorative symbols used when re-fluctuation is started. Here, the types of decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b are different. This difference makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the re-fluctuation display. Furthermore, if the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed is the same as the combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting re-variation, the player will be able to display the pseudo-continuous symbols again when the blackout ends. It is possible that the user may mistakenly think that the temporary stop is displayed. However, as shown in FIGS. 12(2) to 12(4), by making the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and the combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the re-variation different, this kind of game misunderstandings can be prevented. In FIG. 12 (5) following FIG. 12 (4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative pattern has started.

In FIG. 12 (6), a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 5", and in FIG. 12 (7), the right pattern display area A decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at 208c, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 1". In the subsequent FIG. 12(8), a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 4". In FIG. 12(8), a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped (fluctuation display). On the other hand, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to display mini symbol fluctuations, and in the 4th symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner, a blinking "-" (4th Symbol fluctuation display) continues. Whether it is a mini pattern or a fourth pattern, the pattern cannot be confirmed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 12(9), a final display is performed, and the losing decorative pattern combinations such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" are completely stopped and displayed. That is, the decorative pattern does not move during the final display. It should be noted that, also in this final display, it is possible to confirm what kind of decorative pattern the decorative pattern is. Furthermore, the mini symbol in the upper left corner also displays a confirmed display that allows you to check the combination of symbols such as "5-4-1", and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner also displays a confirmed display that allows you to confirm the "x" symbol. is displayed. As is clear from FIG. 12(9), both the mini pattern and the fourth pattern are smaller than the decorative pattern. The confirmed display of the mini symbol is a display that suggests the result of the validity determination, and the confirmation display of the fourth symbol is also a display that suggests the result of the validity determination.

Furthermore, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the final display starts.

While the decorative pattern is being displayed, a wipe effect is performed to change the stage. In FIG. 12 (10), the wipe effect has started. In the wipe effect, the wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and there is a wipe-in where the wipe display wp covers the display screen, and a wipe-out where the wipe display wp disappears from the display screen. executed. Although the decorative symbols and pending icons overlap with the wipe display wp and become invisible, the mini symbols in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the wipe performance. The wipe-in that started in FIG. 12 (10) is completed in FIG. 12 (11), and the decorative pattern and pending icon are no longer visible on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (11). In the subsequent FIG. 12 (12), wipeout has been performed, and a part of the decorative pattern and the hold icon have become visible. A stage change occurs when a wipe-in is completed or a wipe-out is initiated. In this example, a stage change is performed from the normal stage to the buttocks stage. The decorative patterns that have become visible since the wipeout has started are displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later.

When the wipeout is completed, the wipe effect ends. Furthermore, when the wipe performance ends, the symbol variation display of the next special symbol starts. FIG. 12 (13) is a diagram showing the state immediately after the symbol variation display of the next special symbol is started. In FIG. 12 (13), the first special symbol display device 212 has started to display a variable pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. In the variable display of decorative symbols, a variable display start operation is performed at the start of the variation. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 12 (13) undergoes this movement at the start of the variable display, and moves slightly in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of variation. In the movement at the start of variation, the decorative pattern is displayed in a checkable state. In the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, following the fluctuation start operation, the decorative symbols are displayed in a downward fluctuating manner.

Furthermore, since the stage has changed from the normal stage to the lord stage, the lord character YM1 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13). . This lord's character YM1 is displayed as an animation. In addition, a character display YM2 that differs for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed at the lower left corner of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of starting the variable display of decorative patterns is "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" in which a different character display YM2 is additionally displayed for each type of decorative pattern, and the combination of this decorative pattern is The operation at the start of fluctuation is performed with the combination as it is. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the previous decorative pattern fluctuation display ("Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" shown in FIG. "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" shown in Figure 12 (9) and the combination of decorative symbols (at the start time or immediately after the start) when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (Figure 12 (13) This is different from "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" shown in ) in which a different character display YM2 is additionally displayed for each type of decorative pattern. Here, although the decorative patterns are the same, the presence or absence of the display YM2 of a different character differs depending on the type of decorative pattern, and although the type of decorative pattern is the same, the display mode is different. Since the decorative symbols are different in this way, the player can easily distinguish between the previous stop display and the current start of the variable display. Furthermore, it becomes easier to confirm that a stage change has taken place.

In addition, in Figure 12 (13), the mini symbol and the 4th symbol are already changing at high speed, but when the fluctuation starts, the display of the mini symbol and the 4th symbol are confirmed (display in Figure 12 (9)) It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the same displayed symbol. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in Figure 12 (9)) in response to the final display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before (13) in FIG. 12) is the same.

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (13), the shifting of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that has been the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 12 (14) is an icon in the default display mode. Further, the icon that was the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11, and the icon that was the third hold icon h12 has become the second hold icon h12.

In addition, the display contents are difficult to see in the part that has started to be visible due to the wipeout due to effect display such as light emission (see Figure 14 (7)), and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display content becomes visible. You may also make it so that Alternatively, the stage change may be performed when the wipeout is completed.

In FIG. 12 (14), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (15), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also here, a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed at the lower left corner of each decorative pattern.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (16) continuing from FIG. 12 (15), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 4" is displayed as confirmed. Also here, a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed at the lower left corner of each decorative pattern. Furthermore, the animated lord character YM1 is depressed.

In FIG. 13 (17), the first special symbol display device 212 has started to display a variable pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 13 (17) is an icon in a red display mode.

In addition, in Figure 13 (17), the mini symbols and the 4th symbol are already changing at high speed, but when the fluctuation starts, the display of the mini symbol and the 4th symbol is confirmed (display in Figure 13 (16)) It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the same display pattern as . In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in Fig. 13 (16)) in response to the final display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before (17) in FIG. 13) is the same.

Note that the period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" to the end of the final display (Fig. 12 (8) to (12)) is better than that of "Decoration 9 - Decoration". 2-Decoration 4" is longer than the period from the start of the temporary stop display to the end of the final display (FIG. 12 (15) to FIG. 13 (16)).

In FIG. 13 (18), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern.

In the subsequent FIG. 13 (19), the ready-to-win state is established, and "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Note that a princess character display YM2 is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of "Decoration 2" which is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 13 (20), the game develops into a super (SP) reach, and on the decorative pattern display device 208, a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed on the entire display screen. In addition, the animation display of the lord's character YM1, the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1 disappear, and the decorative pattern that was previously displayed large in the center of the display screen is reduced to the lower right corner of the display screen. Displayed. Note that the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (21), an animation showing a lord who has won against an enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal jackpot ("Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2") is displayed. The combination of decorative symbols of ``Special Figure B'' (3R Normal Jackpot) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Although the decoration 13 does not additionally display a different character YM2 for each type of decorative pattern, it may be additionally displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (22), a normal jackpot decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2" is displayed as determined, and after this, 3 rounds of the jackpot game are started. (Figure 13 (23)). When the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state (time saving gaming state).

In FIG. 13 (24), the jackpot game has ended and the state has shifted to a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state (time saving gaming state). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 13 (24) displays a background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state.

In addition, in FIG. 13 (24), there are three consecutive winning balls in the second special pattern starting port 232, and the pattern fluctuation display on the second special pattern display device 214 is started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also displays the decorative pattern. Fluctuation display has started. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 13 (17) is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. As a result, a combination of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed ("Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (21)) and a combination of decorative patterns determined and displayed ("Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (22)), Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2") and a combination of decorative symbols when starting the variable display of the next decorative symbol (at the start time or immediately after the start time) ("Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" shown in FIG. 13 (24) Decoration 2 - Decoration 2"). Here, the types of decorative patterns themselves in the middle pattern display area 208b are different. In particular, since the ornament 13 is not displayed in the combination of ornamental symbols when starting the next variable display of ornamental symbols, it is possible to avoid giving the player the misunderstanding that he has hit the jackpot again.

Further, on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 where the variable icon h0 is displayed, a hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2 is displayed, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "49 remaining" are displayed as a display of the remaining number of time-saving game states indicating that the time-saving game state will continue for 49 more times. Further, on the left side of the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, a right-hitting first display RH1 is displayed that encourages right-handed hitting. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even after the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is shifted.

In addition, Fig. 13 (24) is a scene where the fluctuation has already started, but after the end of the jackpot game and before the next fluctuation starts, the decorative pattern ("Decoration 2 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 2"), Mini It is assumed that the symbol ("2-2-2") and the fourth symbol are displayed momentarily in a recognizable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in Figure 13 (22)) in response to the final display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before (24) in FIG. 13) is the same.

In FIG. 13 (25), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern.

The operation at the start of the variable display may be an operation of shaking the decorative pattern, an operation of enlarging or contracting the decorative pattern, or the like, in addition to an operation of slightly moving in the opposite direction to the direction of fluctuation. In any case, this is an operation that allows you to confirm the decorative pattern.

Next, an example of zone performance will be explained. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of entering from the sea zone to the sky zone and hitting the jackpot.

In this example, it is a time-saving gaming state (special pattern high probability regular pattern high probability state), and it is a state in which right-handed hitting is recommended. In the time-saving game state, the background of a castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but in this example, a background corresponding to the zone is displayed. Further, on the left side of the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, a right-hitting first display RH1 is displayed to encourage a right-handed hitting. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a time saving game state remaining number display is also displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(1) displays a sea background corresponding to the sea zone. In addition, in this FIG. 14(1), the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display device 214 has started, and the variable display of decorative symbols has also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14(1) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special map 2. The second hold icon h22 is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 14(2), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(3), a temporary stop display is performed when three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 are aligned. In addition, there is one ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 increases to 3, and a third reservation icon h23 is additionally displayed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 14 (4), the second special figure display device 214 starts to display the special figure 2, and the decorative figure display device 208 starts to confirm the combination of decorative figures such as “decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12”. Display starts. Further, in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is displayed as an "x" indicating a loss, and "256" is displayed as a mini symbol.

When the final display of the decorative pattern starts, the fusuma image fs appears from the left and right sides of the display screen (Fig. 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes the fusuma image fs due to the animation in which the fusuma is closed (Fig. 14 (5)). 6)). The background image, the combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12", and the pending icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the sliding door image fs and become invisible, but the mini pattern and the fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 The display is visible.

As shown in FIG. 14(6), when the entire display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes the fusuma image fs, a zone transition is performed and the zone transitions to the empty zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(7), the sliding door begins to open, the back of the sliding door begins to be seen, and a sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a prediction forecast that has higher expectations for a jackpot than the sea zone. Note that the decorative pattern and the background image may be made invisible by displaying an effect or the like until the sliding door is fully opened. The timing of the zone transition may be the timing when the sliding door is fully opened, or may be the timing according to the start of symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214.

In addition, the sliding door begins to open, and at the back of the sliding door, instead of the decorative pattern combination "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12," the combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6" is displayed. We are beginning to see that

In the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(8), the sliding door is completely opened and the sliding door image fs has disappeared. In FIG. 14(8), the second special symbol display device 214 starts to display a variable pattern of symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14(8) is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time of starting the variable display of decorative symbols is also "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the operation at the start of variation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed ("Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" shown in FIG. 14(3)) and the combination of decorative symbols at the time when the final display started ("Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" shown in FIG. 14(3)) ), and the combination of decorative patterns (shown in FIG. 14 (8) "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6"). Here, the types of all the decorative patterns themselves are different. In this way, since the decoration 12 is not displayed in the combination of decorative patterns when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern, it is possible to avoid giving the player the misunderstanding that the zone entry pattern has stopped again. In addition, since the combination of decorative patterns when starting the next variable display of decorative patterns is a combination of decorative patterns representing a loss, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the wrong impression that he has won the jackpot. Note that the combination of decorative symbols when starting the next variable display of decorative symbols matches the combination of mini symbols that are stopped and displayed in FIG. 14(4). However, they do not have to match, and it is sufficient that the display of the decorative pattern at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern is a display that indicates a loss at a glance (for example, a display of a broken pattern).

In addition, in FIG. 14 (8), the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are already changing at high speed, but when the fluctuation starts, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are confirmed (display in FIG. 14 (4)) It is assumed that the fluctuation starts from the same displayed symbol. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in Figure 14 (4)) in response to the final display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before FIG. 14(8)) is the same.

Note that at the stage when the sliding door begins to open and the back of the sliding door is visible (stage (7) in Figure 14), the combination of decorative patterns remains as "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12", and the next It may become "decoration 2 - decoration 5 - decoration 6" at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(8), fluctuation of the mini pattern and blinking display of the fourth pattern have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 is displayed in green. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h22 has become the first hold icon h21. The first hold icon h21 is displayed in red.

In FIG. 14(9), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(9), a line preview display sf1 is displayed. The dialogue notice is a normal notice that indicates the expected level of jackpot in the currently occurring symbol variation display by means of dialogue. If the line preview here includes the line ``sun'', the expectation of a jackpot will be high.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 14(10), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, there are two balls entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 increases to 4, and a third reservation icon h23 and a fourth reservation icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 14 (11), a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is displayed as confirmed.

In FIG. 14 (12), the second special symbol display device 214 has started to display a variable pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 14 (12) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. When the variation of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol starts, it is assumed that the variation starts from the symbol that is the same as the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol that are confirmed and displayed (the display in FIG. 14 (11)). In other words, the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are displayed in response to the final display of the special symbol (display in Figure 14 (11)), and the mini symbol's variable display and the fourth symbol are displayed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before FIG. 14 (12)) is the same. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 14 (13) is an icon in a red display mode. In addition, the zone rendering of the sky zone continues, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the sky background.

Note that the period from the start of the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12" until the end of the final display (Fig. 14 (3) to (7)) is longer than that of "Decoration 7 - Decoration". 14 (10) to (11) in FIG. 14). Note that the same relationship holds true even when only the display time of the temporary stop display does not include the display time of the final display.

In FIG. 14 (13), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation. Also, a line preview, which is a regular preview, is also shown here. The line preview display sf2 in FIG. 14 (13) includes the line "sun" and has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the line preview display sf1 in FIG. 14 (9).

In the subsequent FIG. 14 (14), the ready-to-win state is established, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 14 (15), the game develops into a super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. In addition, the background display, the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear, and the decorative pattern that had been displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Note that the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during super reach.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 in a step-by-step manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (16-1), which continues from FIG. - Decoration 7" combinations of decorative symbols with a probability of winning a jackpot are displayed temporarily. The temporary stop display started in FIG. 15 (16-1) continues until the timing shown in FIG. 15 (16-2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (17), the jackpot combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed, and if you win the 2R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern B), There is. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed as a combination of "777".

In FIG. 15 (18), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the text "Congratulations on the jackpot." Moreover, since the variable winning a prize opening 234 is arranged in the right side area, the right-handed first display RH1 is displayed. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening performance), a second right-handed display RH2 that encourages right-handed hitting is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This second display for right-handed players RH2 is a display format in which the words "Play to the right" are displayed between right-pointing arrows arranged vertically with an interval, and is larger than the first display for right-handed players RH1. be.

In FIG. 15 (19), the first round has started, and the second right-handed player display RH2 has disappeared and is not displayed, but the right-handed player first display RH1 is still displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 15 (20), the second round has started. In the 2R fixed-variable jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. At the start of the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the words "Aim for the V" to urge the player to pass the game ball through the V passing switch VS.

In FIG. 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a V winning notification to notify that the player has won a V winning. In other words, it is reported that the state will shift to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game.

In FIG. 15 (22), the end performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the words "Jackpot End". Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed at this end effect.

When the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state. In FIG. 15 (23), the variable display of symbols on the second special symbol display device 214 has started, and the variable display of decorative symbols has also started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 15 (23) is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative symbols at the time when the variable display of decorative symbols starts is the combination of the decorative symbols that won the jackpot when the jackpot was hit first, ``Decorative figure 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7'' (see Figure 15 (17)) This is the same combination of decorative symbols, and the movement at the start of variation is performed with this combination of decorative symbols. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Further, a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special map 2.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (23), a background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "119 remaining" are displayed as a display of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state.

In addition, although FIG. 15 (23) shows a scene where the fluctuation has already started, the decorative pattern (here, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is changed before the next fluctuation starts after the end of the jackpot game. ), the mini symbol (here, "7-7-7"), and the fourth symbol are displayed for a moment in a viewable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol (display in Figure 15 (17)) in response to the final display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. It can be said that the display when the blinking display starts (the display immediately before (23) in FIG. 15) is the same. In FIG. 15 (24), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation.

In addition, as a combination of decorative symbols displayed when the jackpot game ends and the next variable display of decorative symbols starts, a combination representing a loss such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23') is shown. It may be displayed. In FIG. 15 (23'), the fluctuation start operation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5". By doing this, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the jackpot game ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (16-1) and FIG. 15 (16-2)) ), the combination of decorative patterns that have been decidedly displayed ("Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" shown in Figure 15 (17)), and when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern (at the starting point or from the starting point). Immediately after the start), the combination of decorative patterns ("decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23')) becomes different. In the example shown in FIG. 15 (23'), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are different, so that the player does not have to misunderstand that he has hit the jackpot again.

In addition, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the jackpot game ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (16-1) and FIG. 15 (16-2)), When starting the variable display of the fixed displayed decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" shown in FIG. 15 (17)) and the next decorative pattern (at the start time or immediately after the start time) Even if the combination of decorative symbols ("Decoration 3 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 5" shown in FIG. 15 (23')) is different, the mini symbol and the fourth symbol are used when the jackpot game starts. The fixed display before the display is the same as the display when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started (at the start time or immediately after the start time).

In the example from FIG. 14 to FIG. 15 described above, the player finally hits the jackpot. The display time of the temporary stop display that continues from Figure 15 (16-1) to Figure 15 (16-2) is the display time of the temporary stop display in Figure 12 (15) and the display time of the temporary stop display in Figure 14 (10) longer than display time. In other words, the display time of the temporary stop display in the decorative pattern variable display for a win is likely to be longer than the display time for the temporary stop display in the decorative pattern variable display for a loss, and the combination of the decorative symbols in the temporary stop display and the next Among cases where the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol variation display to be started is the same, the jackpot game is executed more when the display time of the temporary stop display is relatively longer than when the display time of the temporary stop display is relatively short. A relationship is established in which the level of expectation for the future increases. Furthermore, the same relationship holds true for the combined display time of the temporary stop display and the display time of the final display.

In addition, when the combination of decorative patterns in the temporary stop display and the combination of decorative patterns at the start of the next decorative pattern fluctuation display are the same, the types of the decorative patterns themselves are the same, and the decorative patterns are the same. This refers to the case where the display mode itself is also the same. The type of decorative pattern is the type represented by a number, the type of symbol, or the type of pattern, and the display mode is the presence or absence of the character display YM2 shown in FIG. 12 (13) or the like.

Moreover, the special symbols such as decoration 11, decoration 12, and decoration 13 shown in FIG. 5(c) may be stopped and displayed only in a specific game state. For example, it may be stopped and displayed only in the normal game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state), or it may be stopped and displayed only in the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state. It may be stopped and displayed only in the special pattern high probability regular pattern low probability state, or it may be stopped and displayed only in the special pattern high probability general pattern high probability state. good. Alternatively, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed only in a certain mode (for example, a certain performance mode, pre-reading mode, etc.).

Furthermore, if the combination of decorative symbols in the temporary stop display is different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the next decorative symbol fluctuation display, this may occur only in a specific game state. You can. For example, it may occur only in the normal game state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state), or it may occur only in the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state. , may occur only in the special pattern high probability general pattern low probability state, or may occur only in the special pattern high probability general pattern high probability state. Alternatively, if the combination of decorative symbols in the temporary stop display is different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the next decorative symbol fluctuation display, a certain mode (for example, a certain production mode or look-ahead mode) etc.) may occur.

Further, in certain cases where the combination of decorative symbols in the temporary stop display is different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the next decorative symbol variation display, the background images are different. For example, in the temporary stop display shown in FIG. 13 (21), the background image is a plain white background representing a non-time saving gaming state, but at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. It is an image. The background images in FIG. 15 (16-1) and FIG. 15 (16-2) and the background image in FIG. 15 (23') are also the same. In addition, in the temporary stop display shown in Figure 14 (3), the background image of the sea corresponds to the sea zone, but when the fluctuation starts as shown in Figure 14 (8), the background image of the sky corresponds to the sky zone. There is.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display means includes a first display (e.g., a temporary stop display or a temporary stop display) that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before the display of the final display that is displayed following the first decorative symbol variation display ends. and confirmation display] may be displayed.
The display means may display a second display [for example, a display at the start of variation] that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols at the start of variation of the second decorative symbol variation display;
The second decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern variation display that is started after the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display of FIGS. 12(1) to 12(12) is In the case of the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIG. 12 (13) to (16), the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 13 (17) to (22) is the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. If the decorative pattern fluctuation display starts in Figure 13 (24), and if the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (1) to (7) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the 14(8) to (11), and when the decorative pattern fluctuation displays of FIGS. 14(8) to 14(11) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display shown in FIG. 14(12) ~When the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figure 15 (17) and the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (12) to 15 (17) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display starts in Figure 15 (23). Decorative pattern variation display or decorative pattern variation display starting in FIG. 15 (23')],
In certain cases where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, Fig. 12 (9) and Fig. 12 (13), 13 (21) and the same figure (24), FIG. 14 (3) and the same figure (8), FIG. 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23')].
A certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [for example, FIG. 12 (15) and FIG. 13 (17) , Figure 14 (10) and Figure 14 (12)],
In a certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same and the display time of the first display is longer than that of the second case (hereinafter referred to as "third case") ) [For example, Figure 15 (16-1), Figure 15 (16-2), and Figure 15 (23)],
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case,
The degree of expectation that the jackpot game [for example, FIGS. 15(18) to 15(22)] will be executed is higher in the third case than in the second case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, since there is the first case and the second case, variations can be made in the performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Moreover, it is also possible to liven up the game. In addition, since the display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case, the combination of the decorative patterns of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination is different without causing the player to misunderstand.

In addition, since the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed differs depending on the length of the display time of the first display, attention can be drawn to the first display, and the above-mentioned effect of enlivening the game and preventing misunderstandings can be achieved. can be further improved.

The first display may be a display that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative patterns before displaying the confirmed display (for example, a temporary stop display), or a display that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative patterns before displaying the confirmed display. The display may include both a confirmation display and a confirmation display (the same applies below).

The decorative pattern in the first display and the decorative pattern in the second display are different because the types of decorative patterns are different (for example, decoration 2 and decoration 12), or even if the types of decorative patterns are the same, The display mode is different (for example, the presence or absence of character display YM2 on the same decoration 2) (the same applies below). The types of decorative patterns mentioned here include types representing numbers, types of symbols, and types of pictures (the same applies below).

The first case may be a certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different. The second case may be a certain case in which the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same. The third case is a case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same and the display time of the first display is longer than that of the second case. It may also refer to certain cases.

In the case where the decorative symbols in the first display and the decorative symbols in the second display are the same, the longer the first display is displayed, the higher the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may increase.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display means includes a first display (e.g., a temporary stop display or a temporary stop display) that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before the display of the final display that is displayed following the first decorative symbol variation display ends. and confirmation display] may be displayed.
The display means may display a second display [for example, a display at the start of variation] that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols at the start of variation of the second decorative symbol variation display;
The second decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern variation display that is started after the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display of FIGS. 12(1) to 12(12) is In the case of the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIG. 12 (13) to (16), the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 13 (17) to (22) is the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. If the decorative pattern fluctuation display starts in Figure 13 (24), and if the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (1) to (7) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the 14(8) to (11), and when the decorative pattern fluctuation displays of FIGS. 14(8) to 14(11) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display shown in FIG. 14(12) ~When the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figure 15 (17) and the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (12) to 15 (17) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display starts in Figure 15 (23). Decorative pattern variation display or decorative pattern variation display starting in FIG. 15 (23')],
There is a certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, FIG. 13 (21), FIG. 14 (3) and the same figure (8), Figure 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23')],
In a certain case (hereinafter referred to as "second case") where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same (for example, FIG. 12 (15) and FIG. 13 (17), 14 (10) and the same figure (12), FIG. 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23)],
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case,
In the first case, the background image during display of the first display [for example, a plain white background representing a non-time-saving gaming state, a sea background corresponding to the sea zone] and the background image of the second display are The background image being displayed is different from the background image [for example, the castle town background representing the time-saving game state, the sky background according to the sky zone],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this game machine as well, since the first case and the second case exist, variations can be made in the performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Moreover, it is also possible to liven up the game. In addition, since the display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case, the combination of the decorative patterns of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination is different without causing the player to misunderstand.

Furthermore, by making the background images different, it is possible for the player to easily notice that the combination of decorative symbols in the first display is different from the combination of decorative symbols in the second display.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display means displays a first display that allows the user to confirm the decorative pattern before the display of the fixed display that is displayed following the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, a temporary stop display of a combination of decorative patterns, or Temporary stop display and final display of decorative pattern combinations] may be displayed.
The display means may display a second display [for example, a display at the time when the combination of decorative patterns starts to fluctuate] that allows the user to confirm the decorative pattern at the time when the second decorative pattern fluctuation display starts to fluctuate. ,
The second decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern variation display that is started after the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display of FIGS. 12(1) to 12(12)] When the first decorative pattern variable display is used, the decorative pattern variable displays of FIGS. 12(13) to 16(16) and the decorative pattern variable displays of FIGS. 13(17) to 13(22) are used as the first decoration. In the case of the symbol variation display, the decorative symbol variation display starts in FIG. 13 (24), and in the case that the decorative symbol variation displays in FIGS. 14 (1) to 14 (7) are used as the first decorative symbol variation display. 14 (8) to (11), and when the decorative pattern fluctuation displays of FIGS. 14 (8) to (11) are the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display shown in FIG. 14 ( 12) - When the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 15 (17) and the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 14 (12) to 15 (17) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, it starts with FIG. 15 (23). Decorative pattern fluctuation display that is started or decorative pattern fluctuation display that starts in FIG. 15 (23')],
In certain cases where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, Fig. 12 (9) and Fig. 12 (13), 13 (21) and the same figure (24), FIG. 14 (3) and the same figure (8), FIG. 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23')].
A certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [for example, FIG. 12 (15) and FIG. 13 (17) , Figure 14 (10) and Figure 14 (12), Figure 15 (16-1), Figure 15 (16-2), and Figure 15 (23)].
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case,
The display means is also capable of displaying another symbol variation display that variably displays another symbol other than the decorative symbol [for example, a mini symbol, a fourth symbol],
The separate design displayed on the display means is a smaller design than the decorative design displayed on the display means,
The display means displays the first decorative pattern variation display and also displays the first different symbol variation display,
The display means displays the second decorative pattern variation display and also displays a second different symbol variation display,
The display means includes a third display that allows confirmation of another symbol indicating the result of the judgment in the first alternate symbol fluctuation display [for example, the mini symbol shown in the upper left corner of FIG. 12 (9), the mini symbol shown in the upper right corner The fourth symbol shown in the upper left corner of Figure 13 (22), the fourth symbol shown in the upper right corner, the mini symbol shown in the upper left corner of Figure 14 (4), the fourth symbol shown in the upper right corner, 17) The mini pattern shown in the upper left corner, the fourth pattern shown in the upper right corner] can be displayed,
The display means displays a fourth display in which a different symbol can be confirmed at the start of variation in the second different symbol variation display [for example, the mini symbol immediately before FIG. 12 (13), the fourth symbol, the fourth symbol immediately before FIG. 13 (24) The mini symbol, the fourth symbol, the mini symbol immediately before Fig. 14 (8), the fourth symbol, the mini symbol immediately before Fig. 15 (23), the fourth symbol] can be displayed.
Even in the first case, the separate symbol in the third display and the separate symbol in the fourth display are the same [for example, if it is a mini symbol, the decorative symbol with the same number, or if it is the fourth symbol. same symbol (○ or ×)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

With this game machine as well, since the first case and the second case exist, variations can be made in the performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Moreover, it is also possible to liven up the game. In addition, since the display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case, the combination of the decorative patterns of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination is different without causing the player to misunderstand.

Furthermore, even in the first case, the separate design in the third display and the separate design in the fourth display are the same, and the separate design is smaller than the decorative design. It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination of decorative symbols in the first display and the combination of decorative symbols in the second display are different, without interfering with the performance related to the symbols, without causing the player to misunderstand. can.

As for the different symbols, the display time of the third display is the same regardless of the number of rights stored in the reservation storage means (the number of reserved special symbols).

Also,
“In the first display, a combination of the first type of decorative patterns [for example, decoration 12 (zone entry pattern)] can be displayed in a confirmable manner,
In the first display, a combination of a second type of decorative pattern [for example, decoration 1 to decoration 10 (number decorative pattern)] can be displayed in a confirmable manner,
In the second display, the combination of the second type of decorative patterns can be displayed in a confirmable manner,
In the second display, the first type of decorative pattern is not displayed,
The first case refers to a case where the decorative pattern in the first display is the first type of decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern in the second display is the second type of decorative pattern [for example, When the zone entry symbol and the number decoration symbol are different],
The second case refers to a case where the decorative pattern in the first display is the second type of decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern in the second display is also the second type of decorative pattern [for example, When the decorative patterns of numbers are the same]
A game machine characterized by: ”
The limitations regarding the first type of decorative pattern and the second type of decorative pattern have also been explained.

Also,
``The first case refers to the information indicated by the decorative pattern in the first display [for example, information such as the start of a zone performance] and the information indicated by the decorative symbol in the second display [for example, jackpot or loss]. information such as
A game machine characterized by: ”
We have also explained the limitations regarding the information indicated by the decorative patterns.

Also,
``In the first case, the information indicated by the decorative pattern in the first display [for example, information such as losing] and the information indicated by the decorative pattern in the second display [for example, information such as losing] are the same. However, the display mode of the decorative pattern in the first display [for example, the display mode of numbers without character display YM2 shown in FIG. 12 (9)] and the display mode of the decorative pattern in the second display [for example, This is a case where the character display YM2 and number display mode shown in FIG. 12 (13) is different.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Limitations regarding the display mode of decorative patterns have also been explained.

Next, a modification of the game progress example shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 will be described.

FIG. 15(3') is the same state as FIG. 14(3), and the temporary stop display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where three zone entry symbols of the decoration 12 are aligned.

In the subsequent FIG. 15 (5'), the sliding door image fs appears from the left and right of the display screen while the symbol fluctuation display continues on the second special symbol display device 214, that is, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol continues. are doing. Then, an animation of the sliding door being closed is displayed while the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern continues.

As shown in FIG. 15 (6'), when the sliding door is completely closed, the second special pattern display device 214 starts displaying the special pattern 2, and the fourth pattern/reservation number display area 284 shows the special pattern. The fourth symbol in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x" indicating a miss, and "256" is stopped and displayed on the mini symbol. The display of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the fusuma image fs and is no longer visible.

FIG. 15 (7') is the same state as FIG. 14 (7), and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the sliding door has begun to open and "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6" which is being stopped and displayed is beginning to be seen. . Note that "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" may begin to appear.

As described above, the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12" may end in a state where the display of the decorative pattern is no longer visible (a state in which it is difficult to see). In other words, the final display or the final display of the decorative pattern in the special figure display device may be started in a state where the decorative pattern is no longer visible (a state where it is difficult to see). Then, when the display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, the display may be different from the temporary stop display. In addition, not only the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12" but also other decorative patterns (for example, "Decoration 11" and "Decoration 13") may also be stopped in a state where they become invisible (difficult to see). good.

In addition, effects that make the decorative pattern invisible include blackout (Figure 12 (3)), wipe effect (Figures 12 (10) to (12)), and animation of the fusuma image fs (Figure 14 (5) to (7) in the same figure) and effect display have been given as examples, but the production in which the decorative pattern becomes invisible is not limited to these.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs during the final display of a decorative pattern, but the power is immediately restored.

FIG. 16 (9-1) is the same state as FIG. 12 (9), and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed. A power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being displayed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 16 (9-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the characters "Preparing for restoration" are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9-3). . Eventually, the first special symbol display device 212 starts to display the changing symbols, and as shown in FIG. 16 (13'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 16 (13') is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of power restoration in FIG. This is also different from the combination of decorative patterns (the combination of decorative patterns shown in FIG. 12 (13)) when starting the next variable display of decorative patterns in the case where no occurrence occurs. The combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" corresponds to the initial pattern combination and is always displayed when the power is restored. This initial combination of symbols is displayed, and variable display of decorative symbols is started. In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbols and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12. is also the default display mode. Furthermore, no stage change is performed, and the lord's character YM1 and the characters YM2, which are different for each type of decorative pattern, are not displayed.

In addition, although FIG. 16 (13') shows a scene where the variation has already started, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3"), the mini symbol (here, "1-2-3"), and the fourth symbol are momentarily displayed in a viewable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol when the power is restored is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol that were confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage (display in Figure 16 (9-1)). It can be said that this is different from the display of the mini pattern and the fourth pattern (the display immediately before FIG. 12 (13)) when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern when no break occurs.

FIG. 16 (4-1) is the same state as FIG. 14 (4), and a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 12-decoration 12-decoration 12" is displayed as confirmed. Here again, a power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being performed, but the power is immediately restored. FIG. 16 (4-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the characters "Preparing for restoration" are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (4-3). . Eventually, the first special symbol display device 212 starts to display the changing symbols, and as shown in FIG. 16 (8'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 16(8') is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of power restoration in FIG. 16 (8') is the above-mentioned initial pattern combination "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3." As a result, the combination of decorative patterns ("Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3") when the power is restored and the next variable display of decorative patterns starts is the combination of the decorative patterns that were fixedly displayed at the time of the power outage ("Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3"). "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12") is different from the combination of decorative symbols shown in FIG. It is also different from "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6"). In addition, the fluctuation of the mini symbols and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also started.

Also, in FIG. 16(8'), a variable icon h0 in the default display mode and pending icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. Further, the zone performance itself is not performed, and the background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state is displayed.

In addition, although FIG. 16 (8') shows a scene in which the variation has already started, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3"), the mini symbol (here, "1-2-3"), and the fourth symbol are momentarily displayed in a viewable state. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol when the power is restored is different from the display of the mini symbol and the fourth symbol that were confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage (display in Figure 16 (4-1)). It can be said that this is different from the display of the mini pattern and the fourth pattern (display immediately before FIG. 14(8)) when starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern when no break occurs.

In this embodiment, the initial symbol combination is "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", but the initial symbol combination is not limited to this combination and may be any other combination. However, combinations that evoke a jackpot are not preferred, and combinations that cannot be displayed in the variable display are desirable.

According to the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display means displays a first display that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before displaying the final display upon completion of the first decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 14(3), FIG. 14(10), 15 (16-1) and (16-2) of the same figure] may be displayed.
The display means displays a second display (for example, FIG. 14 (8), FIG. 14 (12), FIG. 15 (23), Display at the time of disclosure of fluctuation in Figure 15 (23')] may be displayed.
The second decorative pattern fluctuation display is a decorative pattern fluctuation display that is started next to the first decorative pattern fluctuation display [for example, the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 14(1) to 14(7) is 14(8) to (11), and the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 14(8) to (11) is the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. In the case of display, the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 14(12) to 15(17) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIGS. 14(12) to 15(17) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. 15 (23) to 15 (24) or the decorative pattern fluctuation display of FIG. 15 (23')],
A first case where the combination of decorative patterns in the first display and the combination of decorative patterns in the second display are different [for example, FIG. 14(3) and FIG. 14(8), FIG. 15(16-1) and the same figure (16-2) and the same figure (23')],
A second case where the combination of decorative patterns in the first display and the combination of decorative patterns in the second display are the same [for example, FIG. 14 (10) and FIG. 14 (12), FIG. 15 (16-1) and The same figure (16-2) and the same figure (23)] are also available.
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case [for example, the display time of the temporary stop display in FIG. 14(3) is longer than the display time of the temporary stop display in FIG. 14(10). display time is longer],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also,
“In the decorative pattern variation display, the combination of the first type of decorative pattern [for example, decoration 12 (zone entry pattern)] can be displayed in a confirmable manner,
In the decorative pattern variation display, a combination of a second type of decorative pattern [for example, decoration 1 to decoration 10 (number decorative pattern)] can be displayed in a confirmable manner,
In the first case, the combination of decorative patterns in the first display is a combination of decorative patterns of the first type, and the combination of decorative patterns in the second display is a combination of decorative patterns of the second type. In the case of a combination of symbols [for example, when the zone entry symbol and the number decoration symbol are different],
In the second case, the combination of decorative patterns in the first display is a combination of decorative patterns of the second type, and the combination of decorative patterns in the second display is also the second type of decoration. In the case of a combination of designs [for example, when decorative designs of numbers are the same],
the first type of decorative pattern combination is not displayed in the second display;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The display means also displays another symbol variation display that variably displays another symbol other than the decorative symbol [for example, the fourth symbol (the fourth symbol/the notification area during symbol variation in the number-of-retention display area 284), the mini symbol]. is doable and
The first case refers to the information indicated by the combination of decorative patterns in the first display [for example, information that a zone effect is started] and the information indicated by the combination of decorative symbols in the second display [for example, information such as jackpot or loss] is different.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also, according to the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a decorative pattern,
The display means displays a decorative pattern confirmation display that displays the decorative pattern in a confirmable state [for example, a display when the display of the decorative pattern disguise display starts, a display at the time of the variable display start operation, and a decorative pattern disguise display. A temporary stop display, a stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed after the decorative pattern disguise display is completed, and a combined display of a temporary stop display and a confirmed display].
The decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern fluctuation display may be different from the decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern fluctuation display [for example, Fig. 12 (2) and Fig. 12 (4) , Figure 12 (9) and the same figure (13), Figure 13 (22) and the same figure (24), Figure 14 (4) and the same figure (8), Figure 15 (17) and the same figure (23')] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a decorative pattern of the pattern, when starting the next decorative pattern fluctuation display, the player is asked to decorate the pattern. There is no need to give the wrong impression that you have hit the jackpot because of the design. In addition, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern representing a jackpot, when the next decorative pattern variation display starts, it may give the player the misunderstanding that they have hit the jackpot again. I don't need it.

Note that the display of decorative patterns may be a display of a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the decorative pattern may be a number, a symbol, or a picture.

The decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display may be a display suggesting the result of a lottery.

The decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern fluctuation display may be included entirely or partially in the decorative pattern fluctuation display, or may be included in the decorative pattern fluctuation display. Instead, it may be included in the stop display of decorative symbols that is started following the decorative symbol fluctuation display.

``The difference between the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display and the decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern variation display means that the type of decorative pattern [for example, decoration 1 to decoration 13] may be the same and the display mode [for example, the presence or absence of character display YM2] may be different, but the type of decorative pattern may be different.''The type of decorative pattern referred to here refers to the type of numerical representation. It may be the type of symbol, or the type of picture.

A display in which a decorative pattern can be confirmed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern is included in the decorative pattern confirmation display. However, if the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern once disappears or becomes invisible, it is not included in the decorative pattern confirmation display.

Also,
“The decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern fluctuation display may be the same as the decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern fluctuation display [for example, Fig. 13 (16) and Fig. 13 (17) ), Figure 14 (11) and Figure 12 (12), Figure 15 (17) and Figure 15 (23)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

"When the power is restored while displaying the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display, the display means displays a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, FIG. 16 ( 13') or a combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" shown in Fig. 13'(8')]. That is, the first display of the decorative pattern which is the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12(9) or "Decoration 5-Decoration 1" in FIG. 14(4)] "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12"] and the second display of the decorative pattern which is the decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern variation display [For example, "Decoration 5 - "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6" in FIG. If the power is restored during the display, a third display different from the first display and the second display is used as the decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration" in FIG. 16 (13') 2-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" in FIG. 16 (8'). ”
``When the first decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display and the second decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern variation display are different, the first decoration The display time of the first decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, during the period from (8) to (12) in FIG. The period from FIG. 12(15) to FIG. 13(16) is longer than the period from FIG. 14(3) to FIG. 14(7) is longer than the period from FIG. 14(10) to FIG. 14(11). ] may be long."
In addition, the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern fluctuation display may be a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern (shaking display) or a display of the permanent stop of the decorative pattern (determined display). Alternatively, the display may be performed from the start of the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern until the end of the display of the permanent stop. Note that the display time of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern may vary. For example, the display time may be 0 seconds, or may be 1 second or more and 10 seconds or less. On the other hand, the display time of the decorative pattern of the main stop may be constant. However, the display of the main stop of the decorative pattern may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display notifying a small hit), or may be short in the case of a specific second display (for example, a display notifying a jackpot or a display notifying a jackpot). In the case of a display in which an effect such as a stage transition or zone change is performed, the length may be longer.

Also,
``The display means also displays another symbol variation display that variably displays another symbol other than the decorative symbol [for example, the fourth symbol (the fourth symbol/the notification area during symbol variation in the number-of-retention display area 284), the mini symbol]. is doable and
The display means executes another symbol confirmation display that displays another symbol in a confirmable state [for example, the display immediately before FIG. 12(9) to FIG. 12(12) or FIG. 12(13)]. ,
Another symbol confirmation display after starting another symbol variation display [for example, the fourth symbol or mini symbol in Figure 12 (9) to (12)] and another symbol when starting the next another symbol variation display It is the same as the confirmation display [for example, the fourth symbol or mini symbol immediately before Fig. 12 (13)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

"The first display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern variation display is a display that will not be displayed in the separate pattern confirmation display after starting the different pattern variation display [for example, decoration 11 - Decoration 13 or a pseudo-continuous pattern (a decorative pattern written as "NEXT")]. ”
In addition, the display of another symbol (another symbol variation display, another symbol confirmation display) may be a display using a combination of different symbols, or may be a display using one different symbol. Further, the different symbols may be numbers or symbols.

Further, the display of another symbol (another symbol variation display, another symbol confirmation display) may be a display that is displayed by a device other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display means (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to another symbol, or it may be a sub-display means when the display means is used as the main display means.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating another example in which power is immediately restored after a power outage occurs.

FIG. 17 (10-1) shown on the left side is in the same state as FIG. 14 (10), and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Although a power outage occurs while this temporary stop display is being displayed, the power is immediately restored. FIG. 17 (10-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed, and the characters "Preparing for restoration" are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (10-3). . While the characters "Preparing to return" are being displayed, the confirmation display ends, and the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 starts anew, as shown in FIG. 17 (12'). The decorative pattern display device 208 has also started variable display of decorative patterns. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17 (12') is in operation at the start of variable display. The combination of decorative patterns at the time of power restoration in FIG. 17 (12') is "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" which is the above-mentioned initial design combination. As a result, the combination of decorative patterns ("Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3") when the power is restored and the next variable display of decorative patterns starts is the combination of the decorative patterns that were temporarily stopped and displayed at the time of the power outage. This is different from the combination of decorative patterns shown in FIG. 14 (12) (both "decoration 7 - decoration 2 - decoration 9") at the time of starting the variable display of the next decorative pattern in the case where no power outage occurs.

In addition, although the fluctuation of the mini symbol and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have started, the decorative symbol (here, "Decoration 1- Similar to the "Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), the mini symbol (here, "1-2-3") and the fourth symbol are also momentarily displayed in a viewable state. The display of the mini symbol at the time of power restoration is the display of the mini symbol at the time of starting the fluctuating display of the next decorative symbol in the event that no power outage occurs (the display immediately before the display of FIG. 12 (13) and "7- 2-9” display).

According to the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variable display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display means includes a first display (e.g., a temporary stop display or a temporary stop display) that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before the display of the final display that is displayed following the first decorative symbol variation display ends. and confirmation display] may be displayed.
The display means may display a second display [for example, a display at the start of variation] that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols at the start of variation of the second decorative symbol variation display;
The second decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern variation display that is started after the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display of FIGS. 12(1) to 12(12) is In the case of the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIG. 12 (13) to (16), the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 13 (17) to (22) is the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. If the decorative pattern fluctuation display starts in Figure 13 (24), and if the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (1) to (7) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the 14(8) to (11), and when the decorative pattern fluctuation displays of FIGS. 14(8) to 14(11) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display shown in FIG. 14(12) ~When the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figure 15 (17) and the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (12) to 15 (17) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display starts in Figure 15 (23). Decorative pattern variation display or decorative pattern variation display starting in FIG. 15 (23')],
In certain cases where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, Fig. 12 (9) and Fig. 12 (13), 13 (21) and the same figure (24), FIG. 14 (3) and the same figure (8), FIG. 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23')].
A certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") [for example, FIG. 12 (15) and FIG. 13 (17) , Figure 14 (10) and Figure 14 (12), Figure 15 (16-1), Figure 15 (16-2), and Figure 15 (23)].
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case,
In the second case [for example, FIG. 14 (10) and FIG. The decorative pattern of the second display is different [for example, Figure 17 (10-1) and Figure 17 (12')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

With this game machine as well, since the first case and the second case exist, variations can be made in the performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Moreover, it is also possible to liven up the game. In addition, since the display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case, the combination of the decorative patterns of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination is different without causing the player to misunderstand.

Further, even in the second case, when the power is cut off, the decorative pattern is different, so that the player can easily understand that the power cut has occurred.

Furthermore, limitations regarding the first type of decorative pattern and the second type of decorative pattern described above, limitations regarding the information indicated by the decorative pattern, and limitations regarding the display mode of the decorative pattern in this game machine have also been explained.

FIG. 17 (22-1) shown on the right side is in the same state as FIG. 13 (22), and a normal jackpot combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. A power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being displayed, but the power is restored immediately. FIG. 17 (22-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power recovery process (step S111) shown in FIG. 6 is executed in the same manner as described above, and the characters "Preparing for return" are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (22-3). Displayed. Eventually, the pachinko machine 100 starts a jackpot game. In this example, even if the jackpot game is started and the jackpot game screen can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of ``preparing for return'' is continued and the jackpot game screen is not displayed. However, since the variable prize opening 234 is placed in the right side area, it is necessary to hit right during the jackpot game, and as shown in FIG. 17 (22-4), the characters "Preparing to return" are displayed. A right-handed player first display RH1 is displayed. Before long, the jackpot game ends, and the second special symbol display device 214 starts displaying variable symbols, and as shown in FIG. 17 (24'), the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts displaying variable symbols. There is. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 17 (24') is in operation at the start of variable display. In the first variable display start operation after the end of the jackpot game in FIG. 17 (24'), except for the fact that the combination of decorative symbols is "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", FIG. 24). The combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 17 (24') corresponds to the initial symbol combination in the case of a jackpot. In other words, if the power is cut off and then restored during a jackpot game after the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot is displayed as confirmed, the display will not be displayed as confirmed in the first variable display start operation after the jackpot game ends. An initial symbol combination ("Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1") that is exclusive to the jackpot is displayed, which is different from the combination of decoration symbols for the jackpot. In addition, during a jackpot game, the character display "Preparing to return" will not be displayed continuously, but if the jackpot game screen can be displayed, it will switch to the jackpot game screen, and the first screen after the jackpot game ends. In the operation at the start of the variable display, a special initial symbol combination ("decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1") may be displayed in case of a jackpot.

A plurality of types of variable display patterns are prepared for the decorative symbol variable display, and the display time of the temporary stop display also changes depending on the variable display pattern. Although the temporary stop display can be seen as a part of the variable display pattern, here, the variable display pattern and the temporary stop display will be distinguished and explained.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display pattern and the display time of the temporary stop display.

FIG. 18 also shows a confirmation stop display (confirmation display) that is displayed following the decorative pattern variation display. In addition to the decorative patterns, a fourth pattern and a mini pattern are also shown. As mentioned above, variable display is also performed on the 4th symbol and mini symbol, but multiple types of patterns are not prepared, and in the 4th symbol, a variable display of a blinking "-" is performed, and the mini symbol In this case, a fluctuating display is performed that makes it difficult to confirm the design.

Also, in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol, a fixed stop display (fixed display) is performed following the variable display. That is, the temporary stop display is not performed in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol. The display time (T3, T6, T10, T15, T22, T27) is a predetermined time whether the fixed stop is displayed in the decorative pattern or the fixed stop is displayed in the fourth pattern and mini pattern. Therefore, in the decorative pattern, even if the display time of the temporary stop display changes depending on the variable display pattern, the display time of the fixed stop display remains the same. Further, by changing the display time of the temporary stop display, the total time of the display time of the temporary stop display and the display time of the confirmed stop display also changes.

FIG. 18(a) shows an example of a pattern of a shortened variable display of decorative symbols, and FIG. 18(b) shows an example of a pattern of a normal variable display of decorative symbols. The display time (T1) of the shortened variable display pattern is shorter than the display time (T4) of the normal variable display pattern, for example, 5 seconds. Further, the display time (T2) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the shortened variable display pattern is also shorter than the display time (T5) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the normal variable display pattern. In addition, in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol, the variable display continues while the shortened variable display and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are being executed, and even while the normal variable display and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are being executed. , the fluctuating display continues.

FIG. 18(c) shows an example of a pattern for normal reach display of decorative patterns. The normal reach display pattern is executed following the normal variable display pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 18(c), the display time (T8) of the normal reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T7) of the normal variable display pattern. Further, the display time (T9) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the normal reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T5) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the normal variable display pattern. In addition, in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol, the variable display is continued while the normal variable display, normal reach display, and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are being executed.

FIG. 18(d) shows an example of a pattern of a super reach (SP reach) display of a decorative pattern. The SP reach display pattern is executed following the normal reach display pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 18(d), the display time (T12) of the normal reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T11) of the normal variable display pattern, and is longer than the display time (T12) of the normal reach display pattern. Also, the display time (T13) of the SP reach display pattern is longer. Furthermore, the display time (T14) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the pattern of the SP reach display is longer than the display time (T9) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the pattern of the normal variable display. Note that a plurality of types of patterns (for example, SP reach 1, SP reach 2, etc.) with different characters appearing are prepared as SP reach display patterns. In the plural types of SP reach display patterns, the display time is different and the expectation level of the jackpot is also different, and the higher the expectation level of the jackpot, the longer the display time of the temporary stop display is likely to be (the same applies below). In addition, in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol, the variable display is continued while the normal variable display, normal reach display, SP reach display, and temporary stop display of the decorative symbols are being executed.

FIG. 18E shows an example in which a re-variation display pattern is executed during a temporary stop display. A temporary stop display is executed following the SP reach display pattern, but a re-variation display pattern is started before a confirmed stop is displayed. This re-fluctuation display pattern is a revival effect, and is only performed when a jackpot is hit. However, it may be carried out even in the case of a loss. Following the re-fluctuation display pattern, the temporary stop display is executed again. In the example shown in FIG. 18(e), the display time (T17) of the normal reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T16) of the normal variable display pattern, and the display time (T17) of the normal reach display pattern is longer. Also, the display time (T18) of the SP reach display pattern is longer. In addition, the display time (T19) of the first temporary stop display that is executed following the SP reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T9) of the temporary stop display that is normally executed following the variable display pattern. . Note that the display time (T19) of this first temporary stop display is the same as the display time (T14) of the temporary stop display shown in FIG. 18(d), but if it is longer than the display time (T14), It may be long, or it may be short. The display time (T20) of the re-fluctuation display pattern may be longer or shorter than the display time (T19) of the first temporary stop display. Or they may be the same. The display time (T21) of the second temporary stop display that is executed following the re-fluctuation display pattern is shorter than the display time (T19) of the first temporary stop display, but it may be longer. , may be the same. Also, the display time (T21) of the second temporary stop display is shorter than the display time (T20) of the re-fluctuation display pattern, but it may be longer or may be the same. . Furthermore, the display time that is the sum of the display time of the first temporary stop display (T19) and the display time of the second temporary stop display (T21) is the display time of the temporary stop display (T14) shown in FIG. 18(d). longer than In addition, in the 4th symbol and the mini symbol, while the decorative symbol's normal variation display, normal reach display, SP reach display, first temporary stop display, re-variation display, and second temporary stop display are being executed, the variable display is will continue.

FIG. 18(f) shows an example of a pattern for displaying the special super reach (SPSP reach) of decorative patterns. In this example, the SPSP reach display pattern is executed following the normal reach display pattern, but the SPSP reach display pattern may be executed after expanding from the SP reach shown in FIG. 18(d). In the example shown in FIG. 18(f), the display time (T24) of the normal reach display pattern is longer than the display time (T23) of the normal variable display pattern, and is longer than the display time (T24) of the normal reach display pattern. Also, the display time (T25) of the SPSP reach display pattern is longer. Further, the display time (T26) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the SPSP reach pattern is longer than the display time (T14, T19) of the temporary stop display that is executed following the SP SP reach pattern. However, the display time (T26) is shorter than the display time (T19+T21) of the first and second temporary stop displays with the re-fluctuation display in between. In addition, a plurality of types of patterns (for example, SPSP Reach 1, SPSP Reach 2, etc.) with different characters appearing are also prepared for the SPSP Reach display pattern. In the plurality of patterns of SPSP reach display, the display time is different and the expectation level of the jackpot is also different, and the higher the expectation level of the jackpot, the longer the display time of the temporary stop display is likely to be (the same applies below). In addition, in the fourth symbol and the mini symbol, the variable display is continued while the normal variable display, normal reach display, SPSP reach display, and temporary stop display of the decorative symbols are being executed.

The relationship between the display time lengths of the temporary stop display explained above can be summarized as T2<T5<T9<T14=T19<T26<T19+T21. In other words, shortening variation<normal variation<normal reach<SP reach<SPSP reach<with re-variation after SP reach. Note that T19 and T26 may have the same length.

Moreover, whether it is a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, or a mini pattern, the display time of the fixed stop is the same, and the relationship is T3=T6=T10=T15=T22=T27. Therefore, the relationship between the length of the display time that is the sum of the display time of the temporary stop display and the display time of the confirmed stop is the same as the relationship between the length of the display time of the above-mentioned temporary stop display.

In addition, the expected level of jackpot is as follows: Decorative symbol fluctuation display in case of loss after shortened fluctuation display = Decorative symbol fluctuation display in case of loss after normal fluctuation display < Normal reach as shown in Fig. 18(c) Decorative symbol fluctuation display when the display does not develop beyond SP reach (it may be a hit or a loss) <SP reach display as shown in FIG. 18(d) → Temporary stop display → Decorative pattern fluctuation display when a confirmed stop is displayed (it may be a hit or a loss) < As shown in Figure 18(f), SPSP reach display → Provisional stop display → Decorative pattern fluctuation display when a confirmed stop is displayed (it may be a hit or a loss). In addition, as shown in FIG. 18(e), the decorative symbol variation display when the re-variation display of the revival performance is performed may have the highest expectation level of a jackpot. From this relationship, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the longer the suspension time of the temporary stop display tends to be.

Moreover, to simply express the magnitude of the expectation of a jackpot, shortening variation=normal variation<normal reach<SP reach<SPSP reach.

In addition, special symbols such as decoration 11, decoration 12, and decoration 13 shown in FIG. 5(c) may stop at a pattern other than the shortening fluctuation display pattern, and are not displayed when the special symbol is displayed. The display time of the temporary stop display tends to be longer than the case where the temporary stop display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 18(b), even if the decorative symbol fluctuation display does not develop from the normal fluctuation display to the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 18(c), although the normal reach is performed, the SP Even if the decorative symbol fluctuation display does not develop beyond the reach, if the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the display time of the temporary stop display will be limited to the SP reach, as shown in Figure (d). It may be the same as the display time (T14) of the temporary stop display when the situation develops. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 18(f), it may be the same as the display time (T26) of the temporary stop display when it develops into SPSP reach, and as a relationship between the length of the display time of the temporary stop display, SP There may be a case where a relationship such as reach < variation in which the special symbol stops = (<) SPSP reach may be established. In addition, even in the case where the special symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, the display time of the temporary stop display may be set according to each decorative symbol variation display. However, even in this case, the display time of the temporary stop display when a special symbol is temporarily stopped is longer than the display time (T2) of the temporary stop display that is displayed following the shortened fluctuation display. Become. Further, the display time of the fixed stop when the special symbol is displayed as a temporary stop is the same as the display time of the fixed stop when the special symbol is not displayed as the temporary stop.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, there are multiple types of patterns available for the SP reach display and SPSP reach display, and the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the longer the display time of the temporary stop display is likely to be. There may be SP reach or SPSP reach that is executable and SP reach or SPSP reach that is not executable.

In addition, if the combination of decorative symbols in the temporary stop display is different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the next decorative symbol fluctuation display, it is not possible to execute the event pre-reading notice or event mixed notice described later. If the combination of decorative patterns in the temporary stop display and the combination of decorative patterns at the start of the next decorative pattern fluctuation display are the same, even if event pre-reading notice or event mixed notice can be executed. good.

In addition, in non-reach fluctuations where reach display is not performed, the larger the number of reserved special symbols, the shorter the display time of temporary stop display or the display time of temporary stop display + confirmed stop, and the overall decorative pattern fluctuation display. The fluctuation time is also likely to be shortened.

Further, when the number of reserved special symbols is large, the shortened variation display pattern shown in FIG. 18(a) is more likely to be selected than when the number is small. For example, if the number of reserved special symbols is 4 and the decorative symbol variable display is not performed with a reach effect, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. That is, in the case of a decorative symbol fluctuation display in which a combination of decorative symbols that are unsuccessful in a winning combination is displayed as confirmed, the display time of the temporary stop display may become shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern variation display after the number of reserved special drawings 2 increases to four.

FIG. 19 (11) is the same state as FIG. 14 (11), and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 7-decoration 2-decoration 9" is confirmed and displayed. The number of reserved special figures 2 at this time is 4, which is the maximum number.

Subsequently, FIG. 19(a) shows a state in which the decorative pattern variation display is started when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4, which is the maximum number. In this decorative pattern variation display, the shortened variation display pattern shown in FIG. 18(a) is executed. When the shortened fluctuation display pattern is executed, the operation at the start of the decorative symbol fluctuation display is not performed, and the downward high-speed fluctuation is started from the beginning. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h21 has become the variable icon h0. As can be seen from the number of pending icons, the number of pending special drawings 2 is reduced by one to three. In the subsequent FIG. 19(b), a combination of randomly selected decorative symbols such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 2-Decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The display time of the temporary stop display here is a short time such as T2, and in FIG. 19(c), the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 4-Decoration 2-Decoration 5" is definitively displayed.

FIG. 19(d) shows a state in which the decorative pattern variation display is started when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 3. In the decorative pattern variable display here, the pattern of the normal variable display shown in FIG. 18(b) is executed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(d), an operation is performed at the time of starting the variable display of decorative patterns. The number of reservations for special drawing 2 is reduced by one to 2. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(e), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern. In the subsequent FIG. 19(f), a combination of randomly selected decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display here continues until the next FIG. 19(g), and in FIG. 19(h), the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 19(i) shows a state in which the decorative pattern variation display is started in a state where the number of reservations for special drawing 2 is 2. In the decorative symbol variation display here, a pattern of normal reach display is executed after the normal variation display as shown in FIG. 18(c). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(i), an operation at the start of variable display of decorative patterns is performed. The number of reservations for special drawing 2 is further reduced by one to 1. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19(j), the decorative pattern fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative pattern. In the subsequent FIG. 19(k), the ready-to-win state is established, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 19(l), a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 8-Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display here continues in the next FIG. 19(m), and continues until the next FIG. 19(n).

In the example shown in FIG. 19 described above, the display time of the temporary stop display becomes longer as the number of reserved special drawings 2 decreases.

In the above description,
``A reservation storage means [for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] that can store up to a predetermined upper limit number [for example, 4] of the right to execute the validity judgment;
A display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display that variably displays a plurality of decorative patterns [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208];
A game machine comprising:
The display means includes a first display (e.g., a temporary stop display or a temporary stop display) that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before the display of the final display that is displayed following the first decorative symbol variation display ends. and confirmation display] may be displayed.
The display means may display a second display [for example, a display at the start of variation] that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols at the start of variation of the second decorative symbol variation display;
The second decorative pattern variation display is a decorative pattern variation display that is started after the first decorative pattern variation display [for example, the decorative pattern variation display of FIGS. 12(1) to 12(12) is In the case of the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIG. 12 (13) to (16), the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 13 (17) to (22) is the first decorative pattern fluctuation display. If the decorative pattern fluctuation display starts in Figure 13 (24), and if the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (1) to (7) is used as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the 14(8) to (11), and when the decorative pattern fluctuation displays of FIGS. 14(8) to 14(11) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display shown in FIG. 14(12) ~When the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figure 15 (17) and the decorative pattern fluctuation display in Figures 14 (12) to 15 (17) are set as the first decorative pattern fluctuation display, the display starts in Figure 15 (23). If the decorative pattern fluctuation display or the decorative pattern fluctuation display starting in FIG. 15 (23'), or the decorative pattern fluctuation display in FIGS. 19(c) to 19(g) decorative pattern variation display],
There is a certain case where the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are different (hereinafter referred to as "first case" [for example, FIG. 12 (9) and FIG. 12 (13), FIG. (21) and the same figure (24), FIG. 14 (3) and the same figure (8), FIG. 15 (16-1), the same figure (16-2), and the same figure (23')].
The first decorative pattern variable display is started with the first number of rights stored in the retention storage means, and the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same. There is also a certain case (hereinafter referred to as "second case") [for example, FIGS. 19(a) and 19(c)],
The first decorative pattern variable display is started in a state where the second number of rights is stored in the retention storage means, and the decorative pattern of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display are the same. There is a certain case (hereinafter referred to as "third case") [for example, FIGS. 19(e) to 19(f) and 19(g)],
the first number [for example, 4] is larger than the second number [for example, 3],
The display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case,
The display time of the first display tends to be shorter in the second case than in the third case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

With this game machine as well, since the first case and the second case exist, variations can be made in the performance, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Moreover, it is also possible to liven up the game. In addition, since the display time of the first display is longer in the first case than in the second case, the combination of the decorative patterns of the first display and the decorative pattern of the second display It is possible to correctly convey to the player that the combination is different without causing the player to misunderstand.

Furthermore, when the decorative symbol variation display is performed continuously (for example, when there are four rights), the display time of the first display tends to be shortened, so the game progresses at a good tempo, and the game progresses at a faster pace. It can improve your interest.

The second case is a case where the final display displayed subsequent to the first decorative pattern variation display is a random display. Further, the third case is a case where the final display displayed subsequent to the first decorative pattern variation display is a random display. That is, whether in the second case or the third case, the reach effect is not executed in the first decorative symbol variation display (the reach variation display is not displayed), and the confirmation of loss is displayed. is displayed.

Furthermore, limitations regarding the first type of decorative pattern and the second type of decorative pattern described above, limitations regarding the information indicated by the decorative pattern, and limitations regarding the display mode of the decorative pattern in this game machine have also been explained.

Next, a description will be given of the event pre-reading notice that is executed after the end of the losing chance performance.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of an event pre-read notification. In this example, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state), and left-handed playing is recommended.

In FIG. 20(1), the first special symbol display device 212 is displaying a variable pattern, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displaying a variable pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(1), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the three pending icons h11 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1. ~h13 is displayed. These three pending icons h11 to h13 are also in the default display mode.

In addition, in the variable display of decorative symbols shown in FIG. 20(1), there are cases where a pending icon change notice described later or a zone effect described using FIGS. 14 to 15 is executed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(2), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the subsequent FIG. 20(3), "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1", a winning combination of decorative patterns is displayed as confirmed.

In addition, the decorative pattern fluctuation display shown in FIGS. 20(1) and 20(2) is a normal fluctuation, and a shortened fluctuation is performed in which the time length of the decorative pattern fluctuation display is shorter (for example, 5 seconds) than this normal fluctuation. The temporary stop display period for the losing decorative symbol combination is shorter in the shortened variation than in the normal variation. Further, the shortening fluctuations include extremely shortening fluctuations in which the temporary stop display period is 0 seconds. Further, in the shortening variation, the operation at the start of the variable display of decorative symbols is not performed.

In FIG. 20(4), the first special symbol display device 212 starts displaying variable symbols, and also starts varying displaying decorative symbols. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of this new icon, which has become the first hold icon h11, changes from the default display mode to a green display mode when the icon is shifted, and a preview of the change in the hold icon has started. This reservation icon change notice is a type of pre-read notice that suggests that there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot in the symbol change display that will start when the reservation represented by the reservation icon whose display mode has changed is exhausted. The expectation level of a jackpot varies depending on the display mode, and the expectation level of a jackpot is higher in the green display mode than in the default display mode. The execution timing of the hold icon change notice may be when the hold is increased or when the shift is moved, but it may also be during the period when the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is being performed or when the final display of the decorative pattern is being performed. The pending icon change notice will not start during the period. If there is an increase in reservations during these periods, a notice of change in the reservation icon is given at the time of shift movement.

In FIG. 20(5), a ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 increases to 3, and a holding icon h13 with three eyes is additionally displayed. Also when the number of holds increases, the hold icon change notice is started, and the display mode of the third increased hold icon h13 is a green display mode. In addition, button notifications, which are a type of normal notifications, have also started. In the button preview, an image related to the effect button 136 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, an image is displayed that prompts the user to press the production button 136 within the valid operation period. More specifically, a button image 136a imitating the performance button 136, a meter display 136b representing the remaining period of the operation validity period, and a character display 136c saying "Press" to urge the button to be pressed are displayed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period. When the presentation button 136 is pressed, the upper presentation device 2, which is at an initial position above the decorative pattern display device 208, descends in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the button preview, the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on how far the upper presentation device 2 descends, and the further the upper presentation device 2 descends, the higher the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In FIG. 20(6), the upper presentation device 2 is slightly lowered while the decorative symbols are rapidly changing in all of the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. In the subsequent FIG. 20 (7), the upper presentation device 2 rises to the initial position, and the decorative pattern display device 208 temporarily stops displaying the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8". ing. In FIG. 20(8), "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8" is displayed as confirmed.

In FIG. 20(9), the first special symbol display device 212 starts to display a variable pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 also starts to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 20(9) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in green, has changed to the variable icon h0, which is also displayed in green, and this time, a normal notice is being given. become.

In FIG. 20 (10), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation.

In FIG. 20 (11), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started.

In FIG. 20 (12), the normal reach does not develop into the super reach, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In Figure 20 (13), which follows Figure 20 (12), an advance prediction of the event is performed while the temporary stop display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" continues. There is. During the temporary stop display period for losing decorative symbol combinations when a reach is achieved (Figures 20 (12) to (13)), there is a temporary stop display for losing decorative symbol combinations when a reach is not achieved. It is longer than the display period (FIG. 20(2)). Further, the event preview in FIG. 20 (13) is an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge." The event advance notice in this example is to foretell an event that will occur in any one of the one or more symbol variation displays whose start is currently pending, and is a confirmation display of the jackpot symbol, i.e. There are times when a jackpot is announced, and there are times when a reach pattern with higher expectations for a jackpot than the current reach pattern will be performed. Here, since it was a normal reach end, it is predicted that it will develop into a super reach or a special super reach in the symbol variation display that starts when one of the two holds is exhausted. Incidentally, the event advance notice may be one that notifies the expectation level of a jackpot in addition to the event notice. For example, the expectation level of a jackpot may be reported depending on the type of animation display js. Further, instead of the event advance notice, only the expectation level of the jackpot may be notified. Further, even if the event advance notice is executed, it may not develop into a super reach or a special super reach (so-called false notice).

Further, the pending icon change notice by the second pending icon h12 continues.

In FIG. 20 (14), the winning combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 20 (15), the first special symbol display device 212 starts to display a variable pattern of symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 20 (15) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shifting of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, has become the variable icon h0, which is also the default display mode.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 20 in a step-by-step manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (16) continuing from FIG. 20 (15), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation.

In FIG. 21 (17), there are two balls entering the special map 1 starting port 230, the number of reservations for special map 1 increases to 3, and a second reservation icon h12 and a third reservation icon h13 are added. Displayed. Moreover, the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (18), as predicted, the event develops into a super (SP) reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (19) displays an animation depicting a lord being defeated by an enemy samurai without developing into a special super reach, and the center of the display screen displays "Decoration 4". - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4", a combination of unsuccessful decorative patterns is temporarily stopped and displayed. In Figure 21 (20), which follows Figure 21 (19), an advance prediction of the event is performed while the temporary stop display of the unsuccessful decorative pattern combination ``Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4'' continues. ing. The temporary stop display period for the losing decorative pattern combination when reaching the Super Reach (Figure 21 (19) to Figure 21 (20)) It is longer than the period of the stop display (Fig. 20 (2)), and the period of the temporary stop display of the losing decorative symbol combination (Fig. 20 (12) to the same) when a reach is established but does not develop into a super reach. It is longer than the figure (13)). The event pre-read notice in FIG. 21 (20) is also the same animation display js as the event pre-read notice in FIG. 20 (13). In Figure 21 (20), the event preview of the Super Reach stop is a symbol fluctuation display that starts when any one of the three reservations is exhausted, and the Special Super Reach has a higher expectation of jackpot than the Super Reach. It is predicted that this will develop into a reach.

In FIG. 21 (21), a winning combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed.

It should be noted that even in the variable display of decorative patterns shown in FIGS. 20 (15) to 21 (20), a pending icon change notice or the zone effect described using FIGS. 14 to 15 may be executed.

In FIG. 21 (22), the first special symbol display device 212 has started to display a variable pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started to display a variable pattern of decorative symbols. The decorative pattern shown in FIG. 21 (22) is in operation at the start of variable display. In addition, fluctuations in the mini symbols and blinking display of the fourth symbol have also started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in green, has become the variable icon h0, which is also displayed in green. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11. The display mode of this new icon, which has become the first hold icon h11, changes from the default display mode to the red display mode when shifting, and the hold icon change notice, which is a pre-read notice, has started. There is. The anticipation of a jackpot is higher in the advance preview using the pending icon in the red display mode than in the advance preview using the pending icon in the green display mode.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (23), the decorative pattern fluctuation display is a downward high-speed fluctuation.

In FIG. 21 (24), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (24) where the ready-to-reach state is established, a line preview display sf3, which is a type of normal notice, is also displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (25), the game develops into a super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (26), a red flash display fl1 representing the expectation level of the jackpot is displayed, and as per the event preview in FIG. 21 (20), the special super (SPSP) reach has developed. are doing. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21 (27), there is a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" which is temporarily stopped and displayed from the red flash display fl1. In the following figure (28), a temporary stop display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" continues. After that, in FIG. 21 (29), a wipe effect is started as a revival effect, and in FIG. 21 (30), where the wipe-in is completed, the display of the decorative pattern is no longer visible due to the wipe display wp.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 in a step-by-step manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (31) continuing from FIG. 21 (30), wipeout has started and a part of the decorative pattern has become visible. In the subsequent FIG. 22 (32), the wipe effect has ended, and the unsuccessful decorative pattern combination "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is still temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect has ended in failure. In addition, in FIG. 22 (32), the event preview preview is executed by displaying the animation display js. Here, it is assumed that the execution was performed for the next reservation to be used up, and in the variable display in which the event advance notice was executed, a special super reach was executed, so a jackpot was predicted.

Note that the process may be started in FIG. 21 (28) before the wipe effect is started.

In FIG. 22 (33), a winning combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed.

The temporary stop display period (Figure 21 (27) to Figure 22 (32)) for the losing decorative pattern combination when reaching the Special Super Reach is the temporary stop display period for the losing decorative pattern combination when the reach is not established. The temporary stop display period (Fig. 20 (12) to It is longer than the figure (13)). Furthermore, the temporary stop display period for the losing decorative symbol combination (Figures 21 (27) to 22 (32)) when the special super reach is reached is the period when the special super reach is reached. may be longer than the temporary stop display period of the losing decorative symbol combination (FIG. 21 (19) to FIG. 21 (20)) in the case that the combination is not developed.

In FIG. 22 (34), the first special symbol display device 212 starts displaying a variable pattern, and also starts displaying a variable decorative pattern. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in red, has become the variable icon h0, which is also displayed in red, and the normal preview has started.

In FIG. 22 (35), a button notice, which is a type of normal notice, has also started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a button image 136a, a meter display 136b, and a character display 136c saying "Press". There is. The production button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period, and the upper production device 2 descends from the initial position to the front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In FIG. 22 (36), the upper production device 2 is shown in FIG. It has fallen significantly compared to when it was , and there is a high expectation of a jackpot. Eventually, in FIG. 22 (37), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started. In the subsequent FIG. 22 (38), the game develops into a super reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (39), a rainbow-colored flashing display fl2 representing the expectation level of the jackpot is displayed, which has developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. The rainbow color has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the red color, and is a color that indicates a confirmation of a jackpot. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (40), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" which is temporarily stopped and displayed appears from among the rainbow-colored flash display fl2. However, in the following figure (41), a wipe effect is started as a revival effect. In FIG. 22 (42) where the wipe-in has been completed, the display of the decorative pattern has become completely invisible due to the wipe display wp. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out begins, and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. In Figure 22 (43), the wipe effect ends and a normal jackpot ("special pattern") such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 7" The decorative pattern combination of ``3R normal jackpot'' of ``b'' is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect is successful. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44), the combination of decorative patterns for the normal jackpot is displayed as determined.

Note that the revival performance may be a performance that always occurs when the special super reach ends, or may be a performance that may or may not occur. In addition, the display contents become difficult to see in the part that starts to be visible due to the wipeout due to the effect display ef such as light emission (see Figure 14 (7)), and when the wipeout is completed, the effect display ends and the display contents become visible. You may also make it so that Alternatively, during the wipe effect, high-speed fluctuation is performed due to re-fluctuation, and it is difficult to confirm the decorative pattern from the part that has begun to appear due to the wipe-out, and when the wipe performance ends, the re-fluctuation also ends and the decorative pattern temporarily stops. Display may also be performed. Furthermore, the wipe performance may not be performed, and high-speed fluctuation of re-fluctuation may be performed as a revival performance.

In the game progress example shown in Figures 20 to 22 above, the animation display js of the event look-ahead notice with the same production mode is executed for each loss reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next change is the target of the look-ahead notice. However, the event preview animation display js is not only performed each time with a continuous fluctuating display of decorative symbols, but may also be performed once. In this case, the change that is two steps ahead may be subject to a look-ahead notice, the change that is three steps ahead may be a change that is subject to a look-ahead notice, or the change that is four steps ahead may be a change that is subject to a look-ahead notice. be. Note that if there are two or more pending changes, the player does not know which change is the target change of the pre-read notice.

Furthermore, the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event advance notice and the event (suggested content) targeted by the event advance notice is summarized in FIG. 22(a).

When an event pre-read notice is executed when a normal reach is lost, the event pre-read notice becomes an effect that foretells that a super (SP) reach or a special super (SPSP) reach will be performed.

When an event pre-read notice is executed when a super (SP) reach is lost, the event pre-read notice is an effect that foretells that a special super (SPSP) reach will be carried out.

If the event advance notice is executed after developing to the special super (SPSP) reach and losing, the event advance notice becomes a performance that foretells the confirmation of the jackpot.

Note that in the case of a normal reach loss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed.

In addition, in the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the special pattern low probability state (non-probability variable gaming state), the event advance notice is not executed, and in the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern in the special pattern high probability state, The event advance notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach performance pattern in the special figure high probability state, the event advance notice is not executed and the special figure low probability state (non-probability variable In the case of a loss in the pattern of the reach effect in the gaming state), a preview of the event may be executed.

In addition, in the case of a loss in the reach performance pattern in the low probability state of common figures (non-time-saving gaming state), the event advance notice is not executed, and in the case of a loss in the reach performance in the high probability state of the common figure, the event advance notice is not executed. The advance notice may be executed, or conversely, in the case of a loss in the reach effect in the high probability state of the common figure, the advance notice of the event is not executed, and In the case of a loss in the reach effect pattern, an event advance notice may be executed.

In addition, if you lose in the reach performance pattern in an advantageous state (special pattern high probability state general pattern high probability state, special pattern high probability state low probability state general pattern low probability state, special pattern low probability state general pattern high probability state), If the event advance notice is not executed and the pattern of reach performance in the normal state (special figure low probability state, regular figure low probability state) is a loss, the event advance notice may be executed, or vice versa. , in the case of a loss in the reach performance pattern in the normal state (special pattern low probability state, general pattern low probability state), the event advance notice is not executed, and the advantageous state (special pattern high probability state, general pattern high probability state, special pattern In the case of a loss in the pattern of reach performance in the low probability state of high probability state, low probability state of common figure, low probability state of special figure, high probability state of common figure), event pre-reading notice may be executed.

Further, the event look-ahead effect may be a suggestion of the expectation level of a jackpot (see FIG. 23) instead of a suggestion of a reach. Furthermore, instead of the event look-ahead effect, an effect suggesting the setting value to be changed in the setting change process of step S117 in FIG. 6 may be executed.

Furthermore, even if a reach loss occurs, the event advance notice is not always executed, and may not be executed. For example, even if a normal reach loss occurs and the next fluctuation develops into a super reach, the event advance notice may not be executed. Alternatively, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols in a predetermined state (for example, a fluctuating display of decorative symbols in a time-saving gaming state (during play time), or a fluctuating display of decorative symbols at the end of a time-saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state) (display, etc.), even if a reach loss occurs, the event advance notice may not be executed.

Further, when a normal reach loss occurs and the event pre-read notice is executed, the event pre-read notice may be repeatedly executed until a change becomes the target of the event pre-read notice. That is, the same event pre-reading notice may be executed for every change (for every temporary stop display period).

In addition, although the event advance preview was a specific display of an animation display js in which a character riding a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge," it may also be a specific sound or specific light emission.

In addition, the event advance notice is a notice that will not be executed unless a reach effect such as normal reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach is performed, and even if a reach effect is performed, it will not be executed unless it is a lose reach effect (decorative symbol that becomes a jackpot). Although this is a notice (not executed in a variable display), it may or may not be executed even if a losing reach effect is performed. For example, during a certain period such as a suggestion period in a decorative pattern variation display where a normal reach is executed, the event pre-reading notice does not start to be executed, and during a suggestion period in a decorative pattern variation display where an SP reach is executed, an event pre-reading notice is not started. There may be cases where execution of the notice is started. The suggested period here is a period that suggests the result of the validity judgment, and specifically refers to the display period of the provisional suspension indication and the period from the provisional suspension indication to the final indication (also in the following). same). In addition, during a certain period such as the suggestion period in the decorative pattern variation display when SP reach is executed, the execution of the event advance notice may not be started, and during a certain period such as the suggestion period in the decorative symbol variation display when SPSP reach is executed. During this period, the execution of event look-ahead notification may be started. Alternatively, as mentioned above, there are multiple types of SP Reach patterns (for example, SP Reach 1, SP Reach 2, etc.) with different characters appearing, display times, jackpot expectations, etc. There are also multiple types of reach patterns (for example, SPSP reach 1, SPSP reach 2, etc.) that differ in characters appearing, display times, expectations of jackpot, etc. For example, during a certain period such as the suggestion period in the decorative symbol fluctuation display when SP Reach 1 is executed, the execution of the event advance notice does not start, and SP Reach 2, which has a higher expectation of jackpot than SP Reach 1, In a certain period, such as a suggestion period in the decorative pattern variation display to be executed, execution of the event pre-reading notice may be started. In addition, during a certain period such as the suggestion period in the decorative symbol fluctuation display when SPSP Reach 1 is executed, the execution of the event advance notice may not start, and SPSP Reach 2, which has a higher expectation of jackpot than SPSP Reach 1, In a certain period, such as a suggestion period in the decorative pattern variation display to be executed, execution of the event pre-reading notice may be started.

According to the above description,
``Display means capable of performing a decorative pattern variation display that changes the display of the decorative pattern [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208],
A look-ahead effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] that executes multiple types of look-ahead effects;
A game machine comprising:
One type of look-ahead performance among the plurality of types of look-ahead performances is a first look-ahead performance [e.g., pending icon change notice, zone performance],
One type of lookahead performance among the plurality of types of lookahead performances is a second lookahead performance [for example, an event lookahead notice],
In a decorative symbol variation display in which a reach effect [for example, a normal reach effect, a SP reach effect, or a SPSP reach effect] is not executed, the prefetch effect means starts executing the first prefetch effect [for example, a pending icon change notice]. [For example, Figure 20 (5)]
The pre-reading performance means is configured to perform a first period in a decorative pattern variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is executed [for example, after a temporary stop display of decorative symbols is started, In the period until the final display of the symbol starts], the execution of the first look-ahead effect [e.g., notice of pending icon change] may not start [for example, if there is an increase in pending in the first period] [starts on shift movement] and not on shift movement], and
In the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is not executed, the look-ahead performance means performs the second look-ahead performance [for example, when riding a motorcycle]. There is no case where the character appears and starts executing the animation display js chanting "revenge" [for example, the animation display js is not displayed in FIGS. 20(2) and 20(7)],
The look-ahead performance means does not start executing the second look-ahead performance during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the first ready-to-read performance is executed;
The pre-reading performance means is configured to perform a second reach performance different from the first reach performance [for example, if the first reach performance is a normal reach performance, an SP reach performance; if the first reach performance is a SP reach performance, the first reach performance is a SP reach performance. In the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which SPSP reach effect, SP2 reach effect if the first reach effect is SP1 reach effect, execution of the second look-ahead effect may be started. is something,
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Generally, when a reach effect is executed, the player expects to hit the jackpot with the decorative symbol fluctuation display for which the reach effect was executed. On the other hand, if the player loses due to the decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed, the player will be disappointed. The player can look forward to the decorative symbol variation display that will be the object of the second look-ahead performance later, and the player can be entertained in two stages. Furthermore, during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the reach effect is executed, the execution of the first look-ahead effect may not be started, but the execution of the second look-ahead effect may be started. , it is possible to differentiate the look-ahead performance, and it is possible to provide a game machine with a wide variety of variations.

Furthermore, the second look-ahead performance may or may not be performed depending on the type of reach performance, thereby making it possible to differentiate the reach performance.

Note that the second ready-to-win performance may be a ready-to-win performance with a longer performance time than the first ready-to-win performance.

Also,
"The first period is a period that includes a suggestion period that suggests the result of the validity judgment [for example, a period during which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 21 (28) and FIG. 22 (32)) [for example, 21 (27) to FIG. 22 (32), including the period in which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is not visible (FIG. 21 (29) to FIG. 22 (31)).
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the display means may display a first display that allows confirmation of the combination of decorative symbols before the display of the final display that is displayed following the decorative symbol variation display is completed, and One period may be a period during which the first display is displayed (the same applies below).

Also,
“The second reach performance is a reach performance [for example, SP reach or SPSP reach] that has a higher expectation that a jackpot game will be executed than the first reach performance [for example, normal reach],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by executing the second look-ahead performance in a reach performance where the expectation of a jackpot is high, it is possible to look forward to the decorative symbol fluctuation display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance after a reach loss. This allows the player to enjoy the game in two stages. In addition, it is possible to increase the motivation of players who are disappointed due to losing in a reach performance with high expectations for a jackpot.

Also, according to the above description,
``Display means capable of performing a decorative pattern variation display that changes the display of the decorative pattern [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208],
A look-ahead effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] that executes multiple types of look-ahead effects;
A game machine comprising:
One type of look-ahead performance among the plurality of types of look-ahead performances is a first look-ahead performance [for example, pending icon change notice, zone performance],
One type of lookahead performance among the plurality of types of lookahead performances is a second lookahead performance [for example, an event lookahead notice],
In a decorative symbol variation display in which a reach effect [for example, a normal reach effect, a SP reach effect, or a SPSP reach effect] is not executed, the prefetch effect means starts executing the first prefetch effect [for example, a pending icon change notice]. There may be cases where
The pre-reading performance means is configured to perform a first period in a decorative pattern variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is performed [for example, after a temporary stop display of decorative symbols is started, In the period until the final display of symbols starts], the execution of the first look-ahead effect [e.g., pending icon change notice] may not start [for example, if there is an increase in pending in the first period] [starts on shift movement] and not on shift movement], and
In the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is executed and a loss occurs, the look-ahead performance means performs the second look-ahead performance [for example, a motorcycle]. An animation display js in which a character riding a appears and chants "revenge" may start to be executed [for example, Fig. 20 (13), Fig. 21 (20), Fig. 22 (32)],
The pre-read presentation means does not start executing the second pre-read presentation during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the reach effect is executed and a jackpot is achieved [for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (43 ), a character riding a motorcycle appears, and the animation display js chanting "revenge" is not displayed],
The pre-read effect means does not start execution of the second pre-read effect during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the ready-to-read effect is not performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 20(2), In Figure (7), a character riding a motorcycle appears, and the animation display js chanting "revenge" is not displayed.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Generally, when a reach effect is executed, the player expects to hit the jackpot with the decorative symbol fluctuation display for which the reach effect was executed. On the other hand, if the player loses due to the decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed, the player will be disappointed. The player can look forward to the decorative symbol variation display that will be the object of the second look-ahead performance later, and the player can be entertained in two stages. Furthermore, during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the reach effect is executed, the execution of the first look-ahead effect is not started, and in the case of a jackpot, the execution of the second look-ahead effect is not started. First, in the case of a loss, execution of the second pre-read performance may be started, so that the pre-read performance can be differentiated and a game machine rich in variation can be provided.

Also,
"The first period is a period that includes a suggestion period that suggests the result of the validity judgment [for example, a period during which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 21 (28) and FIG. 22 (32)) [for example, 21 (27) to FIG. 22 (32), including the period in which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is not visible (FIG. 21 (29) to FIG. 22 (31)).
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The decorative pattern fluctuation display has multiple types of fluctuation display patterns [for example, fluctuation patterns including reach patterns],
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that will start after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether there will be a jackpot]. ,
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that differs in the content suggested by the pattern of the decorative symbol variation display in which the second look-ahead performance is executed [for example, FIG. 22(a)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Next, a modification of the game progress example shown in FIGS. 20 to 22 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a modified example of event pre-reading notice step by step.

FIG. 23 (19') is the same state as FIG. 21 (19), and without developing into a special super reach, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai. A losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the subsequent FIG. 23 (20'), an event mixed notice has been started instead of the event look-ahead notice. In this mixed event preview, a single picture ec of a character that captures the player's gaze is displayed on the entire display screen, and if the character is uttering a line, a revival effect will be performed or the character will be put on hold. It is very likely that you will hit the jackpot. In other words, a notice that a revival performance will be performed corresponds to a normal event notice, and a notice that there is a jackpot in the pending game corresponds to a pre-event notice. In the single picture ec displayed in Fig. 23 (20'), the line "Not yet" is uttered, and in Fig. 23 (21'), a wipe effect has started as a revival effect, and the wipe-in has been completed. At 23 (22'), the single picture ec becomes invisible due to the wipe display wp. Next, a wipeout is performed, and in FIG. 23 (23'), the wipe effect has ended. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (23') temporarily stops displaying a combination of decorative patterns for a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special map b") such as "decoration 4 - decoration 13 - decoration 4". The revival performance has been a success. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (24'), the combination of decorative patterns for the normal jackpot is displayed as determined.

Figure 23 (19'') is also in the same state as Figure 21 (19), and without developing into a special super reach, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation showing a lord being defeated by an enemy samurai. is displayed, and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the subsequent FIG. 23 (20''), event pre-reading notice has started. This event pre-reading notice is not a pre-reading notice regarding any of the reservations, but is a pre-reading notice in which the change to be notified is determined. In other words, when the character poses with his thumbs up, it is a prediction that there is a possibility of hitting the jackpot in the next swing, and when the character speaks a line, it is a prediction that the jackpot is guaranteed to be hit in the next swing. become. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (20'') displays a display cp in which the character is in a thumbs-up pose.

In FIG. 23 (21''), a winning combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed.

In FIG. 23 (22''), the next variation that was the target of the event pre-reading notice is started, and first, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and in the following figure (23''), , the variable display of decorative patterns has started. In this next variation, a reach state is established in Fig. 23 (24''), develops into a super reach state in the same figure (25''), and in the same figure (26''), a “decoration 4 - decoration 13 - decoration A combination of ornamental symbols such as ``4'', which usually results in a jackpot, is displayed as confirmed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example in which the game state changes.

FIGS. 24(1) to 24(7) are diagrams showing an example of entering the play time described using FIG. 11(b). In FIG. 24(1), the special pattern 1 symbol variation display is performed in the special pattern low probability state and the general pattern low probability state. This symbol variation display corresponds to the symbol variation display of the 949th special symbol after the previous jackpot game ended. That is, this is a special pattern symbol variation display that is started in a state where the special pattern loses consecutively 948 times in a special pattern low probability state.

In FIG. 24 (2), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the subsequent FIG. 24 (3), "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8" is displayed. The winning decorative pattern combination is displayed as confirmed. As a result, the previous jackpot game has ended and the special symbol loss has continued 949 times in the special symbol low probability state.

In FIG. 24(4), the symbol variation display of the 950th special symbol has started since the previous jackpot game ended. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(4), a number achievement display YT1 such as "0 remaining until play time" is displayed in conjunction with the start of the symbol variation display of the 950th special symbol. This number of times achievement display YT1 is a display that is displayed only on the 950th decorative pattern variation display after the end of the previous jackpot game, and it overlaps with the decorative pattern, and the number of times achievement display YT1 is not displayed. The decorative pattern is more difficult to see than in the case of . Therefore, in FIG. 24(4), although the operation at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, it is difficult to visually recognize it. Additionally, the mini symbol in the upper left corner has started to change and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner has started blinking. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the first hold icon h11, which was displayed in white, has become the fluctuating icon h0, which is displayed in white.

In FIG. 24(5), the number of times achieved display YT1 disappears and the decorative symbol fluctuation display changes downward at high speed, making it difficult to confirm the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 24(6), a temporary stop display of decorative symbols is being displayed, but this temporary stop display is overlapped with a transition notice display YT2 that foretells that play time will begin. Therefore, although the decorative pattern should normally be visible when the temporary stop display is performed, it is difficult to see the decorative pattern in FIG. 24(6). However, since the transition preview display YT2 has been displayed, it is highly likely that even the symbol change display of this 950th special symbol will be missed and the game will enter play time. This transition notice display YT2 is a display that is displayed only in the 950th decorative symbol variation display after the previous jackpot game ends. On the other hand, in the 950th decorative pattern variation display since the end of the previous jackpot game, a character riding a motorcycle appears and the animation display js (display of event advance notice) chanting "revenge" is not displayed. That is, in the decorative pattern variation display in which the transition notice display YT2 is displayed, the event pre-read notice is not executed. Further, even if a reach effect is performed in the symbol variation display of the 950th special symbol, the event pre-read notice is not displayed.

In addition, the event advance notice is not executed at the 950th decorative symbol fluctuation display after the end of the previous jackpot game, but in the 1st to 949th decorative symbol fluctuation displays, the decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed. It may be executed. For example, an event preview notice may be executed during a suggestion period (a display period of a temporary stop display or a period from a temporary stop display to a final display) that indicates the result of the validity determination.

In FIG. 24 (7), the final display of the decorative pattern is performed, and the third right-hitting display RH3 that encourages right-handed hitting overlaps with the finalized display. For this reason, it is difficult to see the confirmed combination of decorative symbols, but the confirmed display of "5-4-1" in the mini pattern in the upper left corner is visible and also represents a loss in the fourth symbol in the upper right corner. The confirmation display of "x" is also visible. As a result, the previous jackpot game ended and the special pattern loss was repeated 950 times in the special pattern low probability state, and from the next change the gaming state will change to the time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) Be changed. At the time of FIG. 24 (7), the non-time-saving gaming state remains, but the right-handed third display RH3 is a display in preparation for the time-saving gaming state that will start from the next fluctuation, and the right-handed first display RH1 is also displayed.

FIGS. 24(a) to 24(f) are diagrams showing an example of the symbol variation display of 120 special symbols after the 2R probability variable jackpot game is finished. In this example, the player wins the V prize in the 2nd round, and the special pattern high probability regular pattern high probability state is maintained during the 120 symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 24(a) is a diagram showing how the symbol variation display of the first special symbol started after the end of the 2R probability variation jackpot game is performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(a) displays a background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state. Furthermore, it is shown that the decorative pattern variation display is started when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 4, and the decorative pattern variation display is fluctuating downward at high speed. In this example, a cumulative display RS1 is displayed below the mini symbol in the upper left corner. The cumulative display RS1 is a display showing the cumulative value of prize balls acquired so far. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "119 remaining" are displayed as a display of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. Note that the display of the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state is also the display of the remaining number of times in the special figure high probability state.

In this decorative pattern fluctuation display, a super shortened fluctuation display pattern that is even shorter than the shortened fluctuation display pattern is executed, and a temporary stop display is not performed and the losing decorative symbol combination "Decoration 8-Decoration 1- "Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed.

Next, the symbol variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(c) is performing high-speed variation of the decorative symbol variation display. Note that the remaining number of times displayed in the lower right corner is displayed in characters "118 remaining."

Thereafter, the special symbol pattern variation display is repeated without hitting the jackpot, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(d) displays the 120th decorative symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game. The remaining number of times displayed in the lower right corner is the characters "LAST". In FIG. 24(d), the ready-to-win effect has started, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started.

In the subsequent FIG. 24(e), a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed, and the result display RS2 overlaps with the temporary stop display. Therefore, although the decorative pattern should normally be visible when the temporary stop display is performed, it is difficult to see the decorative pattern in FIG. 24(e). However, since the result display RS2 is displayed, there is a strong possibility that even the symbol variation display of this 120th special symbol will fail and fall to the special symbol low probability regular symbol low probability state. This result display RS2 is a display that is displayed only in the 120th decorative symbol variation display after the previous jackpot game ends. On the other hand, in the 120th decorative pattern variation display since the end of the previous jackpot game, a character riding a motorcycle appears and the animation display js (display of event advance notice) chanting "revenge" is not displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation display in which the result display RS2 is displayed, even if the ready-to-reach effect is executed, the event pre-read notice is not executed. The result display RS2 is a display showing the number of successive jackpots (number of jackpots) and the cumulative value of prize balls acquired so far (number of prize balls acquired), which was displayed in the cumulative display RS1. When the result display RS2 is displayed, the cumulative display RS1 is hidden. Additionally, the background display has also changed to a plain background. Note that both the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

In FIG. 24(f), the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 has ended, the mini symbol in the upper left corner displays the "4-1-4" symbol combination, and the fourth symbol in the upper right corner displays "x". The design is confirmed and displayed. Although the combination of decorative patterns is also displayed as confirmed, it is difficult to visually recognize it because it is overlapped by the result display RS2.

In addition, the event pre-reading notice is not executed at the 120th decorative symbol fluctuation display after the end of the previous jackpot game, but in the 1st to 119th decorative symbol fluctuation displays, the decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed. It may be executed. For example, an event preview notice may be executed during a suggestion period (a display period of a temporary stop display or a period from a temporary stop display to a final display) that indicates the result of the validity determination.

According to the above description,
``Display means capable of performing a decorative pattern variation display that changes the display of the decorative pattern [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208],
A pre-reading effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] that executes multiple types of pre-reading effects;
A game machine comprising:
One type of look-ahead performance among the plurality of types of look-ahead performances is a first look-ahead performance [for example, pending icon change notice, zone performance],
One type of lookahead performance among the plurality of types of lookahead performances is a second lookahead performance [for example, an event lookahead notice],
In a decorative symbol variation display in which a reach effect [for example, a normal reach effect, a SP reach effect, or a SPSP reach effect] is not executed, the prefetch effect means starts executing the first prefetch effect [for example, a pending icon change notice]. [For example, Figure 20 (5)]
The pre-reading performance means is configured to perform a first period in a decorative pattern variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is performed [for example, after a temporary stop display of decorative symbols is started, In the period until the final display of symbols starts], the execution of the first look-ahead effect [e.g., pending icon change notice] may not start [for example, if there is an increase in pending in the first period] [starts on shift movement] and not on shift movement], and
In the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which a reach performance [for example, normal reach performance, SP reach performance, or SPSP reach performance] is executed, the look-ahead performance means performs the second look-ahead performance [for example, while riding a motorcycle]. A character appears and starts executing an animation display js chanting "revenge" [for example, FIG. 20 (13), FIG. 21 (20), FIG. 22 (32)],
The pre-reading presentation means may start executing the second pre-reading presentation during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which a ready-to-read presentation [for example, a normal reach presentation, a SP ready-to-read presentation, or a SPSP ready presentation] is not executed. [For example, in Figure 20 (2) and Figure 20 (7), a character riding a motorcycle appears, and the animation display js chanting "revenge" is not displayed],
The above-mentioned pre-reading performance means is configured to perform decorative pattern fluctuations executed in a certain game state without a jackpot game being executed after a certain game state [for example, a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state] starts. In the decorative pattern variable display in which the number of times of display is the first number [for example, 950 times or 120 times], there is no case where the second look-ahead effect is executed [for example, FIG. 24 (4) to Figure 24 (6), Figure 24 (d) to Figure 24 (f)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Generally, when a reach effect is executed, the player expects to hit the jackpot with the decorative symbol fluctuation display for which the reach effect was executed. On the other hand, if the player loses due to the decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the reach effect is executed, the player will be disappointed. The player can look forward to the decorative symbol variation display that will be the object of the second look-ahead performance later, and the player can be entertained in two stages. Furthermore, during the first period in the decorative symbol variation display in which the reach effect is executed, the execution of the first look-ahead effect may not be started, but the execution of the second look-ahead effect may be started. , it is possible to differentiate the look-ahead performance, and it is possible to provide a game machine with a wide variety of variations.

In addition, in the first number of decorative pattern fluctuation displays, there is no case where the second look-ahead performance is executed, so that the decorative pattern fluctuation display itself and the performance performed during the decorative pattern fluctuation display are It is possible to make the players concentrate, and it is also possible to suppress an increase in the frequency of execution of the second pre-read performance.

Also,
``The first period is a period that includes a suggestion period that suggests the result of the validity judgment [for example, a period during which a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 21 (28) and FIG. 22 (32)) [for example, 21 (27) to FIG. 22 (32), including the period in which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is not visible (FIG. 21 (29) to FIG. 22 (31)).
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The display means displays the first image [for example, the gaming state transition display YT2 shown in FIG. 24(5), the result display RS2 shown in FIG. 24(e)] in the decorative symbol variation display that is the first number of times. and
The first image is displayed before the number of decorative symbol fluctuation displays executed in the certain gaming state reaches the first number without a jackpot game being executed after the certain gaming state starts. This is an image that will not be displayed in the decorative pattern variation display that is executed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by not executing the second look-ahead effect during the first decorative pattern variation display in the certain gaming state, the display is performed only during the first decorative pattern variation display. It is possible to avoid interfering with the first image being displayed.

Also,
``There is a first gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability state] and a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state] that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The certain gaming state is the first gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the certain game state is a special pattern low probability state, and the mode shifts to the play time (b time saving) from the decorative symbol fluctuation display next to the decorative symbol fluctuation display that is the first number of times. Good too. According to this aspect, in the decorative symbol variation display where the play time transition condition is satisfied, neither the first look-ahead effect nor the second look-ahead effect is executed, and it is notified (suggested) that play time will begin. Displaying the first image.

Also,
``There is a first gaming state [for example, a special figure low probability state] and a second gaming state [for example, a special figure high probability state] that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The certain gaming state is the second gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the certain game state is a special pattern high probability state, and the state shifts to the normal game state (first game state) from the decorative symbol fluctuation display next to the first number of decorative symbol fluctuation displays. It may also be in the form of an ST machine. According to this aspect, in the final variation of ST (the last decorative symbol variation display in the second gaming state), neither the first look-ahead performance nor the second look-ahead performance is executed, and the number of times the jackpot is won. A result image (first image) that displays the number of prize balls won, etc. is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
``A look-ahead effect means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208] that executes multiple types of look-ahead effects;
A notice effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] that executes a notice effect [for example, button notice, dialogue notice] in the symbol variation display that is currently being performed;
A game machine comprising:
One type of look-ahead performance among the plurality of types of look-ahead performances is a first look-ahead performance [for example, pending icon change notice, zone performance],
One type of lookahead performance among the plurality of types of lookahead performances is a second lookahead performance [for example, an event lookahead notice],
The prefetch performance means may execute the first prefetch performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, in FIG. Display sf1, display sf2 of pre-read notice and dialogue notice by empty zone in FIG. 14 (13)],
The prefetch performance means does not execute the second prefetch performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, FIG. 20 (13), FIG. 21 (20), and FIG. 21 (28) to In Figure (32), the preview performance is not executed and only the event preview preview is executed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also, according to the above description,
``Display means capable of performing a decorative pattern variation display that changes the display of the decorative pattern [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208],
A look-ahead effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] that executes multiple types of look-ahead effects;
A notice effect means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] that executes a notice effect [for example, button notice, dialogue notice] in the symbol variation display that is currently being performed;
A game machine comprising:
One type of look-ahead performance among the plurality of types of look-ahead performances is a first look-ahead performance [for example, pending icon change notice, zone performance],
One type of lookahead performance among the plurality of types of lookahead performances is a second lookahead performance [for example, an event lookahead notice],
The prefetch performance means may execute the first prefetch performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, in FIG. Display sf1, display sf2 of pre-read notice and dialogue notice by empty zone in FIG. 14 (13)],
The prefetch performance means does not execute the second prefetch performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, FIG. 20 (13), FIG. 21 (20), and FIG. 21 (28) to In Figure (32), the preview performance is not executed and only the event preview preview is executed],
The pre-reading performance means is configured to perform a first period in a symbol variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is executed [for example, after a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is started, a decorative symbol In the period until the confirmation display starts], the execution of the first look-ahead effect [e.g., notice of pending icon change] may not start [for example, when there is an increase in pending display in the first period]. is not started and is started on shift movement], and
In the first period in the symbol variation display in which a reach performance (e.g., normal reach performance, SP reach performance, or SPSP reach performance) is executed, the look-ahead performance means performs the second look-ahead performance [e.g., riding a motorcycle]. A character appears and starts executing an animation display js chanting "revenge" [for example, FIG. 20 (13), FIG. 21 (20), FIG. 22 (32)],
The look-ahead performance means does not start executing the second look-ahead performance during the first period in the symbol variation display in which a reach performance [for example, a normal reach performance, a SP reach performance, or a SPSP reach performance] is not performed. is something,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The decorative pattern fluctuation display may include a suggestion period that suggests the result of the validity judgment [for example, a period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped displaying (Fig. 21 (28) and Fig. 22 (32)]).
The first period is a period including the suggestion period [for example, the period from FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. ) to Figure 22 (31))].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The decorative pattern fluctuation display has multiple types of fluctuation display patterns [for example, fluctuation patterns including reach patterns],
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that will start after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether there will be a jackpot]. ,
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that differs in the content suggested by the pattern of the decorative symbol variation display in which the second look-ahead performance is executed [for example, FIG. 22(a)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to make the second pre-read notice stand out.

Note that the preview effect is a so-called normal notice, but instead of this preview effect, a pre-read effect other than the first pre-read effect and the second pre-read effect may be performed.

Further, although the preview effect, the first pre-read effect, and the second pre-read effect are displays, they are not limited to displays, and may be sounds, light emission, movement of a movable body, or the like.

Also,
“The above-mentioned pre-reading effect means performs the first pre-reading effect [e.g. icon change notice] is not started [for example, it is not started when there is an increase in hold in the first period, but is started when the shift moves],
The pre-read effect means may start executing the second pre-read effect during the first period [for example, Fig. 20 (13), Fig. 21 (20), Fig. 22 (32)] ], A game machine characterized by the following. ”
Also explained.

Note that the first period may have a different period length.

Also,
``Equipped with a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of performing a decorative pattern variable display that changes the display of the decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern fluctuation display may include a suggestion period that suggests the result of the validity judgment [for example, a period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped displaying (FIG. 21 (28) and FIG. 22 (32)),
The first period is a period including the suggestion period [for example, the period from FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. ) to Figure 22 (31))].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, the display means is capable of displaying a decorative pattern in a stopped state following the decorative pattern variable display, and the first period is a period in which the decorative pattern is being displayed in a stopped state (for example, a 22 (33) (period of final display of the decorative pattern) may be a period that does not include. In addition, although it can be said that the static display of the decorative pattern also suggests the result of the validity determination, it can also be said that the static display of the decorative pattern is something that notifies the result of the validity determination.

Further, the first period may include a period in which a temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern is displayed. More specifically, during the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display once disappears from view, and then the temporary stop display becomes visible again. This may be the period until the actual stop display (confirmation display) is displayed. Alternatively, during the first period, after the temporary stop display (shaking display) of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed, the temporary stop display temporarily disappears from view, and the temporary stop display does not become visible again and becomes the main character. It may be a period until a stop display (confirmation display) is displayed. That is, the first period may be a period from when the temporary stop display (wavering display) of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed until the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed.

Also,
``The decorative pattern fluctuation display has multiple types of fluctuation display patterns [for example, fluctuation patterns including reach patterns],
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests what will happen in the decorative symbol variation display that will start after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether there will be a jackpot]. ,
The second look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests different contents depending on the pattern [for example, FIG. 22(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

“One type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is a first pattern [for example, a fluctuation pattern that does not establish reach], and one type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is a second pattern. [For example, the variation pattern of normal reach], and the second pattern has a longer suggested period than the first pattern [for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 20 (12) to (13) in FIG. 20 is longer], and the pre-reading performance means does not execute the second pre-reading performance in the first pattern [for example, FIG. 20 (2)], The presentation means may perform the second look-ahead effect in the second pattern [for example, FIG. The first look-ahead effect [for example, pending icon change notice] may be executed even in the pattern [For example, the pending icon change notice may be executed in FIG. 20(1), and FIG. 20(12) ~ In (13) of the same figure, a pending icon change notice is being executed by the second pending icon h12.''Furthermore, the second pattern may be a reach effect (two same decorative patterns are confirmed This is a pattern of a fluctuating display in which the third decorative pattern cannot be confirmed even when the third decorative pattern can be seen.The first pattern is a non-reach presentation (two different decorative patterns can be confirmed. It may also be a pattern of a fluctuating display effect in which the third decorative pattern continues to be in a state where the third decorative pattern cannot be confirmed.

“One type of pattern among the plurality of types of patterns is a first reach effect pattern, and one type of variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns is a second reach effect pattern. This is a pattern of a reach performance, and the pre-reading performance means does not execute the second pre-reading performance in the first reach performance pattern, and the pre-reading performance means executes the second ready-to-read performance. In this pattern, the second look-ahead effect may be executed.''Furthermore, the second reach effect pattern may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first reach effect pattern. This is a pattern with high reach performance. For example, the second reach effect pattern may be a super reach effect or a special super reach pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a normal reach effect pattern. In addition, the second reach effect pattern is a reach effect pattern in a special figure high probability state (probability variable gaming state), and the first reach effect pattern is a special figure low probability state (non-probability variable gaming state). It may be a pattern of reach performance. Or, on the contrary, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special figure low probability state, and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special figure high probability state. good. In addition, the second reach performance pattern is a pattern of reach performance in a high probability state of common figures (time-saving gaming state), and the first pattern of reach performance is a pattern of reach performance in a low probability state of common figures (non-time-saving gaming state). It may be a pattern of reach performance. Or, conversely, the second reach performance pattern is a reach performance pattern in a low probability state of common figures, and the first reach performance pattern is a pattern of reach performance in a high probability state of common figures. You can. Furthermore, the second reach performance pattern is a reach in an advantageous state (special pattern high probability state, general pattern high probability state, special pattern high/low probability state, general pattern low probability state, special pattern low probability state, general pattern high probability state). The first ready-to-win performance pattern may be a pattern for a ready-to-win performance in a normal state (special pattern low probability state, regular pattern low probability state). Alternatively, on the contrary here, the second ready-to-win performance pattern may be a ready-to-win performance pattern in the normal state, and the first ready-to-win performance pattern may be a ready-to-win performance pattern in the advantageous state.

``The above-mentioned pre-reading presentation means differs depending on the type of the pattern, although the content suggested [for example, an event that is subject to a pre-reading notice of circumstances] is different, but the presentation mode is the same [for example, a character riding a motorcycle appears and chants ``revenge''. Animation display js] The second look-ahead effect may be executed." In other words, the content suggested by the second look-ahead effect differs depending on the type of pattern, but the mode of effect is the same. You can.

“When a reach performance is performed and the result of the success/failure determination is suggested to be a loss in the suggestion period, the look-ahead performance means is configured to perform a reach performance that is higher than the reach performance ( For example, a look-ahead performance that suggests that a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance or a reach performance with a longer duration than the reach performance is executed, and the highest reach When the performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the success/failure determination is a loss during the suggestion period, the second look-ahead performance is a look-ahead that suggests that a decorative symbol fluctuation display that will hit the jackpot will be executed while it is pending. It may also be something that carries out a performance.”
"The above-mentioned look-ahead performance means may perform the second look-ahead performance when the reach performance is performed and the result of the win/fail judgment is suggested to be a loss in the suggestion period, but the predetermined In the symbol fluctuation display of the state (for example, the symbol fluctuation display during play time, the final symbol fluctuation display when the time-saving gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state is maintained, etc.), the reach effect is performed and the validity judgment is made during the suggestion period. Even if it is suggested that the result is a loss, the second look-ahead performance may not be executed.
Next, the role object vibration effect will be explained. This is a normal notice that there are two types of role-playing vibration effects: role-playing vibration effect A and role-playing vibration effect B. Both vibration performances are performances in which a common accessory (upper performance device 2) vibrates.

FIG. 25(a) is a diagram showing a table regarding the accessory vibration effect A. The accessory vibration effect A may be performed during execution of a super (SP) reach, or may be performed during execution of a special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in this table, the expected jackpot is 40% when the role-playing vibration effect A is performed during the execution of the Super (SP) Reach, and the expectation level of the jackpot is 40% when it is performed during the execution of the Special Super (SPSP) Reach. The expectation of winning the jackpot is 55%. In this way, the role-playing vibration effect A is a normal notice effect in which the degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on the execution timing. Furthermore, in the accessory vibration performance A, an image related to the vibrating accessory (upper performance device 2) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 before the start of the performance (vibration).

FIG. 25(b) is a diagram showing a table regarding the accessory vibration effect B. The accessory vibration performance B may be performed during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols in which the super (SP) reach is performed, or during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed. In the above-mentioned accessory vibration performance A, only one execution timing is prepared for one fluctuating display of a decorative pattern, whereas in the accessory vibration performance B, there is only one execution timing for one fluctuating display of a decorative symbol. Multiple timings are available. The expectation level of the jackpot differs depending on the execution timing. In other words, in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols in which super (SP) reach is performed, if the role vibration effect B is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, the expectation of a jackpot is 70%, and the reach state is first If it is performed during a reach that has been established (before the development of a super reach), the expectation of a jackpot is 35%, and during a super reach (after the development of a super reach and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern) If the jackpot is executed, the expectation of the jackpot is 45%, and if the jackpot is executed while the combination of decorative symbols indicating a loss is temporarily stopped (during the execution of the revival effect), the expectation of the jackpot is 100%. be. Note that since the expectation level of a jackpot is 100%, the temporary stop display of a combination of decorative symbols representing a loss means that a revival performance that will eventually lead to a jackpot is being executed. In addition, in the variable display of decorative symbols in which Special Super (SPSP) Reach is performed, during Super Reach means after it develops into Super Reach but before it develops into Special Super Reach, and during Special Super Reach. Execution timing has been added. During this special super reach, it is after the special super reach has developed and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, and if the role-playing vibration effect B is performed during the special super reach, it is possible to win the jackpot. The expectation level will be 55%. Furthermore, in the accessory vibration performance B, the vibration period of the vibrating accessory (upper performance device 2) is the same even if the execution timing is different.

In addition, "reach" in the table shown in FIG. 25 may be the time when the reach is established, or the reach is changing. Moreover, "SP reach" may be when super reach is developing, or may be during fluctuation of super reach. Furthermore, "SPSP reach" may be when the special super reach is developing, or may be during the period when the special super reach is changing.

Further, the accessory vibration effect B may be executed at a timing when the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. In other words, when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, during the reach state where the reach state is established for the first time, and during the temporary stop display of the combination of decorative symbols representing a loss (during the execution of the revival effect), the role object vibration effect A is not executed. This is the execution timing of object vibration effect B.

Furthermore, although the role object vibration performance A and the role object vibration performance B have the same vibration method (vibration mode), they may be different. For example, while the accessory vibration performance A repeats short vibrations, the accessory vibration performance B may end with one long vibration.

Further, the role object vibration effect A and the role object vibration effect B may be effects in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates instead of the upper effect device 2. Alternatively, the role object vibration effect A may be a effect in which the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and the role object vibration effect B may be a effect in which the lower effect device 3 vibrates. Furthermore, a presentation device that vibrates in the role object vibration effect A and the role object vibration effect B may be provided in the front frame door 106.

Further, the expectation level of the jackpot shown in FIG. 25 may change depending on the gaming state (for example, variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state, non-probability varying gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state, or a combination thereof), It may be the same regardless of the gaming state.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing in stages a case where the accessory vibration effect A is performed and a case where it is not performed. In the example shown in FIG. 26, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and a state in which left-handed playing is recommended.

In FIG. 26, the upper presentation device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208. This upper performance device 2 was an accessory that descends from the initial position when a button is announced (see FIG. 20 (7) and FIG. 22 (36)), but it also performs a vibration performance at the initial position.

FIG. 26(1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state.

In FIG. 26(2), variable display of decorative patterns has started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 26(2) is an icon in a red display mode.

In FIG. 26(3), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started. Subsequently, in FIG. 26(4), the game progresses to a super (SP) reach, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a confrontation animation between the lord and the enemy samurai on the entire display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(5) displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and the vibration effect related image 2hg related to the upper effect device 2 is displayed at the top of the display screen. has been done. This vibration performance related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image, and includes an arrow display 2hg1, drawing attention to the upper performance device 2, and a text display such as "If it vibrates, you have a great chance." Further, the vibration performance related image 2hg is an image that draws the player's attention to the upper performance device 2, and is also an image that draws the player's attention to the upper performance device 2.

Note that, before the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed, a suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration effect-related image 2hg may be displayed may be executed. This suggestive effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light emission effect, but for example, in the case of a display effect, a translucent upward arrow display may be used. may appear, gradually materialize, and finally become an arrow display 2hg1. Note that there may be cases where it does not materialize and disappears. In this case, the vibration effect related image 2hg is not displayed, and the accessory vibration effect A is not executed. Furthermore, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (even if the above-mentioned suggestive effect is executed), attention is drawn to the upper effect device 2, and the text display such as "If it vibrates, you have a great chance" is not displayed, and in the end, the image related to the vibration effect is not displayed. 2hg may not be displayed.

In FIG. 26(6) continuing from FIG. 26(5), after the vibration effect-related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 in the initial position starts vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other, and also displays an effect display of ``Big Chance'' that makes you expect a jackpot. The upper performance device 2 continues to vibrate until the super reach performance ends (until the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed). The role object vibration performance A performed here by the upper performance device 2 is a normal preview with a jackpot expectation level of 40%. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (7) displays the victory of the lord over the enemy samurai, and the winning combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed in the center of the display screen. is temporarily stopped and displayed, and you have won the 2R sure-change jackpot (special map B). The upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 26(7) had continued to vibrate until just before this, but at the timing of FIG. 26(7), the vibration has ended and it is in a stationary state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(8), the combination of decorative symbols for the 2R probability-variable jackpot is displayed as determined.

Note that the vibration of the upper performance device 2 may end before the performance display of "Big Chance" that makes the player expect a jackpot.

Further, even if the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed, the role object vibration effect A may not be executed. Furthermore, the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when the role object vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than when the role object vibration effect A is not executed. .

In addition, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed at the start of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (FIG. 26 (2)), and is used as the execution timing of the accessory vibration effect A during the super reach when the super reach develops (FIG. 26 (2)). There may be cases in which the vibration occurs at the timing shown in (4)) and cases in which the vibration occurs at the timing after the development of the super reach (timing shown in FIG. 26 (6)). That is, the accessory vibration effect A may start to be executed at different timings during super reach or special super reach.

On the other hand, in FIG. 26 (6') following from FIG. 26 (5), after the vibration effect related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 in the initial position does not start vibrating, and the role object vibration effect A is not executed. This is an example of something that didn't exist. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (6') displays the state after the lord and enemy samurai have slashed each other. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (7') displays the defeat of the lord by the enemy samurai, and the losing decorative pattern such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is displayed in the center of the display screen. The combination is displayed as temporarily stopped. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(8'), the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as confirmed.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing step by step another example continuing from FIG. 26(3).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(4) following FIG. 26(3) has developed into a super (SP) reach. The subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (5'') displays the lord and enemy samurai facing each other, but the vibration effect related image 2hg shown in FIG. 26 (5) is not displayed. Not yet.

In FIG. 27 (6''), the upper performance device 2 in the initial position is vibrating. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the situation after the lord and enemy samurai have slashed each other. In this example, the vibration period of the upper performance device 2 is short, and the upper performance device 2 comes to a halt state before the super reach performance ends. The role object vibration effect performed here by the upper effect device 2 corresponds to role object vibration effect B, and is better than the role object vibration effect A performed in FIG. 26, even though it is in the same super reach. The degree is a little high. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(6'') does not display the effect display of the big chance shown in FIG. 26(6). Role object vibration effect B does not display the vibration effect related image 2hg before execution, the vibration period is shorter than role object vibration effect A, and the effect display "Great chance" is not displayed, so role object vibration effect B is not displayed before. It can be said that this is a normal notice that can be seen by players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100. On the other hand, the role-playing vibration effect A can be said to be a normal notice that even a player who is not familiar with the pachinko machine 100 can understand.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (7'') displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen is a jackpot decorative pattern such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7". The combination is displayed temporarily, and you have won the 2R surefire jackpot (special map B). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(8), the combination of decorative patterns for the 2R probability-variable jackpot is displayed as determined.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing step by step another example in which the accessory vibration effect B is performed. In this example as well, the game is in a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and left-handed playing is recommended.

Similar to FIG. 26(1), FIG. 28(1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state. In FIG. 28(2), like FIG. 26(2), variable display of decorative patterns has started. The variable display of decorative symbols here is a variable display that develops into a super reach as shown in FIGS. 26(1) to 26(4). At the start of the variable display of decorative patterns, the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration performance B is executed. The role-playing vibration performance B here is a normal preview with a jackpot expectation level of 70%. In the role-playing vibration effect B, the expectation of a jackpot is higher at the execution timing when the fluctuating display of decorative symbols starts than during reach or super reach. When the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is displayed, it is not known whether or not a reach will be achieved in the first place, but players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100 have high expectations from the start of the fluctuation when the upper presentation device 2 vibrates when the fluctuating display is opened. Attention is drawn to the fluctuating display of decorative patterns. In FIG. 28(3), a super reach effect is developed, and in FIG. 28(4), a combination of decorative symbols with a probability of winning the jackpot, such as "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", is displayed as confirmed.

FIG. 28 (3-1) is a state continued from FIG. 26 (2), in which the ready-to-reach effect is started, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In other words, normal reach has started. During this reach, the upper performance device 2 vibrates and the accessory vibration performance B is executed. The role-playing vibration performance B here is a normal preview with a jackpot expectation level of 35%. In Figure 28 (3-2), it has developed into a super reach effect, but in Figure 28 (4'), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed. .

FIG. 28 (6-1) is a state continued from FIG. 27 (5''), and the super reach effect has ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (6-1) shows that the lord is an enemy samurai. A state of defeat is displayed, and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and the accessory vibration performance B is being executed. The role-playing vibration performance B here is a normal preview with a jackpot expectation of 100%, and in the subsequent figure 28 (6-2), a wipe performance that is a revival performance has started. After the wipe-in shown in FIG. 28 (6-3) is completed, the wipe-out is performed, the wipe effect that is the revival effect is completed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (4'') displays "Decoration 7". - Ornament 13 - Ornament 7'', a combination of ornamental symbols that usually results in a jackpot is displayed as confirmed.

Next, a role object vibration effect A that is an action effect of the upper effect device 2, a vibration effect related image 2hg′ which is a modification of the vibration effect related image 2hg which is an image related to the upper effect device 2, and an image related to the result of the judgment. The validity judgment suggestion image will be explained in more detail.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing a pattern determination table for the accessory vibration effect A. There are two types of vibration performance patterns in the role object vibration performance A: vibration performance pattern 1 and vibration performance pattern 2. The vibration effect pattern 1 is a pattern in which no vibration is performed, and the vibration effect pattern 2 is a pattern in which vibration is performed. The vibration performance pattern of the accessory vibration performance A, which is a normal notice, is selected based on the result of the validity determination of the special figure. That is, as shown in the table of FIG. 29(a), in the case of a loss, vibration effect pattern 1 in which vibration is not executed with a 70% probability is selected, and vibration effect pattern 1 in which vibration is executed with a 30% probability is selected. 2 is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, vibration performance pattern 1 is selected in which vibration is not performed with a probability of 20%, and vibration performance pattern 2 is selected in which vibration is performed with a probability of 80%. In other words, in the case of a loss, the vibration effect pattern 1 is more likely to be selected than the vibration pattern 2, and in the case of a jackpot, the vibration effect pattern 2 is more likely to be selected than the vibration pattern 1. Further, since the role object vibration performance A is a normal notice, the expectation of a jackpot is high if the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher in the vibration performance pattern 2 than in the vibration performance pattern 1. Further, the vibration of the upper performance device 2 by the role object vibration performance A is executed whether it is a loss or a jackpot, but the vibration of the upper performance device 2 due to the role object vibration performance A is more easily executed in the case of a jackpot than in a loss.

FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing an image type determination table for a vibration effect related image 2hg' in a modified example. The vibration effect-related image 2hg shown in FIG. "Instead of the text display such as "Expect the vibration," the text display includes a text display such as "Expect the vibration." Further, like the vibration effect related image 2hg shown in FIG. 26(5), an arrow display 2hg1 is also included. The vibration effect-related image 2hg' of the modified example includes a vibration effect-related image 1 with letters in normal colors, a vibration effect-related image 2 with letters in red, and a vibration effect-related image with letters in rainbow colors. There are three types of performance-related images 3. Note that instead of a difference in color, it may be a difference in image size or a difference in wording. Alternatively, if a character image is also included, it may be a different character. The vibration performance related image 2hg' is an image related to the upper performance device 2, and since the upper performance device 2 vibrates in the vibration performance pattern 2 of the role object vibration performance A, the vibration performance related image 2hg' The image type is selected based on the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure. That is, as shown in the table of FIG. 29(b), in the case of a loss, the normal color vibration effect related image 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and the red vibration effect related image 2 is selected with a 20% probability. is selected, and the rainbow-colored vibration effect related image 3 is never selected. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, the normal color vibration effect-related image 1 will be selected with a 50% probability, the red vibration effect-related image 2 will be selected with a 45% probability, and the rainbow-colored vibration effect will be selected with a 5% probability. Performance-related image 3 is selected. The expectation level of a jackpot is the lowest for the normal color vibration performance related image 1, and the red vibration performance related image 2 is higher than the normal color vibration performance related image 1. Then, the rainbow color vibration performance related image 3 is the highest, and when this rainbow color vibration performance related image 3 is displayed, a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, the vibration effect related image 2hg' of the modified example also functions as a normal preview. Note that the color of the vibration effect related image 2hg' may be a color other than the normal color, red, and rainbow color (for example, green or gold, which has a lower jackpot expectation than red). In addition, if the image type of the vibration effect related image 2hg' is not a color difference but a difference in image size, the expected level of jackpot is set to be normal size < large size < very small size. Good too. Furthermore, the number of image types is not limited to three, but may be four or more. Furthermore, although the description has been made here as an image type, differences in color and size can also be seen as differences in display mode.

Furthermore, considering the table shown in FIG. 29(a) and the table shown in FIG. 29(b) together, the upper performance device 2 displays the normal color vibration performance related image 1 as the vibration performance related image 2hg'. It can be said that it is easier to vibrate when the red vibration effect related image 2 is displayed than when the red vibration effect related image 2 is displayed, and when the rainbow colored vibration effect related image 3 is displayed than when the red vibration effect related image 2 is displayed. It can be said that it is easier to vibrate.

FIG. 29(c) is a diagram showing an image type determination table for the validity judgment suggestion image. In the previous examples, we have only explained the performance display of "Big Chance" shown in Fig. 26 (6) as the image that suggests the correctness judgment, but as the image that suggests the correctness judgment of the special drawing, we have explained the effect display of ``Pinch''. There is also a suggestion image 1 and a validity judgment suggestion image 2 called "Chance". It should be noted that the effect display of "big chance" corresponds to the validity judgment suggestion image 3. The image type of the propriety judgment suggestion image is also selected based on the result of the propriety judgment of the special figure. That is, as shown in the table of FIG. 29(c), in the case of a loss, the correctness judgment suggestion image 1 of "Pinch" is selected with an 80% probability, and the correctness judgment suggestion image 1 of "Chance" is selected with a 15% probability. Image 2 is selected, and with a probability of 5%, the validity judgment suggestion image 3 of "Big Chance" is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, there is a 10% probability that the correctness judgment suggestion image 1 is selected as ``Pinch'', a 60% probability that the correctness judgment suggestion image 2 is selected as ``Chance'', and a 30% probability that ``Pinch'' is selected. The validity judgment suggestion image 3 "Big Chance" is selected. In this way, one of the appropriate/inappropriate judgment suggestion images is displayed depending on the appropriate/inappropriate judgment result. In other words, even if the result of the judgment is a failure, the judgment suggestion image is displayed. Furthermore, if the result of the judgment is a failure, a certain image (for example, a text image of "Unfortunate") may be always displayed. Moreover, the magnitude of the expectation level of a jackpot is as follows: validity determination suggestion image 1<propriety determination suggestion image 2<propriety determination suggestion image 3. Therefore, the validity judgment suggestion image also functions as a normal notice. Note that the image type of the validity determination suggestion image may be a difference in image size or color instead of a difference in wording. For example, if the colors are different, the expected level of jackpot may be such that normal color<red<gold. Alternatively, if a character image is also included, it may be a different character. Furthermore, the number of image types is not limited to three, but may be four or more. Furthermore, although the explanation has been given here as an image type, a difference in wording or a difference in characters can also be seen as a difference in display mode.

Next, an example in which a modified vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed will be described.

FIG. 30 shows that after the SP reach is developed, the rainbow-colored vibration effect related image 3 is displayed, then the vibration movement of the role object vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is executed, and the propriety judgment suggestion image 3 is displayed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example step by step. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 26 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 30 is also in a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and is a state in which left-handed playing is recommended.

In FIG. 30 (1), "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state, and in the subsequent figure (2), the fluctuating display of decorative symbols has started. Furthermore, the shift movement of the hold icon has been completed, and the red display mode icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 30 (3), normal reach has started, and in FIG. 30 (4), it has developed to super (SP) reach. The decorative pattern display device 208 after the SP reach has been developed, shown in FIG. 30 (5-1), displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other at a distance. Further, at the top of the display screen, a vibration effect related image 2hg' including an arrow display 2hg1 is displayed. This vibration effect-related image 2hg' is a rainbow-colored vibration effect-related image 3. Therefore, the jackpot with this decorative pattern variation display is certain. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (5-2), the vibration effect related image 2hg' disappears, and the upper effect device 2 is vibrating. That is, the vibration motion of the role object vibration performance A (vibration performance pattern 2) is being executed. Furthermore, the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has shortened a little. In the subsequent FIG. 30 (5-2), the vibrating motion of the role object vibrating effect A has ended, and the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has further shortened. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(6) displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and also displays the validity judgment suggestion image JSG. This validity judgment suggestion image JSG is a validity judgment suggestion image 3 titled "Big Chance."

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (7) displays the victory of the lord over the enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a winning combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed. is displayed as temporarily stopped. Eventually, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(8), the jackpot combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed, and the player wins the 2R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern B). There is. In this example, when a jackpot is won, the upper performance device 2 vibrated by the accessory vibration performance A performs an opening/closing operation at the initial position.

Further, FIG. 30 (5-2') is another example continuing from FIG. 30 (5-1). In this FIG. 30 (5-2'), the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) has not been executed yet. That is, in a state where the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai is slightly reduced, the upper performance device 2 remains stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (5-3'), when the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai further decreases, the vibration motion of the role object vibration performance A (vibration performance pattern 2) is started. In this way, after the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed, there are multiple timings at which the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is started. After the vibrating motion of the role object vibrating effect A is finished, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the situation after the lord and enemy samurai have slashed each other, as in FIG. A judgment suggestion image JSG is also displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30, the start timing of the vibration operation (vibration effect pattern 2) of the role object vibration effect A is different, but in any case, the vibration operation of the upper effect device 2 (FIG. 30 (5- 2), (5-3')) is started after the display of the vibration effect related image 2hg' disappears, and is started after the display of the "big chance" judgment suggestion image 3 ends (FIG. 30 (6)). have finished before. Note that the start timing of the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A may be while the vibration effect related image 2hg' is being displayed.

FIG. 31 shows an example in which the timing at which the vibration motion of role object vibration performance A (vibration performance pattern 2) is executed and the timing at which the validity judgment suggestion image 3 is displayed are opposite to the example shown in FIG. 30. It is a diagram shown step by step. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 30 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 31 is also in a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and is a state in which left-handed playing is recommended.

In FIG. 31(1), "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state, and in the subsequent FIG. 31(2), variable display of the decorative symbols has started. In FIG. 31 (3), normal reach has started, and in FIG. 31 (4), it has developed to super (SP) reach. As shown in FIG. 31 (5-1), the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the SP reach has been developed, as in FIG. 30 (5-1). This vibration performance-related image 2hg' is a rainbow-colored vibration performance-related image 3, and is a normal notice of a confirmed jackpot.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (5-2), the vibration performance related image 2hg' has disappeared, and the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has shortened a little. Even if the vibration effect related image 2hg' disappears, the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is not executed, and instead, the display of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG is started. The validity judgment suggestion image JSG shown in FIG. 31 (5-2) is the validity judgment suggestion image 3 titled "Big Chance."

In the subsequent FIG. 31 (5-3), the validity judgment suggestion image JSG has disappeared, and the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has further shortened. After the validity judgment suggestion image JSG disappears, the upper performance device 2 starts vibrating. That is, the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is started.

In FIG. 31 (6), the vibration motion of the role object vibration effect A has ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the state after the lord and enemy samurai have slashed each other, as shown in the subsequent figure (7). The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the winning combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. . Eventually, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(8), the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed, and the player wins the 2R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern B). There is. In this example as well, when a jackpot is won, the upper presentation device 2 vibrated by the accessory vibration presentation A performs an opening/closing operation at the initial position.

Further, FIG. 31 (5-3') is another example continuing from FIG. 31 (5-2) in which the validity judgment suggestion image JSG of "Big Chance" is displayed. In this FIG. 31 (5-3'), the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) has not yet started. That is, in a state where the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai is shortened, the upper performance device 2 remains stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (6'), after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other, the vibrating motion of the accessory vibrating effect A is started in a state where it is unclear who has won. Even in the example shown in FIG. 31 in which the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG is displayed before the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A is executed, the timing at which the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A is started is There are multiple timings. After the vibrating motion of the role object vibrating effect A is finished, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene showing who won (in this case, a scene in which a lord defeats an enemy samurai), as in FIG. 31 (7). ) is displayed, and a jackpot combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen.

Above, we have shown an example in which the accessory vibration effect A in which the upper effect device 2 vibrates, but instead of the vibration of the upper effect device 2, the opening/closing operation of the upper effect device 2 that is executed when a jackpot is won. The same opening and closing operations may be performed. In this case, the role object vibration performance becomes a role object motion performance, and the vibration performance related image 2hg' becomes a motion performance related image that includes a character display such as "Expect opening/closing motion". Alternatively, instead of the vibration of the upper performance device 2, a moving operation of the upper performance device 2 may be performed.

Furthermore, in both the example of FIG. 30 and the example of FIG. 31, when the SP reach develops, the accessory vibration effect B described using FIG. 27 may be executed. Even in this case, the vibration performance related images 2hg and 2hg' are not displayed before the execution of the role object vibration effect B, and the vibration period of the role object vibration effect B is shorter than the vibration period of the role object vibration effect A.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a normal color vibration effect related image 1 is displayed as a vibration effect related image after SP reach development. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 30 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 32 is also in a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and is a state in which left-handed playing is recommended.

In FIG. 32(1), "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state, and in the subsequent FIG. 32(2), variable display of the decorative symbols has started. In FIG. 32 (3), normal reach has started, and in FIG. 32 (4), it has developed to super (SP) reach. As shown in FIG. 32 (5-1), the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the SP reach has been developed, as in FIG. 30 (5-1). The vibration effect-related image 2hg' shown in FIG. 32 (5-1) is the vibration effect-related image 3 in normal color.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (5-2), the vibration performance related image 2hg' has disappeared, and the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has shortened a little. Even if the vibration effect-related image 2hg' disappears, the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is not executed, and the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG has not started.

In the subsequent FIG. 32 (5-3), the distance between the lord and the enemy samurai has further shortened, but the vibration motion of the role object vibration effect A is not executed, and the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG has not started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(6), after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought each other, the display of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG is started in a state where it is unclear who has won. The validity determination suggestion image JSG shown in FIG. 32(6) is the validity determination suggestion image 1 of "pinch".

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (7) displays a situation where the lord has been defeated by an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of unsuccessful decorative patterns such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is displayed. is displayed as temporarily stopped. Eventually, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(8), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed. In the case of a loss, the opening/closing operation of the upper performance device 2 is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 32 described above, even if the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed, the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is not executed, and the upper effect device 2 remains stopped. . In addition, although the image 1 suggesting a success/failure decision indicating "Lose" is displayed, the image 3 suggesting a success/failure decision indicating "Big Chance" is not displayed.

Next, the relationship between the vibration effect related image 2hg', the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG, the role object vibration effect A, the role object vibration effect B, and the music (BGM) output from the speaker 120 will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a timing chart of decorative symbol fluctuation display that results in a jackpot after SPSP reach. In FIG. 33, time passes from the left side to the right side of the figure.

In the example of FIG. 33, when the decorative pattern variation display is started, it starts with normal variation, reach is established, and normal reach is started. BGM1 has been output from the speaker 120 before the decorative symbol fluctuation display starts, and continues during the normal fluctuation period ((a) to (d)) and normal reach period ((d) to (e)). Output. Further, in this example, the accessory vibration effect B is executed during a part of the normal variation period ((b) to (c)), and the upper effect device 2 vibrates. Even when the accessory vibration performance B is executed and the upper performance device 2 starts vibrating, the BGM 1 that has been output until then continues to be output. Role object vibration performance B is a performance in which the vibration performance related image 2hg' is not displayed before execution, the vibration period is shorter than that of role object vibration performance A, and the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG is not displayed. Unlike A, this is a performance that is intentionally made difficult for players to notice. In other words, since role object vibration performance B is a performance that gives a feeling of superiority and specialness to the player who has noticed this performance, the vibration performance related image 2hg' is not only not displayed, but also the BGM continues to be output. I try to let them do it.

When the normal reach progresses to the SPSP reach, the BGM switches from BGM1 to BGM2. BGM2 is BGM output during SPSP reach. The vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed during a part of the period ((f) to (h)) of the SPSP reach period ((e) to (k)). In the middle of the period ((f) to (h)) during which the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed, the output of the BGM 2 is stopped ((g)). Note that the output of the BGM 2 may be stopped at the same time as the display of the vibration effect-related image 2hg' starts ((f)). Even during the period when the output of the BGM 2 is stopped, sound effects (for example, a sound that draws attention to the upper performance device 2, a volume setting sound, etc.), an error sound, etc. can be output.

Then, at the same time as the vibration effect related image 2hg' disappears, the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is started ((h)). The output of BGM2 may be stopped at the same time as the vibration motion of this accessory vibration performance A starts. Alternatively, the output of BGM2 may be stopped in the middle of the period ((h) to (j)) during which the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A is being performed.

When the upper performance device 2 starts vibrating or when the BGM 2 is stopped while the upper performance device 2 is vibrating, the player is likely to notice the vibrating operation or vibration sound of the upper performance device 2.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 30 to 32, the execution period of the vibration motion of the role object vibration effect A and the display period of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG did not overlap; The execution period of the vibration operation and the display period of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG partially overlap. That is, the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG is started during the execution of the vibrating motion of the role object vibrating effect A ((i)). Note that the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG may be started at the same time as the end of the vibration motion of the role object vibration effect A or after the end of the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A. Alternatively, the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG may be started at the same time as the start of the vibration motion of the role object vibration effect A or before the start of the vibration operation of the role object vibration effect A. Furthermore, the execution period of the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A and the display period of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG may completely overlap. In other words, both periods may coincide. Furthermore, the display of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG ends at the timing ((k)) when the decorative pattern variation display ends (stops). Note that the display period of the temporary stop display may be (f) to (k), (g) to (k), or (h) to (k). However, it may be (i) to (k) or (j) to (k). Further, as described above, the timing at which the display of the propriety judgment suggestion image JSG ends may be before the end of the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A.

When the decorative pattern variation display ends (stops), the final display of the jackpot decorative pattern combination starts ((k)). When the confirmation display of the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot starts, the output of BGM3 starts. BGM3 is BGM that is output when a jackpot game is started.

FIG. 34 is a timing chart of decorative symbol fluctuation display in which the player loses even after reaching SPSP reach. Also in FIG. 34, time passes from the left side of the figure to the right side.

(a) to (f) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 33, so the explanation will be omitted, and the example after (f) will be explained mainly on the differences from the example shown in FIG. 33, Again, duplicate explanations will be omitted.

The vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed during a part of the period ((f) to (h)) of the SPSP reach period ((e) to (k)). In the middle of the period ((f) to (h)) during which the vibration effect related image 2hg' is displayed, the output of the BGM 2 is stopped ((g)). Note that in this example as well, the output of the BGM 2 may be stopped at the same time as the display of the vibration effect-related image 2hg' starts ((f)). Further, even during a period when the output of BGM 2 is stopped, sound effects (for example, a sound that draws attention to the upper performance device 2, a volume setting sound, etc.), an error sound, etc. can be output.

Even if the vibration effect related image 2hg' disappears, the vibration operation of the accessory vibration effect A (vibration effect pattern 2) is not started, and the upper effect device 2 remains stopped at the initial position. Before long, the display of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG starts ((i)). Even during the display period ((i) to (k)) of the validity judgment suggestion image JSG, the vibration operation of the role object vibration performance A is not started, and the upper performance device 2 remains stopped at the initial position. In the example shown in FIG. 34, the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A is not performed. Even if the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A is not executed, the BGM2 that has been output until then stops being output. If the output of BGM2 is not stopped, the player will know that the vibration motion of the accessory vibration effect A will not be performed, so the output is stopped. The timing for stopping the output of BGM2 may be timing (f), timing (h), timing (i), or timing (j). There may be.

In this example, when the decorative symbol variation display ends (stops), the final display of the losing decorative symbol combination is started ((k)). When the confirmation display of the losing decorative symbol combination is started, the output of BGM4 is started. BGM4 is BGM that is output in case of a loss. In addition, in the case of a loss, BGM1 may be re-outputted.

As mentioned above, the stop of the output of each BGM explained using the timing chart of FIG. 33 and the timing chart of FIG. You can.

Both the role-playing vibration performance A and the role-playing vibration performance B described above are performance movements that suggest the expectation of a jackpot, but the upper performance device 2 is a vibration performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot. It may also be possible to perform a different vibration operation. The vibration strength of the vibration motion that is unrelated to the expectation level of the jackpot may be weaker than the vibration motion of the role object vibration performance A, or may be weaker than the vibration motion of the role object vibration performance B. Alternatively, the vibration time of the vibration motion that is unrelated to the expectation level of a jackpot may be shorter than the vibration motion of the accessory vibration performance A, or may be shorter than the vibration motion of the accessory vibration performance B. Further, the vibration operation that is unrelated to the expectation level of a jackpot may be a notification operation that is performed when a predetermined number of reservations have been accumulated. For example, the upper presentation device 2 may perform a vibration operation when the number of reservations reaches three, which is one step before the reservation is full. This vibrating motion suggests a stop shot.

Next, a button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates will be explained. The button vibration performance is also a normal preview performance, just like the role object vibration performance. Also, in the button vibration effect, as in the role object vibration effect B, an image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed. This point differs from the button preview in which the button image 136a and the like shown in FIG. 20 (6) and FIG. 22 (35) are displayed.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a table regarding button vibration effects. The button vibration effect may be executed with a fluctuating display of decorative symbols that is a combination of a ready-to-reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect. Even in the case of normal reach, it is executed at the time of the first temporary stop (see FIG. 12 (2)) due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and the expected degree of jackpot at this execution timing is 13%.

In addition, the button vibration effect is performed during the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern where a super (SP) reach is performed, and during the fluctuating display of a decorative pattern where a special super (SPSP) reach is performed, as in the role object vibration performance B. Sometimes it is done. The button vibration effect is also a regular notice with different expectations for the jackpot depending on the execution timing. In other words, in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols in which Super (SP) reach is performed, if the button vibration effect is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, the expectation of a jackpot is 50%, and the first time due to the pseudo continuous effect is If it is performed when the temporary stop is displayed, the expected jackpot is 13%, and if it is performed when the second temporary stop is displayed due to the pseudo-link effect, the expected jackpot is 15%. The expected level of jackpot is 30% when it is performed during the third temporary stop display due to the performance, and the expected level of jackpot is 36% when it is performed when super reach is developed. Furthermore, if the jackpot is performed while a combination of decorative symbols representing a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed (during a revival effect), the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%. This means that the expectation level of the jackpot is 100%, similar to the role-playing vibration effect B, and a revival effect that will eventually lead to a jackpot is being executed. Furthermore, in the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the special super reach (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing when the special super reach develops is added. If the button vibration effect is performed during the development of this special super reach, the expectation level of jackpot will be 48%.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of a button vibration effect. In this example as well, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state) and a state in which left-handed playing is recommended. Further, in FIG. 36, a production button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208.

The effects in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 36(1) to 36(9) are the same as those in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 12(1) to 12(9). That is, in FIG. 36(1), the variable display of the decorative pattern of special figure 1 has started. In FIG. 36(2), a pseudo-continuous effect is started, and a pseudo-continuous pattern (a decorative pattern written as "NEXT") suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left pattern is displayed. "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208a, "Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the first temporary stop display is performed. FIG. 36(2) shows that the effect button 136 is vibrating during this first temporary stop display, and a button vibration effect is being performed. The expected level of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 13%. In FIG. 36(3), the display screen is blacked out, and the subsequent FIG. 36(4) shows the situation immediately before the second variation (re-variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect is started. In FIG. 36(5), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative pattern has started.

When the effect button 136 vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a predetermined period, a response display (for example, a character display of "It's hot") may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 36(6), the decorative pattern "Decoration 5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and in FIG. 36(7), the decorative pattern "Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right pattern display area 208c. has been done. In the subsequent FIG. 36 (8), the decorative pattern "Decoration 4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking). In FIG. 9, the winning combination of decorative symbols is displayed as determined.

The effects in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 36(A) to 36(E) are the same as those in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 13(18) to 13(22). That is, in FIG. 36 (A), the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing 1 starts under the hall stage, and in the same drawing (B), the reach state is established and the right pattern is also displayed in the left pattern display area 208a. “Decoration 2” is also temporarily stopped and displayed in the area 208c. In Figure 36(c), it has developed into a super reach. FIG. 36(c) shows the effect button 136 vibrating when the super reach is developed, and a button vibration effect is being performed. The expected level of jackpot of the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(d), an animation showing a lord who has won against an enemy samurai is displayed, and in the center of the display screen, a normal jackpot decoration such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2" is displayed. The combination of symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and in FIG.

In the button vibration effect described above, the image related to the effect button 136 is not displayed, the vibration period is shorter than the role vibration effect A, and the effect display matching the button vibration effect is not displayed. It can be said that this is a normal notice that can be understood by players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100 and who have known the vibration effect for a long time.

Note that the button vibration effect may be an effect in which the determination button 1930 vibrates instead of the effect button 136.

Further, the performance button 136 may also perform the same vibration operation as the vibration operation described in the explanation of the upper performance device 2, which is unrelated to the expected level of jackpot.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is higher when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the first action is completed before the display of the second image, so the first action is Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the execution of the first action and the display of the second image end does not change, and the player may feel uncomfortable. This allows the viewer to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image".

In addition, the aspect of the first image suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, so that a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image" is created. can be enjoyed even more.

In addition, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 In the case of (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first presentation means ends the display of the second image before the end of the first operation in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is higher when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the display of the second image ends before the first action, so the first action Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the second image is displayed and the first operation is completed remains the same, causing a sense of discomfort to the player. This allows the user to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action".

In addition, the aspect of the first image suggests the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, so that a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action" is created. can be enjoyed even more.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of executing the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the first action is completed before the display of the second image, so the first action is Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the execution of the first action and the display of the second image end does not change, and the player may feel uncomfortable. This allows the viewer to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image".

Furthermore, by indicating whether or not to perform the first action depending on the aspect of the first image, a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image" can be created. can be enjoyed even more.

In addition, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of executing the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first presentation means ends the display of the second image before the end of the first operation in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the display of the second image ends before the first action, so the first action Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the second image is displayed and the first operation is completed remains the same, causing a sense of discomfort to the player. This allows the user to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action".

Furthermore, by suggesting whether or not to perform the first action depending on the aspect of the first image, a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action" can be created. can be enjoyed even more.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, SP reach effect) during execution of the variable display,
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain effect [for example, SP reach effect] [for example, the Example shown in 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg'],
The second image is also an image different from the image of the decorative pattern [for example, an appropriateness judgment suggestion image JSG of a production display of “big chance”],
The first operation is executed at a first timing [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (5-2)] after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production]. In the first case [for example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-2)],
A second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production] [for example, the timing in FIG. 30 (5-3') ] [For example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-3′)],
A third case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32] in which the first operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production], can be,
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The first performance means is capable of performing a second action [for example, a fourth vibration action],
The second operation is an operation performed based on a predetermined number of reservations being stored [for example, a notification operation performed when a predetermined number of reservations has been accumulated],
The second operation is an operation whose operation time is shorter than the first operation.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, SP reach effect) during execution of the variable display,
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain effect [for example, SP reach effect] [for example, the Example shown in 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg'],
The second image is also an image different from the image of the decorative pattern [for example, an appropriateness judgment suggestion image JSG of a production display of “big chance”],
The first operation is executed at a first timing [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (5-2)] after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production]. In the first case [for example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-2)],
A second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production] [for example, the timing in FIG. 30 (5-3') ] [For example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-3′)],
A third case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32] in which the first operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production], can be,
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action after the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. Yes [for example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The first performance means is capable of performing a second action [for example, a fourth vibration action],
The second operation is an operation performed based on a predetermined number of reservations being stored [for example, a notification operation performed when a predetermined number of reservations has been accumulated],
The second operation is an operation whose operation time is shorter than the first operation.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means [for example, presentation button 136 or enter button 1903];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, SP reach effect) during execution of the variable display,
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain effect [for example, SP reach effect] [for example, the Example shown in 30],
The second presentation means is capable of performing a second action [for example, a button vibration presentation],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg'],
The second image is also an image different from the image of the decorative pattern [for example, an appropriateness judgment suggestion image JSG of a production display of “big chance”],
The first operation is executed at a first timing [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (5-2)] after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production]. In the first case [for example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-2)],
A second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production] [for example, the timing in FIG. 30 (5-3') ] [For example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-3′)],
A third case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32] in which the first operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production], can be,
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started [for example, in FIGS. 36(1) and 36(a) None are displayed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means [for example, presentation button 136 or enter button 1903];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, SP reach effect) during execution of the variable display,
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain effect [for example, SP reach effect] [for example, the Example shown in 30],
The second presentation means is capable of performing a second action [for example, a button vibration presentation],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg'],
The second image is also an image different from the image of the decorative pattern [for example, an appropriateness judgment suggestion image JSG of a production display of “big chance”],
The first operation is executed at a first timing [for example, the timing shown in FIG. 30 (5-2)] after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production]. In the first case [for example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-2)],
A second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production] [for example, the timing in FIG. 30 (5-3') ] [For example, the case of FIG. 30 (5-3′)],
A third case [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32] in which the first operation is not executed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production [for example, SP reach production], can be,
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action after the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. Yes [for example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
The first image includes a first aspect [for example, vibration effect related image 1 shown in FIG. 29(b)] and a second aspect different from the first aspect [for example, FIG. 29(b) There is a vibration effect related image 3 shown in
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started [for example, in FIGS. 36(1) and 36(a) None are displayed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of executing the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The display means may display a third image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of "pinch"];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means displays the third image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32(6)];
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the first action is completed before the display of the second image, so the first action is Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the execution of the first action and the display of the second image end does not change, and the player may feel uncomfortable. This allows the viewer to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image".

Furthermore, even in the third case where the first action is not executed, the third image related to the validity determination result is displayed after the first image starts to be displayed, so that the effect can be improved. It can make up for the lack of something.

In addition, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of executing the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
The display means may display a third image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of "pinch"];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach starts] [for example, in FIG. 30 In the case of (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means displays the third image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32(6)];
The first presentation means ends the display of the second image before the end of the first operation in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
A game machine characterized by: ”
According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can give hope. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the display of the second image ends before the first action, so the first action Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the second image is displayed and the first operation is completed remains the same, causing a sense of discomfort to the player. This allows the user to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action".

Furthermore, even in the third case where the first action is not executed, the third image related to the validity determination result is displayed after the first image starts to be displayed, so that the effect can be improved. It can make up for the lack of something.

Also,
"The first action is an action in which the first effect means vibrates [for example, role object vibration effect A],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The first performance means is capable of performing a second action [for example, role object vibration performance B],
The first action is an action that takes longer than the second action;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the first action is completed before the display of the second image, so the first action is Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the execution of the first action and the display of the second image end does not change, and the player may feel uncomfortable. This allows the viewer to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "first action" → "second image".

Furthermore, even if the same first performance means is operated, by setting lengths and shortenings of operation time, the first action will attract the attention of all players, while the second action will be more likely to attract the attention of all players. The performance can be easily understood only by those who are familiar with the game machine, and can give a sense of superiority to those who are familiar with the game machine.

In addition, according to the above description,
“A first performance means [for example, upper performance device 2] that can execute the first action [for example, role object vibration performance A];
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first production means [for example, vibration production-related image 2hg'];
A game machine comprising:
The first effect means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 30],
The display means may display a second image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, the judgment suggestion image JSG of the effect display of “Big Chance”];
A first case in which the first operation is performed at a first timing after the display of the first image starts [for example, a certain timing after super reach is started] [for example, in FIG. 30 (5-2)] and
A second case where the first operation is executed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 30 (5-3') ] and
There is a third case in which the first operation is not performed even after the display of the first image is started [for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 32],
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 30 (6)],
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 32 (5-2) to FIG. 32 (7)]. can be,
The first presentation means ends the display of the second image before the end of the first operation in either the first case or the second case. [For example, the example shown in FIG. 31],
The first performance means is capable of performing a second action [for example, role object vibration performance B],
The first action is an action that takes longer than the second action;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, in addition to the first case in which the first action is executed and the third case in which the first action is not executed, the timing of the first case (the first case is In the second case where the first action is performed at the second timing, which is later than the second timing, even if the first action is not performed at the first timing, the player may continue to can set expectations. Moreover, in either the first case or the second case, the display of the second image ends before the first action, so the first action Even if the execution timing reaches the second timing, which is later than the first timing, the order in which the second image is displayed and the first operation is completed remains the same, causing a sense of discomfort to the player. This allows the user to enjoy a series of effects such as "first image" → "second image" → "first action".

Furthermore, even if the same first performance means is operated, by setting lengths and shortenings of operation time, the first action will attract the attention of all players, while the second action will be more likely to attract the attention of all players. The performance can be easily understood only by those who are familiar with the game machine, and can give a sense of superiority to those who are familiar with the game machine.

Also,
“The first action is an action in which the first performance means vibrates [for example, role object vibration performance A],
The second action is also an action in which the first effect means vibrates [for example, role object vibration effect B],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``Equipped with a second presentation means different from the first presentation means [for example, presentation button 136 and determination button 1903],
The second presentation means is capable of performing a third action [for example, button vibration presentation],
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the third action is started [for example, in FIGS. 36(1) and 36(a) None are displayed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The third action is an action in which the second presentation means vibrates [for example, a button vibration presentation],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also, according to the above description,
“A first vibration means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of performing a first vibration operation [for example, role object vibration performance A],
a display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a first image related to the first vibration means [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg];
A game machine comprising:
The first vibration means is capable of starting execution of the first vibration operation after the first image is displayed [for example, FIG. 26(6)],
The display means is capable of displaying a certain image related to the result of the judgment after displaying the first image [for example, an effect display of "Great Chance"] [for example, FIG. 26 (6)],
a first case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a first timing after the start of displaying the first image [for example, the timing when super reach develops in FIG. 26(4)]; A second case in which the first vibration operation is performed at a second timing that is later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the development of super reach (timing in FIG. 26 (6))]; There is a third case [for example, FIG. 26 (6')] in which the first vibration operation is not performed even if the display of the image starts,
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image, and also in the second case, displays the certain image after starting to display the first image. A certain image is displayed [for example, FIG. 26 (6)], and in the third case, the certain image is not displayed after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 26 (6')] ] is a thing,
The first vibration means ends the first vibration operation before the end of the display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also, according to the above description,
“A first vibration means [for example, upper performance device 2] capable of performing a first vibration operation [for example, role object vibration performance A],
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
A game machine comprising:
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibration means [for example, vibration effect related image 2hg] before execution of the first vibration operation is started. A game machine characterized by the following. ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it becomes difficult for the player to overlook the first vibration motion. In addition, the player may play the game in anticipation of the first vibrational motion, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Note that the first vibration operation may be a presentation operation or a notification operation.

Further, the first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibration means, or may be an image that draws attention to the first vibration means.

Further, the display means may start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibration operation starts and after the ready-to-reach effect starts [e.g. , Figure 26(5)].

Furthermore, before starting the display of the first image, an effect (for example, a display effect or a sound effect) indicating that the first image may be displayed is provided. It may also be possible to perform a light emitting effect). Note that even if this effect is executed, the first image may not be displayed.

Also,
“The display means finishes displaying the first image before execution of the first vibration operation starts [for example, FIG. 26 (5)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first vibration means is capable of performing a second vibration operation [for example, role object vibration production B],
The display means does not display the first image before execution of the second vibration operation is started [for example, FIG. 27 (6'')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Further, the second vibration operation may be an operation whose vibration start timing is different from that of the first vibration operation [for example, when the fluctuation is released as shown in FIG. 25(b), during reach, or when the losing symbol [during temporary stop], the vibration may be performed in a different manner from the first vibration operation.

Also,
"The first vibration motion vibrates for a longer period of time than the second vibration motion [for example, the vibration continues until the super reach effect ends (until the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed)" ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with a second vibration means different from the first vibration means [for example, the production button 136 and the determination button 1930],
The second vibration means is capable of performing a third vibration operation [for example, a button vibration effect],
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibration means before execution of the third vibration operation is started [for example, FIGS. 36(1) and 36(a) None are displayed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

"The first vibration means may not perform the first vibration operation even when the first image is displayed on the display means." When the first vibration operation is performed after the image is displayed, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher than when the first vibration operation is not performed.

"The first vibration means is configured to vibrate at a first timing [for example, after the first image is displayed on the display means [for example, displayed at the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern in FIG. 26(2)]" A case in which the execution of the first vibration operation is started at the timing when the super reach develops in FIG. In other words, the first vibration means may display the first image on the display means. After being displayed, execution of the first vibration operation may be started at a different timing.

“The first vibration means [e.g., the upper presentation device 2] is arranged on the door member [e.g., the front frame door 106], and is capable of vibrating whether the door member is closed or opened. In addition, the first vibration means may be disposed on a door member, and the first vibration operation that starts when the door member is closed is performed when the door member is opened. It may continue even if it becomes a state. Alternatively, the first vibration means [for example, the upper stage production device 2] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member, and the first vibration means [for example, the upper stage production device 2] is arranged in a member [for example, the main body 104], and the first vibration means [for example, the upper stage production device 2] is arranged in a separate member [for example, the main body 104], and even when the door member is closed, it is in the open state. However, it may also be one that can vibrate. Further, the first vibration means [for example, the upper presentation device 2] is disposed on a member other than the door member [for example, the main body 104], and the The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is in an open state. The second vibration means [for example, the production button 136 or the decision button 1930] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door with a ball storage plate 108], and can be held in the open state even when the door member is closed. However, it may also be one that can vibrate. Further, the second vibration means [for example, the effect button 136 or the determination button 1930] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door with ball storage plate 108], and the second vibration means [for example, the production button 136 or the decision button 1930] is arranged on the door member [for example, the door with the ball storage plate 108], and the vibration is started when the door member is closed. The first vibration operation may be continued even when the door member is in an open state. Alternatively, the second vibration means [for example, the lower presentation device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door with ball storage plate 108], and The door member may be able to vibrate both in the closed state and in the open state. Further, the second vibration means [for example, the lower performance device 3] is arranged on a member [for example, the main body 104] different from the door member [for example, the door with ball storage plate 108], and The first vibration operation started when the door member is closed may be continued even when the door member is opened.

``After the display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208] finishes displaying the first image [for example, the vibration effect related image 2hg], the display means [for example, displaying the characters 'It's hot' ] may start displaying. ” The third image may be a response display in response to the operation of the first vibration means (for example, the effect button 136).

“The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] is capable of performing a fourth vibration operation, and the first vibration operation [e.g., role object vibration performance A] is designed to stimulate the expectation of a jackpot. The second vibration motion [e.g., role object vibration performance B] is also a presentation motion that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot [for example, the expectation of a jackpot shown in FIG. 25(a)]. (b)], and the fourth vibration motion does not have to be a performance motion that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot."Also, the fourth vibration motion In this case, the strength of the vibration may be weaker than the first vibration motion, or may be weaker than the second vibration motion. Alternatively, the vibration time of the fourth vibration operation may be shorter than that of the first vibration operation, or may be shorter than the second vibration operation. Furthermore, the fourth vibration operation may be a notification operation performed when a predetermined number of reservations have been accumulated.

Next, a description will be given of the background effect, which is a normal preview effect similar to the button vibration effect. Here, the execution (start) timing of the background effect and the expectation level of the jackpot will be explained.

FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing a table regarding background effects. The background effect may also be executed (started) with a fluctuating display of decorative patterns that is a combination of a reach effect and a pseudo-continuous effect. The background effect is not executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols when a normal reach is performed, but during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols when a super (SP) reach is performed and the fluctuating display of a decorative symbol when a special super (SPSP) reach is performed. It may be executed (started) during In other words, in the variable display of decorative symbols in which Super (SP) reach is performed, if the background effect is performed at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the expectation of a jackpot is 20%, and the second If the game is performed during a temporary stop display, the expected level of jackpot is 25%, and if it is performed during super reach, the expected level of jackpot is 35%. Furthermore, in the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the special super (SPSP) reach is performed, the execution timing during the special super reach is added. If the background effect is performed during this special super reach, the expected level of jackpot will be 40%.

Next, I will explain the mini character production. The mini character presentation includes a presentation in which mini character A appears and a presentation in which mini character B appears. Note that there may also be an effect in which different types of mini-characters appear. The mini character performance is also usually a preview performance, but even if the mini character that appears changes, the expectation of winning the jackpot remains the same. However, if the mini-characters that appear change, the expectation level of the jackpot may also change. Furthermore, the execution timing remains the same even if the mini-character changes, but the execution timing may also change if the mini-character changes. Furthermore, the displayed mini-characters may change depending on the performance mode, or the displayed mini-characters may change as a result of an internal lottery regardless of the performance mode.

FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing a table related to mini character presentation. This table is a table common to mini-character A and mini-character B.

Like the role object vibration performance, the mini character performance may be performed during the execution of a super (SP) reach, or during the execution of a special super (SPSP) reach. As shown in the table of FIG. 37(b), in the mini character presentation, a plurality of execution timings are prepared for one fluctuating display of decorative symbols. However, the expectation level of a jackpot is the same regardless of the execution timing. In other words, in the variable display of decorative symbols where super (SP) reach is performed, even if the mini character effect is executed before the reach state is established for the first time, it will not be displayed during super reach (after reaching super reach). Even if the jackpot is executed before the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, the expectation level of the jackpot is 55%. In addition, in the variable display of decorative symbols in which Special Super (SPSP) Reach is performed, during Super Reach means after it develops into Super Reach but before it develops into Special Super Reach, and during Special Super Reach. Execution timing has been added. During this special super reach, it means after the special super reach has developed and before the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern. Even if the mini character performance is performed during this special super reach, the expectation level of the jackpot is 55%.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of mini-character presentation. In the example shown in FIG. 38, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern, low probability, regular pattern, low probability state), and left-handed playing is recommended.

FIG. 38(1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" indicating a loss is displayed in a stopped state. In the subsequent FIG. 38(2), the variable display of decorative patterns has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(2), a mini-character related image mcg related to the mini-character presentation is displayed at the top of the display screen. This mini-character related image mcg includes a notice that the mini-character production may start and a text display such as ``If it appears, it will be hot'' like a tutorial.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(3), the mini-character related image mcg disappears, and high-speed fluctuations of the decorative pattern are performed in all of the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. part of the mini-character Amcr begins to appear above the left end of the display screen. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(4), the entire mini-character Amcr is displayed. This mini-character Amcr is a rocket character and is flying towards the right side.

In FIG. 38(5), the ready-to-win effect is started, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, normal reach has started. The mini character Amcr continues to fly, but has lowered its altitude.

In Figure 38 (6), the normal reach has developed into a super reach. Even on the screen that has developed into Super Reach, the mini-character Amcr is displayed, and the mini-character Amcr continues to fly. Subsequently, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (7) displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and the mini-character Amcr continues to fly, but this time he is increasing his altitude.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(8) displays the state after the lord and enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the mini-character Amcr is still displayed. The mini-character Amcr that appears before the reach is established in FIG. 38(3) continues to be displayed until the super reach effect ends, that is, until the temporary stop display starts. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38 (9) displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the center of the display screen displays the normal jackpot decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 1". Although the combination is temporarily stopped and the mini-character Amcr has disappeared, the mini-character Amcr had been displayed until just before this. In FIG. 38 (10), the combination of decorative symbols for the normal jackpot is displayed as confirmed.

Although the mini-character Amcr disappears at the same time as the super reach effect ends (the display of the temporary stop display starts), the mini character Amcr may disappear before the super reach effect ends (before the temporary stop display is displayed). Moreover, after the mini-character Amcr appears, it may become invisible once and then re-appear.

FIG. 38(3') is another example continuing from FIG. 38(2), in which the mini character related image mcg was displayed in FIG. 38(2), but the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Unlike the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3(3), a part of the mini-character Amcr is not visible. In FIG. 38 (5'), the reach effect is started, and the mini-character Amcr does not appear before the reach effect is established. In Fig. 38 (7'), a super reach effect is performed, but the mini character Amcr does not appear, and in the end, the super reach effect ends without any mini character appearing, and the decorative pattern shown in Fig. 38 (9') The display device 208 displays a state in which the lord has been defeated by an enemy samurai, and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In FIG. 38 (10'), the losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as confirmed.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which the role object vibration effect B and the mini character effect are performed. In FIG. 39, the upper presentation device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 39 (7-1), after the super reach effect has been developed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other while also displaying a mini-character related image mcg. Note that the mini-character related image mcg may be displayed when the variable display of decorative symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 38(2). The subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7-2) also displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, but the mini-character related image mcg disappears and the mini-character Amcr is displayed above the left end of the display screen. Part of it is starting to become visible. Further, the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 39 (7-2) is vibrating, and the role object vibration performance B is being performed. In this way, during super reach, the mini character performance and the role object vibration performance B may be executed in parallel. In this way, two types of regular notices overlap, making it possible to create a hot performance. However, the execution of the mini character presentation and the execution of the role object vibration presentation B are not started at the same time. In other words, the start timing of the mini-character presentation and the start timing of the execution of the role object vibration presentation B are different from each other. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (8'') displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the rocket mini-character Amcr is flying toward the right. Note that the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 39 (8'') has finished vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (9''), the mini character Amcr disappears, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. Although not shown, a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is determined and displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 38 (10').

FIG. 39 (7-1') is the same state as FIG. 39 (7-1), and after the development of the super reach effect, the mini character related image mcg is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (7-2'), the mini-character related image mcg disappears, and a part of the mini-character Bmcu begins to appear above the left end of the display screen. On the other hand, the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 39 (7-2') does not vibrate and remains stationary at the initial position. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (8''') displays the situation after the lord and the enemy samurai have slashed each other, and the mini-character Bmcu is flying towards the right side. The mini character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (9-1), the mini character Bmcu disappears, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen. There is. In this example, the mini-character Bmcu appears, but the same applies even if the mini-character Amcr appears. Further, the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 39 (9-1) is vibrating, and the role object vibration performance B is being performed.

In the subsequent FIG. 39 (9-2), the temporary stop display has ended and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, has started. Note that the upper performance device 2 shown in FIG. 39 (9-2) has finished vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the subsequent FIG. 39 (9-3), the wipe-in is completed. When the wipe-in is completed, the wipe-out begins and a part of the decorative pattern becomes visible. In Figure 39 (9-4), the wipe effect ends and the normal jackpot decoration such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 1" is displayed. The combination of symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the revival effect is successful. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (10''), the combination of decorative symbols that usually results in a jackpot is displayed as determined.

As explained above, unlike during the super reach, the mini character performance and the role object vibration performance B are not executed in parallel during the losing symbol temporary stop. This is because if the accessory vibration effect is performed during the temporary stop of a losing symbol, a jackpot is guaranteed, so the game can be sufficiently exciting even without two types of normal notices.

In addition, in role object vibration production B, the execution period length (vibration period length) of the production is the same even if the start timing is different, whereas in the mini character production, the execution period of the production is the same even if the start timing is different. The length (display period length) is also different. In other words, if the mini character performance is started before the reach is established, the execution period will be from Figure 38 (3) to just before (9), and if it is started during the super reach, it will be the execution period from Figure 39 (7-2). ) to immediately before (9'') in the figure, and the lengths of both execution periods are different.

According to the above description,
``Display means capable of displaying decorative pattern fluctuations [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208];
A production means capable of performing multiple types of production [for example, the upper production device 2, the decorative pattern display device 208],
A game machine comprising:
One of the plurality of types of performances is a first performance [for example, role object vibration performance B] that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot,
One of the multiple types of performances is a second performance that indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot [for example, a performance executed on the decorative pattern display device 208 such as a mini character performance],
The production means is capable of executing the first production at one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 25(b)] in one decorative pattern variation display. It is a thing,
The production means is capable of executing the second production at one of a plurality of start timings [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 37(b)] in one decorative symbol variation display. It is a thing,
The first performance is a performance that suggests different jackpot expectations depending on which start timing it is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation shown in FIG. 25(b)],
The second performance is a performance that suggests a jackpot expectation level that does not differ no matter which start timing it is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation level shown in FIG. 37(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing two types of effects.

Also,
“When executing the first performance [e.g., role object vibration performance B] at the first start timing [e.g., at a certain timing during super reach], the performance means executes the second performance [e.g. , mini-character A production] can be performed in parallel with the first production [for example, FIG. 39 (7-2)],
When executing the first performance at a second start timing [for example, at a certain timing during temporary stop of losing symbols], the performance means executes the second performance in parallel with the first performance. A game machine characterized in that it is impossible to perform [for example, the mini-character performance disappears when a losing symbol is temporarily stopped] [for example, FIG. 39 (9-1) when the mini-character Amcr appears instead of the mini-character Bmcu]. ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The production means performs the first production [for example, role object vibration production B] both in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a jackpot and in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a loss [for example, FIG. 28 (2)]. For example, FIG. 39 (7-2)] is executable,
The presentation means is configured to display a decorative pattern that results in a loss in the second presentation [for example, mini character A presentation] and also in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a jackpot [for example, immediately before FIGS. 38(3) to 38(9)]. This can be executed even in a variable display [for example, immediately before FIG. 39 (7-2) to FIG. 39 (9'')].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

``The first performance is a performance in which the execution period length of the performance does not differ even if the start timing differs, and the second performance is a performance in which the execution period length of the performance differs even if the start timing differs. [For example, if it is started before the reach is established, it is from Figure 38 (3) to just before (9) in the same figure, and if it is started during SP reach, it is from Figure 39 (7-2) to the same until just before figure (9'')].
“One of the multiple types of performances is a third performance that indicates the expectation level of a jackpot [for example, mini character B performance], and the performance means also controls the third performance in one time. The third effect is executed at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings in the decorative pattern fluctuation display [for example, the plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 37(b)], and the third effect is Even if the start timing is different, the expected degree of jackpot suggested is the same [for example, the expected degree of jackpot shown in FIG. 37(b)], and the expected degree of jackpot suggested by the third effect is Alternatively, the second performance may be the same as the expectation level of the jackpot suggested by the second performance.''Alternatively, the second performance may include multiple performance modes [for example, a performance mode in which the mini character Amcr appears, and a performance mode in which the mini character Bmcu appears. It may be a performance that has a certain aspect.

``The presentation means performs the first presentation both in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a jackpot [for example, FIG. 28 (2)] and in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a loss [for example, FIG. 39 (7-2)] ] is possible, but it may not be possible at a specific timing in the decorative symbol fluctuation display that results in a loss [for example, the timing during the execution of a revival effect that ultimately results in a loss] [For example, in FIG. 37 ( multiple execution timings shown in b)].
"The effect means may not start the execution of the first effect and the second effect at the same time." In other words, the start timing of the execution of the first effect and the The timing may be different from the start timing of execution of the second performance.

"The presentation means may include a first presentation means [for example, the upper presentation device 2] and a second presentation means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208]." In this case, the The first presentation means may be capable of executing the first presentation, and the second presentation means may be capable of executing the second presentation. Alternatively, the presentation means may include a plurality of types of presentation means, and the first presentation and the second presentation may be performed by different presentation means, or the plurality of types of presentation means may be capable of performing the first presentation and the second presentation. Some of the presentation means [for example, the game board lamp 442 or the game platform frame lamp 452] can perform at least part of the first presentation and the second presentation in common [for example, the The light may be emitted at the start of the first performance, and the light may be emitted at the start of the second performance.

“The first performance [for example, role object vibration performance B] is better when executed in the second game state [for example, variable probability game state, time-saving game state, or variable probability and time-saving game state]. The expectation level of the suggested jackpot may be higher than when executed in one gaming state [for example, non-probability variable gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state, or normal gaming state (non-probability variable and non-time-saving gaming state)] "When the second performance [for example, a mini-character performance] is performed in the second game state, the expectation of a jackpot is suggested more than when it is performed in the first game state." ”Alternatively, even if the first performance is executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state, the first performance may be The expected level of jackpot may be the same. Whether the second performance is executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state, the expected level of jackpot is the same. Good too. The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. In addition, although the wording ``gaming state'' is used here, if there is a performance mode based on the game state, the game state can be read as the performance mode.

The production means may perform the first production at a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach develops, after a super reach develops, when a special super reach develops, after a special super reach develops. ], and the presentation means may also execute the second presentation at a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach is achieved, It may be executed at one start timing selected from [at the time of development, after development of super reach, at the time of development of special super reach, and after development of special super reach].

In the example of game progression described above, there were cases in which a button preview (FIG. 20 (5), FIG. 22 (35)) or a button vibration effect (FIG. 36) was performed using the effect button 136. Here, the effect button 136, operation key unit 190, and operation lever 137, which may be operated in the course of the game, will be explained again.

The button sensor 426 shown in FIG. 4 is operated (pressed) when each operation surface (upper surface) of the production button 136, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, and the enter button 1930 arranged on the operation key unit 190 is pressed to a predetermined pressed position. Then, it outputs a detection signal indicating that it has been operated. The maximum operation stroke of the various buttons 136, 1910 to 1930 may be up to the predetermined pressed position (detected position), or may be such that the buttons can be operated beyond the predetermined pressed position. That is, the position of the operation end point may be the predetermined pressed position, or may be a position beyond the predetermined pressed position. Hereinafter, the amount of operation (stroke amount) from the starting point position, which is the initial position, to the end point position, which is the position of the operation end point, will be simply referred to as the amount of operation.

FIG. 40(a) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the production button 136, and also shows the operation surface 1361 of the production button 136.

In FIG. 40(a), the effect button 136 at the starting position, which is the initial position, is indicated by a solid line, and a downward arrow indicates the operating direction. The performance button 136 at the end position is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the effect button 136 may be one in which the amount of operation may change. That is, the effect button 136 may be able to take a state where the amount of operation is large and a state where the amount of operation is small.

FIG. 40(b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation amount of the upper button 1910 arranged on the operation key unit 190, and also shows the operation surface 1911 of the upper button 1910.

In FIG. 40(b) as well, the upper button 1910 at the starting position, which is the initial position, is indicated by a solid line, and the downward arrow indicates the operating direction. The upper button 1910 at the end position is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Note that the amount of operation of the lower button 1920 arranged on the operation key unit 190 is also the same as the amount of operation of the upper button 1910.

The amount of operation of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 40(a) is greater than the amount of operation of the upper button 1910 shown in FIG. 40(b). Further, the amount of operation of a decision button 1930 (not shown here) arranged on the operation key unit 190 is smaller than the amount of operation of the production button 136, but more than the amount of operation of the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920. However, the amount of operation of the determination button 1930 and the amount of operation of the production button 136 may be the same.

The lever sensor 427 shown in FIG. 4 outputs a detection signal indicating that the operating lever 137 has been operated when it is operated to a predetermined position (when it is pushed down). The maximum operating stroke of the operating lever 137 may be up to the above-mentioned predetermined operating position (detection position), or may be such that it can be operated beyond the predetermined operating position. That is, the position of the operation end point may be the above-mentioned predetermined operation position, or may be a position beyond the above-mentioned predetermined operation position. Regarding the operation lever 137, the amount of operation (stroke amount) from the starting point position, which is the initial position, to the end point position, which is the position of the operation end point, is simply referred to as the amount of operation.

FIG. 40(c) is a diagram schematically showing the amount of operation of the operating lever 137, and the central axis 1371 of the operating lever 137 is also shown by a dotted line.

In FIG. 40(c), the operating lever 137 at the starting position, which is the initial position, is shown by a solid line. The operating lever 137 at the starting position is in a vertical position and can be tilted in any direction through 360 degrees. In FIG. 40(c), tilting the operating lever 137 in a certain direction is indicated by an arcuate arrow. The operating lever 137 at the end position is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The amount of operation of the operating lever 137 shown in FIG. 40(c) is greater than the amount of operation of the upper button 1910 shown in FIG. The amount of operation of the production button 136 shown in FIG.

Note that the various comparisons above were made with respect to the amount of operation up to the end point position, but for the various buttons 136, 1910 to 1930, the amount of operation from the start point position to the above-mentioned predetermined pressed position (detection position) was compared. The same applies to the operation lever 137 even when the operation amount is from the starting point position to the predetermined operation position (detection position). That is, regarding the amount of operation to the detection position by the sensors 426 and 427, the operation lever 137 has the largest amount, and the upper button 1910 and the lower button 1920 have the smallest amount.

Next, operation effects using operating means such as the effect button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 will be explained. Note that this operation performance also includes the button preview that was executed in FIG. 20 (5) and FIG. 22 (35). Further, the operation effect is an effect in which related images (images related to each button, images related to each lever) related to operation means (effect button 136, operation lever 137, etc.) to be described later are displayed. In other words, this can also be said to be a period in which the operation of the operation means such as the production button 136 and the operation lever 137 is valid.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a table summarizing button-related images related to the effect button 136. The button-related image related to the performance button 136 referred to herein is an image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the operation performance, and is an image that urges the performance button 136 to be pressed within the operation validity period. . More specifically, it includes a button image imitating the performance button 136, a meter display representing the remaining period of operation validity period of the performance button 136, and a character display representing the operation type of the performance button 136.

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 41, normal button related images are shown. The normal button-related images include a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black character display 136cN that says "Press". The normal size here refers to the standard display size. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 40 to 56, no hatching is used to represent white, and no pattern is used. The button image 136aN, which is a normal button-related image, is an image simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, in the blue meter display 136bN, a blue bar portion is displayed on a white background, and this blue bar portion decreases. In the explanation of FIGS. 40 to 56, hatching directed diagonally downward to the left is used to represent the color blue. In this table, the blue bar portion shows a slight decrease. Further, the black text display 136cN "Press" is a black text display that prompts the player to press the production button 136 once.

A red button related image is shown below the normal button related image. The red button-related images include a normal-sized red button image 136aR, a normal-sized red meter display 136bR, and a normal-sized red character display 136cR that says "Press." The red button related image has the same display size as the normal button related image, but has a different color. In the explanation of FIGS. 40 to 56, cross hatching is used to represent the color red.

In the table shown in FIG. 41, the magnification of the display size relative to the normal size is written on the right side of the button-related image. Further, to the right of the magnification of the display size, the magnification of the operation effective period length is also shown. The magnification of the valid operation period length is a magnification of the length of the valid operation period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button related image. In the red button related image, the magnification of the display size is 1x, and the magnification of the valid operation period is also 1x.

The red button image 136aR is an image simulating a state in which the button lamp 138 emits red light at the initial position. Further, in the red meter display 136bR, a red bar portion is displayed on a white background, and the red bar portion decreases. In this table, the red bar portion shows a slight decrease. Further, "Press" in the red text display 136cR is a red text display prompting the user to press the production button 136 once.

A large button related image is shown below the red button related image. The large button related images include a large button image 136aB that is twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 136bB that is twice the normal size, and a large black text display 136cB that says "Press" that is larger than the normal size. . The large button image 136aB is an image in which a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position is displayed in a large size. Further, although the large blue meter display 136bB is displayed in a display size twice the normal size, the length of the valid operation period is one time. When the player looks at the large blue meter display 136bB, he or she tends to think that the operation validity period is longer than the blue meter display 136bN, but in this embodiment, the operation validity period is not extended and the blue meter It has the same period length as the display 136bN. The large black character display 136cB is not as large as twice the display size of the black character display 136cN, but may be twice the display size. In addition, instead of the large blue meter display 136bB that is twice the normal size, a normal size blue meter display 136bN may be displayed, and instead of the large black letter display 136cB that says "Press" which is larger than the normal size, a normal size meter display 136cB may be displayed. A black text display 136cN "Press" may be displayed.

A small button related image is shown below the large button related image. The small button related images include a small button image 136aS that is 0.8 times the normal size, a small blue meter display 136bS that is 0.8 times the normal size, and small black letters that say "Press" that are 0.8 times the normal size. Display 136cS is included. The small button image 136aS is an image in which the button lamp 138 is displayed in a small size in the initial position, emitting white light. Furthermore, although the small blue meter display 136bS is displayed in a display size 0.8 times the normal size, the length of the valid operation period is one time. When the player looks at the small blue meter display 136bS, he or she tends to think that the operation valid period is shorter than the blue meter display 136bN, but in this embodiment, the operation valid period is not shortened and the blue meter It has the same period length as the display 136bN. This small button-related image is a rare image that appears least frequently among the button-related images shown in the table of FIG. 41.

Below the small button related image, a continuous button related image is shown. The repeated-hit button-related images include a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a black text display 136cC of "repeat-hit" with the same font size as the normal size. This repeated button related image differs from the normal button related image only in the character display representing the operation type. Further, the valid operation period is displayed using a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and the length of the valid operation period appears to be the same as the length of the normal button-related image. However, unlike the case where a normal button-related image is displayed, which requires only one operation, when a continuous button-related image is displayed, a continuous press operation is required, which increases the operation time. For this reason, when a repeated button related image is displayed, the valid operation period is extended, and is 1.6 times longer than when a normal button related image is displayed.

A long press button related image is shown below the continuous press button related image. The long-press button related images include a normal-sized button image 136aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a black text display 136cL of "long press" with the same text size as the normal size. This long-press button-related image also differs from the normal button-related image only in the character display representing the operation type, similar to the continuous press button-related image. Further, the valid operation period is displayed using a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and the length of the valid operation period appears to be the same as the length of the normal button-related image. However, even when a long-press button-related image is displayed, the operation time is extended due to the long-press operation, so the operation validity period is extended, and is 1.6 times longer than when a normal button-related image is displayed. has reached its operational validity period.

Note that a button image different from the normal size button image 136aN may be displayed in the repeated press button related image and the long press button related image. For example, an animation of the effect button 136 being pressed repeatedly may be displayed, or an image simulating the effect button 136 at the end position may be displayed. Furthermore, the length of the valid operation period may be different between the continuous press button related image and the long press button related image. For example, the image related to the repeated press button may be longer (1.8 times as long, for example).

Furthermore, although here the button-related images are for the production button 136, button-related images for the various buttons 1910 to 1930 that constitute the operation key unit 190 may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. . Alternatively, even if a button-related image for the production button 136 is displayed, operations on various buttons 1910 to 1930 constituting the operation key unit 190 may be accepted instead of the production button 136. .

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a table summarizing lever-related images related to the operating lever 137. The lever-related image related to the operating lever 137 referred to herein is an image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 during the operation performance, and is an image that urges the operating lever 137 to be operated within the operation validity period. . More specifically, it includes a lever image imitating the operating lever 137, a meter display representing the remaining operation period of the operating lever 137, and a character display such as "lever on".

At the top of the table shown in FIG. 42, normal lever-related images are shown. The normal lever-related images include a normal-sized lever image 137aN, a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN, and a normal-sized black character display 137cN that reads "Lever On." The normal size here refers to the standard display size. The lever image 137aN, which is a normal lever-related image, is an image simulating a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, in the normal size blue meter display 137bN, a blue bar portion represented by hatching diagonally downward to the left is displayed on a white background, and this blue bar portion decreases. In this table, the blue bar portion shows a slight decrease. The length of the operation validity period represented by this normal size blue meter display 137bN is the same as the length of the operation validity period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button related image. Further, the black text display 137cN "lever on" is a black text display that prompts the operator to operate the operating lever 137.

A red lever-related image is shown below the normal lever-related image. The red lever-related images include a normal-sized red lever image 137aR, a normal-sized red meter display 137bR, and a normal-sized red character display 137cR that reads "Lever On." The red lever-related image has the same display size as the normal lever-related image, but has a different color.

In the table shown in FIG. 42, the magnification of the display size relative to the normal size is written on the right side of the lever-related image. Further, to the right of the magnification of the display size, the magnification of the operation effective period length is also shown. The magnification of the valid operation period length is a magnification of the length of the valid operation period represented by the normal size blue meter display 137bN in the normal lever-related image. In the red lever related image, the magnification of the display size is 1x, and the magnification of the valid operation period is also 1x.

The red lever image 137aR is an image simulating a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits red light at the initial position. Further, in the red meter display 137bR, a red bar portion is displayed on a white background, and this red bar portion decreases. In this table, the red bar portion shows a slight decrease. Furthermore, the red text display 137cR "lever on" is a red text display that prompts the user to operate the operating lever 137.

A large lever related image is shown below the red lever related image. The large lever-related images include a large lever image 137aB that is twice the normal size, a large blue meter display 137bB that is twice the normal size, and a large black text display 137cB that says "Lever On" that is twice the normal size. There is. The large lever image 137aB is an image in which a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position is displayed in a large size. Furthermore, although the large blue meter display 137bB is displayed at twice the display size of the normal size, the length of the valid operation period is one time. When the player looks at the large blue meter display 137bB, he or she tends to think that the operation validity period is longer than the blue meter display 137bN, but in this embodiment, the operation validity period is not extended and the blue meter It has the same period length as the display 137bN. The large black character display 137cB is twice the display size of the black character display 137cN, but the display size is not limited to twice as long as it is larger than the black character display 137cN. In addition, instead of the large blue meter display 137bB that is twice the normal size, a normal size blue meter display 137bN may be displayed, and instead of the large black letter display 137cB that says "Lever On" that is twice the normal size, the normal size meter display 137cB may be displayed. A black text display 137cN "Lever On" may be displayed.

As explained above, in lever-related images, the length of the valid operation period is the same regardless of the type of image. The length of the operation validity period of the operation lever 137 is longer than the length of the operation validity period represented by the normal size blue meter display 136bN in the normal button related image. This is because the operating amount of the operating lever 137 is larger than that of the production button 136, so that it takes longer to complete the operation. However, the lengths of both operation valid periods may be the same.

In addition, the button-related image types include images that encourage repeated-press operations (repeated-press button-related images) and images that encourage long-press operations (long-press button-related images), but lever-related images encourage repeated press operations. No images (for example, images related to continuous press levers) or images that encourage long press operations (for example, images related to long press levers) are provided. In this way, by not providing a continuous press operation or a long press operation using an operation means with a large amount of operation (in this case, the operation lever 137), it is possible to avoid giving the impression that the operation means with a large amount of operation is bothersome. There is. Furthermore, by reducing the frequency of use and increasing the rarity, it is possible to increase the anticipation (excitement) when using the product.

Note that in the tables of FIGS. 41 and 42, the description 1 times may be 1.1 times or 0.9 times. That is, there may be a slight difference, or a difference may be intentionally provided.

In addition, to explain the operation validity period of the production button 136 in the operation production, taking the normal button related image as an example, the period from when the display of the normal button related image starts until the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 136bN disappears. The period is an operation valid period of the performance button 136 in the operation performance. The same applies to red button related images, large button related images, repeated button press related images, and the like. In addition, to explain the operation validity period of the control lever 137 in the operation performance, taking the normal lever-related image as an example, the period from the start of display of the normal lever-related image until the blue bar portion of the blue meter display 137bN disappears. The period is a valid operation period of the operation lever 137 in the operation performance. The same applies to red lever related images and large lever related images. Furthermore, the operation validity period may be a period that starts before the display of the normal button-related image or the normal lever-related image starts.

Next, the general flow of the operation performance using the operation means such as the performance button 136, the operation key unit 190, and the operation lever 137 will be explained. The operation performance is a performance performed between an introduction performance described later and a response performance executed as a result of operating the operating means. A response performance is a performance that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means (performance button 136, operation lever 137, etc.) in the operation performance (the effective period has ended without the operation means being operated in the operation performance). The response performances include a development performance, a reach determination performance, a cut-in performance, a win/loss performance, and the like.

In addition, the introduction performance and the operation performance may be combined as an operation performance, the response performance and the operation performance may be combined as an operation performance, or the introduction performance, the response performance, and the operation performance may be combined as an operation performance. Also good.

FIG. 43(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of operation effect, the type of development effect, and the expectation level of jackpot.

The development performance is a performance that indicates whether or not normal reach will develop into super reach, and is performed at the end of the normal reach period. The jackpot expectation level represents the reliability of hitting the jackpot with the symbol variation display currently being performed.

If the normal reach does not develop into the super reach, the development will fail and the normal reach will result in a loss. In this case, in the operation effect, there are cases in which a continuous press button related image is displayed, a case in which a long press button related image is displayed, and a case in which a normal button related image is displayed.

There are multiple types of SP (Super) Reach available, but here, development to SP Reach 1 and development to SP Reach 2 are targeted. SP Reach 2 is a reach performance that has a longer reach period than SP Reach 1 and has a higher expectation of a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the expectation of a jackpot is 20% when the image related to the long press button is displayed and the SP reach 1 develops, and the image related to the long press button is displayed and the development progresses to the SP reach 1. The expectation level of a jackpot in this case is 30%, and the expectation level of a jackpot in a case where the normal button related image is displayed and the SP reach 1 is reached is 40%. Furthermore, when a normal lever-related image is displayed, the development is always successful, and when the SP reach 1 is developed, the expected degree of jackpot is 50%. Note that even if the normal lever-related image is displayed, the development may fail.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the expectation level of a jackpot is 30% when the image related to the long press button is displayed and SP reach 2 is reached. The expectation level of a jackpot is 40% when the game develops to SP reach 2, and the expectation level of a jackpot when the normal button related image is displayed and the game progresses to SP reach 2 is 50%. Furthermore, when the normal lever-related image is displayed and the SP reach 2 is developed, the expected level of jackpot is 60%.

Based on FIG. 43(a), if the image types of operation effects are listed in order of increasing jackpot expectation, the order will be normal lever-related images, normal button-related images, long-press button-related images, and repeated-press button-related images.

The table shown in FIG. 43(a) does not include large button related images. The advanced performance itself is not a performance that directly suggests the expectation level of a jackpot, and the big button related image is not displayed when the response performance is not a performance that directly suggests the expectation level of a jackpot. Note that although the table shown in FIG. 43(a) does not include images related to the red button, images related to the red button may be displayed even when the response performance is not a performance that directly suggests the expectation level of a jackpot. It may be set as such. On the other hand, in the case of a successful development, the expected level of jackpot can be indirectly known by the type of SP reach, so a normal lever-related image may be displayed.

FIG. 43(b) is a diagram showing a determination table for the introduction effect that is started during normal reach. During the normal reach, the introduction performance is started and the operation performance is executed, and if the operation means is operated within the operation validity period and the development is successful, the development performance is performed. In addition, in the case of development failure, a presentation is performed to notify the development failure, the normal reach presentation ends, and the losing decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, even if the operating means is not operated within the operation validity period, when the operation performance ends, a notification of a development performance or development failure is performed.

This introduction effect determination table is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8.

The introductory performance is a performance performed before the operation performance is started, and is a performance that suggests the start of the operation performance. Before the operation effect in which the button-related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 or introduction effect pattern 2 is executed, and before the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 or introduction effect pattern 4 is executed. is executed. The introduction performance pattern 2 is a performance pattern with a longer performance time than the introduction performance pattern 1, and the introduction performance pattern 4 is a performance pattern with a longer performance time than the introduction performance pattern 3. The introduction effect pattern 3 will be described later using FIGS. 45(b1) to 45(b4). The longer the performance time, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, between the introduction performance pattern 2 and the introduction performance pattern 3, the introduction performance pattern 2 is longer. Further, between the introduction performance pattern 1 and the introduction performance pattern 3, the introduction performance pattern 3 is longer, and between the introduction performance pattern 2 and the introduction performance pattern 4, the introduction performance pattern 4 is longer. Alternatively, the performance time of the introduction performance may be determined by lottery; in this case, between introduction performance pattern 1 and introduction performance pattern 3, introduction performance pattern 3 is likely to be longer, and introduction performance pattern 2 and introduction performance pattern 3 are likely to be longer. Compared to presentation pattern 4, introduction presentation pattern 4 tends to be longer.

The flow of the performance such as introduction performance → operation performance → development performance → SP no reach or SP reach performance is determined in the performance control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8 before the start of variation of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), if the repeated button button related image is displayed but the development fails, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a 95% probability, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining 5% probability. is selected. If the long-press button related image is displayed but development fails, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 10%. If the normal button-related image is displayed but development fails, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with an 85% probability, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining 15% probability. On the other hand, if the continuous button related image is displayed and the development is successful, the introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and the introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with the remaining probability of 40%. If the long-press button related image is displayed and the development is successful, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 45%. If the normal button related image is displayed and development is successful, introduction effect pattern 1 and introduction effect pattern 2 are each selected with a probability of 50%. In addition, when the normal lever-related image is displayed, the development will always be successful as described above, and the introduction effect pattern 3 will be selected with a 30% probability, and the introduction effect pattern 4 will be selected with the remaining 70% probability. .

As mentioned above, the flow of the performance such as introduction performance → operation performance → development performance → SP no reach or SP reach performance is determined in the performance control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8 before the start of variation of the decorative symbols. , when SP reach 1 is executed as the SP reach effect, a cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach 1 effect. The cut-in performance is a preview performance that suggests whether or not there will be a jackpot in the symbol variation display currently being performed, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 1. That is, the SP reach where the cut-in effect is performed last is SP reach 1. However, even if the SP reach is 1, the cut-in effect may not be performed.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of operation performance and the expectation level of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the normal button related image is displayed during the performance of SP reach 1, the expected degree of jackpot is 10%. Furthermore, during the performance of SP Reach 1, the expectation level of a jackpot when a red button related image is displayed is 15%, and the expectation level of a jackpot when a large button related image is displayed is 18%. Therefore, the expected degree of jackpot for the large button related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times the expected degree of jackpot for the normal button related image (normal button image 136aN). Since the display size of the large button related image (large button image 136aB) is twice the display size of the normal button related image (normal button image 136aN), the expectation level of a jackpot is not as large as the display size. However, by displaying it at twice the display size, it is possible to make it seem like the expectations are higher than the actual expectations. Furthermore, when a small button-related image, which is a rare image with the lowest appearance frequency among button-related images, is displayed during the SP reach 1 performance, the expectation level of a jackpot is 100%. That is, if the small button related image is displayed, the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, during the performance of SP Reach 1, the expectation level of a jackpot when the normal lever-related image is displayed is 20%, and the expectation level of the jackpot when the red lever-related image is displayed is 50%, The expectation level of a jackpot when the big lever related image is displayed is 80%.

Based on FIG. 44(a), the image types of operation effects are listed in order of increasing jackpot expectation: small button related image, large lever related image, red lever related image, normal lever related image, large button related image, red The order is button-related images, then normal button-related images.

FIG. 44(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the cut-in performance performed during SP reach 1 and the expectation level of the jackpot.

In the cut-in effect, one type of cut-in image is displayed from among a plurality of types of cut-in images. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the expected level of jackpot when the green cut-in image is displayed is 20%, and the expected level of jackpot when the red cut-in image is displayed is 50%. The expectation level of a jackpot when a gold cut-in image is displayed is 80%.

FIG. 45(a) is a diagram showing a gold cut-in image.

The cut-in image is an image that is displayed by operating the operating means within the operation validity period in the operation performance, and in FIG. 45(a) as well, the performance button 136 is operated within the operation validity period. Then, the cut-in image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the SP reach 1 effect is displayed. In the explanation of FIGS. 40 to 56, vertical striped hatching is used to represent the gold color. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(a) displays a gold cut-in image CTG with golden edges.

Note that the cut-in image is displayed when the operation effect ends even if the operation effect is started and the operation means is not operated within the operation validity period.

The jackpot expectation level for each cut-in image is different from the jackpot expectation level for each operation effect image type explained using FIG. 44(a), and is different from the jackpot expectation level for each operation effect image type that is displayed first. When the expectation level of the jackpot of the cut-in image displayed later is higher than the expectation level of the jackpot of the cut-in image displayed later, the interest in the game tends to improve.

Note that instead of the cut-in performance, a dialogue preview performance may be performed. In this case, a dialogue preview image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the cut-in image. In the dialogue preview performance, the level of expectation for winning the jackpot varies depending on the dialogue. The dialogue preview image is an image that is displayed when the operating means is operated within the operation effective period in the operation effect, but if the operation effect is started and the operation means is not operated within the operation effective period, the operation effect is displayed. The dialogue preview image may not be displayed even after the end of the dialogue.

Further, the cut-in effect is also executed when the operation lever 137 is operated within the operation validity period. Alternatively, the dialogue preview performance is also executed when the operation lever 137 is operated within the operation validity period.

FIG. 44(c) is a diagram showing a determination table for the introduction effect to be started during SP reach 1. During SP reach 1, an introduction performance is started, an operation performance is executed, and the operation means is operated within the operation validity period to perform a cut-in performance.

The introduction effect determination table shown in FIG. 44(c) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8.

The introduction performance performed during SP reach 1 is the same as the introduction performance performed during normal reach, and before the operation performance in which button-related images are displayed, there is a relatively short introduction performance pattern 1 or a relatively long introduction performance pattern 1. Before the introduction effect pattern 2 is executed and the operation effect in which the lever-related image is displayed, a relatively short introduction effect pattern 3 or a relatively long introduction effect pattern 4 is executed. The performance time of each introduction performance pattern is as described in FIG. 43(b). Note that the introduction performance performed during SP reach 1 and the introduction performance performed during normal reach may be different.

As shown in FIG. 44(c), when a normal button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 5%. When a red button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 10%. When a large button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 15%. When a small button related image confirming a jackpot is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 40%. Therefore, at the stage of the introduction effect, it is not known whether the small button related image will be displayed or not. When a normal lever-related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a remaining probability of 45%.

FIGS. 45(b1) to 45(b4) shown on the right side of FIG. 45(a) are diagrams showing the introduction effect pattern 3.

In FIG. 45(b1), the reach effect of SP reach 1 has started. In the reach effect display of SP reach 1, an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed in a large size is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. In addition, in the same way as the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 12(1), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. A mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner.

In FIG. 45(b2), the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 3 has started. In the introduction performance pattern 3, wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a wipe-in is performed like a wipe performance. In FIG. 45(b3), the wipe-in is completed, the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe display wp, and the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is no longer visible. Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner and the mini symbol in the upper left corner are visible.

When the wipe-in is completed, the wight-out is started, and in FIG. 45 (b4), the wipe-out is completed and the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 3 is completed. In this FIG. 45(b4), a normal lever-related image is displayed at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, a normal-sized lever image 137aN that simulates a state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 137bN, and a normal-sized black text display 137cN that says "Lever ON" are displayed. has been done. Note that the lever image 137aN and the black text display 137cN overlap with a part of the SP reach effect display of SP reach 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(c), when the red lever related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 and introduction effect pattern 4 are each selected with a probability of 50%. When a large lever related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a remaining probability of 70%.

The performance during SP Reach 1 has been described above, but when SP Reach 2 is executed as the SP Reach 2 performance, a win/loss performance is performed at the end of the SP Reach 2 performance. Like the above-mentioned cut-in performance, the win/loss performance is also a preview performance that suggests whether or not there will be a jackpot in the symbol variation display currently being performed, and is always performed at the end of SP reach 2. That is, SP reach 2 is the SP reach where the win/loss effect is performed last. However, even if it is SP reach 2, there may be cases where the winning/losing effect is not performed.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the image type of operation performance and the expectation level of jackpot.

The relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation level of the jackpot shown in FIG. 46(a) is the same as the relationship between the image type of the operation effect and the expectation level of the jackpot shown in FIG. 44(a). In other words, the expectation level of a jackpot is 10% when a normal button-related image is displayed during SP Reach 2, 15% when a red button-related image is displayed, When related images are displayed, it is 18%. Therefore, even in SP Reach 2, the expected level of jackpot for the large button related image (large button image 136aB) is 1.8 times that of the normal button related image (normal button image 136aN), and twice as high. By displaying at the display size, it is possible to make the user feel that the level of expectation is higher than the actual level of expectation. Also, when the small button related image is displayed, it is 100%, when the normal lever related image is displayed, it is 20%, and when the red lever related image is displayed, it is 50%, When the large lever related image is displayed, it is 80%. Therefore, the image types of operation effects are listed in descending order of jackpot expectation: small button-related images, large lever-related images, red lever-related images, normal lever-related images, large button-related images, red button-related images, and normal button-related images. Sort by image.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing a determination table for the introduction effect to be started during SP reach 2. During SP reach 2, an introduction performance is started, an operation performance is executed, and the operating means is operated within the operation validity period to perform a winning performance. Note that the win/lose performance is also a performance that is performed when the operation performance ends even if the operation means is not operated within the operation validity period after the operation performance has started.

The introduction effect determination table shown in FIG. 46(b) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is used in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG.

The introduction performance performed during SP reach 2 is also the same as the introduction performance performed during normal reach and SP reach 1, and before the operation performance in which button-related images are displayed, there is a relatively short introduction performance pattern 1. Alternatively, a relatively long introduction effect pattern 2 is executed, and a relatively short introduction effect pattern 3 or a relatively long introduction effect pattern 4 is executed before an operation effect in which a lever-related image is displayed. The performance time of each introduction performance pattern is as described in FIG. 43(b). Note that the introduction performance performed during SP reach 2 may be different from the introduction performance performed during normal reach or SP reach 1.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), when a normal button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 95%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 5%. When a red button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 90%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 10%. When a large button related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 85%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 15%. When a small button related image confirming a jackpot is displayed, introduction effect pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 60%, and introduction effect pattern 2 is selected with a remaining probability of 40%. Further, when a normal lever-related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 55%, and introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a remaining probability of 45%. When a red lever related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 and introduction effect pattern 4 are each selected with a probability of 50%. When a large lever related image is displayed, introduction effect pattern 3 is selected with a probability of 30%, and introduction effect pattern 4 is selected with a remaining probability of 70%. Each selection rate explained above is the same as the selection rate explained using FIG. 44(c), but may be different.

Next, specific examples of an introduction performance, an operation performance, and a response performance that are executed from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until the final display is performed will be described.

FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing each of the four specific examples (A) to (D). In each timing chart shown in FIG. 47, time passes at the same speed from left to right. The timing of (a1) shown in FIG. 47(A), the timing of (b1) shown in FIG. 47(B), the timing of (c1) shown in FIG. 47(C), and the timing of (c1) shown in FIG. The timings of d1) are the same, the timings of normal reach ((a2), (b2), (c2), (d2)) are also the same, and the timings of super reach are the same ((a6)). ), (b6), (c6), (d6)) also match.

In FIG. 47(A), during normal reach, an introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is started, and after an operation effect in which a normal button-related image is displayed is executed, a development effect is performed and the pattern develops to SP reach 1. During SP Reach 1, the introductory effect of introductory effect pattern 1 is started, and after the operation effect in which the normal button related image is displayed is executed, the cut-in effect in which the green cut-in image is displayed is performed, and the loser is defeated. This is an example in which a combination of decorative patterns is determined and displayed.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(A) step by step. The diagram shown at (a1) in FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (a1) written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A), and the diagrams shown after (a2) are similarly FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating states at the timings of the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A).

FIG. 48(a1) is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 12(1). That is, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability, normal pattern low probability state), and is a state in which the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a1), decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is normal variation. Further, a variable icon display area 280 is provided at the center of the lower part of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a variable icon h0 in a green display mode is displayed. In the explanation of FIGS. 40 to 56, hatching directed diagonally downward to the right is used to represent the color green. The variation icon h0 in the green display mode is a preview that suggests that the expected level of jackpot is 25% in the symbol variation display currently being performed. On the right side of the variable icon display area 280, a hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1 is provided, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. Both of the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in white (default display mode). Further, a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is provided at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left corner.

In FIG. 48(a2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern changes only in the middle pattern display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 48(a2-1), the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner only in the middle symbol display area 208b. In other words, the introduction performance has not yet started.

In FIG. 48(a3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction performance here is the performance of introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 48(a3), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative pattern is no longer visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (period t1 shown in FIG. 47(A)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 48(a4), the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is finished, and the operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a4), the decorative pattern becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues only in the middle pattern display area 208b. In addition, a normal button-related image is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "Press" are displayed. has been done. At the timing of FIG. 48(a4), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period. Depending on the operation of this performance button 136, whether the development is successful or unsuccessful is displayed. That is, if the development is successful, a development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the development failure is made. In addition, in the case of a development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbols may only be continued in the medium symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notification of the development failure. The timing chart shown in FIG. 47(A) shows that the development effect starts when the entire period t2 of the operation effective period has elapsed, but this is to show the length of the entire period t2. Actually, the advanced performance is started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t2 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(A) can be seen as an example in which the production button 136 is operated just before the entire period t2 has elapsed, but the advanced production is such that the production button 136 is not operated within the valid operation period. Even if the operation effect ends, the effect is executed when the operation effect ends, so it can also be seen as an example of a case where the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation validity period.

FIG. 48(a5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the characters "SP reach" are displayed below the decorative symbols whose decorative symbols are continuously being displayed in a variable manner. The player who sees the display screen of this development effect will know that the SP will develop into a reach after this, and the interest in the game will increase.

In FIG. 48 (a6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 1 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the expectation level of jackpot due to the normal button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a4) was 40% as shown in FIG. 43(a). become. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48 (a6), an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed in a large size is displayed as the reach effect display for SP reach 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right. ing.

In FIG. 48 (a6-1), the SP reach 1 reach effect display is still continuing. In other words, the introduction performance has not yet started.

In FIG. 48(a7), the introduction effect is started. The introduction performance here is also the performance of introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 48 (a7), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is blacked out, and the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is no longer visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (period t3 shown in FIG. 47(A)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out. Note that the introduction performance here is the same introduction performance pattern 1 as the introduction performance during the normal reach period, but a different pattern of introduction performance may be performed with the same period length of t3. For example, an introduction effect may be performed in which a flash display is displayed on the entire display screen for a period of t3.

In FIG. 48(a8), the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is finished, and the operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a8), the reach effect display of SP reach 1 becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In addition, the normal button-related image is displayed again at the lower left of the display screen. Here, too, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light in the initial position, a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "Press" are displayed. . A part of the SP reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the button image 136aN and the black text display 136cN. Here, the expected degree of jackpot based on the normal button related image is 10% as shown in FIG. 44(a). At the timing of FIG. 48(a8), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period. A cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of this effect button 136. That is, a cut-in image foretelling a jackpot is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 47(A), it is shown that the cut-in effect is started when the entire period t4 of the operation effective period has elapsed. Actually, the cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the entire period t4 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(A) can be seen as an example in which the production button 136 is operated just before the entire period t4 has elapsed, but the cut-in production is also performed when the production button 136 is operated within the valid operation period. Since this is a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if there is no operation performance, it can also be seen as an example of a case where the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation validity period.

FIG. 48(a9) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the cut-in effect is started. A green cut-in image CTM with green edges is displayed so as to overlap the SP reach 1 reach effect display. The expectation level of a jackpot for this green cut-in image CTM is 20% as shown in FIG. 44(b).

In FIG. 48 (a10), the decorative symbols that have been reduced and displayed at the lower right start temporary stop display in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. That is, in the middle symbol display area 208b, "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a losing combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation display). An animation of the lord looking disappointed is also displayed. At this stage, the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol of the special symbol 1 is being displayed in a variable manner continues to be displayed.

After the temporary stop display of this combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is performed, the symbol variation display of special drawing 1 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 48 (a11). As shown, the combination "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "X" indicating a loss, and "767" is also stopped and displayed on the mini symbol.

In FIG. 47(B), during normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and after the operation effect in which the normal button related image is displayed is executed, the development effect is performed and the SP reach is developed to SP reach 1. During SP Reach 1, the introductory effect of introductory effect pattern 2 is started, and after the operation effect in which the large button related image is displayed is executed, the cut-in effect in which the red cut-in image is displayed is performed, and the loser is defeated. This is an example in which a combination of decorative patterns is determined and displayed.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(B) step by step. The diagram shown at (b1) in FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (b1) written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(B), and the diagrams shown after (b2) are similarly, FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating states at the timings of the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(B). The following description will include explanations that overlap with the example shown in FIG. 48.

FIG. 49(b1) is also in the same state as shown in FIG. 12(1). That is, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability, normal pattern low probability state), and is a state in which the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b1), decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is normal variation. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon h0 in a red display mode is displayed, and in the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, two pending icons h11 are displayed in a white display mode (default display mode). , h12 are displayed. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode is a preview that suggests that the expected level of jackpot is 50% in the symbol variation display currently being performed. Further, a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is provided at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left corner.

In FIG. 49(b2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern changes only in the middle pattern display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 49(b3), the introduction effect is started. The timing (b3) shown in FIG. 47(B) is earlier than the timing (a3) shown in FIG. 47(A), and the period length from the start of normal reach to the start of the introduction effect is earlier. , it can be seen that the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(B) (the example shown in FIG. 49) is shorter than the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A) (the example shown in FIG. 48). The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 49 is the performance of introduction performance pattern 2. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 49(b3), at first, a normal-sized performance button 136 is imitated at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. A semi-transparent image that does not materialize appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 49 (b3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. In FIG. 49 (b3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the following figure (b4), the operation performance is started and the two images overlap at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 become real. It is a converted button image. That is, at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b4), a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, a normal size blue meter display 136bN and a normal size black text display 136cN saying "Press" are also displayed, and normal button related images are displayed. The introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 49(b3) to FIG. 49(b4) (period t5 shown in FIG. 47(B)), and the performance period of the introduction performance pattern 2 is as follows. It can be seen that this is longer than the presentation period of introduction presentation pattern 1 (period t1 shown in FIG. 47(A)).

At the timing of FIG. 49(b4), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period. In response to the operation of the performance button 136, if the development is successful, the development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, the development failure is notified. In addition, in the case of a development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbols may only be continued in the medium symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notification of the development failure. The timing chart shown in FIG. 47(B) shows that the development effect starts when the entire period t6 of the effective operation period has elapsed, but this is to show the length of the entire period t6. Actually, the advanced performance is started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t6 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(B) can be seen as an example in which the effect button 136 is operated just before the entire period t6 has elapsed, but as described above, in the advanced effect, the effect button 136 is operated within the valid operation period. Since this is a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if it is not operated, it can also be seen as an example of a case where the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation validity period.

FIG. 49(b5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the characters "SP reach" are displayed below the decorative symbols whose decorative symbols are continuously being displayed in a variable manner. The player who sees the display screen of this development effect will know that the SP will develop into a reach after this, and the interest in the game will increase.

In FIG. 49 (b6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 1 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the expectation level of jackpot due to the normal button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b4) was 40% as shown in FIG. 43(a). become. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b6), an animation in which the face of the main character, the lord, is displayed in a large size is displayed as the reach effect display for SP reach 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right. ing.

In FIG. 49(b7), the introduction effect is started. The timing (b7) shown in FIG. 47(B) is earlier than the timing (a7) shown in FIG. 47(A), and is the period from the start of SP reach 1 until the start of the introduction effect. It can be seen that the length is shorter in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(B) (example shown in FIG. 49) than in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A) (example shown in FIG. 48). . The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 49 is the performance of introduction performance pattern 2. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 49 (b7), at first, a performance button of a size larger than the normal size is imitated at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. However, a semitransparent image that does not materialize appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 49 (b7-1), both the upper left image and the upper right image move toward the center. In Figure 49 (b7-2), an animation is displayed in which the two images overlap near the center and materialize, and then expand to a larger size.In the following figure (b8), a large button is displayed. The image 136aB is displayed, and the operation effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 49(b8) displays a large-sized button image 136aB that is an enlarged version of the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, a large blue meter display 136bB of large size and a large black text display 136cB of "Press" also are displayed, and large button related images are displayed. Most of the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the large button image 136aB. Also, a part of the reach effect display of SP reach 1 is overlapped by the large black character display 136cN. The expectation level of jackpot based on the large button related image here is 18% as shown in FIG. 44(a). The introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 49(b7) to FIG. 49(b8) (period t7 shown in FIG. 47(B)), and the performance period of the introduction performance pattern 2 is as follows. It can be seen that this is longer than the performance period of introduction performance pattern 1 (period t3 shown in FIG. 47(A)). At the timing of FIG. 49(b8), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion in the large blue meter display 136bB is in a state before it starts to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period. A cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of this effect button 136. That is, a cut-in image foretelling a jackpot is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 47(B), it is shown that the cut-in effect is started when the entire period t8 of the operation effective period has elapsed, but here, too, this is to indicate the length of the entire period t8. Actually, the cut-in effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136 without waiting for the entire period t8 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(B) can be seen as an example in which the production button 136 is operated just before the entire period t8 has elapsed, but as described above, the cut-in production is performed when the production button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period. Since this is a performance that will be executed when the operation performance ends even if is not operated, this can also be seen as an example of a case where the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation validity period.

Here, the total period t8 of the operation validity period in the operation performance in which the large button image 136aB is displayed is the same period length as the total period t4 of the operation validity period in the operation performance in which the button image 136aN is displayed. In order to maintain fairness or to avoid making players feel uncomfortable, the introduction effect of the operation effect displays a large button image 136aB with a relatively large display size while keeping the length of the valid operation period the same. By lengthening the time, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the large button image 136aB will be displayed.

FIG. 49(b9) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the cut-in effect is started. A red cut-in image CTR with red edges is displayed so as to overlap the SP reach 1 reach effect display. The expectation level of a jackpot for this red cut-in image CTR is 50% as shown in FIG. 44(b).

At the timing (b10) in FIG. 47(B), although not shown, the decorative pattern that had been reduced and displayed in the lower right corner is displayed in the left pattern, similar to the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(a10). A temporary stop display is started in each of the area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, and a losing decorative symbol combination such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation display). Ru.

At the timing (b11) in FIG. 47(B), although not shown, similar to the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. A final display of the combination of decorative patterns is performed.

Note that when large button related images including the large button image 136aB are displayed, the effect button 136 may or always vibrates during execution of the operation effect or/and after the operation of the effect button 136. You can. On the other hand, when a button-related image including the normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed, the effect button 136 does not vibrate during execution of the operation effect and/or after the effect button 136 is operated. Alternatively, the effect button 136 may vibrate, but the rate at which the effect button 136 vibrates is lower than when the large button related image is displayed.

In FIG. 47(C), during normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and after the operation effect in which the continuous button button related image is displayed is executed, the development effect is performed and the pattern develops to SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect is started, the reach selection effect is performed first, then the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is started, and after the operation effect in which the normal button related image is displayed is executed, the winning effect is performed. This is an example in which the losing decorative pattern combinations are confirmed and displayed. In other words, in this example, SP reach 2 is developed.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(C) step by step. The diagram shown at (c1) in FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (c1) written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(C), and the diagrams shown after (c2) are similarly, FIG. 47C is a diagram illustrating states at the timings of the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(C). Hereinafter, explanations will be given including explanations that overlap with the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49.

FIG. 50(c1) is also in the same state as the state shown in FIG. 12(1). That is, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability, regular pattern low probability state), and is a state in which the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c1), decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is normal variation. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon h0 with a red display mode is displayed, and in the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, two pending icons h11 are both displayed in a white display mode (default display mode). , h12 are displayed. Further, a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is provided at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left corner.

In FIG. 50(c2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern changes only in the middle pattern display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 50 (c3), the introduction effect according to the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and a button 136 imitating the normal size effect button is placed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c3). However, a semitransparent image that does not materialize appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 50 (c3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. Then, in FIG. 50 (c3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the subsequent figure (c4), the operation performance is started, and the two images overlap at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is a materialized button image. That is, at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c4), a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, a blue meter display 136bN of normal size and a black character display 136cC of "Consecutive Hit" of the same font size as the normal size are also displayed, and images related to the consecutive press button are displayed. The introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 is executed over the period from FIG. 50(c3) to FIG. 50(c4) (period t9 shown in FIG. 47(C)), and is executed from FIG. This is a performance with the same period length as the introduction performance of the introduction performance pattern 2 explained using up to b4).

At the timing of FIG. 50(c4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is repeatedly pressed within the valid operation period. In response to repeated hits of the performance button 136, if the development is successful, a development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the development failure is made. In addition, in the case of a development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbols may only be continued in the medium symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notification of the development failure. The timing chart shown in FIG. 47(C) shows that the development effect is started when the entire operation valid period t10 has elapsed. In the case of a repeated tap operation, unlike a single press operation, the repeated tap operation is basically performed until the entire period t10 of the valid operation period has elapsed. Note that, exceptionally, the advanced performance may be started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t10 to elapse. The length of the total operation valid period t10 shown in FIG. 47(C) is the length of the total operation valid period t2 shown in FIG. 47(A), and the total length of the operation valid period shown in FIG. It can be seen that it is longer than the length of t6. However, the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 50(c4) is the same as the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 49(b4). It is the size (length). As described above, since a repeated tap operation takes more time than a single press operation, the operation validity period is 1.6 times longer than the operation validity period that requires a single press operation.

FIG. 50(c5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the characters "SP reach" are displayed below the decorative symbols whose variable display continues, and above it, the characters "Duel" are also displayed. If a player is familiar with this game machine, by looking at this development performance, he or she will know that the SP reach 2 will develop instead of the SP reach 1, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, and the interest in the game will be greatly improved. Note that even when SP reach 2 develops, the same development effect as the development effect of SP reach 1 may be performed without displaying the characters "Duel".

In FIG. 50 (c6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 2 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 2. With the development to SP Reach 2, the expectation level of jackpot due to the repeated button button related images displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c4) was 30% as shown in FIG. 43(a). become. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c6), the opening effect of the SP reach 2 reach effect display is performed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right.

In FIG. 50(c7), the reach selection effect is started. This reach selection performance is a performance in which the stage of the duel performance can be selected by the player's operation, and the expected level of jackpot does not differ depending on the stage. In other words, the reach selection performance is not a performance that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation. The reach selection performance is composed of an introduction performance and an operation performance, and first, the introduction performance is performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c7) displays an introduction effect in the ready-to-reach selection effect. The performance period of this introduction performance is the period t11 shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(C), which is shorter than the period t9 of introduction performance pattern 2 and even shorter than the period t1 of introduction performance pattern 1. The duration of the introductory performance is kept short so as not to make the players have high expectations by making it too long.

When this short introduction performance ends, the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c8), operation performance has started. In the operation performance of the ready-to-reach selection performance, a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed that simulates a state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). A normal-sized blue meter display 136bN is also displayed. Further, the character display representing the operation type is a tutorial-like display, and a character display 136cT such as "select by button operation" is displayed in the same character size as the normal size. In this way, in the operation performance of the reach selection performance, the normal button related image (button image 136aN) is displayed, and the large button related image (large button image 136aB) is not displayed. The big button related image is not displayed when the response performance is not a performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot. Since the large button related images have a large display size, it is easy for the player to have high hopes for a jackpot, and the large button related images are intentionally not displayed to prevent misunderstandings. Note that the red button-related image may also not be displayed when the response performance is not a performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot, or on the contrary, the red button-related image may be displayed. Furthermore, the lever-related image is not displayed when the response performance is not a performance that suggests the expectation level of a jackpot. In the operation performance in which a lever-related image is displayed, operation of the operation lever 137, which requires a large amount of operation, is required. In return for performing many operations, a response performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot is performed, and response performances that do not suggest the expectation of a jackpot are not performed, thereby reducing the feeling of bothersome operations. can do.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50(c8) also displays the castle town stage, sea stage, fusuma stage, and wilderness stage at the 12 o'clock position, 3 o'clock position, 6 o'clock position, and 9 o'clock position. The background images are each displayed in a small size, and the background image displayed at the 12 o'clock position is displayed within the selection window CW. In the operation performance of the reach selection performance, each time the performance button 136 is operated, the background image moves clockwise, and when the operation validity period has passed, the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW changes. Set. In the timing chart of FIG. 47(C), the entire operation valid period in the reach selection performance is shown as t12. This entire period t12 is the operation valid period (t2, t6) when the normal button-related image is displayed before the advanced effect, or when the normal button-related image or large button-related image is displayed before the cut-in effect. Although it is longer than the valid operation period (t4, t8) (for example, 1.2 times longer), it is shorter than the valid operation period (t10) when the repeated button button related image is displayed, so that the player can select it slowly to some extent. The period is long enough to allow for this. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where the operation of the effect button 136 is not done in time. Note that even if the entire operation validity period t12 has not elapsed, if the production button 136 is double-clicked, the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time will be set. good.

In FIG. 50(c9), the entire period t12 of the valid operation period has elapsed, and the background image of the selected stage is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, the wilderness stage has been selected.

In the following Figure 50 (c6-1), a duel has started on the wilderness stage, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the ronin, standing at a distance from each other in the decorative pattern display device 208. An animation of what is happening is displayed. Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c6-2), the situation is displayed in a large size, and the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7", which was displayed in a reduced size at the lower right, is displayed in the center part.

FIG. 51 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 50.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (c6-3), which continues from FIG. 50 (c6-2), displays an animation in which the distance between the main character, the lord, and the villain, the ronin, is shrinking.

Eventually, at the timing (c10) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(C), the introduction effect based on the introduction effect pattern 1 is started. As shown in FIG. 51 (c10), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the animation of the duel performance is no longer visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (period t13 shown in FIG. 47(C)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 51 (c11), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is finished, and the operation effect is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (c11), the animation of the duel performance becomes visible, and the protagonist lord and enemy ronin still remain in a stance with a short distance between them. In addition, a normal button-related image is displayed at the top of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "Press" are displayed. has been done. Here, the expected degree of jackpot based on the normal button related image is 10% as shown in FIG. 46(a). At the timing of FIG. 51 (c11), the operation performance has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The production button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period. In response to the operation of this performance button 136, a winning performance is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a winning/losing animation that foretells a jackpot. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 47(C), it is shown that the winning/losing effect is started when the entire period t14 of the operation valid period has elapsed. Actually, the winning/losing presentation is started in response to the operation of the presentation button 136 without waiting for the entire period t14 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(C) can be seen as an example in which the production button 136 is operated just before the entire period t14 has elapsed, but as described above, the winning/losing production also occurs when the production button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period. Since this is a performance that will be executed when the operation performance ends even if is not operated, this can also be seen as an example of a case where the performance button 136 is not operated within the operation validity period.

FIG. 51 (c12) is a diagram showing the decorative symbol display device 208 when the winning/losing effect is started. When the win/lose performance starts, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene where the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the ronin, slash each other, and an animation of one of them falling down at the end of the win/lose performance is displayed. If the main character, the lord, falls, it means he has lost and it is a prediction that he will lose, and if the villain, the ronin, falls, it will signal that he has won the jackpot. The notice of loss may be a notice of a confirmed loss (the expected degree of jackpot is 0%), or may be a notice of a likely loss (the expected degree of jackpot is 5%). Further, the notice of a jackpot may be a notice that the jackpot is confirmed (the expectation of the jackpot is 100%), or a notice that the jackpot is likely to be hit (the expectation of the jackpot is 95%). In addition, in the case of a notice of a high chance of losing or a notice of a high probability of a jackpot, the decorative symbols are changed again after the winning/losing performance ends, and the result may be reversed. In this example, an animation in which the main character, the lord, falls down (an animation that foretells that he will lose) is displayed.

In FIG. 51 (c13), the winning/losing effect has ended and a temporary stop display (fluctuation fluctuation display) of the combination of decorative symbols has started. In other words, while an animation of the main character's lord falling down is displayed, "Decoration 6" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a losing decorative symbol combination such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is displayed. Temporary stop is displayed. At this stage, the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol of the special symbol 1 is being displayed in a variable manner continues to be displayed.

After the temporary stop display of this combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is performed, the symbol variation display of special drawing 1 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 51 (c14). As shown, the combination "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as confirmed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "X" indicating a loss, and "767" is also stopped and displayed on the mini symbol.

In FIG. 47(D), during normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is started, and after the operation effect in which the continuous button button related image is displayed is executed, the development effect is performed and the pattern develops to SP reach 2. When the SP reach 2 effect is started, the reach selection effect is performed first, then the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 4 is started, and after the operation effect in which the normal lever related image is displayed is executed, the winning effect is performed. This is an example in which the jackpot combination of decorative symbols is determined and displayed. That is, in this example, it develops into SP reach 2 and hits the jackpot.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the specific example shown in FIG. 47(D) step by step. The diagram shown at (d1) in FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbol (d1) written in the timing chart of FIG. 47 (D), and the diagrams shown after (d2) are similarly, 47(D) is a diagram showing the state at the timing of the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(D). FIG. The following description will include explanations that overlap with the examples shown in FIGS. 48 to 51.

FIG. 52(d1) is also in the same state as the state shown in FIG. 12(1). That is, it is a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability, normal pattern low probability state), and is a state in which the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d1), decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is normal variation. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon h0 in a red display mode is displayed, and in the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, two pending icons h11 are displayed in a white display mode (default display mode). , h12 are displayed. Further, a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is provided at the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left corner.

In FIG. 52(d2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern changes only in the middle pattern display area 208b. The display continues.

In FIG. 52(d2-1), the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner only in the middle symbol display area 208b. In other words, the introduction performance has not yet started.

In FIG. 52(d3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction performance here is the performance of introduction performance pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 52(d3), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out, and the decorative pattern is no longer visible. However, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. While the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is being performed (period t15 shown in FIG. 47(D)), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 remains blacked out.

In FIG. 52(d4), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 1 is finished, and the operation effect is started.
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d4), the decorative pattern becomes visible, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues only in the middle pattern display area 208b. Further, an image related to the continuous press button is displayed at the lower left of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position) and a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN are displayed, and furthermore, "" with the same font size as the normal size is displayed. A black text display 136cC "Continuous Hit" is also displayed.

At the timing of FIG. 52(d4), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 136bN is in a state before it starts decreasing, but it starts decreasing immediately.

The production button 136 is repeatedly pressed within the valid operation period. In response to repeated hits of the performance button 136, if the development is successful, a development performance is started, and if the development is unsuccessful, a notification of the development failure is made. In addition, in the case of a development failure, the variation display of the decorative symbols may only be continued in the medium symbol display area 208b until the symbol variation period ends without notification of the development failure. The timing chart shown in FIG. 47(D) shows that the development effect is started when the entire operation valid period t16 has elapsed. In the case of a repeated tap operation, unlike a single press operation, the repeated tap operation is basically performed until the entire period t16 of the operation validity period has elapsed. Note that, exceptionally, the advanced performance may be started in response to the operation of the performance button 136 without waiting for the entire period t16 to elapse. The length of the total operation valid period t15 shown in FIG. 47(D) is the length of the total operation valid period t2 shown in FIG. 47(A) or the total length of the operation valid period shown in FIG. 47(B). It is longer than the length of t6, and is 1.6 times as long. However, the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 52(d4) is the same as the normal size blue meter display 136bN shown in FIG. 49(b4). It is the size (length).

FIG. 52(d5) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the development effect is started. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the characters "SP reach" are displayed below the decorative symbols whose variable display continues, and above it, the characters "Duel" are also displayed. In addition, in order to prevent you from knowing the type of SP reach in the development effect, even when it develops into SP reach 2, the text "It's a duel" is not displayed, and the development effect is the same as the development effect of SP reach 1. It may also be executed.

In FIG. 52 (d6), the development effect ends and the SP reach 2 period starts. That is, it develops from normal reach to SP reach 2. With the development to SP Reach 2, the expectation level of a jackpot based on the repeated button button related images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d4) was 30% as shown in FIG. 43(a). become. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d6), the opening effect of the SP reach 2 reach effect display is performed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right.

In FIG. 52 (d7), the ready-to-reach selection effect is started. The reach selection performance here is the same as the reach selection performance described using FIGS. 50(c7) to 50(c9), and first, an introduction performance is performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d7) displays an introduction effect in the ready-to-reach selection effect. The performance period of this introduction performance is the period t17 shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(D), which is shorter than the period t9 of introduction performance pattern 2 and even shorter than the period t1 of introduction performance pattern 1.

When this short introduction performance ends, the operation performance starts. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52(d8), a normal-sized button image 136aN is displayed that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position) when the operation performance is started. . Further, a blue meter display 136bN of normal size and a text display 136cT of "select by button operation" are also displayed in the same text size as the normal size. The decorative pattern display device 208 also displays a selection window CW in which a background image of the selected stage is displayed. In the timing chart of FIG. 47(D), the entire operation valid period in the reach selection effect is shown as t18. This entire period t18 also includes the valid operation period (t2, t6) when the normal button-related image before the development effect is displayed, and the operation valid period (t2, t6) when the normal button-related image or large button-related image before the cut-in effect is displayed. Although it is longer than the valid operation period (t4, t8) (for example, 1.2 times as long), it is shorter than the valid operation period (t10) when the repeated button button related image is displayed. Note that even if the entire operation validity period t18 has not elapsed, if the production button 136 is double-clicked, the stage of the background image displayed in the selection window CW at that time will be set. good.

In FIG. 52(d9), the entire period t18 of the valid operation period has elapsed, and the background image of the selected stage is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, the castle town stage has been selected.

In the following Figure 52 (d6-1), a duel has started on the castle town stage, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the ronin, standing at a distance from each other in the decorative pattern display device 208. An animation of what is happening is displayed. Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (d6-2), the situation is displayed in a large size, and the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7", which was displayed in a reduced size at the lower right, is displayed in the center part, The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 3(d6-3) displays an animation in which the distance between the main character, the lord, and the villain, the ronin, is shrinking.

FIG. 53 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 52.

Eventually, at the timing (d10) shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(D), the introduction effect based on the introduction effect pattern 4 is started. The timing (d10) shown in FIG. 47(D) is earlier than the timing (c10) shown in FIG. 47(C), and is the period from the start of SP reach 2 until the start of the introduction effect. It can be seen that the length is shorter in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(D) (example shown in FIG. 53) than in the specific example shown in the timing chart of FIG. 47(C) (example shown in FIG. 51) . The introduction performance in the example shown in FIG. 53 is the performance of introduction performance pattern 4. In the introduction performance of this introduction performance pattern 4, at first, as shown in FIG. A semi-transparent image that does not materialize appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 53 (d10-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. In FIG. 53 (d10-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the subsequent figure (d10-3), the two overlapping images are covered by the effect image ef and become temporarily invisible. Note that this effect image ef also covers a part of the main character's lord and the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7" on the left side, and these covered displays are also temporarily invisible.

In FIG. 53 (d11), the operation performance is started, and the effect image ef disappears on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the two overlapping images become a materialized lever image. That is, at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (d11), a normal-sized lever image 137aN is displayed that simulates the state in which the lever lamp 139 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, a normal size blue meter display 137bN and a normal size black text display 137cN reading "lever on" are also displayed, and normal lever-related images are displayed. The normal size lever image 137aN and the black text display 137cN that says "Lever On" cover a part of the decorative pattern of "Decoration 7" on the left, and the normal size blue meter display 137bN covers a part of the main character's lord. ing. Here, the expected degree of jackpot based on the normal lever-related image is 20% as shown in FIG. 46(a). The introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 4 is executed over the period from FIG. 53 (d10) to FIG. It can be seen that this is longer than the performance period of introduction performance pattern 2 (period t7 shown in FIG. 47(B)).

At the timing of FIG. 53 (d11), the operation effect has just started, and the blue bar portion in the blue meter display 137bN is in a state before starting to decrease, but the decrease starts immediately.

The operating lever 137 is operated within the valid operation period. In response to the operation of this operating lever 137, a winning/losing effect is started. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a winning/losing animation that foretells a jackpot. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 47(D), it is shown that the winning/losing effect is started when the entire period t20 of the operation valid period has elapsed. Actually, the winning/losing effect is started in response to the operation of the operating lever 137 without waiting for the entire period t20 to elapse. The specific example in FIG. 47(D) can be seen as an example in which the operating lever 137 is operated just before the entire period t20 has elapsed, but as described above, the winning/losing effect also occurs when the operating lever 137 is operated within the valid operation period. Since this is a performance that is executed when the operation performance ends even if the operation performance is not operated, it can also be seen as an example of a case where the operation lever 137 is not operated within the operation validity period.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 51 in which the normal button-related image is displayed, if the operation lever 137 is operated instead of the production button 136 within the operation validity period, the operation lever 137 is Although the win/loss effect is not started, in the example shown in FIG. 53 in which the normal lever-related image is displayed, if the effect button 136 is pressed once instead of the operating lever 137 within the operation validity period. Even if it is, the winning/losing presentation is started in response to the operation of the presentation button 136. The operation lever 137 has a larger amount of operation than the performance button 136, so even if some players feel that the operation is troublesome, the operation of the operation lever 137 can be replaced by the operation of the performance button 136. It will be resolved.

FIG. 53 (d12) is a diagram showing the decorative pattern display device 208 when the winning/losing effect is started. When the win/lose performance starts, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a scene where the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the ronin, slash each other, and at the end of the win/lose performance, an animation of one of them falling down is displayed. In this example, an animation of the enemy ronin falling down (an animation foretelling a jackpot) is displayed.

In FIG. 53 (d13), the winning/losing effect has ended and a temporary stop display (fluctuation fluctuation display) of the combination of decorative symbols has started. In other words, while an animation of the enemy ronin falling down is displayed, "Decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a jackpot combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed. Temporary stop is displayed. At this stage, the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner, and in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, a blinking "-" indicating that the symbol of the special symbol 1 is being displayed in a variable manner continues to be displayed.

After the temporary stop display of this combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is performed, the symbol variation display of special drawing 1 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 53 (d14). As shown, the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. When the confirmation display is performed, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as "○" representing a jackpot, and "777" is also stopped and displayed in the mini symbol.

As mentioned above, the length of the valid period is the same for the normal button related image (normal lever related image) and the large button related image (large lever related image), but the size (length) of the meter display is different. Therefore, the rate at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or increases) differs. In other words, the display area of the meter display of the large button related image (large lever related image) decreases faster than the meter display of the normal button related image (normal lever related image). Note that the size (length) of the meter display may be the same for the normal button related image (normal lever related image) and the large button related image (large lever related image).

In addition, the size (length) of the meter display is the same in the normal button-related image and the repeated button-related image, but the length of the validity period is different, so the speed at which the display area of the meter display decreases (or increases) This results in different speeds. In other words, the speed at which the display area decreases in the meter display of the repeatedly-hit button-related image is slower than that of the meter display in the normal button-related image.

In this embodiment, the development effect is executed during the normal reach period, but the development effect may be executed during the SP reach 1 period or the SP reach 2 period.

In addition, the introduction effect pattern 1 of this embodiment was an effect in which the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 was blacked out, but like the introduction effect pattern 2, it seems to imitate the effect button 136, but it is not materialized. It may also be performed using a semi-transparent image. Even in that case, it is preferable that the introduction effect pattern 2 has a longer effect period than the introduction effect pattern 1.

Further, in the introduction effect pattern 3 of the present embodiment, the wipe display wp spreads from the lower left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, respectively, and wipes in and wipes out, like a wipe effect. It is also possible to create a performance using a semi-transparent image that seems to imitate the operating lever 137 but does not materialize, as in performance pattern 4. Even in that case, it is preferable that the introduction effect pattern 4 has a longer effect period than the introduction effect pattern 3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation performance is executed in the special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state, but the operation performance is not limited to the special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state, It may also be executed in other states. For example, it may be executed in a state where the probability of special and high probability of regular and high probability is high. In this case, in the state of high probability of special and high probability of regular and high probability, the lever is lower than in the state of low probability of special and low probability of regular and low. It is only necessary to make it easier for related images to be displayed. In addition, the lever-related images are displayed even in the special pattern low probability, normal pattern, and high probability state, so that lever-related images are displayed more easily in the special pattern, low probability, general pattern, and high probability state than in the special pattern, low probability, regular pattern, and high probability state. The lever-related image may be displayed more easily in the special pattern, high probability, general pattern, high probability state than in the special pattern, low probability, general pattern, high probability state.

Next, a modification of FIG. 47(A) will be described. Also in this modification, the introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 1 is started during normal reach, and after the operation performance in which the normal button related image is displayed is executed, the development performance is performed and the SP reach 1 is developed. During SP reach 1, the introductory effect of introductory effect pattern 2 is started, and after the operation effect is executed in which a small button related image that confirms a jackpot is displayed, a cut in which a gold cut-in image is displayed. This is an example in which an in effect is performed and a jackpot combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed. Hereinafter, differences from the example of FIG. 47(A) will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 47(A) step by step.

The diagram indicated by the drawing number (a'2) in FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a state corresponding to the timing of the symbol (a2) written in the timing chart of FIG. The same applies to the figure shown in . That is, the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A) and the figure numbers in FIG. 54 correspond, ignoring the presence or absence of '.

In FIG. 54(a'2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 54(a'2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern is displayed only in the middle pattern display area 208b. continues to display fluctuations. Note that the variation icon h0 in this modification is displayed in red, indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is 50%.

In FIG. 54(a'2-1), the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner only in the middle symbol display area 208b.

In FIG. 54 (a'3), the introduction effect is started. The introduction performance here is the performance of introduction performance pattern 1, and the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is blacked out.

In FIG. 54(a'4), the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 1 is finished, and the operation effect is started. While in the normal reach state, a normal button-related image is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "Press" are displayed. has been done.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the operation validity period, and in FIG. 54 (a'5), the advanced effect is started and the words "SP Reach" are displayed.

In FIG. 54 (a'6), the development effect ends and the normal reach develops to SP reach 1.

In FIG. 54(a'7), the introduction performance according to the introduction performance pattern 2 is started, and the display button 136 of normal size is materialized, although it seems to imitate the normal size performance button 136, at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, respectively. A semi-transparent image appears. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 54 (a'7-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. In Figure 54 (a'7-2), an animation is displayed in which the two images overlap at the bottom left and become material, and are further reduced to a smaller size. A button image 136aB is displayed, and the operation effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 54(a'8) displays a small button image 136aS that is a reduced size of the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting position). Further, a small blue meter display 136bS of small size and a small black character display 136cS of the same small size "Press" are also displayed, and an image related to the small button confirming the jackpot is displayed. The length of the valid operation period here is the same as the length of the period t4 shown in FIG. 47(A). In the case of the small button image 136aS, it may be difficult to notice due to its small size, so if you shorten the operation validity period to match the image size, you may notice it too late and not be able to perform the operation in time. By not shortening the validity period, you can avoid not being able to perform operations in time.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, and in response to the operation of the effect button 136, the cut-in effect is started in FIG. 54 (a'9). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 54(a'9), a gold cut-in image CTG with golden edges is displayed so as to overlap with the SP reach effect display of SP reach 1. The expectation level of a jackpot for this gold cut-in image CTG is 80% as shown in FIG. 44(b), but the jackpot is confirmed because the small button image 136aS is displayed.

In FIG. 54 (a'10), the decorative pattern that had been reduced and displayed in the lower right corner starts to be displayed temporarily in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c, and "Decoration 7 - Ornament 7 - Ornament 7'', a winning combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation display). An animation of the lord holding his hand out in a peace sign is also displayed.

Then, in FIG. 54 (a'11), the jackpot combination of decorative symbols such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

Next, a modification of FIG. 47(B) will be described. In the modified example of FIG. 47(B), during normal reach, the introduction effect of introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and after the operation effect in which the red button related image is displayed is executed, the development effect is performed and SP reach 1 is reached. Develop. During execution of this introduction performance, a lower tray full error is detected, and a ball removal error notification is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. During SP reach 1, an introduction performance of introduction performance pattern 2 is started, and after an operation performance in which a large button related image is displayed is executed, a cut-in performance in which a red cut-in image is displayed is performed. Up to this point, the ball removal error notification remains displayed. Hereinafter, differences from the example in FIG. 47(B) will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 47(B) step by step.

The diagram indicated by the drawing number (b'1) in FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the state corresponding to the timing of the symbol (b1) written in the timing chart of FIG. 47 (B), and after (b'2) The same applies to the figure shown in . That is, the symbols written in the timing chart of FIG. 47(B) and the figure numbers in FIG. 55 correspond, ignoring the presence or absence of '.

In FIG. 55(b'1), decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative pattern here is normal variation.

In FIG. 55(b'2), a reach state is established from the normal fluctuation, and a normal reach period is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(b'2), "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c, and the decorative pattern is displayed only in the middle pattern display area 208b. continues to display fluctuations.

In FIG. 55(b'3), the introduction effect according to the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and a normal-sized effect button 136 is materialized at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, although it seems to imitate it. A semi-transparent image appears. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (b'3-1), the upper left image moves directly downward, and the upper right image moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, it is detected that the lower tray 128 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with game balls, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an error message BER indicating a ball removal error notification, ``Please remove the ball.'' are displayed on the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This error display BER is displayed so as to overlap with the right image that moves diagonally downward to the left. In FIG. 55 (b'3-2), the two images overlap at the lower left, and in the subsequent figure (b4'), the introduction effect of the introduction effect pattern 2 is completed and the operation effect is started. While in the normal reach state, a red button related image is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen. The red button related image displayed in this modification is slightly different from the red button related image described using FIG. 41. That is, the red button image 136aR that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits red light in the initial position is displayed, but instead of the red meter display 136bR in which the red bar portion is displayed, the normal button is displayed. A blue meter display 136bN in which a blue bar portion is displayed, which is displayed when a related image is displayed, is displayed. Blue is a color with high visibility, and even when displaying the red button image 136aR, high visibility is maintained by displaying the blue meter display 136bN, making it easier to convey the valid operation period to the player. However, if the button image is displayed in a color that has a high expectation of a jackpot (for example, a rainbow color with a 100% expectation of a jackpot), the meter display will also be displayed in that color (for example, a rainbow color). It is also possible to do so. In addition, instead of the red text display 136cR that indicates "Press" in red text, a black text display 136cN that indicates "Press" in black text, which is also normally displayed when a button-related image is displayed, is also displayed. . Note that even if the operation effect is started, the ball ejection lever 132 shown in FIG. 1 is not operated, and the error display BER remains displayed. The error display BER does not overlap the red button related image. Note that a normal button-related image may be displayed instead of the red button-related image, and the error display BER does not overlap with the normal button-related image either.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, and in FIG. 55 (b'5), the advanced effect is started and the characters "SP reach" are displayed. Even if the production button 136 is operated, the ball ejecting lever 132 is not operated, and the ball ejecting error notification remains displayed. Note that when the SP reaches 2, the character display "Duel" (see FIG. 52 (d5)) is overlapped by the error display BER.

In FIG. 55 (b'6), the development effect ends and the normal reach develops to SP reach 1. Due to the development to SP reach 1, the expectation level of jackpot due to the red button related image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 55(b'4) is not shown in FIG. 43(a). For example, it is 45%. The ball ejection lever 132 has not been operated yet, and the animation in which the lord's face is displayed in a large size, which is the reach effect display of SP reach 1, is overlapped by the error display BER.

In FIG. 55 (b'7), the introduction effect according to the introduction effect pattern 2 is started, and it appears that the effect buttons of a size larger than the normal size are imitated at the upper left and upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, respectively. A translucent image appears that does not materialize. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 55 (b'7-1), both the upper left image and the upper right image move toward the center. Then, in Figure 55 (b'7-2), an animation is displayed in which the two images overlap near the center, materialize, and expand to a larger size, followed by the same figure (b'8). Then, the large button image 136aB is displayed and the operation effect is started. Even during the introduction performance according to introduction performance pattern 2, the ball ejection lever 132 is not operated and the error display BER remains displayed, and semi-transparent images that have not materialized or animations that expand to a large size are overflowed by the error display BER. Wrapped.

When the operation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 55 (b'8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a large-sized enlarged image of the button lamp 138 emitting white light at the initial position (starting position). A button image 136aB is displayed. This large-sized button image 136aB is also overlapped by the error display BER. Further, a large-sized large blue meter display 136bB and a similarly large-sized large black character display 136cB saying "Press" are also displayed.

The effect button 136 is pressed once within the valid operation period, and in response to the operation of the effect button 136, a red cut-in image CTR with red edges is displayed in FIG. 55 (b'9). Up to this point, the ball ejection lever 132 has not been operated yet, and the red cut-in image CTR is also overlapped by the error display BER.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the situation when the front frame door 106 is opened while the operation performance is being performed.

FIG. 56(a) is the same situation as the timing (a4) in the timing chart of FIG. 47(A), in which the decorative pattern display device 208 starts the operation effect under the normal reach state, and the normal button related Image is displayed. That is, a normal-sized button image 136aN that simulates the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light at the initial position (starting point position), a normal-sized blue meter display 136bN, and a normal-sized black text display 136cN that says "Press" are displayed. has been done. Note that a voice saying "Press" is output from a speaker 120 (not shown).

On the left side of FIG. 56(a), a performance button 136 is displayed when an operation performance is being executed, and a button lamp 138 emits white light.

In FIG. 56(b), the front frame door 106, which is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable, is opened while the operation performance is being performed. That is, the front frame door 106 is opened within the operation validity period and before the production button 136 is operated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the operation performance is continued on the decorative pattern display device 208. However, when it is detected that the front frame door 106 has been opened, the button lamp 138 is restricted from emitting light, and the button lamp 138 is turned off. Even if the button lamp 138 is turned off, the button image 136aN displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 does not change and continues to be displayed imitating the state in which the button lamp 138 emits white light. Further, although the sound "Press" is no longer output from the speaker 120, the normal-sized black character display 136cN "Press" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 continues to be displayed. Furthermore, an error display DER is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 to notify that a front frame door opening error has occurred.

Even if the effect button 136 is operated while the front frame door 106 is open, response effects such as development effects are executed.

In addition to the audio output from the speaker 120, in the operation performance, lamps such as the game board lamp 442 shown in FIG. 4 are also lit or flashing, and when a front frame door opening error is detected, these lamps There are no restrictions on lighting, and the lights will continue to light up or flash. However, these lamps may also be regulated and turned off.

In addition, when a front frame door opening error occurs, the button lamp 138 is turned off, but instead of turning off the button lamp 138, instead of emitting light (in this case, white light emitting) in the operation effect, The light may be emitted in a manner that notifies that a front frame door opening error has occurred (a manner different from the light emission in the operation effect).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 55 (b'-3-1), when a lower tray full error is detected, the light emission of the button lamp 138, the sound output of the speaker 120, the game board lamp 442, etc. Light emission regulation is not performed, and when the effect button 136 is operated, a response effect such as a cut-in effect is executed.

Above, we have described several examples in which operation effects are performed by operating the effect button 136 and the operation lever 137. However, when the number of reserved special drawings accumulates to a predetermined number (for example, three), the effect button 136 may vibrate. There may be. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of special symbols are reserved, the production button 136 does not vibrate, but the decision button 1930, the upper button 1910, or the lower button 1920 may vibrate.

Next, a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be explained using FIG. 57. Here, FIG. 57 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 57), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is designed to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57, a suitable number of symbols are printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 1013, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57 has three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 1010 to 1012 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 1014 that becomes valid. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line becomes valid, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line will become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, Five lines, including the down winning line and the right up winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he is playing a bonus game. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the medal input button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are input when the medal input button 1031 is pressed, and three coins are input when the medal input button 1032 is pressed. It is now ready to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 will also be referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1041 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. It is. The stored medal number display 1025 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57, the stored coin count display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout coin count display 1027 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1041 or when the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key is inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 has a built-in button lamp. This chance button 1100 is an operation means corresponding to the production button 136 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. The state may be changeable during the validity period.

The information display button unit 1050 is composed of a plurality of buttons such as an up button, a down button, a left button, a right button, an OK button, and a cancel button. It functions as an operation button for calling up a menu (for menus), or as an operation button for adjusting the speaker volume or the light intensity of various lamps. The information display button unit 1050 is an operation means corresponding to the operation key unit 190 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Furthermore, a production lever 1046 is provided on the right side of the information display button unit 1050. The production lever 1046 can perform operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057, and a lever lamp is arranged inside. This production lever 1046 is an operating means corresponding to the operating lever 137 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

A title panel 1062 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 1036 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 1060 is disposed at the top of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided at the top of the presentation device 1060. This production device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen appears oddly shaped. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Further, although the present invention has been exemplified as a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game machine, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a junk ball game machine, a smart ball, etc.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 57, the predetermined conditions for music selection include winning the n-th consecutive bonus, winning the bonus by matching specific symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), and Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on the winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT, winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of additional games, An example of this is winning an AT that has the same combination of roles.

Further, the jackpot game state in the pachinko machine 100 is a bonus game state, an ART state, an AT state, etc. in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. In addition, when the jackpot game state is changed to the bonus game state, the time-saving game state becomes the ART state, AT state, etc., and when the jackpot game state is set to the ART state, it becomes the AT state, RT state, etc. .

In the above description,
“A first operation means [for example, the production button 136],
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a first operation image [for example, a button image imitating a normal size button such as a button image 136aN or a red button image 136aR, or a black text saying "Press" in an operation performance using the first operation means. 136cN, red text display 136cR, a normal size text image that promotes an operation or indicates the type of operation, or a combination of a button image and a text image].
The display means displays a second operation image [for example, a large button image 136aB or a large black character display 136cB, or a large size combination of a large button image 136aB and a large black character display 136cB] in an operation performance using the first operation means. is a means that can display images of
The second operation image is an image with a display size of a first magnification [for example, 2 times as shown in the table of FIG. 41] that is larger than the display size of the first operation image,
The length of the second operation validity period is the length of a second multiplier of the length of the first operation validity period,
The second operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed,
The first operation valid period is a period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed,
The second magnification is a smaller magnification than the first magnification [for example, 1x shown in the table of FIG. 41],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, when a second operation image larger than usual is displayed, if the operation validity period is made longer at the same magnification as the image magnification, the operation will not be effective because it will make the player feel uncomfortable. By making the length of the period smaller than the magnification of the image, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort. Further, it is possible to prevent redundant presentations for players who do not perform operations.

Note that the second operation image may be an enlarged image of the first operation image, or may be an image prepared separately from the first operation image.

Further, the operation effect in which the first operation image is displayed and the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed may be the same effect (common effect), or may be different effects (the former is the first operation effect). (the latter being a second operation performance).

Further, the length of the second operation validity period may be the same as the length of the first operation validity period. That is, the value of the second magnification may be 1.0.

Also,
``The display means is configured to display a third operation image [for example, a black text display 136cC saying "repeat press" or a black text display 136cL "long press" in an operation performance using the first operation means, or to display a third operation image [for example, a black text display 136cL indicating "long press"] is a means that can display a normal-sized character image representing
The third operation image is an image with a display size that is the second magnification [for example, 1x] of the display size of the first operation image,
In the operation performance in which the third operation image is displayed, the length of the third operation valid period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid is longer than the length of the second operation valid period. is the length of the magnification of
The third magnification is a magnification larger than the second magnification [for example, 1.6 times as shown in the table of FIG. 41],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the third magnification may be smaller than the first magnification.

Also,
“The display means displays, together with the first operation image, an image related to the first operation validity period [for example, blue meter display 136bN, red meter display 136bR],
The display means displays an image related to the second operation valid period [for example, large meter display 136bB] together with the second operation image,
The display means displays an image related to the third operation validity period [for example, blue meter display 136bN] together with the third operation image.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with a second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137, the upper button 1910, the lower button 1920, or the determination button 1930],
The second operating means is a different operating means from the first operating means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``The first operation means is such that the amount of operation from the reference position, which is the non-operation position, to the end point position, which is the position of the operation end point, is the first operation amount [for example, refer to the arrow shown in FIG. 40(a)]. It is a thing,
The second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] has a second operation amount [for example, see the arrow shown in FIG. 40(c)],
the second manipulated variable is greater than the first manipulated variable;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Further, the display size of the second operation image [for example, the large button image 136aB or the large black text display 136cB, or a large-sized image of a combination of the large button image 136aB and the large black text display 136cB] is the same as that of the first operation image. [For example, the display size of the button image 136aN or the black text display 136cN saying "Press" or a combination of the button image and the text image] is n times (n>1) [for example, twice as shown in the table of FIG. 41]. The first operation image suggests the degree of expectation that a special game (for example, a jackpot) advantageous to the player will be executed, and the second operation image also suggests the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation suggested by the second operation image is m times (n>m>1) the degree of expectation suggested by the first operation image [for example, the table in FIG. In the table a), it is 1.8 times]. For example, n=2 and m=1.8. By increasing the display size of the operation image, it is possible to make the expectation level seem higher than the actual expectation level.

Further, while the second operation image [for example, the large button image 136aB or the large black text display 136cB, or a large-sized image of a combination of the large button image 136aB and the large black text display 136cB] is being displayed, the first operation means [for example, , production button 136] is operated, a suggestive production that suggests the level of expectation [e.g., a cut-in production, a win/loss production] may be executed, but a production that does not suggest the level of expectation [for example, a development production] , reach selection effect] is never executed. On the other hand, when the first operation means is operated while the first operation image [for example, the button image 136aN, the black text display 136cN saying "Press", or a combination of the button image and the text image] is displayed, the suggestion effect is displayed. In some cases, a performance that does not suggest the level of expectation is performed. Further, there may be an operation performance in which the first operation image is displayed and a performance that does not suggest the expectation level, or a case in which the first operation image is displayed and a performance that does not suggest the expectation level is executed. In a certain operation performance, the length of the first operation valid period [for example, t12 shown in FIG. 47(C) or t18 shown in FIG. For example, it is made longer than t8] shown in FIG. 47(B). Note that the introduction performance performed before the start of this operation performance [for example, the introduction performance performed during the period t11 shown in FIG. 47(C), or the introduction performance performed during the period t17 shown in FIG. 47(D)] The effect period is shorter than the second introduction effect performed before the start of the operation effect in which the second operation image is displayed [for example, the introduction effect performed during the period t7 shown in FIG. 47(B)]. Short or prone to becoming short. When the first operating means is operated in an operation effect in which the second operation image having a relatively large display size is displayed, the suggestion effect is executed in conjunction with the display size, and the game is played. In some cases, the expectation that the player will have an advantage increases. However, by not displaying any display that does not suggest the degree of expectation, it is possible to prevent the misperception that the player has a high expectation that the player will have an advantage, while also achieving the first point. Since the operation validity period is long, it is possible to prevent the first operation means from being operated in time.

Furthermore, the second introduction performance [for example, the introduction performance performed during the period t7 shown in FIG. 47(B)] is better than the first operation image [for example, the normal A button image imitating a size button, a normal-sized character image that promotes an operation or indicates the type of operation, such as a black character display 136cN saying "Press" or a red character display 136cR, or a combination of a button image and a character image] are displayed. Although the presentation period is longer or tends to be longer than the first introduction presentation performed before the start of the operation presentation [for example, the introduction presentation performed during the period t3 shown in FIG. 47(A)], the second introduction presentation The length of the valid operation period [for example, t8 shown in FIG. 47(B)] and the length of the first valid operation period [for example, t4 shown in FIG. 47(B)] are the same. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid creating a sense of discomfort), the length of the operation validity period is the same, but the introduction effect of the operation effect in which the second operation image with a relatively large display size is displayed (the above-mentioned second operation image) is By lengthening the second introduction effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the second operation image to be displayed.

Further, the first operation image may be displayed in a first color [e.g., white] (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), or in a second color [e.g., red]. (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), and whether it is the first case or the second case, the period image related to the first operation effective period [for example, meter display] image of the bar portion] are the same color [for example, FIG. 55 (b'4)]. The same color is a color with high visibility, and whether in the first case or the second case, by displaying the period image regarding the first operation effective period in the same color, High visibility is maintained, and the effective period of operation can be easily communicated to the player. However, when the first operation image is displayed in a third color [eg, rainbow color], the color of the period image changes [eg, changes to the third color (rainbow color)].

The display means may display a fourth operation image [for example, a reduced image of a button image, a reduced image of an operation promotion image, or a combination of a button image and an operation promotion image] in an operation performance using the first operation means. The fourth operation image is an image having a display size that is a fourth magnification (for example, 0.8 times) of the display size of the first operation image. The fourth magnification value may be less than 1, and the fourth operation image may be a reduced image of the first operation image. In this case, the display size is as follows: fourth operation image < first operation image < second operation image, and the size of the expectation is as follows: first operation image < second operation image < This becomes the fourth operation image. On the other hand, in the operation performance using the first operation means, the length of the fourth operation valid period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid is the same as the length of the first operation valid period. It is also the same as the length of the valid operation period [for example, FIG. 54 (a'8)]. In the case of the fourth operation image, it may be difficult to notice, so if you shorten the operation validity period according to the image size, the operation may not be completed in time. prevent it from being delayed.

Furthermore, the first period image related to the first operation valid period [for example, blue meter display 136bN] and the second period image related to the second operation valid period [for example, large meter display 136bB] are also displayed in the display size are different. Both the first period image and the second period image are images representing the remaining time of the valid operation period or the elapsed time of the valid operation period [for example, an image of a bar portion of a meter display]. The rate of change, such as the rate at which the remaining time decreases or the rate at which the elapsed time increases, is different between the first period image and the second period image, which have different display sizes. For example, the speed at which the display area of the meter image decreases and the speed at which it increases are different. When the length of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period are the same length, and the display size of the second period image is larger than the first period image. In this case, the rate of change is faster in the second period image than in the first period image. However, the first period image and the second period image may have the same display size and the same rate of change.

Further, an error display [for example, an error display BER such as "Please remove the ball"] is displayed on the upper layer, and an error display [for example, a button image 136aN or a black text display 136cN saying "Press" or a button image] is displayed on the upper layer. and character image combination] [for example, FIG. A large size image of a combination of display 136 cB] is overlapped [for example, FIG. 55 (b'8)].

Further, when a predetermined error [for example, a door opening error] is detected, a part of the operation performance is regulated [for example, light emission regulation, sound output regulation, etc. of the first operating means]. The operation of the operating means is valid. Further, if another certain error [for example, lower tray full error] is detected, the operation performance is not restricted and the operation of the first operation means is also effective [for example, FIG. 55 Example shown in].

Furthermore, when the second operation image is displayed, the first operation means vibrates at a higher rate than when the first operation image is displayed.

In the above description,
“A first operation means [for example, the production button 136],
a second operating means [e.g., operating lever 137];
A game machine comprising:
The first operation means has a first operation amount [e.g., the arrow shown in FIG. 40(a)] from a starting point position that is an initial position before operation to an end point position that is an end point position of the operation. and
The second operation means is such that the operation amount is a second operation amount [for example, the arrow shown in FIG. 40(c)],
the second manipulated variable is greater than the first manipulated variable;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

By providing operating means with different operation amounts, it is possible to provide variations in the operation performance using the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the operation amount is the maximum operation amount of each operation means.

Also,
``Production means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, button lamp 138, lever lamp 139, upper presentation device 2, lower presentation device] including at least a display device [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] device 3, side direction device 4, etc.],
The display means is capable of displaying a first operation promotion image [for example, a button image 136aN, a blue meter display 136bN, a black text display 136cN, or a normal button-related image] that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
The display means is capable of displaying a second operation promotion image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN, the black text display 137cN, or the normal lever-related image] that prompts the operation of the second operation means,
The effect means is configured to generate an expectation level [for example, Suggestive effects (e.g., cut-in effects, win/loss effects, dialogue preview effects) that suggest the level of expectation of a jackpot may be carried out.
The production means produces a suggestive production that suggests the level of expectation when the second operation means is operated while the second operation promotion image is displayed (e.g., a cut-in production, a win/loss production, a speech preview production). may be carried out,
The first operation promotion image also suggests the expectation level [for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 44(a), 10% shown in the table of FIG. 46(a)],
The second operation promotion image also suggests the expectation level [for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 44(a), 20% shown in the table of FIG. 46(a)],
the degree of expectation suggested by the second operation promotion image is higher than the degree of expectation suggested by the first operation promotion image;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By increasing the amount of operation of the second operating means for which the expectation level is high, the higher the expectation level is, the more responsive the operation becomes, which may improve the interest of the game.

Note that the degree of expectation suggested by the first operation promotion image [for example, 10% shown in the table of FIG. 44(a), 10% shown in the table of FIG. 46(a)] and the first operation The expectation level suggested by the suggestion performance executed by operating the first operating means while the promotion image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation level shown in the table of FIG. 44(b), the jackpot in the win/loss performance It is different from "Confirmed (100%)" and "Confirmed loss (0%)". That is, the degree of expectation suggested by the suggestive effect may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation suggested by the first operation promotion image. Note that there may be a case where the expectation levels of both parties are the same.

Furthermore, the degree of expectation suggested by the second operation promotion image [for example, 20% shown in the table of FIG. 44(a), 20% shown in the table of FIG. 46(a)] and the second operation The expectation level suggested by the suggestion performance executed by operating the first operating means while the promotion image is displayed [for example, the jackpot expectation level shown in the table of FIG. 44(b), the jackpot in the win/loss performance It is different from "Confirmed (100%)" and "Confirmed loss (0%)". That is, the degree of expectation suggested by the suggestive effect may be higher or lower than the degree of expectation suggested by the second operation promotion image. Note that there may be a case where the expectation levels of both parties are the same.

Furthermore, the suggestive effect executed when the first operating means is operated and the suggestive effect executed when the second operating means are operated are the same effect (common effect) [for example, a cut-in effect]. (notice), or may be different performances (the former being a first suggestion production [for example, a cut-in notice], and the latter being a second suggestion production [for example, a winning/losing notice]).

Further, the first operation promotion image is an image displayed in an operation effect using the first operation means. The second operation promotion image is an image displayed in an operation performance using the second operation means.

Also,
``The production means operates the first operation means [for example, production button 136] while displaying the second operation promotion image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN, the black text display 137cN, or the normal lever-related image]. ] is operated, the above-mentioned suggestion effect [for example, win/loss effect] may be executed,
The production means is configured to cause the second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] while displaying the first operation promotion image [for example, the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN, the black text display 136cN, or the normal button related image]. Even if is operated, there is no case where the above-mentioned suggestion effect [e.g., win/loss effect] is executed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the operation of the first operation means while the second operation promotion image is displayed is valid, but the operation of the second operation means while the first operation promotion image is displayed is invalid. .

For players who are looking for an operating means with a responsive operation, the second operating means can provide an operation with a moderately large amount of operation, and the first operating means, which has a small amount of operation, can be provided with an appropriate amount of operation. By making it possible to use the second operating means in place of the second operating means, which requires a large amount of operation, it is possible to alleviate the discomfort of the player who finds operations that require a large amount of operation troublesome.

Note that the second operating means has a larger amount of operation than the first operating means, so the player may find it troublesome to operate. It can be substituted by operating the operating means.

Also,
“The display means is capable of displaying the first operation promotion image in a first mode [for example, the mode of a normal button-related image],
The display means is capable of displaying the first operation promotion image in a second mode [for example, a mode of a large button related image],
The first operation promotion image of the second aspect is an image with a display size that is a first magnification [for example, twice] of the display size of the first operation promotion image of the first aspect,
The length of the operation valid period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid when displaying the first operation promotion image of the second aspect [for example, the length of the period t8 in FIG. 47(B) ] is the length of the valid operation period during which the operation of the first operating means is valid when displaying the first operation promotion image of the first aspect [for example, t2 in FIG. 47(A) or the length of the period t4 or the length of the period t6 in FIG.
The second magnification is a smaller magnification than the first magnification.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the operation validity period is a period that starts before the first operation promotion image is displayed, regardless of whether it is the second aspect or the first aspect. It may be a period during which the first operation promotion image is displayed, or it may be a period including a period after the first operation promotion image is displayed. . That is, it is sufficient that the period includes at least the period during which the first operation promotion image is being displayed. Further, the length of the operation valid period during which the operation of the first operation means in the production in which the first operation promotion image of the second aspect is displayed is the first operation promotion period of the first aspect. The length may be a second multiplier of the length of the valid operation period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid in the production in which the operation promotion image is displayed. If the value of the second magnification is 1.0, the lengths of both valid operation periods are the same.

Also,
``Equipped with a third operation means [for example, the upper button 1910 or the lower button 1920],
The third operation means is such that the operation amount is a third operation amount [for example, the arrow shown in FIG. 40(b)],
the third manipulated variable is smaller than the first manipulated variable;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
"The gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Furthermore, the second introduction performance performed before the start of the operation performance in which the second operation promotion image is displayed [for example, the lever introduction performance performed during the period t19 in FIG. 47(D)] is better. The presentation period is longer than the first introduction presentation performed before the start of the operation presentation in which the first operation promotion image is displayed [for example, the button introduction presentation performed during the period t13 in FIG. 47(C)]. Or it tends to get longer. However, in the operation effect in which the first operation promotion image is displayed, the length of the first operation valid period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid [for example, the period t14 in FIG. 47(C) length] and the length of the second operation valid period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid in the operation performance in which the second operation promotion image is displayed [for example, t20 in FIG. 47(D) the length of the period] are the same. In order to maintain fairness (to avoid creating a sense of discomfort), the length of the operation validity period is the same, but the introduction effect of the operation means with a large amount of operation is made longer, so that the operation means with a large amount of operation can be operated. preparations can be made and operations can be prevented from being delayed.

Also, the display mode [e.g., color or size] of the image related to the first operation effective period [e.g., blue meter display 136bN] and the display mode [e.g., color or size] of the image related to the second operation effective period [e.g., blue meter display 137bN]. The display mode [for example, color or size] is also the same.

It also includes a firing operation means [for example, the ball firing handle 134 shown in FIG. 1] that is operated when firing a game ball, and the second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] is the first operation means. [For example, the effect button 136] is provided closer to the firing operation means. The second operating means is provided on the side of the firing operating means because it becomes a hindrance to opening the door (for example, the front frame door 106).

Further, the second operation means [for example, the operation lever 137] is operated while the second operation promotion image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN, the black text display 137cN, or the normal lever-related image] is displayed. Then, although the suggestive effects (for example, cut-in effect, win/loss effect) may be executed, effects that do not suggest the level of expectation (for example, reach selection effect) may not be executed. On the other hand, when the first operation means [for example, the production button 136] is operated while the first operation promotion image [for example, the button image 136aN, the blue meter display 136bN, the black text display 136cN, or the normal button related image] is being displayed, Then, the suggestive effect may be executed, or the effect that does not suggest the expectation level may be executed. When operating the second operating means, which has a relatively large amount of operation, the suggestive effect may be executed in return for performing a large amount of operations, but the effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the operation is troublesome.

Further, the operation performance that causes the second operation means to be operated continuously is not executed. Since it is troublesome to continuously operate an operating means that requires a relatively large amount of operation, it is preferable not to provide an operation effect that allows continuous operation.

Further, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of reservations is accumulated, the first operation means [for example, the effect button 136] may vibrate. Alternatively, when a predetermined number (for example, three) of reservations is accumulated, the first operation means does not vibrate, but the third operation means [for example, the decision button 1930, the upper button 1910, or the lower button 1920] vibrates. There may be cases.

Moreover, it is better to display the second operation promotion image [for example, the lever image 137aN, the blue meter display 137bN, the black text display 137cN, or the normal lever-related image] than the first operation promotion image [for example, the button image 136aN , the blue meter display 136bN, the black text display 136cN, or the normal button-related image] is displayed at a higher rate than the first operating means [for example, the production button 136] vibrates at a higher rate.

Further, the first operating means [for example, the effect button 136] may be one in which the amount of operation may change. That is, the first operation means may be capable of taking a state where the amount of operation is large and a state where the amount of operation is small.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, modifications, and various examples described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, modifications, and various examples. It may also be applied to In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc., may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. Even when applied to the world, it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a game machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating drum game machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 90. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 to 90 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 58 to 90, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 90, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 to 90.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 58. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and is provided with a main body open sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening 116. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. Note that in this embodiment, a device whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Also provided is a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 that detects when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes an upper tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for ejecting game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, A ball ejection lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box), and a ball discharge lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128, into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box); A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices according to the player's operation, and a chance button lamp that is built into the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. 138, a ball lending operation button 140 that instructs a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game parlor to lend balls, and a return operation button 142 that instructs the card unit to return the player's balance. It also includes a ball lending display section 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110 shoots a game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player. This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the gaming area 124 is not shown in FIG. 58, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 60.

FIG. 59 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 58 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 62). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 receives a predetermined amount of Based on the fulfillment of the conditions, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the grant conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 62) that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158 that stores the main board 156 that configures the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 62) that performs control processing for the overall game. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 62) that performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 62) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls). 62) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls (see FIG. 62). A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the game equipment (see Figure 62), and a power switch that constitutes a power supply control section 660 (see Fig. 62) that supplies power to various electrical game machines and turns the power on and off by operation by a game store clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode allows setting at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities. can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 70(A), the accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. Note that in this embodiment, no settings are provided, but a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of settings are provided and the jackpot probability etc. are changed depending on the settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a portion of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 60(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left, and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side is sometimes called the front or front, and the back side is sometimes called the back or rear.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201. If detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the gaming area 124, and as shown in FIG. 60(b), on the main control lamp board 254, a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol Display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, normal symbol retention lamp 216, first special symbol retention lamp 218, second special symbol retention lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp An RD, a right-handed lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performances, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) display, a leaf display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and in this embodiment is configured with two LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment are configured by two LEDs.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation games are held until a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do so. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, the special symbol variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, one). This makes it possible.

Further, the high probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state. The electric support mode lamp RD is a lamp for indicating that the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is shortened and that the blade member 232a of the electric tulip described later is in the electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. The right-hand hitting display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain benefits by playing right-handed, in a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, and an electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball entrance openings, for example, general prize winning openings 226a, 226b, a regular symbol starting opening 228, and a first special symbol starting opening 230 are arranged, and the gaming area 124 A variable prize winning device 2340 is provided at the lower right of the screen.

One or more general winning holes 226a and 226b are provided at appropriate locations in the gaming area 124. Here, the general winning hole placed on the left side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as the general winning hole 226a, and the general winning hole placed in the variable winning device 2340 is referred to as the general winning hole 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a, 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the ball has won in the general winning openings 226a, 226b, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls) are generated. The ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The players can freely take out the balls discharged onto the upper tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. In this embodiment, when a plurality of general winning holes are provided, the ball entering may be detected by a separate ball detection sensor, or each of the plurality of general winning holes may be detected by a separate ball detection sensor. The ball paths that guide the played game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes are provided on the right side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. However, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. The balls that entered the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one installed in Unlike the balls that enter the general prize openings 226a and 226b, the balls that have passed through the regular game start opening 228 are not discharged to the game island side, but when they enter, a predetermined number of balls (for example, one) are ejected. In addition to paying out the prize balls, the game balls that have entered may be guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

The first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200 in this embodiment. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into the first special figure starting port 230, it drives a payout device 152 (described later) and transfers a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls) to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time as being ejected, a special symbol fluctuation game using the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The ball that entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting hole 230, when the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting hole 230. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of the special figure 2 is started in priority to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification is sometimes referred to as a "special 2 priority variable machine"). has been done. This first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region whose size does not change.

The second special figure starting port 232 is constituted by an electric tulip (electric tube), and only one is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230, and is equipped with a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed left and right. 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and when a winning symbol is won in the regular symbol variation game and the regular symbol display device 210 stops displaying the winning symbol, the blade member 232a is activated at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, one ball) of balls into the upper tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time, a special figure fluctuation game using the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that enters the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the regular game starting hole 228 (due to a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the regular game starting hole 228 when the game ball is hit to the left. . Therefore, while the player is playing left-handed, there is no chance of winning the normal pattern variation game, and therefore, there is no opening or closing of the blade member 232a in principle. On the other hand, if the ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the normal pattern starting port 228, so the blade member 232a may open and close due to winning in the normal pattern fluctuation game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the left hand, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the right hand.

Next, the configuration of the variable prize winning device 2340 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the variable prize winning device 2340. Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram explaining the internal structure of the variable winning a prize opening 2340, and FIG. 61(a) is a diagram showing that the V shutter 2352a is in a closed state, and FIG. 61(b) is a diagram showing that the V-shutter 2352a is in an open state. In addition, in FIG. 61, in order to easily explain the internal structure of the variable prize winning device 2340, the decorative member 2340b is shown transparently.

The variable winning device 2340 has a flat plate shape, for example, and includes a mounting base 2340a for mounting on the front surface of the game board 200, and a decorative member 2340b mounted at a predetermined distance from the front surface of the mounting base 2340a. There is.

The mounting base 2340a has a rectangular opening formed approximately at the center near the upper end, and a plate-shaped first door member 2341a is attached to cover this opening. The lower end of the first door member 2341a is pivotally supported by the mounting base 2340a, and can be opened and closed forward by driving a solenoid (not shown) attached to the rear side of the mounting base 2340a. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334. In this embodiment, the first variable winning hole 234a is configured as described above. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first variable prize opening 234a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball that enters the first variable winning hole 234a is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a second variable winning opening 235a is formed between the mounting base 2340a and the decorative member 2340b as described below.

As shown in FIG. 61, the decorative member 2340b has a wall surface having a bottom surface 2340c, a top surface 2340d, and a side surface 2340e that stands upright from the back surface of the plate surface 2340f. In the decorative member 2340b, a first rolling area SP1 and a second rolling area SP2 in which game balls can roll are formed by the wall surface, and the open portion at the rear thereof is closed by the front surface of the mounting base 2340a.

The first rolling area SP1 is open at the top, and a plate-shaped shutter member 2351a is provided so as to be movable in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the open area. The shutter member 2351a is inclined slightly downward toward the front, and is also inclined from right to left, and is configured to be able to be displaced by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334 (see FIG. 62). That is, in this embodiment, when the shutter member 2351a is in a state (closed state) in which it advances forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the first rolling region SP1 is closed, and the first rolling region SP1 of the game ball is When entry into the rolling area SP1 is blocked and the game ball is in a backwardly retreated state (open state), the first rolling area SP1 is opened and the game ball enters the first rolling area SP1. Entry is permitted. Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of ribs 2340i protrude rearward at approximately equal intervals on the back surface of the decorative member 2340b so as to face the shutter member 2351a, and the shutter member is in a closed state. The game ball is configured to decelerate by colliding with the game ball rolling on the shutter member 2351a, so that the residence time of the game ball on the shutter member 2351a becomes longer. In this embodiment, since it is configured in this way, by opening the shutter member 2351a for a short time (for example, 0.06 seconds), a plurality of game balls mainly staying on the shutter member 2351a are simultaneously moved to the second variable speed. There are cases where it is possible to make the ball enter the winning hole 235a. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the shutter member 2351a is located on the back side of the decorative member 2340b, it is difficult for the player to see the shutter member 2351a.

A winning count switch SW1 that detects passage of a game ball is arranged at a position connecting the first rolling area SP1 and the second rolling area SP2, and enters the first rolling area SP1. When the game ball rolls on the bottom surface 2340c and is guided to the left, it passes through the win count switch SW1. The prize count switch SW1 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects passage of a game ball to the winning count switch SW1, it detects the winning to the second variable winning opening 235a, and also detects the winning number (for example, 10 balls) based on the winning. ) performs processing to pay out prize balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls that can be won by winning in the first variable winning hole 234a and the number of prize balls that can be won by winning in the second variable winning hole 235a are the same, but the number of prize balls that can be won by winning in the first variable winning hole 234a is the same. The number of prize balls that can be won when a game ball wins and the number of prize balls that can be won when a game ball wins a prize in the second variable winning hole 235a may be different.

The game ball that has passed the winning count switch SW1 is guided to the second rolling area SP2. The second rolling area SP2 is configured to have a V passage 2340g and a general passage 2340h arranged side by side in the left-right direction below, and to guide the received game ball to either passage and discharge it downward. . A V passage switch SW2 is disposed in the V passage 2340g, and the game ball guided to the V passage 2340g is configured to pass through this V passage switch SW2. In this way, the V passage 2340g can be said to be an area provided at a position where at least the game ball that has entered the second variable prize opening 235a can enter. The V passing switch SW2 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects passage of the game ball to the V passing switch SW2, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the V passage 2340g. Further, a plate-shaped V shutter 2352a is provided so as to be movable in the depth direction with respect to the mounting base 2340a so as to cover the upper part of the V passage 2340g. The V-shutter 2352a is configured to be movable by driving a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334. That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61(a), when the V-shutter 2352a is in a state (closed state) in which it advances forward with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball enters the V-path 2340g. The game ball that has entered the second rolling area SP2 is guided to the general passageway 2340h by rolling on the upper surface of the V-shutter 2352a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61(b), when the V-shutter 2352a is in a backwardly retracted state (open state) with respect to the mounting base 2340a, the game ball is not allowed to enter the V-path 2340g. , the game ball that has entered the second rolling area SP2 is guided to the V passage 2340g. Further, the general passage 2340h is provided with an ejected ball detection switch SW3, and the game ball guided to the general passage 2340h is configured to pass through this ejected ball detection switch SW3. The ejected bulb detection switch SW3 is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects passage of the game ball to the ejected ball detection switch SW3, it detects that the game ball has passed through the general passage 2340h.

In this embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the number of game balls passing through the winning count switch SW1 and the number passing through the V passing switch SW2 and the ejected ball detection switch SW3 can be used to determine the second variable winning of the game ball. By monitoring the in/out of the opening 235a, it may be possible to monitor illegal passing of game balls to the V passage 2340g. Specifically, the number of game balls detected by the winning count switch SW1 of the second variable winning hole 235a is counted as the number (IN number) accepted by the second variable winning hole 235a, and is stored in the RAM 308. On the other hand, the total number of game balls detected by each of the V passing switch SW2 and the ejected ball detection switch SW3 is counted as the number ejected from the second variable prize opening 235a (OUT number) and stored in the RAM 308. . Then, regarding these IN numbers and OUT numbers, for example, in the above-mentioned special electric combination remaining ball detection process, a process is executed to check whether the IN number and OUT number match, and if the IN number>OUT number, If the number of INs is less than the number of OUTs, it is determined that there is an excess amount of winnings, and if the number of INs is less than the number of OUTs, it is determined that the number of winnings is in excess of the number of outputs, thereby making it possible to determine a winning error. Examples of illegal acts include acts using balls with strings or game balls larger than the prescribed size (so-called large balls).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, due to the above-described configuration, only the game balls that have entered the second variable winning opening 235a can enter the V passage 2340g, and the gaming balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234a can enter the V passage. It is configured so that it cannot enter 2340g.

In this embodiment, for example, if a game ball passes through the V passage switch SW2 during a small winning game in which a small winning occurs and the second variable winning opening 235a is opened, the game ball becomes a jackpot and shifts to the jackpot game. It is possible to do so.

In this embodiment, by configuring as described above, for example, the second variable winning of game balls is determined by the number of passing game balls of winning count switch SW1 and the number of passing of game balls passing V passing detection switch SW2 and ejected ball detection switch SW3. By monitoring input/output to/from the mouth 235a, it may be possible to monitor fraudulent winnings. Examples of illegal acts include acts using balls with strings or game balls larger than regulations (so-called large balls).

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and controls the firing rod and the firing motor. The ball is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction conversion member 236, game nails, etc. Winning a prize in the second variable winning opening 235a) or starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232), or not winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or starting a regular drawing. It reaches the out port 240 only by passing through the port 228. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect passage of a game ball received in the ejected ball receiving port. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge path, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

In addition, a presentation device 2 is placed at the top of the game area 124, a presentation device 3 is placed at the bottom, and a presentation device 4 is placed on the left and right sides, respectively. Behind each presentation device 4, a presentation device 5, which will be described later, is arranged. In this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is impossible for game balls to enter the first variable winning hole 234a and the second variable winning hole 235a in the closed state, but it may be possible to win a prize, or at least in the open state. It suffices if it is difficult for game balls to enter.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 62. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also receives signals output from various sensors 320, including a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor that detects game balls passing through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and a lower tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular symbol display device 210, and a various status display section 328 (for example, To perform display control of the regular map holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-hand hitting lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) A drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting opening 232 as a normal electric accessory, and a door of the first variable prize opening 234a as a special electric accessory. It is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including a drive means for driving the member 2341a and the shutter member 2351a of the second variable prize opening 235a. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

Note that when the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230 at that timing, and transfers the latched value to the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 1. to be memorized. Furthermore, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control section, which will be described later), is started.

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Further, the configuration may be such that the ROM 406 is included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the production devices 2 to 5, etc., and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 that adjusts the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the presentation devices 2 to 5, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects presses of the presentation buttons 136 and various buttons that constitute the operation key unit 190. Output to basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (Video Display Processor) that reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control section 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface section 606. The payout control unit 600 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 receives control signals output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output by a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 and the control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper tray 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC power, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In this embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 connects the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500 with each other. Although power at a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and general symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed to stop. We will explain the types of special and regular maps. Here, FIG. 63(a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special pattern 1, FIG. 63(b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special pattern 2, and FIG. 63(c) shows the decorative pattern. FIG. 3(d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display pattern of a common map.

The special pattern 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, and the ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 causes some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. "Fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 causes a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. 2 fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 After lapse of time, the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in a row.

FIG. 63(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1. In this FIG. 63(a), six types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure F" are shown. In FIG. 63(a), the white portions in the figure represent lamps that are turned off, and the black portions represent lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, five types of jackpot symbols ("special pattern A" to "special pattern E") are prepared as the stop pattern mode of the special pattern. "Special drawing A" is a 3 round (R) jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing A" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends. , until the variable display of the special figure is executed 8 times, the control state becomes the special figure low probability regular figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "a time saving state"). In other words, the electric power support state is reached with eight time reductions. In addition, "Special drawing B" is a 3rd round (R) jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing B" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the time saving state a until the variable display of the special figure is executed four times. In addition, "Special drawing C" is a 3rd round (R) jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing C" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the time saving state a until the variable display of the special figure is executed twice. In addition, "Special drawing D" is a 3 round (R) jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing D" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes the time saving state a until the variable display of the special figure is executed once. In addition, "Special drawing E" is a 3rd round (R) jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing E" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the game does not shift to the time-saving state a, but enters the normal game state (special pattern low probability, normal pattern low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, five types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that only one type or multiple types of jackpot symbols other than the five types may be prepared. Further, a small winning symbol or a sudden time saving symbol may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, whether or not it is a jackpot in the special symbol variation game is determined by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol is determined by a software random number lottery. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, the game may shift to a time saving state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot, etc. Refers to the state. Although time saving will be described in detail later, a time saving state is referred to as a high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "probability state"), and a state that is not in a time saving state is referred to as a low probability state. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is only a state related to regular cards, and the "time saving state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to general cards and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is an electric support state and a normal rate high probability state. In a state with a high probability of a common figure, it is easier to win a variable game of a common figure compared to a state with a low probability of a common figure (a certain probability of a common figure). For example, the probability of winning a general figure fluctuation game is 0/100 (in other words, you will always lose) in a general figure low probability state (non-electronic support state), but in a general figure high probability state (electronic support state) ), it increases to 100/100 (that is, it is always a hit). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (general figure change short). For example, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is 10 seconds in the non-electric support state, but is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (the electric chew opening period is extended). For example, an electric chew open period of 0.2 seconds in the non-electric support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electrically supported state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open (the number of times the electrical chew is opened increases) than in the non-electrically supported state. For example, the blade member 232a that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one winning in the general figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds). open). By extending the opening period of the electric chute and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of the ball entering the special map 2 starting hole 232 increases. Note that the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-electric support state is maintained. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the following are performed: changing the regular figure, changing the regular figure, shortening the electric chew, extending the electric chew opening period, and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened. If any one of them is performed, the player will be in a state with a high advantage, and may be placed in an electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of an extension of the electric chew opening period or an increase in the number of electric chew openings, which increases the probability of a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, is performed, the electric chewing state may be set as an electric support state (time saving state). In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 starting opening 232 changes between the difficult winning state where it is difficult for game balls to enter and the easy winning state where it is easy for game balls to enter. This special figure 2 starting opening 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when "Special Figures A" to "Special Figures D" are stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game that is played after that, the electric support is supported until the special symbol fluctuation game is executed the number of times corresponding to the jackpot symbol. The state (a time saving state) is maintained, and thereafter it shifts to a non-electrical support state (general low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support is won (for example, "special map E"), the state does not shift to electric support after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "Tokuzu A" to "Tokuzu D" are stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to the Tokuzu low probability, normal to high probability state, and " When "special pattern E" is stopped and displayed, the control state changes to the special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. “Special figure F” is a losing symbol.

FIG. 63(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 2. This figure 63(b) shows six kinds of special symbols from "special symbol a" to "special symbol f", one of which is the jackpot symbol ("special symbol a"). ing. "Special drawing a" is a 9R jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing a" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to the jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the special drawing The control state becomes the time saving state a until the variable display is executed eight times, and then shifts to the non-electrical support state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot symbols, three types of stop symbols ("special pattern b" to "special pattern d") are prepared as small winning patterns. When the small winning symbol stops being displayed and becomes a small winning, the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning a prize opening 235a opens 12 times for 0.5 seconds after the symbol stops. That is, if you win a small hit with "Special Figure B", many game balls will easily enter the second variable winning hole 235a, making it possible to obtain many balls. Note that the opening time and number of openings of the shutter member 2351a can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, when a small hit is made, the V shutter 2352a opens, allowing the game ball to enter the V passage 2340g. Then, when the game ball that enters the second variable prize opening 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2 provided in the V passage 2340g, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game is started. In addition, in this embodiment, since the small winning game is counted as the first round, when the jackpot game is started, it will start from the second round. After the transition to the jackpot game, the round game in which the first variable winning hole 234a is opened is executed until the final round. Thereafter, when the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes the time saving state a until the variable display of the special symbol is executed eight times. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of rounds differs depending on the type of small winning symbol, and the "special pattern b" stops displaying and becomes a small winning, and the small winning occurs during the small winning game related to the small winning. In this case, the round game is executed until the 9th round, "Special drawing c" is stopped and displayed and it becomes a small hit, and if it becomes a jackpot during the small winning game, the round game is played until the 6th round. is executed, the "special figure d" is stopped and displayed, and it becomes a small win, and if a jackpot occurs during the small win game related to the small win, the round game is executed up to the third round.

Moreover, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a sudden time-saving symbol that transitions to an electric support state without transitioning to a jackpot. “Special symbol e” is a sudden time-saving symbol. In this embodiment, when the "special figure e" is displayed and the state shifts to the electric support state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "c time saving state"), the electric support state remains unchanged while the special figure variable game is played 200 times. It is maintained, and at the 201st time, it shifts to a non-electric support state (normal pattern low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, when the "special pattern e" is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the gaming state before the symbol stops is maintained, but in the electric support state, the "special pattern e" is stopped. If it is displayed, the c time saving state may be started. Also, multiple types of sudden time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of symbol fluctuation displays for maintaining the electric support state may be different depending on the symbol. For example, some of the multiple types of sudden time-saving symbols may be The number of times (for example, 600 times, etc.) may be greater than the number of symbol fluctuation displays (555 times) for which the play time is maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. “Special symbol f” is a losing symbol.

FIG. 63(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns in this embodiment: "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10". The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230 or the special pattern 2 starting port 232, that is, the first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, or the special pattern 2 starting port 230 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the starting port 232, each of the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208 In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... "Fluctuating display of symbols" may be performed. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 is for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, a stop pattern mode that is a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the non-electronic support state (special chart low probability normal chart low probability state or special chart high probability normal chart low probability state) in which the special chart 1 is mainly fluctuated, the fluctuation of the special chart 1 is In the electric support state (special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state or special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state) in which the decorative pattern is displayed fluctuating according to the display, and the special pattern 2 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the special pattern is The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display in FIG. On the other hand, in the non-electronic support state, even if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and only in the fourth symbol or the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the support state, even if the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and only the fourth symbol or the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in a variable manner.

When announcing a jackpot or small hit using the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, a decorative pattern in which three decorative patterns of the same even number are lined up is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. The combinations (for example, "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4", etc.) are stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying that the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 will stop displaying “special figure A”, “special figure a”, and “special figure b”, the symbol display area "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying that the "special map e" that suddenly shifts to time saving (c time saving) will stop displaying, "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Stop display. In addition, when notifying either the losing pattern of "special pattern F" or "special pattern f", a combination of decorative patterns other than the combinations of decorative patterns described above (for example, , loose stitches) are stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "fluctuating display of decorative patterns" to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the decorative pattern will be referred to as the variable display of decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuating decorative pattern display"). ). The variable display of decorative patterns is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 63(d) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of the ordinary symbol. There are two types of stop display modes of common symbols in this embodiment: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the normal pattern display device 210 causes the normal pattern display device 210 to alternately light up two LEDs arranged vertically. ``Fluctuating Display'' (Fluctuating Game of Common Figures). Then, after the variable time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the losing symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 63(d), the white part in the figure shows the location of the lamp that is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the lamp that is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed 555 times after the ram is cleared after the end of the jackpot or when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the electric support state until the variable display of the special symbol is executed 200 times. In the following description, this electric support state may be referred to as "play time" or "b-time saving state."

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "fluctuation display of a common symbol" until the stop display of the stop symbol mode of a common symbol may be referred to as a variable display of a common symbol.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 62 will be described using FIG. 64. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 62 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special figure symbol determination random value, and the like. Further, this RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random numbers, various judgment (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the reserved number of special symbols storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 contains special map start information divided into the maximum number of areas (four each for special map 1 and special map 2 in this example) in which the start of the winning/failure judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A storage section is provided, as well as a random value storage area for ordinary figures. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are made into one set and these starting information are stored one set at a time in each area in order of winning (order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 64 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that in this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value equivalent to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power cutoff (before power cutoff), and if it is not returned to the state before power cutoff (when the basic circuit 302 of main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state will return to the state before the power cut (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 59 was operated by a clerk at the game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the RAM clear switch 180 has been operated). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115). If it is determined that the setting is correct (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio/setting display 196 flash and indicate "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments on the setting monitor are incremented, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor are showing "6". When it does, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, and by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. Thereafter, after the settings are finalized, the setting values can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output. good. Further, in this embodiment, the settings are set in six stages from settings 1 to 6, but settings other than the six stages may be used, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Good too.

Further, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side, ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and if this power status information does not indicate suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (e.g. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0). (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Note that in this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command described later, is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the initialization process, a part of the storage area of the RAM 308 may be maintained in the state before the power cut without being initialized. The flags related to the number of time starts (TS) and the execution of play time (b time saving state), which will be described later, may not be cleared even if the settings are changed (including resetting the same settings). Further, even if the RAM is not cleared, only predetermined data such as the number of jackpot starts (TS) and flags related to the execution of play time (b time saving state) may be cleared. In this case, this predetermined data may be cleared arbitrarily or may be forcibly cleared.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the regular figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, respectively, are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 59 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 65. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 62 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger for main control. 2. Starts timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area partitioned for each sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned into the previous detection signal storage area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 62 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). (information indicating that), to the general winning openings 226a, 226b, the first variable winning opening 234a, the second variable winning opening 235a, the first special drawing starting opening 230 and the second special drawing opening 232. It is determined that the ball has entered the ball, or that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 228 or the jackpot generation gate 252. That is, it is determined that there has been a win to these winning holes 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b and these starting holes 230, 232, 228, 252. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal for the past three times in the first special figure starting hole sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting hole 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first It is determined that there has been a winning at the special figure starting opening 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winnings at the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence of the signal does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning into the first special symbol start opening 230. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, next time it will be determined whether it matches the entered award judgment pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the general figure winning random number value and the Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating winning random numbers has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random numbers for winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it is also determined that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and stopping display of symbols on the regular symbol display device 210, a symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined prize-winning presentation time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end presentation period, etc. Update timer.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 234a, 235a, 226a, 226b or the starting holes 230, 232, the number of winning balls is stored in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. Read the value of the area, add 1 to it, and set it in the original award ball count storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, multiple types of starting information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage section provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (pending order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. is the power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption information. The number of payout requests after conversion processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are alternately turned on and off. Performs drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of normal symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off so as to be in the display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the losing symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of two LEDs. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 63(d)) or the losing symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 63(d)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of a timer for managing stop time provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is set to open the blade member 232a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of a timer for managing the blade opening time provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening/closing drive solenoid (332) of the blade member 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general figure inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on as described later. When this general figure loss flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set "Normal map inactive" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general pattern fluctuation game and the second special pattern starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general pattern is inactive), and the pending general pattern fluctuation game is not controlled. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern fluctuation game is a win or a non-win by a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area mentioned above. A winning flag is set in the RAM 308 if the winning is determined. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a random value of the general figure timer, and based on the acquired random value of the general figure timer, the general figure display device 210 selects a normal figure from among a plurality of variable times. One time during which a figure is displayed in a variable manner is selected, and this variable display time is stored as a general figure variable display time in a general figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in the storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Subsequently, special figure pre-reading processing (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the starting information that has increased in each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and variation time before the validity determination process, and performs the preliminary determination. The result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined number of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 contains a 9R jackpot flag, a 3R jackpot flag, a 9R small hit flag, a 6R small hit flag, a 3R small hit flag, a c-time saving transition flag, a loss flag, a normal pattern probability fluctuation flag, etc. Flags are provided. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 9R jackpot flag is on, and the regular figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special pattern a, 9R shown in FIG. 63(b) is turned on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on, the special pattern b, 6R shown in FIG. 63(b) is turned on. The small hit flag is on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on, the special pattern c shown in Figure 63(b), the 3R small hit flag is on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on, ), the time-saving transition flags d and c shown in ) are on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, special pattern e shown in FIG. 63(b), and when the loss flag is on, special pattern f is selected, respectively The lighting/extinguishing drive control of the LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so that the display device 214 performs a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the 9R jackpot symbol (special symbol a), the 9R small prize symbol (special symbol b), the 6R small prize symbol (special symbol c), and the 3R small prize symbol (special symbol). d), one of the time-saving symbols (special symbol e) and the losing symbol (special symbol f) is displayed as confirmed. In this embodiment, the explanation is given using a special 2 priority changing machine as an example, but it may also be applied to a simultaneous changing machine that fluctuates and displays special figure 1 and special figure 2 at the same time, and in this case, the pachinko machine 100 , There is a case where the variable display of special figure 1 is performed while the variable display of special figure 2 is being performed, but if the jackpot symbol or small hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special symbol 2 variable display time has elapsed, Regardless of the lottery result of special figure 1, the lottery result of special figure 1 is discarded and the losing symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing of displaying the jackpot symbol of special figure 2. In addition, when the variable display of special figure 1 is performed during the variable display of special figure 2, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 Even if the small winning symbol is displayed, the variable display of the special figure 1 may be continued.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time saving times stored in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is present in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a small hit, the small hit flag is turned on. When the small hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is updated. Set the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. In order to do this, information indicating the winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 standby time management provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234a or the second variable winning opening 235a). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in the open state is output to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the shutter member 2351a) of the shutter member 235a, and the door opening time management provided in the RAM 308 Set information indicating the open period in the storage area of the timer. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is set in the closed state by the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a of the first variable winning opening 234a (the shutter member 2351a of the second variable winning opening 235a). It outputs the signal to be held and also sets information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (9 rounds, 6 rounds, or 3 rounds in this exemplary embodiment) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (e.g. 3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a timer for managing performance standby time provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the decorative symbol display device 208 to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended is displayed. Set information indicating the production standby period. In this embodiment, if the special pattern probability variation flag is set to ON and the regular pattern probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the probability variation flag and time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 are turned on, and the special pattern probability variation flag is set to ON. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF and the regular figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time reductions (for example, 8 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number provided in the RAM 308 is set to Turn on flag.

Time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of a jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, the state is in a high probability state (probability variation). In the high probability state of common symbols, the probability of winning in the common symbol fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the high probability state of common figures than in the low probability state of common figures. The state in which any of these ``Fuzu definite change'', ``Furuzu change shortness'', and ``Electric tulip expansion'' is set is called the ``den support'' (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the normal ball is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234a (second variable winning hole 235a) during the jackpot game. There is a problem that many game balls enter the starting port 232 in FIG. 2, and the number of game balls that can be obtained during a jackpot (number of balls played) increases, which increases the gambling nature. It is meant to solve problems. In addition, in this embodiment, since the prize ball number for winning the special figure 2 starting hole 232 is "1", the number of balls that come out during the jackpot game does not increase substantially, so during the jackpot game You can also leave the time saving flag on.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inoperable setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is suddenly shortened in time, the c time-saving shift flag is turned on. When this c-time saving transition flag is on, special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) Then, set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. At this time, the number of time reductions (for example, 200 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process during the special figure 1 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined number of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 Performs lighting/light-off drive control that repeatedly turns the LED on and off. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag, a loss flag, and a regular pattern probability fluctuation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 3R jackpot flag is on, the regular figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also on, special chart A to special chart D, 3R jackpot flag is on, regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, special chart E, and if the loss flag is on, special chart F. , performs lighting/extinguishing drive control of the LEDs constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 so as to be in each mode, and performs a setting indicating that the special figure 1 is being stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 displays any of the 3R jackpot symbols with electric support (special figures A to special figures D), the 3R jackpot symbols (special figure E), and the losing symbols (special figure F). Confirm display of one symbol.

In the above explanation, the special pattern 2 variable game with a high advantage is started with priority over the special pattern 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the reservation of special pattern 2 is prioritized and consumed over the reservation of special pattern 1. The special figure 2 priority fluctuation game was given as an example, but the special figure 1 fluctuation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special map 2 fluctuation game with a high advantage, and the hold of the special map 1 is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation game. It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is consumed with priority over reservation. In addition, without prioritizing either the special pattern 2 variable game with a high advantage or the special pattern 1 variable game with a low advantage, the special pattern variable game related to the reservation of each of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 will be entered into the starting opening prize. It may also be a starting opening winning order variation that starts sequentially.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is assumed that the lottery process or variable game regarding the suspension of the other special figure is not performed depending on the state of one special figure, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update A plurality of special symbols may be changed at the same time by performing processing and special symbol related lottery processing independently on special symbols 1 and 2 (simultaneous variation machine). In addition, in the case where a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special symbol, or the lottery results of each special symbol are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Furthermore, it may be a simultaneous variable machine in which the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game are played at the same time. In pachinko machines that are simultaneous variable machines, the variable display of special figure 2 may be performed while the variable display of special figure 1 is being displayed, but the jackpot symbol will stop being displayed at the timing when the variable display time of special figure 1 has elapsed. In this case, irrespective of the lottery result of the special pattern 2, the lottery result will be discarded and the winning pattern will be stopped and displayed on the special pattern 2 at the timing of the display of the jackpot pattern of the special pattern 1. In addition, if the losing pattern is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special pattern 1 variable display time has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of special pattern 2, the special pattern 2 will be displayed at the timing when the losing pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed. The lottery results may be discarded and the losing symbols may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the variable display of special figure 2 is being performed while the variable display of special figure 1 is being displayed, the lottery result of special figure 1 is discarded as described above at the timing when the variable display time of special figure 2 has elapsed. The symbols may be displayed in a stopped state.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time saving times stored in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the special symbol fluctuation display (sometimes referred to as special prize start (TS)) from the end of the jackpot and the special symbol low probability state until the jackpot occurs. The number of times is counted, and when the number reaches a predetermined number (555 times), the time saving flag is turned on, the predetermined number of times (200 times) is set to the number of time saving times, and the time saving state (b time saving state or "play time") ).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol for which the fluctuation display is to be stopped is special figure 1. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 1 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 settings To set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing special figure 2 standby time provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning hole 234a (second variable winning hole 235a)). A signal for holding the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) in an open state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) to open and close, and a door opening control signal provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set information indicating the open period in the storage area of the time management timer. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) is held in the closed state by the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 2341a (shutter member 2351a) of the first variable winning opening 234a and the second variable winning opening 235a. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 rounds) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the decorative pattern display device 208 In order to set the system to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed, information indicating the performance standby period is set in the storage area of the performance standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. do. In this embodiment, if the common pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time reductions (for example, 8 times, 4 times, 2 times, or 1 time) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308. , turns on the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 inactive setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special drawing related lottery process for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related drawing processing) is first performed (step S229), and then the special drawing related drawing processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) is performed (step S229). ) is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing is performed when the variable game of special figure 2 is not being performed, the state of special figure 2 is inactive, the state of special figure 2 is not in the jackpot game of either special figure 1 or special figure 2, and it is on hold. The starting condition is that the number of special figure 2 variable games being played is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random value storage area. . In the special drawing 1 related lottery process, neither the variable game of special drawing 1 nor special drawing 2 is being performed, the state of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is inactive, and the state of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is The starting condition is that you are not in any jackpot game, the number of special figure 2 variable games is not pending, and the number of pending special figure 1 variable games is 1 or more, special figure 1 random value storage It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value within the area.

The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this embodiment, in the time saving state, the notification of the winning result to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery based on the prize winning in the special figure 1 starting hole 230 is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting hole 230, and in the normal gaming state, The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning number is given priority over the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the prize winning in the special map 2 starting hole 232.

In the case of the special figure 2-related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (previously stored) pending position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Figure 2 (a set of winning random numbers and special drawing 2 random numbers) is obtained, and based on the special drawing 2 winning random number in the obtained special drawing 2 starting information, etc., using the validity judgment table stored in the ROM 306. A decision (judgment) is made as to whether it is a big hit, a small hit, a sudden time reduction, or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 using the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined validity judgment result. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined result of the judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of judgment of the judgment, the acquired random value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and Subtract 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You can do it like this.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the above-mentioned special figure status update process and special figure-related lottery process are configured so that special figure 2 is performed with priority over special figure 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2 may be performed independently, so that a plurality of special symbols may be varied at the same time.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command types (in this example form, basic command, winning opening command, out ball command, firing position command, special pattern fluctuation start command, special pattern fluctuation stop command, special pattern per start command, special pattern per end command, big prize) Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). information).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information such as various jackpot flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flag, loss flag, timer number selected in special figure related lottery processing, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol variation start command is set, stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of a special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flag, loss flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number specification command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds, etc. . When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a prize in the special drawing 1 starting hole 230, whether or not there is a winning in the special drawing 2 starting hole 232, and whether or not there is a winning in the first variable winning hole 234a. This includes the presence or absence of winnings, and the presence or absence of winnings in the second variable winning opening 235a. In the case of a prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage section. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, c time saving transition flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308, special drawing 1 related lottery processing, and special drawing 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small win flags, c time saving transition flags, loss flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figures that are on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure that is on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-described big winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described big winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (advance notice information, fake Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. , the special figure 2 display device 214, the display data to be output to the various status display sections 328, etc. are set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (if power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (if power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it becomes HALT state.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be explained with reference to FIG. 66. Here, FIG. 66(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, and FIG. 66(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of the special symbol 1, FIG. 6(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbol 2, and FIG. (e) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special pattern 2 determination allocation table, (f) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern table, and (g) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special pattern 1 variation pattern table. This is a diagram explaining an example of transition of the variation pattern table of special figure 1.

The table for determining the validity of ordinary figures shown in FIG. 66(a) is a table for determining the validity of ordinary figures used when determining the validity of ordinary figures. Note that this table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 66(a), when this correctness determination table is used, there is no winning value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of winning is 0%, and the probability of winning is 0%. In the high probability state, the possible range of random numbers is 0 to 99, and the winning value is 0 to 99. That is, the probability of winning is 100/100 (that is, 100%). In addition, in the low probability state of common figures (when time saving is not activated), it may be set so that there is a certain probability of winning (for example, 1%), and in the high probability state of common figures (when time saving is activated), there is a constant probability of winning. It may also be possible to set it to be a failure with a probability of (for example, 1%).

The table for determining the validity of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. A jackpot is selected at approximately 1/199.8). Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Furthermore, although this embodiment does not have a configuration in which a plurality of settings are provided, a configuration may be provided in which a plurality of settings are provided and the jackpot probability is different for each setting.

The table for determining the validity of special drawing 2 shown in FIG. 66(c) is a table that is referred to when determining the validity of special drawing 2. A jackpot is selected with a probability of about 1/199.8), a small win is selected with a probability of 13945/65536 (about 1/4.7), and a sudden time saver is selected with a probability of 18969/65536 (about 1/3.455). selected. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

FIG. 66(d) shows an example of the distribution table for determining the special symbol 1, and the stopping symbols are determined based on the result of the determination of the validity of the special symbol 1 as described above. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special pattern determination allocation table, a random number range corresponding to the stop pattern mode of the special pattern (see FIG. 63(a)) is defined for each validity determination result.

First, if the result of the special drawing 1 judgment is a jackpot, one of "special drawings A" to "special drawings E" is selected. As mentioned above, "Tokuzu A" to "Tokuzu E" are all 3R jackpots that are opened by the first variable prize opening 234a, and "Tokuzu A" has a time saving number of 8 after the end of the jackpot game. "Special drawing B" is given 4 time saving times, "Special drawing C" is given 2 time saving times, "Special drawing D" is given 1 time saving number, and "Special drawing C" is given 1 time saving number. Special map E" is not given time saving. The selection rates for each selection are as follows: "Special drawing A" has a probability of 3/100, "Special drawing B" has a probability of 15/100, "Special drawing C" has a probability of 15/100, and "Special drawing D" has a probability of 15/100, and "special map E" has a probability of 50/100.

FIG. 66(e) shows an example of the distribution table for determining the special figure 2, and the stopping symbols are determined based on the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure 2 as described above. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special pattern determination distribution table, a random number range corresponding to the stop pattern mode of the special pattern (see FIG. 63(b)) is defined for each result of the validity determination.

If the result of the special figure 2 judgment is a jackpot, "special figure a" is selected. As described above, "special map a" is a 9R jackpot that is opened by the first variable winning hole 234a, and the time saving number of times is given eight times after the end of the jackpot game. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 judgment is a small hit, one of "special figures b" to "special figures d" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special drawing b" to "Special drawing d" are all small winnings that the second variable winning opening 235a opens, and the game ball enters the second variable winning opening 235a in the small winning game. When the player passes through the V passage switch SW2, the game shifts to the jackpot game that starts from the 2R, and "special map b" is a 9R small win in which the first variable prize opening 234a opens up to the 9R when it becomes a jackpot. "Special drawing c" is a 6R small win in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened up to the 6th round when it becomes a jackpot, and "special drawing d" is a 6R small win in which the first variable prize opening 234a is opened up to the 6th round when it becomes a jackpot. This is a 3R small win in which the winning opening 234a is opened up to the 3rd round. The respective selection rates are 15/100 for "special map b", 30/100 for "special map c", and 55/100 for "special map d".

In this way, in this embodiment, it is easier to shift to a jackpot game with more balls when you hit the jackpot on special drawing 2 than when you hit the jackpot on special drawing 1, and it is more advantageous to hit the jackpot on special drawing 2. Therefore, for example, it may be possible to increase expectations for hitting the jackpot during playing time or suddenly during time saving. In addition, in this embodiment, it can be said that when a jackpot is won on special drawing 2 than when a jackpot is won on special drawing 1, it is more likely to be a jackpot with a large number of time savings.

FIG. 66(f) shows an example of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern table, which has four variation pattern tables, and one of the variation pattern tables is used depending on the state. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown, it also has a special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table, a special chart 2 winning fluctuation pattern table, and a special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table, all of which are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. There is.

As shown in FIG. 66(f), the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern table includes a normal time variation pattern table (No. 0), a time saving time variation pattern table (No. 1), and b time saving/c time saving time variation pattern table. It is configured with a fluctuation pattern table (No. 2) and a quick time fluctuation pattern table (No. 3). It should be noted that the system may be configured to include other variation pattern tables in addition to these.

The normal time variation pattern table is a normal table that is mainly selected in the normal game state (special figure low probability regular figure low probability state), and the time saving time variation pattern table a is the time saving state to which the transition is made after the end of the jackpot game. (a time saving state) is the a time saving table that is selected by the time the number of symbol fluctuations of special drawing 1 reaches the 10th time, and the b time saving/c time saving time fluctuation pattern table is the playing time (b This is a bc time saving table that is selected when the special pattern 1 off symbol variation is executed in the time saving state (b time saving state/c time saving state) that suddenly becomes time saving (c time saving) and transitions to the time saving state (time saving state/c time saving state). The time variation pattern table is a table for crisp time which is selected from the 201st to 540th times of symbol variation display of the special figure 1 after the end of the jackpot game in the normal game state. In addition, although the details of the crisp time table in this embodiment will be described later, the composition of the production content is the same as the normal table, but the distribution rate is different, and it is more expensive than when the normal table is selected. A loss with a reach is less likely to be selected, so the time taken to display a symbol variation is likely to be shorter than when a normal table is selected, and expectations for a jackpot in the case of a reach are high.

As shown in FIG. 66(g), for example, after the end of the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot (jackpot with "special map E") in which the first jackpot does not shift to the time-saving state, the special chart starts after the end of the jackpot game. 1 is executed, the normal table is selected from the 1st rotation to the 200th rotation, the quick time table is selected from the 201st rotation to the 540th rotation, and the 555th rotation is selected from the 541st rotation to the 555th rotation. Until the rotation, the normal table is selected again. Thereafter, when the game shifts to play time, the bc time saving table is selected. In addition, when a jackpot with a time saver occurs and the jackpot game related to the jackpot ends, the a time saver table is selected from the 1st spin to the 10th spin of special drawing 1, and the regular table is selected from the 11th spin to the 200th spin. The crisp time table is selected from the 201st rotation to the 540th rotation, and the normal table is selected again from the 541st rotation to the 555th rotation. In addition, after entering the c time saving state, after the symbol fluctuation display is executed 200 times without becoming a jackpot and the c time saving state ends, the bc time saving table will be displayed from the 1st rotation to the 200th rotation of special drawing 1. is selected, and the normal table is selected from the 201st to the 555th rotation. Note that these tables are selected according to the number of executions of the symbol variation display of special figure 1, and do not take into consideration the number of executions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2, but the number of executions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 The number of executions of variable display may also be included.

Next, the variation pattern selection table used in the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. Here, FIG. 67(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the normal time deviation fluctuation pattern selection table, and FIG. FIG. 3B is a diagram illustrating an example of the contents of a time saving/time saving fluctuation pattern selection table, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example, and the same figure (d) is a figure showing an example of the contents of the change fluctuation pattern selection table at crisp time, and the same figure (d-1) is a figure showing an example of the contents of the change fluctuation pattern selection table with reach at crisp time. It is a figure showing an example of the contents.

The normal time deviation variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 67(a) is a table that may be used when the result of the validity determination of special symbol 1 is a failure in the normal gaming state. Specifically, when the result of the validity judgment of special figure 1 is a miss and the normal time error variation pattern selection table is used, the variation pattern of no reach and error is selected with a probability of 90/100, and 10 A fluctuation pattern of reach and miss is selected with a probability of /100. In addition, when the variation pattern of reaching and missing is selected, the normal reach and missing variation pattern selection table shown in Figure (a-1) is referred to, and the variation pattern of normal reach and missing is selected with a probability of 50/100. The variation pattern that misses SP1 is selected with a probability of 20/100, the variation pattern that misses SP2 is selected with a probability of 20/100, the variation pattern that misses the normal relief reach is selected with a probability of 5/100, and the variation pattern that misses the normal relief reach is selected with a probability of 5/100. A variation pattern that misses SP1 relief is selected with a probability of /100, and a variation pattern that misses SP2 relief is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, the fluctuation pattern including a relief loss is a fluctuation pattern including that after becoming out of reach, the medium symbol starts to fluctuate again and stops at a combination of a loss again. In this way, in this embodiment, there are cases in which the game is reached in 10% of cases where the player loses, making the game more enjoyable.

The a time saving time deviation variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 67(b) is a table that may be used when the result of the validity determination of special symbol 1 is a failure in the a time saving state. Specifically, no reach is selected with a probability of 100/100, and the reach effect is not executed. Note that the table configuration may be such that a reach effect is executed.

The b time saving/c time saving time difference variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. This is a table that may be used when Specifically, no reach is selected with a probability of 95/100, and a miss with reach is selected with a probability of 5/100. Note that the ready-to-reach effect to be executed may be only the normal ready-to-reach, or may include the SP ready-to-reach. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a no-reach option is selected with a probability of 100/100.

The crisp time variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 67(d) and the crisp time reach/miss variation pattern table shown in FIG. This is a table that may be used when the number of symbol fluctuation displays is from 201st to 540th. The fluctuation time and performance content of each fluctuation pattern are the same as the normal time off fluctuation pattern selection table and the normal time reach/miss fluctuation pattern table described above, but the distribution rate of each fluctuation pattern is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(d), no reach is selected with a probability of 99/100, and no reach is selected with a probability of 1/100. In addition, when the variation pattern with reach is selected, the variation pattern selection table of variation with reach and deviation during crisp time shown in (d-1) of the same figure is referred to, and the variation pattern with deviation from normal reach is selected with a probability of 90/100. , a variation pattern that misses SP1 is selected with a probability of 5/100, a variation pattern that misses SP2 is selected with a probability of 2/100, a variation pattern that misses normal relief is selected with a probability of 1/100, and a variation pattern that misses SP2 is selected with a probability of 1/100. A variation pattern that misses SP1 relief is selected with a probability of 1/100, and a variation pattern that misses SP2 relief is selected with a probability of 1/100. In this way, in this embodiment, in the crisp time, reach is only 1% of the time when it is a miss, and even if it is a reach, 90% of the time it is a normal reach, so the speed of play is faster than the crisp time. In some cases, the player's stress can be reduced more quickly than in other normal gaming states. Furthermore, since it is difficult for a super reach to be executed in the case of a miss, it may be possible to improve expectations for a jackpot when a super reach occurs.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 68(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 68(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and according to the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform processing to change to .

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command to the performance devices 2 to 5 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 68(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 68(c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random value update processes for effects are performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 69(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 69(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 69(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 69(d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. VDP 516 transfers image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 70(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 70(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value. Note that since the model of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a model that does not have settings, the current setting value is displayed as "-" to notify that it is not a model with settings.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the first It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning hole 234a and the second variable winning hole 235a and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning into the first variable winning hole 234a and the second variable winning hole 235a to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the first special figure starting opening 232, the first variable winning opening 234a, and the second variable winning opening 235a is released and wins a prize). In addition, the game is won by winning in the first variable winning hole 234a, second variable winning hole 235a, first special drawing starting hole 230, second special drawing starting hole 232, and general winning holes 226a, 226b for the number of out balls. It may also be a ratio of the number of balls.

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, if it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous accessory ratio is displayed blinking, and then A security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the emitted light color may be changed. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 70(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

Next, an example of the performance of the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. Here, FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a presentation centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a step by step example of a continuation of the presentation shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the effect shown in FIG. 72.

FIG. 71 shows a decorative pattern display device 208. Note that illustration of the first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, normal symbol display device 210, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and general figure holding lamp 216 is omitted. ing.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state. Note that the background here is not displayed, but a default background image, which will be described later, is displayed. In the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images depending on the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and a variable display and a static display are performed in accordance with the decorative symbol displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and also informing the number of pending items. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area for special drawings 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, at the upper right of the display area, a notification area for the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and at the lower right, a notification area for the symbol variation of the special figure 2 is provided. It should be noted that a notification area during symbol change for common symbols and a display area for the number of pending symbols for common symbols may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 220. It is consistent with the number of reservations indicated by . In addition, in the symbol change notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a jackpot, "○" is stopped and displayed, and if it is a small hit, "△" is displayed. If the time is suddenly short, it will be stopped and displayed with a ``☆'', and if it is not, it will be stopped and displayed with an ``x''. In addition, while the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner, the "-" display may blink, and it may be possible to recognize that the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is also the same as the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and here the display mode corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display and stop display of special figure 2. changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, and changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, you can receive a preview notice and a notice regarding the symbol change display in progress. You may go.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Furthermore, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 71 is a normal gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this normal gaming state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the normal game state, the display area of the reserved icon of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is expressed by the number of reservation icons of special drawing 1, in addition to the number of lights on the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservation display area of special drawing 1, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 The number of reservations is represented by the number of lit special figure 2 reservation lamps 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, it may be made to represent also by the number of reservation icons of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the startup information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information as a second hold icon, etc. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, hold icons are displayed side by side, and hold icons on the right side have older winnings.

In FIG. 71(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and both of these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are , is displayed in the default display mode (round shape, no pattern, and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of special drawing 1 is a round hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 71(a), in order to make it easier to understand that four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, pending icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines. .

On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area of the special drawing 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 71 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so it is difficult to open the electric chew and enter the special drawing 2 starting opening 232. This is because.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of times the symbol change is displayed after the end of the jackpot game (in the following explanation, it may be referred to as the "number of stuck times") is displayed in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284. At the same time, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot (display of the number of starts between jackpots) and the number of symbol fluctuations required to move to play time (b time saving state) (play The number of starts remaining until the time is displayed. In the present embodiment, both the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that are more likely to win is displayed depending on the control state (gaming state). That is, when the control state is in the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, on the contrary, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same or may be different display modes. .

In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the following order: start of variation on the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of movement animation of the pending icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol However, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 71(b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 has started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, and further the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has been performed. No changes have occurred in the pending icon or decorative pattern yet. Also, at this time, the number of symbol fluctuation displays and the number of symbol fluctuation displays required before moving to play time are updated, and change to "after jackpot = 135 times" and "420 times until play time", respectively.

In FIG. 71(c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 has started. In this moving animation, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to this symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280, and the second pending icon The hold icon that was at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1. At this stage, variable display of decorative patterns has not started.

In FIG. 71(d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 71(e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change has reached the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but even at this stage, The variable display of the decorative pattern has not started yet. In addition, at the time when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the pending icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 may be viewed as the variable icon h0, or the pending icon that had been the second pending icon The hold icon h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 71(f), the variable display of decorative patterns starts.

As shown in FIG. 71(g), an operation promotion notification image 136P is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, urging the user to press the production button 136 within the valid period. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the performance button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the validity period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. Although the changing display of the decorative symbols is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special symbols are changing from the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, etc. . Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 71(h), the valid period is decreasing, and in FIG. 71(i), the player has pressed the performance button 136. When the production button 136 is pressed within the validity period, as shown in FIG. 71(j), the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071, the text "It's a chance!!" is displayed on the right side of the main character's character image.

In FIG. 71(k), the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071 disappears, the fluctuating display of decorative symbols becomes visible, and then the ready-to-reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 71(l). Note that even if the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071 is displayed, the ready-to-reach state may not be entered in some cases, but the ready-to-reach state may always be entered.

As explained above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display that is currently being performed.

In FIG. 71(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols that was previously performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size, and in FIG. 71(n) , has developed into SP (Special) Reach (Swordsman Reach). In this embodiment, this "swordsman reach" may be referred to as "SP2 reach". The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 71(o) shows a duel between the main character lord and the enemy swordsman. Animation of the scene is displayed.

Note that the ready-to-reach state entry preview image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the ready-to-reach state, but may also be a notice of the development to SP reach.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71 step by step.

In FIG. 72(p) following FIG. 71(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 72(s). In FIG. 72(s), the main character, the lord, wins against the enemy, the master swordsman, and in FIG. 72(t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 and the mini symbol. Note that a different background image may be displayed instead of being hidden. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 4(u), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image than before. In addition, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1 remains hidden, and the display of the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the mini symbol, the number of starts between jackpots, and the remaining starts until play time. Only the number of times is displayed. It should be noted that the mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner until the symbols are confirmed and displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(v), the characters "Re-lottery!!" are displayed and the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner again, and a re-lottery effect is performed. In this re-lottery performance, "Decoration 3 - Decoration" is a combination of decorative symbols that is certain to become a jackpot and shift to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state of 8 time-savings) after the jackpot game ends. This is fueling expectations for the final display of the jackpot decorative pattern combinations ``3-Decoration 3'' and ``Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7''.

After that, as shown in FIG. 72(w), the combination of decorative patterns does not change from the jackpot combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" and becomes the jackpot combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" again. It is shown that the combinations of are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 72(x), the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. Further, the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special drawing 1 shown in FIG. 72(x) is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is hidden in FIG. 72(x), a background image different from the default one is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 72(y), as a jackpot game start effect, the text "Jackpot" is displayed along with a background image celebrating the jackpot (omitted here), and the text "Right hit" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen. This encourages him to hit right-handed.

On the other hand, as a result of the re-lottery performance shown in FIG. 72(v), for example, as shown in FIG. 72(w') to (y'), the combination of decorative symbols changes from before the re-lotting, It is shown that a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a jackpot is confirmed in which a time saving state of 8 times of time saving of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is given is displayed. In this manner, in this embodiment, by performing the re-lottery effect, it may be possible to create a sense of expectation for a more advantageous jackpot.

Note that in this embodiment, there is one type of re-lottery effect, but there are multiple types, and the degree to which the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot changes before and after the re-lottery effect varies depending on the type of executed re-lottery effect. For example, the re-lottery presentation may be performed in the following order: re-lottery presentation in a mode that involves the movement of a role model > re-lottery presentation using symbol variation display due to frame-by-frame advance > re-lottery presentation using high-speed variation > re-lottery presentation using slow variation. The degree of expectation that the combination of decorative symbols for the jackpot will change before and after the lottery may be set high. Note that the order and manner of the expectation levels are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 73(r'') shows another example of performance following FIG. 72(q). That is, in FIG. 73(r''), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 71(o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 73(r''). In FIG. 73(r''), the main character, the lord, is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and as in FIG. 72(t), everything except the fourth symbol display area 284 is temporarily hidden, and eventually, as in FIG. 73(s ''), the fluctuation of the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(t''), the fourth pattern of the special pattern 1 lights up indicating "x", and the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed. is displayed as stopped. Next, during the final display period of the special figure 1, a deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 may be performed.

FIGS. 73(a1) to 73(a3) and FIGS. 73(b1) to 73(b3) are diagrams showing step-by-step an example of performance in a jackpot game centered on a decorative symbol display device. In addition, in FIGS. 73(a1) to 73(a3) and FIGS. 73(b1) to 73(b3), only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the illustration of the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, the special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and the ordinary symbol holding lamp 216 is omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a1), the jackpot combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol variation display of special drawing 1, and the jackpot with 3R time saving 8 times is confirmed. It shows how the player moves on to the first round after performing the same thing. When the game moves to the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the words "Super Lucky!" along with Machiko Sensei's character slightly to the left of the center of the display screen, congratulating the player for winning the 3R jackpot with 8 time savings. ing. In addition, if it is determined that it is a jackpot due to the combination of decorative patterns at the time of jackpot (for example, if the jackpot is achieved by the jackpot combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4"), As shown in (b1), the words ``Congratulations!'' are displayed instead of the words ``Super Lucky!'' to create a feeling of anticipation as to which type of jackpot it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the number of jackpots from the first jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "consecutive winning number display") is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and in the upper left corner, "Decoration 7", which is a jackpot decorative pattern when a jackpot is won, is displayed. In addition, at the top center of the display screen, the current round number "1R" is displayed as the number of rounds, and at the bottom right of the display screen, the total number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot is displayed. This numerical value is added (counted up) by the number of prize balls won each time a game ball enters a variable winning hole (first variable winning hole 234a, second variable winning hole 235a) in a jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls generated by winning in the variable winning hole is added, but the number of prize balls obtained by winning in other winning holes is also added. For example, the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a specific general prize-winning hole in which a prize can be won by hitting the ball to the right may be further added.

FIG. 73(a2) shows how the third round has ended and the jackpot game has ended. In this embodiment, the jackpot is achieved by the combination of the jackpot symbols "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7", so the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with 8 time savings. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect, the words "8 more chances!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is announced that the time saving state will continue until the special symbol is displayed 8 times. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 73(a2), the display of the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is "Obtained pt 00300 pt".

FIG. 73(a3) shows how the jackpot end performance has ended and the gaming state has shifted to the electric support state (a time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state, the words "Challenge time 8 chances to save time" are displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the state has shifted to the time saver state.

On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(b1), the jackpot combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is displayed in the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1, indicating that the 3R jackpot is confirmed. After the performance, the scene moves to the first round. When moving to the first round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character "Congratulations!" along with Machiko Sensei's character slightly to the left of the center of the display screen to congratulate you on hitting the 3R jackpot. Since it is difficult to recognize whether it is a type of jackpot or not, the player is made to have a sense of expectation. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (b1), the number of consecutive wins is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and "Decoration 4", which is the jackpot decorative pattern when a jackpot is achieved, is displayed in the upper left corner. has been done. Further, at the top center of the display screen, the current number of rounds, ``1R'', is displayed as the number of rounds, and at the bottom right of the display screen, the total number of prize balls acquired since the first jackpot is displayed.

FIG. 73(b2) shows how the third round has ended, the jackpot game has ended, and the jackpot end performance is being performed. In this embodiment, the combination of jackpot symbols "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" resulted in a jackpot, so it was difficult to recognize which type of jackpot it was. The words ``Look forward to the next time!'' are displayed to notify you that this is a normal jackpot that is not played.

FIG. 73(b3) shows a situation where the jackpot end performance has ended and the gaming state has shifted to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the center of the display screen, "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols at the time of a jackpot, is displayed, and at the top, "Left-handed" is displayed to encourage left-handed hitting. ``Please type'' will be displayed and a mini symbol will be displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of special drawing 1 start to be displayed, and in the lower right corner of the display screen, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are displayed. . After that, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73 (b3'), when the jackpot game ends and shifts to the normal gaming state, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is not displayed, As shown in b4'), the display may be started at the start of the 11th variation of the special figure 1.

FIGS. 74 and 75 are diagrams showing step-by-step an example of an effect in the electric support state (time saving state a) centering on the decorative pattern display device. In addition, in FIG. 74, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are not shown.

FIG. 74(a) shows that the mini symbols displayed in the upper left corner after the jackpot game related to the first jackpot and the 4-time shortcut jackpot are a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols that were displayed at the time of the jackpot. It is shown that the display is stopped at "555" and the state has shifted to the power support state. At this time, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 displayed in the upper right part of the display screen, three symbol variation displays of special symbol 1 are reserved, and one symbol variation display of special symbol symbol 2 is reserved. At the same time, the fourth symbol of special drawing 1 is displayed as a jackpot, and the fourth symbol of special drawing 2 is displayed as a loss. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(a), the number of consecutive wins is displayed in the lower left corner, and the number of balls acquired from the first jackpot is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. (At the timing shown in FIG. 74(a), "Obtained pt 00300 pt" is displayed.) In addition, in the electric support state, the symbol fluctuation display is performed centering on the special figure 2, so the variable icon display area 280, the reserved icon display area 280 of the special figure 1, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 2 are not displayed. do not have. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 2 may be displayed. In addition, in the center of the display screen, the words "Challenge Time - 4 Time Saving Chances" are displayed, informing you that the time saving state (electrical support state) will continue until the symbol variation display is executed 4 times.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(b), the first pattern variation display is started after transitioning to the electric support state (time saving state a). As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special pattern 2 priority variation machine, the symbol variation display of the special pattern 2 is given priority to the special pattern 1. In addition, when there is no hold of the special figure 2, the hold of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, "Challenge time 4 more times" is displayed in the center of the display screen to indicate the remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays in the electric support state.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(c) shows how the first pattern variation display of the special drawing 2 has ended after the end of the jackpot game. In conjunction with this, the mini pattern displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is stopped and displayed in a combination of decorative patterns outside of "514".

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(d) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the pattern variation display of the second special figure 2 has started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(d), the display indicating the remaining number of symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is updated to "Challenge time 3 more times".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e) shows that the third symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 has been completed after the end of the jackpot game, and in the center of the display screen, "Challenge time 2 more to go" is displayed. ” is displayed. At the same time, the mini-patterns displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen are stopped and displayed in a combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 7".

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(f) shows how the jackpot game has ended and the pattern variation display of the fourth special figure 2 has started. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(f), the display indicating the remaining number of symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state is updated to "Challenge time - one more time".

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(g), the special symbol 2 stops and displays the small winning symbol, and in response, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen stops and displays "555". Ru. Then, in the center of the display screen, the words "Chance! Aim for V!!" are displayed, prompting the user to enter the game ball into the second variable winning slot 235a. After that, a small winning game in which the second variable winning hole 235a is opened is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(h), when the game ball that entered the second variable prize opening 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 74(i), it becomes a jackpot and the jackpot game starts. be done. At this time, since the small winning game is counted as the first round, when the jackpot game starts, it starts from the second round. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(i), the display of the number of consecutive wins displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "2nd time", and the small win is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. ``5'', which is the decorative pattern displayed when , is displayed. In addition, the words "Congratulations!" are displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen along with Machiko's character MCK to congratulate you on winning the jackpot, but any type of jackpot (9R, 6R, 3R) Since it is difficult to recognize whether this is the case or not, it is designed to give players a sense of anticipation.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(j) shows that the sixth round is being played. In this jackpot, the jackpot game is started in the small win game that is executed when the 6R small win symbol with 8 time saving is displayed, so the jackpot game ends when the 6th round ends. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the words "This time, it's up to 6R" are displayed together with the character MCK of Mr. Machiko, informing the player that he has won a 6R jackpot. Furthermore, in the lower right corner of the display screen, "Obtained pt 00850 pt" is displayed, which indicates the number of prize balls won by entering the variable winning slot in the first jackpot game and the current jackpot game.

FIG. 74(k) shows how the sixth round has ended and the jackpot game has ended. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 is a jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, 8 time savings will be given, and consecutive wins can be expected. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot performance, the words "High-speed RUSH enters!" and "8 more big chances!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and it is announced that the time-saving state will continue until the special symbol is displayed 8 times. Ru.

FIG. 74(l) shows how the jackpot end performance has ended and the gaming state has shifted to the electric support state (a time saving state). Specifically, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot on special map 2 ends and the state shifts to the electric support state, the words "High-speed RUSH Time-saving 8 times big chance" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the state shifts to the time-saving state. You will be notified of what has happened. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74(m), the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started for the first time after shifting to the electric support state (time saving state a). At this time, "high speed RUSH 8 more times" is displayed in the center of the display screen as a display indicating the remaining number of symbol fluctuation display times in the electric support state.

FIG. 75(a) following FIG. 74(m) shows how the symbol variation display of special symbol 2 is performed for the eighth time after transitioning to the electric support state. Since the electric support state ends with this symbol change display, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "High Speed RUSH Last" in the center of the display screen to inform the player of this fact.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(b), the result of the symbol variation display for special drawing 2 becomes off, and in response, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen also changes to the off-center of "417". Displayed as a combination of decorative patterns. In addition, in this embodiment, since only one symbol variation display of special drawing 2 is configured to be able to be held, the electric support state ends, but the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 can be executed only once. ing. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(c), the transition is made from the electric support state to the normal gaming state, but since the symbol variation display of special symbol 2 can be executed only once, the upper center part of the display screen ``One Crying Time!'' is displayed on the screen, suggesting that a symbol variation display that is likely to be advantageous to the player will be executed only once. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 75(c), the decorative symbols are displayed, and the decorative symbols are displayed in combinations outside of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7", and the number of consecutive shots and the total number of balls acquired are also displayed. continues to be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75(d), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the suspension of the special pattern 2 is terminated and variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(e), the time-saving decorative pattern is suddenly stopped and displayed on the special map 2, and the time-saving decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" is suddenly stopped and displayed. It is shown. At this time, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 2(e), the characters "Resurrection time has begun!" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the time saving state ( It is reported that there will be a sudden shift to shortened working hours, where the shortened working hours state (c) continues. In addition, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the c time saving state, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol change display is performed 200 times, but it may be any other number of times, or if multiple types of time saving symbols are suddenly displayed. In addition, the number of symbol fluctuation displays during which the electric support state is maintained may vary depending on the symbols that have been stopped. After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(f) suddenly shifts to a time-saving state (c-time saving state), and shows how the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the words "Revival Time!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, the decorative pattern is erased, and the display state of the number of consecutive games and the total number of pitches acquired is also maintained.

In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(e') following FIG. 75(d), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, indicating that the reach state has been reached. There is. At this time, the words ``Big Chance!'' are displayed at the top center of the display screen, indicating that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot, and making the game more exciting. After that, as shown in FIG. 75(f'), "Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state in the middle pattern, and it is shown that it is fluctuating. In other words, it is suggested to the player that there will be a jackpot or a small win.

Thereafter, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(g'), the decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in Figure 75 (g'), the special symbol 2 stops and displays at the small winning symbol, and in response, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen stops and displays at "444". be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(h'), the words "Chance! Aim for V!!" are displayed in the center of the display screen, urging the user to enter the game ball into the second variable prize opening 235a. . After that, a small winning game in which the second variable winning hole 235a is opened is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(i'), when the game ball that enters the second variable winning hole 235a passes through the V passage switch SW2, as shown in FIG. 75(j'), it becomes a jackpot and the jackpot game is started. At this time, since the small winning game is counted as the first round, when the jackpot game is started, it starts from the second round. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(j'), the display of the number of consecutive attempts displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen is updated to "3rd time", and the small number is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol "4" that was displayed when the game was a hit is displayed. In addition, the words "Congratulations!" are displayed along with Machiko's character MCK on the left side of the center of the display screen, congratulating the player on winning the jackpot.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the time saving state ends, the player can move to a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the result of the symbol change display of special drawing 2 that was on hold at the end of the time saving state. There is.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80, effects after the power is turned on will be described. Here, FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect before and after the power is turned off, FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect before and after the power is turned off, and FIG. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect before and after the power is shut off, FIG. 79 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect before and after the power is shut off, and FIG. It is a figure which shows an example step by step. 76 to 80, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 are shown. The illustration of the holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 is omitted.

FIG. 76(a) is a continuation of the performance shown in FIG. 75(d), and shows how a losing result is displayed in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 after the transition to the normal gaming state. . In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(a), the decorative pattern combinations on the outskirts of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" are stopped and displayed, and there is no opportunity for the pattern variation display to be executed in the special map 2. Since the process has ended, the words "Unfortunate..." are displayed to indicate this. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 76(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , In order to indicate this, an "x" is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of special figure 2.

Furthermore, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. A hold icon display area 281 of special drawing 1 is displayed.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is displayed by the number of special drawing 1 holding lamps 218 lit, the number of holdings for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons for special drawing 1. The number of reserved special symbols 2 is represented by the number of lit special symbols 2 reserved lamps 220 and the number of reserved special symbols 2 displayed in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 76(a), three special drawing 1 holding icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and these three special drawing 1 holding icons h11, h12, All h13 are displayed in the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode).

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot game (the number of hits) is 9, but at the timing shown in FIG. 76(a), the number of starts between jackpots is displayed. Also, the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is hidden.

In FIG. 76(b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special drawing 1 are each moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of special figure 1, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the special figure. 1, the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, the number of hits increases by one, and the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = 10 times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as "545 times until play time". In this embodiment, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are displayed until the a time saving state and the symbol variation display of the remaining special figure 2 are finished (at least until the a time saving state is finished). Therefore, the number of times that the number of remaining starts until the play time starts to be displayed after the end of the jackpot game is greater than the number of symbol fluctuation displays that will transition to the play time after the end of the jackpot game. It is said to occur infrequently. In addition, in this production example, the display of the number of starts during jackpots informs the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot game, but in other words, the display of the number of starts during jackpots indicates the number of symbol fluctuations until play time. It can also be said that it at least indicates the number of times of display. In addition, in this embodiment, since the display of the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the a time saving state ends is displayed in the a time saving state, the display is used to display the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time. Although we try not to display them at the same time, they may be displayed at the same time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(c), a combination of decorative patterns outside of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are displayed with variable variations. It is shown that there is no pending status and the status is on standby. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(c), the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = 163 times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as "392 times until play time".

After that, for example, when the game parlor is closed and the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off as shown in FIG. Return to the previous state. However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 555 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the game time starts. If these numbers can be checked by visitors immediately after a certain opening, pachinko machines 100 that are easy to move on to playing time will be more likely to be targeted, and fairness may be impaired. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76(e), when the backup is restored, the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the jackpot or the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is estimated. To make it more difficult, the display of the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = ??? times", and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as "until play time ??? times". Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of decorative patterns displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns outside of "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" (sometimes referred to as "first roll in the morning"). Therefore, for example, it may be difficult to determine whether the backup was restored or the RAM was cleared when the power was turned on, and fairness may be maintained.

FIG. 76(f) shows a state in which a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Here, both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time remain as "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is still displayed. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol changes are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(g), the 100th pattern variation display is being executed after the power is turned on. In addition, here as well, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are both "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and it is still until play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(h), when the 100th symbol variation display after the power is turned on is completed, the number of symbol variations displayed after the power is turned on is added to the number of symbol variations displayed after the jackpot before the power is turned off. The results will be displayed. In other words, the number of starts between jackpots and the remaining number of starts until play time that are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen become clear, and the numbers are ``after jackpot = 263 times'' and ``292 times until play time'', respectively. The number of symbol fluctuation displays required before moving to play time can be recognized. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 76(h), the number of revolutions has exceeded 200 after the end of the jackpot, and the transition to crisp time, which will be described later, is made, so the words "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. , since the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is less than 300, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to indicate this. In this production example, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time reaches 300, Sabohani's character SBH is displayed, which at least suggests the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time. Can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76(e'), even if the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, in order to make it difficult to estimate the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the jackpot or the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until play time, The display of the number of starts is displayed as ``after jackpot = ??? times'', and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as ``until play time ??? times''. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols that are out of place on the first roll of the morning: "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4."

FIG. 76(f') shows a state in which a game ball enters the first special figure start opening 230 and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Here, both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time remain as "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is still displayed. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol changes are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 76(g'), the 100th pattern variation display is being executed after the power is turned on. In addition, here as well, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are both "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and it is still until play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(h'), when the 100th symbol variation display after power-on is completed, the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot counted since power-on is displayed. In other words, the number of starts between jackpots and the remaining number of starts until play time that are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen become clear, and the numbers are ``after jackpot = 100 times'' and ``455 times until play time'', respectively. You may be able to see that the ram has been cleared.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the present invention is applied to a so-called 1 type 2 type pachinko machine 100, but it may also be applied to an ST machine, etc. For example, a time saving is given after a certain variable state ends. In this case, the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time may not be suggested or reported until the time saving state a ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on, until the symbol variation display is executed 100 times, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the display of the number of remaining starts until play time are displayed in a manner that is difficult to recognize. , it can be said that the number of times is smaller than the number of symbol fluctuation displays from the end of the jackpot game until the start of play time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as "???", but for example, when the jackpot game is over and the play time is After the display starts at "555", which is the number of symbol fluctuation displays until the transition, if a predetermined condition (for example, 100 symbol fluctuation displays or SP reach execution, etc.) is met, the accurate number of times will be announced. You may also do so.

FIG. 77 shows another example showing the state before and after the pachinko machine 100 is powered off and turned on.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(a), a combination of decorative patterns outside of "decoration 7 - decoration 5 - decoration 4" is displayed, and both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 are displayed with variation in the pattern. It is shown that there is no pending status and the status is on standby. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 77(a), the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = 503 times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as "52 times until play time".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off, and then, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(c) shows a backup recovery state. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 77(c), when the backup is restored, the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the jackpot or the number of symbol fluctuations displayed until the play time is difficult to estimate, so that The display of the number of starts is displayed as ``after jackpot = ??? times'', and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as ``until play time ??? times''. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" which is a failure in the first roll of the morning.

In FIG. 77(d), a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 and a state in which the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started is shown. Here, both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time remain as "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is still displayed. It is difficult to recognize the number of times the symbol changes are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(e), the 52nd pattern variation display is being executed after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the symbol variation display is being executed for the 555th time in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot before the power is shut off. In addition, here as well, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are both "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and it is still until play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays. In this case, as shown in FIG. 77(f), when the 555th symbol change display is completed after the jackpot game ends with the power cutoff in between, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(f) As shown in the figure, the words "Enter play time!" are displayed at the top center of the display screen, and before the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time becomes clear, play time (B time shortening state) is reached. The transition will be made. At this time, a right-handed display is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen, prompting the player to play right-handed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the time saving state continues until the symbol variation display is executed 200 times. The area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are erased, and the decorative pattern is also erased, and the variable display of the pattern is performed by the mini pattern displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, when you move to play time, the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is also cleared, and the words "Play time! 200 more times" are displayed in the center of the display screen, and the symbols that allow play time to be executed are displayed. The number of fluctuating displays is reported. In this embodiment, after the play time starts, and after the play time ends, the play time does not start again unless a jackpot is achieved. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 77(g), since the special figure 2 was not on hold, it is shown that the symbol variation display based on the hold of the special figure 1 is performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77(h) shows a state in which the first symbol variation display has been completed after entering play time. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, "434" is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result has been lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 77(i), since the symbol variation display of special map 2 is on hold, the symbol variation display of special symbol 2 is started in priority to the symbol variation display of special symbol 1. It is shown. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining play times in the center of the display screen has been updated to "Play time! 199 more times", suggesting that the play time will continue until 199 symbol fluctuations are displayed. There is.

In this way, in this embodiment, in most cases during the play time, the jackpot will be in a time-saving state until the symbol variation display is executed eight times after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is reduced, the player may think that it is better to enter play time. In other words, if you hit the jackpot before entering the play time, you want it to be a jackpot that gives you the a time-saving state, and even if you move to the play time without hitting the jackpot, you can continue playing as soon as you enter the play time. This is because it is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. In addition, it is not limited to the time when the power is turned on, but it may be configured such that it first notifies only that there is a possibility of transitioning to play time, and then notifies the exact number of times later.For example, after the end of a jackpot game, The configuration may be such that the notification is made after the time saving state ends. In addition, regarding the display of the number of starts remaining until play time, at the start of the display, a display indicating the number of symbol fluctuation displays required from the end of the jackpot game to the start of play time (for example, 555 times) is displayed. After that, the exact number of symbol change displays may be notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 555 times), the pachinko machine 100 assumes that the ceiling has been reached and shifts to play time. Although the example is shown, it may also be applied to a slot machine. For example, after the end of BB or RB, if the number of starts reaches a predetermined number, it is assumed that the ceiling has been reached, and a bonus such as RT or ART is started. It may also be a configuration.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the jackpot game ends, the symbol fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, and then the play time starts. However, after the jackpot game ends, the symbol fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times. The configuration may be such that a jackpot is achieved when executed, or the configuration may be such that the state shifts to a variable probability state.

FIG. 78 shows another example showing the state before and after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and turned on.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78(a), a combination of decorative patterns outside of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is shown that there is no pending status and the status is on standby. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 78(a), the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = 164 times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as "391 times until play time". After that, the effects shown in FIG. 78(b) to FIG. 78(d) are as shown in FIG. ) to (d) of the same figure, so the explanation will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78(e), the 52nd pattern variation display is being executed after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the symbol variation display is being executed for the 216th time in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot before the power is shut off. In addition, here as well, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are both "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and it is still until play time. It is difficult to recognize the number of remaining symbol fluctuation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78(f), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and it is shown that the ready-to-win effect is started. Note that both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the display of the remaining number of starts until play time remain as "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times."

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(g), the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed in a static manner with fluctuations. After that, for example, a re-fluctuation effect may be performed as shown in FIG. 72. In this performance example, as shown in FIG. 78(h), the re-variation performance fails and the combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is maintained and is stopped and displayed. In addition, even at the timing shown in FIG. 78(h), both the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the display of the remaining number of starts until play time are "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times". It remains as it is. Thereafter, the jackpot game is started without the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game (remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time) becoming clear. In this case, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time may be displayed clearly.

FIG. 79 shows another example showing the state before and after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and turned on. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 79(a) to 79(e) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 78(a) to 78(e), so a description thereof will be omitted.

After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 79(f), the combination of decorative patterns at the end of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in response, the mini pattern is also displayed as "534". It is shown that the display is stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the 53rd time since the power was turned on (217th time after the end of the jackpot game), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 79(g), the display of the number of starts during the jackpot and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time are not made clear.

Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(h), when the power is cut off due to the influence of lightning or the like, and then the backup is restored, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 79(i) displays the The recovery display is displayed until the variation time of the symbol variation display being executed has elapsed. Thereafter, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 79(j), the decorative symbols and the mini symbols are displayed as a missed first roll of the morning. In addition, when this symbol variation display is a jackpot, the combination of decorative symbols that are a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot game is started.

In this production example, after the power is turned on, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time will not become clear until the symbol fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). The number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game (remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time) is not revealed until the symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79(k) to 79(m), the symbol variation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, that is, in the production example shown in FIG. After the symbol variation display is executed, as shown in FIG. 79(m), the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 79(m), the number of rotations has exceeded 200 after the end of the jackpot, and the transition has been made to the crisp time described later, so the words "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen. , since the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is less than 300, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to indicate this.

FIG. 80 shows another example showing the state before and after the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off and turned on. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 80(a) to 80(f) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 78(a) to 78(f), so a description thereof will be omitted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 80(f) to 80(i) are such that SP reach 2 (swordsman reach) loses as shown in FIGS. 71(l) to 72(q) and FIG. 73(r''). It is shown being executed.

After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80(j), the combination of decorative patterns on the edge of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed, and in response, the mini pattern is also displayed as "434". be done. At this time, in this embodiment, if a specific effect (for example, Swordsman Reach) is executed after the power is turned on and before the symbol variation display is executed 100 times, regardless of the number of symbol variation displays, First, the display of the number of starts during the jackpot and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time may become clear. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 80(j), the number of rotations has exceeded 200 after the end of the jackpot, and the transition has been made to crisp time, which will be described later. Therefore, the words "crispy time" are displayed in the lower left part of the display screen, and , since the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is less than 300, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to indicate this. In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific performance is performed, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time becomes clear with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4 probability). However, you can always make it clear. On the other hand, if a specific performance is performed but the lottery is unsuccessful, as shown in FIG. 80 (j'), the display of the number of starts during the jackpot and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time will not become clear. .

FIGS. 81 and 82 are diagrams showing step-by-step an example of such effects after the transition to and the end of Sakusaku Time. In addition, in FIGS. 81 and 82, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 are shown. The illustration of the holding lamp 220 and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 is omitted. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(b) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 76(a) to 76(b), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(c), the 209th pattern variation display (of which, special pattern 1 is the 199th pattern variation display) after the end of the jackpot game is completed, and "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(c), four symbol fluctuation displays of special symbol 1 are suspended, but symbol fluctuation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended, and the number of starts between jackpots is displayed. ``After jackpot = 208 times'' is displayed, and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as ``347 times until play time.''

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(d) shows how the 209th (200th special pattern 1) pattern variation display has started after the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 209 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "346 times until play time". "times". Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icons that were in the display position of the second hold icon h12 move toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becoming the first hold icon h11, and The hold icons that were in the display position of the hold icon h13 move toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1, become the second hold icon h12, and then move to the display position of the fourth hold icon h14. The existing pending icons each move toward the display position of the third pending icon h13 of the special drawing 1 and become the third pending icon h13. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(e), the 209th symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game is completed, and the combination of decorative symbols that are out of the range of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4" is displayed. It is shown that there is. Moreover, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(e), three symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are suspended, but symbol variation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(f) shows how the 210th (201st special drawing 1) pattern variation display has started after the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the text "Entering crispy time" is displayed in the center of the display screen to notify that the transition to crispy time has started. In this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed 200 times, the variation pattern table used in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 executed from then on is changed to normal time variation. You can switch from a pattern table to a quick time-varying pattern table. Specifically, as described above, the case where the variable time is determined using the Sakusaku time variable pattern table is better than the case where the variable time is determined using the normal hourly variable pattern table. A variation pattern with a short variation time is likely to be determined, facilitating the comprehension of the symbol variation display, and may prevent the player from getting bored. After that, as shown in FIG. 81(g), the display of "Entering Sakusaku Time" is erased, and the display of "Sakusaku Time" notifying that Sakusaku Time is in progress is displayed at the top of the hold icon display area 281 of special drawing 1. Characters are displayed. Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icons that were in the display position of the second hold icon h12 move toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becoming the first hold icon h11, and The hold icons located at the display position of the hold icon h13 each move toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and become the second hold icon h12. After that, variable display of decorative patterns is started.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(h), the 210th pattern variation display after the end of the jackpot game is completed, and the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 7" is completed. This shows how it is displayed. Moreover, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(h), three symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are suspended, but symbol variation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(i) shows how the 211th (202nd special pattern 1) pattern variation display has started after the end of the jackpot game. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 211 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "344 times until play time". "times". Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icons that were in the display position of the second hold icon h12 move toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becoming the first hold icon h11, and The hold icons located at the display position of the hold icon h13 each move toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and become the second hold icon h12. After that, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, Sakusaku Time continues. Note that the presentation contents when using the crisp time variable pattern table are the same as the presentation contents when using the normal time variable pattern table, so a detailed explanation of the presentation will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(j) shows the 254th symbol variation display being performed after the end of the jackpot game. That is, it is shown that after that, after 301 symbol fluctuation displays without a jackpot, the game shifts to play time. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 254 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "301 times until play time". "times". In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(j), there are four pending symbol fluctuation displays of special drawing 1, and in the holding icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(k), the 254th pattern variation display after the end of the jackpot game is completed, and the combination of decorative patterns on the outskirts of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 1" is completed. This shows how it is displayed. Moreover, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(k), four symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are suspended, but symbol variation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended. Sakusaku Time is also continuing.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(l) shows how the 255th symbol variation display has started after the end of the jackpot game. That is, it is shown that when the symbol variation display is executed 300 times without hitting the jackpot, the game shifts to play time. At this time, the Sabohani character SBH appears in the lower right portion of the display screen, indicating that there are 300 plays left until play time. That is, the character SBH of Sabohani can be said to be a character that may appear in Sakusaku Time. Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becomes the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon that was at the display position of icon h13 moved toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of special map 1, became the second hold icon h12, and was located at the display position of the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon moves toward the display position of the third hold icon h13 of the special drawing 1 and becomes the third hold icon h13. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(m), the 549th (540th special drawing 1) pattern variation display is being performed after the end of the jackpot game. That is, it is shown that after that, after six symbol fluctuation displays are performed without a jackpot, the game shifts to play time. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is updated, the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 549 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "6 until play time". "times". In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 81(m), there are three pending symbol fluctuation displays of special drawing 1, and in the holding icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon are displayed. h13 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Sakusaku Time is also continuing.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 81(n) shows how the 549th (540th special figure 1) symbol variation display has been completed after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when this symbol variation display ends, the crisp time ends and the table used is switched from the crisp time time variation pattern table to the normal time variation pattern table. Therefore, the display of "Sakusaku Time" displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen is erased. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani continues to be displayed. That is, it can be said that even if the table used is a normal time-varying pattern table, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 280 shown in FIG. 81(o), a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becomes the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon that was at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is updated, the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 550 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "550 times until play time". "times".

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 82(p) following FIG. 81(o), the 555th symbol variation display is being performed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, a state in which the play time transition condition is satisfied is shown. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 555 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "0 until play time". "times". In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(p), there are two pending symbol fluctuation displays of special drawing 1, and in the holding icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, the first holding icon h11 to the second holding icon are displayed. h12 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the character SBH of Sabohani continues to be displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(q), the 555th symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game is completed, the Sabohani character SBH is erased, and the upper center of the display screen is The words "Entering play time!" are displayed, and it is notified that the play time (b time saving state) will continue until the symbol change display is executed 200 times. In addition, in this embodiment, when transitioning to play time, the electric support state is maintained until the symbol variation display is performed 200 times, but other times may be used. In addition, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen, encouraging you to play right-handed. This creates a state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, which is advantageous to the player.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(r) shifts to a time saving state related to play time (b time saving state), and shows how the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the words "Play time! 200 more times" are displayed in the center of the display screen, the display of the decorative pattern and the remaining number of starts until the play time is erased, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots is It has been updated to "After jackpot = 556 times". As a result, it is announced that the play time will continue for 200 more times.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(s) shows a state in which the first symbol variation display has been completed after entering play time. That is, as shown in the upper left corner of the display screen, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed at "434", indicating that it has been missed. After that, as shown in FIG. 82(t), since the symbol variation display of special map 2 is suspended, the symbol variation display of special symbol 2 is started in priority to the symbol variation display of special symbol 1. It is shown. In addition, the display showing the number of remaining play times in the center of the display screen has been updated to "Play time! 199 more times", suggesting that the play time will continue until 199 symbol fluctuations are displayed. There is.

In this embodiment, when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the jackpot game, the quick time variation pattern table is selected, so for example, the symbol variation display after the power is turned on is selected. By looking at the behavior, you may be able to infer whether the backup has been restored or the RAM has been cleared.

In addition, in this embodiment, after moving to the play time, after the symbol change display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) and the play time ends, the quick time change pattern table is not selected. However, it may be configured to be selectable.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table is configured to be changeable in the normal gaming state, but the variable pattern table may be configured to be changeable in other gaming states, for example, in the time saving state or in the variable probability state. It may be configured such that the variation pattern table may be changed in some cases. Further, the variable pattern table may be configured to be changed only when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of consecutive attempts) is satisfied during the time saving state or the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82(a) to 82(i), an example of the performance when the ram is cleared when the power is turned on will be described. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 82(d) are similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 76(e') to 76(h'), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Thereafter, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(e) shows how the 101st pattern variation display of the special drawing 1 has started since the power was turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 101 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "454 until play time". "times". Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1 and becomes the first hold icon h11. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(f), the 200th pattern variation display is being performed after the power is turned on. In addition, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as "after jackpot = 200 times" and "355 times until play time."

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(g), the 200th symbol variation display after the power is turned on is completed, and the decorative symbol combination is displayed as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4". The situation is shown. Moreover, at the timing shown in FIG. 82(g), three symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are suspended, but symbol variation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(h) shows how the 201st symbol variation display has started since the power was turned on. In this embodiment, after the jackpot game ends, when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts 201 times, the transition to crisp time is made. After the time saving state ends, it does not shift to crisp time. In this production example, since the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, there is no transition to crisp time, and the symbol variation display using the normal time variation pattern table will continue to be executed. Furthermore, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the moving animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of special drawing 1, becomes the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon that was at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time has been updated to "after jackpot = 201 times" and "354 times until play time."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 82(i), the 255th pattern variation display is being performed after the power is turned on. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 255 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "300 times until play time". "times". In this performance example, the number of symbol fluctuation displays remaining until play time is 300, so the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. In this way, it is shown that Sabohani's character SBH may be displayed even during times other than Sakusaku time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, an example of the performance after the revival time (time saving state c) starts and ends will be described. Here, FIG. 83 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of such effects after the transition to the resurrection time and after the end. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 83(a) to 83(b) are similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 75(e) to 75(f), so the explanation will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(c) shows that the 199th symbol variation display is being performed since the revival time (time saving state c) started, and in the center of the display screen, "Resurrection time!" is displayed. Thereafter, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 ends at the timing shown in FIG. 83(d), and "434" is also displayed on the mini symbol in response.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(e) shows how the 200th symbol variation display has started since the revival time started. That is, it shows how the final symbol variation display is being executed in which the resurrection time is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 83(f), the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special drawing 2 becomes off, and in response, the mini symbol displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen also changes to the off-center of "417". A combination of decorative symbols will be displayed, and the resurrection time will end. In addition, in this embodiment, only one symbol variation display of special figure 2 can be held, but in the production shown in FIG. 83(f), there is no holding of special figure 2, so as shown in FIG. The variable production of “one cry” is not executed. In addition, if there is a hold on the special drawing 2, the "one time of tears" will be executed. It should be noted that instead of performing the "crying once" performance, a normal symbol variation performance using the special figure 2 may be performed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(f), decorative symbols are displayed, and are displayed in a combination of decorative symbols that are outside of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7", and at this timing, the number of consecutive chances and the total number of balls acquired are displayed. The number display is erased, the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. There is. In addition, the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are displayed, and "after jackpot = 209 times" and "346 times until play time" are displayed, respectively. Additionally, the words "Please hit left" are displayed above the decorative pattern to encourage you to hit left. Note that the display of the number of consecutive matches and the display of the total number of pitches acquired may be continuously displayed. Thereafter, the gaming state shifts from the revival time to the normal gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 83(g), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the suspension of the special pattern 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. . Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becomes the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon that was at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time has been updated to ``after jackpot = 210 times'' and ``345 times until play time.''

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(h), the 254th pattern variation display after the end of the jackpot game (of which, special pattern 1 is the 45th pattern variation display) is completed, and "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. In addition, in this performance example, as described above, since the normal game state is after the transition to the revival time (c time saving state) and the end, the transition does not transition to the crisp time, but it may transition. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(h), three symbol fluctuation displays for special symbol 1 are suspended, but symbol fluctuation displays for special symbol 2 are not suspended, and the number of starts between jackpots is displayed. ``After jackpot = 254 times'' is displayed, and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as ``301 times until play time.''

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(i) shows how the 255th symbol variation display has started after the end of the jackpot. At this time, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of remaining starts until play time is updated, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots becomes "after jackpot = 255 times", and the number of starts remaining until play time is "300 times until play time". "times". In this performance example, the number of symbol fluctuation displays remaining until play time is 300, so the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. In this way, it is shown that Sabohani's character SBH may be displayed even during times other than Sakusaku time.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(j), the 409th symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot (that is, the 200th symbol variation display of special map 1 after the end of the jackpot) ends, and the "decoration" 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. Moreover, at the timing shown in FIG. 83(j), three symbol variation displays of special figure 1 are suspended, but symbol variation displays of special symbol 2 are not suspended.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 83(k), the 410th pattern variation display after the end of the jackpot (that is, the 201st pattern variation display of special pattern 1 since the end of the jackpot) starts. It shows what happened. In this embodiment, after the jackpot game ends, when the 201st special symbol 1 symbol variation display starts, the transition is made to the crisp time, but after the transition to the c time saving state and the end, the crisp time will not be migrated to. In this performance example, since it is after the transition to the c time saving state and ending, there is no transition to the crisp time, and the symbol variation display using the normal time variation pattern table is subsequently executed. Furthermore, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement animation here, the pending icon (the pending icon subject to the current symbol change) that was at the display position of the first pending icon h11 starts moving toward the variable icon display area 280 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1, becomes the first hold icon h11, and becomes the third hold icon h11. The hold icon that was at the display position of the icon h13 moves toward the display position of the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 and becomes the second hold icon h12. After that, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time has been updated to ``after jackpot = 410 times'' and ``145 times until play time.'' Furthermore, the character SBH of Sabohani continues to be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, an example of the effect when the power is interrupted and restored during crisp time will be described. Here, FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect before and after the power is shut off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 84(a), a combination of decorative patterns outside of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4" is displayed, and both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are displayed in a fluctuating pattern. It is shown that there is no pending status and the status is on standby. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 84(a), the number of starts between jackpots is displayed as "after jackpot = 325 times", and the remaining number of starts until play time is displayed as "230 times until play time". In addition, in this production example, after the end of the jackpot game, the number of symbol fluctuation displays for special drawing 1 exceeds 200, so the transition is to crisp time, and the remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is Since it is less than 300 times, Sabohani's character SBH is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(b), the power to the pachinko machine 100 is cut off, and then, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 84(c) shows a backup state. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 84(c), when the backup is restored, in order to make it difficult to estimate the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the jackpot or the number of symbol fluctuation display until play time, The display of the number of starts is displayed as ``after jackpot = ??? times'', and the display of the number of starts remaining until play time is displayed as ``until play time ??? times''. In addition, the display of the characters ``Sakusaku Time'' and the Sabohani character SBH are also erased, making it difficult to recognize the number of symbol change displays after the end of the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols displayed after the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" which is a failure in the first roll of the morning.

In FIG. 84(d), a game ball enters the first special pattern starting hole 230 and a state in which the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 is started is shown. Here, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time both remain as "After jackpot = ??? times" and "Until play time??? times", and "Sakusaku time" The characters SBH and Sabohani character SBH continue to be hidden, and it is still difficult to recognize the remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 84(e), the 100th pattern variation display is being executed after the power is turned on. That is, it is shown that the symbol variation display is being executed for the 425th time in total from the number of symbol variation displays after the jackpot before the power is shut off. In addition, here as well, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time remains as "after jackpot = ??? times" and "until play time ??? times", and "crispy". The characters ``Time'' and the Sabohani character SBH continue to be hidden, and it is still difficult to recognize the remaining number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time. After that, as shown in FIG. 84(f), when the 100th symbol variation display after the power is turned on is completed, the number of symbol variations displayed after the power is turned on is added to the number of symbol variations displayed after the jackpot before the power is cut off. The results will be displayed. In other words, the number of starts between jackpots and the remaining number of starts until play time that are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen become clear, and the numbers are ``after jackpot = 425 times'' and ``130 times until play time'', respectively. The number of symbol fluctuation displays required before moving to play time can be recognized. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 84(f), more than 200 rotations have occurred after the end of the jackpot, and the transition has been made to crisp time, which will be described later, so the words "crispy time" are redisplayed in the lower left part of the display screen. At the same time, since the number of symbol fluctuation displays until play time is less than 300, the Sabohani character SBH indicating this fact is redisplayed. Note that, when the power is interrupted and restored, either or both of the character display of "Sakusaku Time" and the character SBH of Sabohani may not be displayed again.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern table used is switched to the Sakusaku Time variation pattern table, the words "Entering Sakusaku Time" and "Sakusaku Time" are displayed. You may choose not to do so. If you do this, Sabohani's character SBH will have messages such as "Sakusaku", "Sakusaku Time", and "Sakusaku Changing" that indicate the possibility that the variation pattern table in use has been switched to the Sakusaku Time variation pattern table. It is desirable to add characters. In other words, in this case, it can be said that the display of the Sabohani character SBH suggests the possibility that the variable pattern table in use is the Sakusaku Time variable pattern table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a description will be given of the relationship between the preview and the effect of displaying decorative pattern fluctuations. Here, FIG. 85 is a diagram showing step-by-step how an example of the preview performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. In addition, in FIG. 85, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(a), the decorative pattern combination "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 85(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. , In order to indicate this, an "x" is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of special figure 2.

Furthermore, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is displayed by the number of special drawing 1 holding lamps 218 lit, the number of holdings for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons for special drawing 1. The number of reserved special symbols 2 is represented by the number of lit special symbols 2 reserved lamps 220 and the number of reserved special symbols 2 displayed in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 85(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and among these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12, The first hold icon h11 is displayed in blue, that is, in a pre-read preview display mode. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 85(a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are respectively "after jackpot". = 156 times'' and ``399 times until play time'' are displayed.

In FIG. 85(b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special map 1 are displayed moving by moving animation, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started. In addition, this time's symbol change display is a jackpot win. Also, since the number of hits increased by one to 157, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are updated to "after jackpot = 157 times" and "398 times until play time" respectively. has been done.

In addition, this production example shows a dialogue preview being displayed. Multiple types of display formats are available for dialogue previews, and in the production example shown in FIG. 85(b), the dialogue has a lever pattern SLV whose base pattern is in the shape of a lever and the words "SP1?" It shows how the notice is being given. The preview performance that includes this lever symbol SLV is basically a preview with a lower reliability than other dialogue announcements, but for example, if it develops into an SP1 reach performance after that, the expectation for a jackpot is higher than other dialogue announcements. It is said to be a high prediction. In addition, when the SP1 reach effect is performed when a speech preview in which the lever symbol SLV is displayed is performed, it may always be a jackpot, or it may be a miss. Further, when a speech preview in which the lever symbol SLV is displayed is performed and the SP1 reach effect is not performed, it may always be a miss, or it may be a jackpot in some cases. In addition, as an example, if the lever symbol SLV is displayed and then develops into the SP1 reach effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when other notices are executed, but it is not limited to the SP1 reach effect, and other It may be a reach effect, or the reliability of a jackpot may be higher if a specific notice is executed than when other notices are executed, or a combination of one effect and another. If both predictions are executed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when other predictions are executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(c), when the line preview is deleted, an icon with the words "Lever stock!" is displayed, and the lever symbol SLV is displayed to the player with the line preview. It suggests. In addition, in this embodiment, the icon is displayed when the lever pattern SLV is displayed, but the icon may not be displayed, and the icon may or may not be displayed. good. Furthermore, when a speech preview is displayed in a display mode other than the lever symbol SLV, another icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(d), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on each of the left and right symbols, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(e), the left and right decorative patterns are moved to the upper left part, the middle pattern is enlarged and displayed to the right of the center, and the line "I'll leave it to you" is displayed. It is also shown that SP1 reach (Chappy reach) is started in which the character CHP of Chappie is displayed. That is, it is shown that the effect corresponding to the lever symbol SLV displayed in the dialogue preview is executed, suggesting that the expectation level for the jackpot is high. Note that the icon indicating that the lever pattern SLV is displayed is maintained.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(f) shows that the expectation level display effect is started. This expectation level display performance is a strong expectation level display performance, and is displayed in the form of a star-shaped frame with the words ``Super Hot!'' attached to it, suggesting that the level of expectation for a jackpot is high. The situation is shown. In addition to the mode shown in (f) of the same figure, the expectation level display effect may be executed in the form of a weak expectation level display effect shown in (f') of the same figure. A display with the words "Heat!" attached is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. It is also suggested that the In addition, although the lever pattern SLV is configured not to be displayed in the expectation level display effect, there may be a case where the lever pattern SLV is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(g), after "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle pattern and SP1 reach is completed, "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration" is displayed as shown in FIG. 85(H). A fluctuating display is performed with the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "4", and then a stop display is performed with the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" as shown in FIG. 85(i). .

Then, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(j), a jackpot game start performance is started in the manner shown in FIG. 72(y).

Furthermore, after the effect shown in Fig. 85(c) is performed, "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern, and "Decoration 4" is stopped on the right pattern, as shown in Fig. 85(d'''). There are cases where it is displayed but the reach status is not reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(e'''), the icon indicating that the lever pattern SLV is displayed is erased, and thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85(f'''), the middle pattern is displayed. ``Decoration 5'' is displayed in a stopped state, and is stopped and displayed after swinging and fluctuating in the combination of decorative patterns on the edge of ``Decoration 7 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 4''.

In addition, in this performance example, the lever symbol SLV is displayed and there are cases where it becomes a reach and cases where it does not become a reach, but when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, it may always become a reach. Furthermore, even if the lever symbol SLV is displayed and the SP reach does not develop, the game may shift to a relief reach after the development fails, and this relief reach may result in a jackpot. In this case, the expectation level of hitting the jackpot with the relief reach may be set higher when the lever symbol SLV is not displayed than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, or conversely set lower. Good too.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, another aspect of the relationship between the preview and the display of decorative pattern variation display will be described. Here, FIG. 86 is a diagram showing step-by-step how an example of the preview performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. In addition, in FIG. 86, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 86(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 , In order to indicate this, an "x" is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of special figure 2.

Furthermore, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is displayed by the number of special drawing 1 holding lamps 218 lit, the number of holdings for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons for special drawing 1. The number of reserved special symbols 2 is represented by the number of lit special symbols 2 reserved lamps 220 and the number of reserved special symbols 2 displayed in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 86(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and among these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12, The first hold icon h11 is displayed in red, that is, in a pre-read preview display mode. The anticipation of a jackpot is higher in the advance preview using the pending icon in the red display mode than in the advance preview using the pending icon in the blue display mode. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 86(a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are respectively "after jackpot". = 156 times'' and ``399 times until play time'' are displayed.

In FIG. 86(b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special map 1 are displayed moving by moving animation, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Also, since the number of hits increased by one to 157, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are updated to "after jackpot = 157 times" and "398 times until play time" respectively. has been done.

Also, this production example also shows how a dialogue preview is displayed. In the dialogue preview shown in FIG. 86(b), the lever pattern SLV similar to that shown in FIG. 85(b) is displayed. In addition, as another aspect of the dialogue preview, as shown in FIG. 86(b'), a large lever pattern BLV with the characters "SP1!!" displayed on the base pattern of a large lever is displayed. , when the big lever symbol BLV is displayed, SP1 reach is more likely to be executed than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, and the expectation level for the jackpot is higher than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed. There is. In addition, in the dialogue preview, as an aspect other than the lever pattern SLV and the big lever pattern BLV, as shown in FIG. 86 (b''), a normal version with the words "Chance!!" When a line preview of a mode or a line preview of a highly reliable mode with the words "Chance!!" added in a red oval frame is displayed, as shown in the same figure (b'''). There is also. Note that the dialogue previews shown in Figures 86(b'') and 86(b''') do not improve expectations for a jackpot when a specific performance is performed, but function as normal jackpot previews. Therefore, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the lever symbol SLV is displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot when the SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview is higher than that of other previews. higher than if executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), when the line preview is erased, an icon with the words "Lever stock!" This suggests that it is displayed. Further, the display mode of the icon may be different depending on whether the lever symbol SLV is displayed or the large lever symbol BLV is displayed.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86(d) shows that a button press effect is being performed as a mission notice. In the button continuous hit effect, the result is displayed when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 136.

When the production button 136 is repeatedly pressed during the button press production and the mission is successful, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86(e) displays a lever symbol SLV or a large lever as shown in FIG. 86(e'), indicating that the mission has been successful. The symbol BLV may be displayed. In this performance example, when the big lever symbol BLV is displayed as a speech preview, if the button successive performance is successful, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed and the big lever symbol BLV is displayed. Note that even if the big lever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, the lever symbol SLV may be displayed when the mission is successful. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 86(f) to 86(g) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 86(f) to 86(g) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 85(c) to 85(d), except that the display mode of the variable icon is different. The explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in this production example, if the button repetition production is successful, the lever pattern SLV (deka lever pattern BLV) may be displayed, and other modes of display are configured not to be displayed. may also be displayed.

In addition, in this production example, the manner in which the dialogue preview is displayed is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be displayed in other manners. may be displayed in the form of , or may be displayed in the form of a blue frame. In such a case, the lever pattern SLV (dekalever pattern BLV) whose base pattern is in the shape of a lever may have a lower reliability than other modes, or the lever pattern SLV where the base pattern is in the shape of a lever may be set to have a lower reliability than other modes. Other modes may be provided that are less reliable than a certain lever symbol SLV (deka lever symbol BLV). For example, the reliability when the SP1 reach effect is not executed is as follows: Lever symbol SLV < Deka lever symbol BLV < White < Blue < Red < Gold, or White < Lever symbol SLV < Deka lever symbol BLV < Blue < Red < Gold. Also good. Also, the reliability when the SP1 reach effect is executed may be as follows: white < blue < red < gold < lever symbol SLV < big lever symbol BLV, or white < blue < red < lever symbol SLV < golden < big lever symbol BLV. Or white < blue < red < lever pattern SLV < big lever pattern BLV < gold.

In addition, the characters displayed in the dialog preview are not limited to those mentioned above, and may be displayed in other ways, such as regular jackpot notices such as "super hot" and "big chance". There may also be characters that function as "SP2", characters that increase the level of expectation for a jackpot when a specific performance is performed, such as "SP2", characters that explain the game performance, and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a lever pattern SLV (big lever pattern BLV) whose base pattern is in the shape of a lever is displayed, the characters "SP1?" ("SP1!!") are added. However, the example is not limited to this example, and even if the lever symbol SLV (deka lever symbol BLV) is used, characters such as "chance" that function as a normal jackpot notice or characters that explain the game effect may be added. Also good. Even if characters other than "SP1?" ("SP1!!") are displayed, the lever pattern SLV (dekalever pattern BLV) whose base pattern is in the shape of a lever is displayed. If this happens, it suggests that expectations are high if SP reach 1 develops after that.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, another example of the relationship between the preview and the effect of displaying decorative pattern variation will be described. Here, FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step-by-step how an example of the preview performance in the decorative pattern variation display is performed. In addition, in FIG. 87, only the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown, and the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the normal pattern display device 210, the special pattern 1 holding lamp 218, and the special pattern 2 holding lamp 220 are shown. , and the ordinary figure holding lamp 216 are not shown.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 87(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 5 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 87(a), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. , In order to indicate this, an "x" is displayed in both the symbol change notification area of special figure 1 and the symbol change notification area of special figure 2.

Furthermore, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. A display area 281 is provided.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is displayed by the number of special drawing 1 holding lamps 218 lit, the number of holdings for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284, and the number of holding icons for special drawing 1. The number of reserved special symbols 2 is represented by the number of lit special symbols 2 reserved lamps 220 and the number of reserved special symbols 2 displayed in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284.

In FIG. 87(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are are also displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 87(a), the number of symbol fluctuations displayed after the end of the jackpot game is the 156th time, and the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are respectively "after jackpot". = 156 times'' and ``399 times until play time'' are displayed.

In FIG. 87(b), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special map 1 are displayed moving by moving animation, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special drawing 1. Thereafter, variable display of decorative patterns is started. Also, since the number of hits increased by one to 157, the display of the number of starts between jackpots and the number of starts remaining until play time are updated to "after jackpot = 157 times" and "398 times until play time" respectively. has been done. In addition, this production example shows a dialogue preview being displayed. In the example of production shown in FIG. 87(b), a situation is shown in which a speech preview with characters "SP1?" attached to the lever symbol SLV is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(c), when the line preview is deleted, an icon with the words "Lever stock!" is displayed, and the lever symbol SLV is displayed to the player with the line preview. It suggests.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(d), "Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on each of the left and right symbols, indicating that the player is in a ready-to-reach state.

After that, the SP2 reach is executed, and finally, as shown in FIGS. 87(e) to 87(i), a combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the SP2 reach effects shown in FIGS. 87(e) to 72(i) are shown in FIGS. 71(m) to 72(q) and FIGS. 73(r'') to 73(t''). It is executed according to the procedure.

In this production example, the lever symbol SLV was displayed in the dialogue preview, but since a production other than SP1 reach was executed, it may be said that a production with low expectation of jackpot was executed.

In addition, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot when SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed is higher than when other previews are executed, but other previews and pre-reading It may also be applied to previews, for example, after the pending icon is displayed as a blue pre-read notice, the display format remains unchanged and is displayed as a fluctuating icon, and then a specific effect (for example, SP1 Reach) is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot when executed is higher than that of other pending icon display modes, but in other cases, the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that of the pending icon of the red pre-read notice mode. Good too. Further, the specific performance is not limited to the reach performance, and may be a specific preview performance or the display of a specific message in a tutorial performance.

Further, the specific preview display such as the lever symbol SLV is not limited to the one described above, and may be displayed in other previews or pre-read previews.

In addition, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed after the reach effect has started, and other preview effects may be displayed after the reach effect has started, but the lever symbol The SLV may be displayed after the reach effect is started.

In the above description,
``A production means capable of performing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.];
A game machine comprising:
One type of notice among the plurality of types of notice is a first notice [for example, a dialogue notice shown in FIG. 85(b), etc.],
There is a case (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") where a first display [for example, lever pattern SLV shown in FIG. 85(b), etc.] is displayed during the execution of the first notice,
In the first case, when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, when the SP1 reach effect shown in FIGS. 85(e) to 85(g) is executed], the first case is It is easier to display a symbol that provides a gaming state advantageous to the player than when the predetermined condition is not met [For example, when the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview and the SP1 reach effect is executed, The jackpot symbol is more likely to be displayed than when a lever symbol SLV other than the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview and the SP1 reach effect is executed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine with characteristics in the performance means.

Further, according to this game machine, when the first display is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a certain performance will be executed, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the presentation means may be capable of executing only a plurality of presentations, or may be capable of executing other presentations. Further, the presentation means may always perform a plurality of presentations, or may not execute a plurality of presentations.

Further, the notice means may be capable of only giving multiple types of notices, or may be capable of executing things other than multiple types of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

Additionally, only the first display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or a display other than the first display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed. Good too. Further, the first display may always be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or the first display may not be displayed while the first notice is being executed.

Furthermore, the first display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the first display may be displayed even when the first notice is not being executed. good.

Furthermore, in the first case where the predetermined condition is met, only the symbols that create a gaming state advantageous to the player are more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met. Alternatively, if the predetermined condition is met in the first case, a symbol other than the symbol that will give the player a more advantageous gaming state than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met. It may be easier to display. In addition, in the first case where the predetermined condition is met, symbols that create a gaming state advantageous to the player are always more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met. Alternatively, in the first case where the predetermined condition is met, symbols that result in a gaming state advantageous to the player are more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met. There may be cases where there is none.

Further, only in the first case where the predetermined condition is met, symbols that result in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player are more likely to be displayed than in the first case where the predetermined condition is not met. Also, in cases other than the case where the predetermined condition is met in the first case, the symbol may result in a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the case where the predetermined condition is not met in the first case. may be easily displayed.

Note that the advance notice referred to here may include a pre-read notice.

In addition, ``a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in connection with the occurrence of the first case [for example, the lever stock indication shown in FIG. 85(c)] is displayed. Ru,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it may be possible to make a player who has missed the first display aware that the first display has been displayed.

Here, only a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in connection with becoming the first case may be displayed, or a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in connection with becoming the first case may be displayed. A display other than a certain suggestion display suggesting that the first display has been displayed may be displayed. Further, a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in connection with the first case may always be displayed, or a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in connection with the first case is displayed. There may be cases where a certain suggestion display indicating that one display has been displayed is not displayed.

Further, a certain indication indicating only that the first indication has been displayed in connection with becoming the first case may be displayed, or a certain indication indicating only that the first indication has been displayed in connection with becoming the first case, or Some suggestive display may be displayed that suggests something other than that one display has been displayed.

Further, a certain indication may be displayed that suggests that the first indication is displayed only in relation to becoming the first case, or a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed only in relation to becoming the first case, or a certain indication indicating that the first indication is displayed in relation to becoming the first case. A certain indication indicating that the first indication has been displayed may be displayed.

Further, "If a certain production is started after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain production has started [for example, FIG. 85(c) to As shown in Figure (f), if the SP1 reach is started after the lever stock display is displayed, the lever stock display is erased after the SP1 reach is started, etc.]
If the certain effect is not started and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased [e.g. , as shown in Fig. 85(c) and (d''') to (e''') in the same figure, the reach is not reached after the lever stock display is displayed, and before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. [Lever stock display is erased, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, if a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, only the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or the certain suggestion display may be displayed. If a certain effect is started after the certain effect is started, displays other than the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started. Furthermore, if a certain production is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may always be deleted after the certain production has started, or the certain suggestion display may not be displayed. If a certain effect is started after the certain effect is started, a certain suggestion display may not be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, if a certain production is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be deleted only after the certain production has started, or the certain suggestion display may be displayed. If a certain effect is started after the certain effect is started, the certain suggestion display may be deleted even after the certain effect is started.

Further, if a certain effect is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after only the certain effect is started, or the certain suggestion display may be displayed. If a certain production is started after the certain production, a certain suggestion display may be erased after production other than the certain production is started.

Further, if only a certain production is started after a certain suggestion display is displayed, a certain suggestion display may be erased after a certain production has started, or a certain suggestion display may not be displayed. If an effect other than the certain effect is started after the certain effect is started, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, if a certain effect is started only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, a certain suggestion display may be erased after a certain effect is started, or a certain suggestion display may not be displayed. If a certain effect is started other than after the certain effect is started, a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

Further, if a certain effect is started after only a certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started, or a display other than the certain suggestion display may be If a certain effect is started after the certain effect is displayed, a certain suggestion display may be erased after the certain effect is started.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if only the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. If a certain suggestion display is displayed and a certain effect is not started and a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a pattern other than the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. You may. In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is always stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. However, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may not be stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. There may be.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed only after a certain suggestion display is erased. It is OK, and if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed even after a certain suggestion display is erased. Good too.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after only a certain suggestion display is erased. It is OK, and if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the display other than the certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

In addition, if only a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. Okay, if a pattern other than a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is displayed without starting a certain effect, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

In addition, if a certain effect is not started after a certain suggestion display is displayed and a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. Okay, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is displayed without any other effect starting, then the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect only after a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. If a certain effect is not started and a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed even after a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. Good too.

In addition, if a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without starting a certain effect after only a certain suggestion display is displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. If a certain effect is not started and a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a display other than a certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain suggestion display is erased. You may.

Further, "one type of notice among the plurality of types of notice is a third notice [for example, the expectation notice shown in FIG. 85(f)],"
The first notice and the third notice are different notices,
In the first case, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the third notice is executed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 85(b) to 85(f), the lever symbol SLV is If SP1 Reach is executed after being displayed, the expectation level notice will be executed, etc.],
In the first case, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third notice is not executed [for example, in FIGS. 85(b) to 85(c), As shown in (d''') to (e''') in the same figure, if SP1 reach is not executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, the expectation level preview will not be executed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, when the first display is displayed and a certain effect is executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the third notice, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Here, if a certain effect is executed after the first case is reached, only the third notice may be executed, or if a certain effect is executed after the first case is reached. In this case, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. Furthermore, if a certain production is executed after the first case has been reached, the third notice may always be executed, or if a certain production is carried out after the first case has been reached. In some cases, the third notice may not be carried out.

Furthermore, the third notice may be executed only when a certain effect is executed after the first case is reached, or a third notice may be executed only when a certain effect is executed after the first case has occurred. The third notice may be executed in other cases as well.

In addition, if only a certain performance is executed after the first case is reached, a third notice may be executed, or if a performance other than the certain performance is performed after the first case is reached. If executed, a third notice may be executed.

Furthermore, if a certain effect is executed only after the first case has occurred, a third notice may be executed, or a certain effect may be executed even after the first case has occurred. If so, a third notice may be executed.

Also, if a certain effect is executed after only the first case has been reached, a third notice may be executed, or if a certain effect is executed after a case other than the first case has occurred. If executed, a third notice may be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case is reached, only the third notice does not need to be executed, and the first case does not need to be executed. In the case where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without a certain effect being executed after that, no notice other than the third notice may not be executed. In addition, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case is reached, the third notice does not necessarily have to be executed, and the first case does not need to be executed. If the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain effect is not executed, a third notice may be executed.

Further, the third notice does not need to be executed only when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case is reached, and the third notice does not need to be executed when the first case is reached. The third notice does not need to be executed even in cases other than the case where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the display.

In addition, if only the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case is reached, the third notice does not need to be executed, and the first case does not need to be executed. If a pattern other than the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without a certain effect being executed after that, the third notice does not need to be executed.

Furthermore, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after the first case is reached, the third notice may not be executed, and the first case may not be executed. If the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without any performance other than a certain performance being executed after that, the third notice does not need to be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect only after the first case, the third notice may not be executed, and the first case may not be executed. If the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect other than after the third notice does not need to be executed.

In addition, if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing a certain effect after only the first case, the third notice may not be executed, and the third notice may not be executed. If a certain effect is not executed and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after a certain event occurs, the third notice does not need to be executed.

In addition, in the first case, if the predetermined condition is met, only the third notice may be executed, or in the first case, if the predetermined condition is met, other than the third notice The notice may be executed. In the first case, if the predetermined condition is met, the third notice may always be executed, or in the first case, if the predetermined condition is met, the third notice may not be executed. There may be cases.

Further, the third notice may be executed only when the predetermined condition is met in the first case, or the third notice may be executed in the first case other than when the predetermined condition is met. Three notices may be carried out.

In addition, in the first case, if the predetermined condition is not met and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, only the third notice does not need to be executed, or in the first case, the predetermined condition is not met. If the decorative pattern is not established and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, no notice other than the third notice does not need to be executed. Furthermore, in the first case, when the predetermined condition is not met and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third notice does not necessarily have to be executed, and in the first case, the predetermined condition is not met. If the decorative pattern is not established and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a third notice may be executed.

Further, in the first case, the third notice may not be executed only when the predetermined condition is not met and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, or in the first case, the predetermined condition is not met. In cases other than the case where the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without being established, the third notice does not need to be executed.

Further, "one type of notice among the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, the button press effects shown in FIGS. 86(d) to 86(e), etc.],
The first notice and the second notice are different notices,
The first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 86(d) to 86(e), when the button press effect is successful, the lever symbol SLV displayed, etc.],
In one symbol variation display, when both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter, "second notice") [For example, as shown in Figures 86(b) to 86(e), after the lever symbol SLV is displayed as a dialogue preview, the lever symbol SLV is displayed due to a successful button press. displayed, etc.],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since the first display may be displayed in a plurality of preview performances, it may be possible to draw attention to various timings and improve the interest of the game.

Here, only the first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed, or a display other than the first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed. You can. Further, the first display may always be displayed while the second notice is being executed, or the first display may not be displayed while the second notice is being executed.

Further, the first display may be displayed only while the second notice is being executed, or the first display may be displayed other than when the second notice is being executed. .

In addition, in one symbol variation display, only the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed. In one symbol variation display, an event other than both the first preview in which the first display is displayed and the second preview in which the first display is displayed may be executed. In addition, in the first symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be always executed, or In the display, both the first preview in which the first display is displayed and the second preview in which the first display is displayed may not be executed.

Furthermore, in one symbol variation display, both a first notice in which the first display is displayed and a second notice in which only the first display is displayed may be executed, In one symbol variation display, both a first preview in which the first display is displayed and a second preview in which a display other than the first display is displayed may be executed.

Furthermore, in one symbol variation display, both a first notice in which only the first display is displayed and a second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed, In one symbol variation display, both a first preview in which a display other than the first display is displayed and a second preview in which the first display is displayed may be executed.

Also, only in one symbol variation display, both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed may be executed, In displays other than the one symbol variation display, both a first preview in which the first display is displayed and a second preview in which the first display is displayed may be executed.

Further, "the first display is a display that may be displayed in a first mode [for example, the lever pattern SLV in the normal mode shown in FIG. 86(b)],
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a second mode [for example, the Dekalever pattern BLV shown in FIG. 86(b')],
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different aspects,
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. [For example, as shown in Figures 86 (b') to (e'), after the Deka Lever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, if the button press effect is successful, the Deka Lever symbol BLV is displayed],
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 86(b') to 86(e'), after the big lever symbol BLV is displayed in the dialogue preview, if the button press effect is successful, the lever symbol SLV will be [Dekalever pattern BLV is displayed instead of being displayed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, variations in the first display may be increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Here, the first display may be displayed only in the first mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first mode, or may be sometimes not displayed in the first mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the second mode. Furthermore, the first display may be always displayed in the second mode, or may not be displayed in the second mode.

Note that the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially or completely different.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second indication may also be displayed in the second manner in the second notice. There may be cases where a display other than the one display is displayed. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is always displayed in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first indication may be displayed in the second manner in the second advance notice. It may not be displayed.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed only in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the second display may also be displayed in a mode other than the second mode. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second display may be displayed in a notice other than the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

In the second case, only after the first display is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second manner in the second notice. In the second case, even after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second indication may be displayed in the second manner in the second notice. The first display may be displayed.

In the second case, after only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is also displayed in the second mode in the second notice. In the second case, after a display other than the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the second display may also be displayed in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed only in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode also in the second notice. In the second case, after the first notice is displayed in a manner other than the second manner in the first notice, the second indication may also be displayed in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second mode in a notice other than the first notice, the second indication may also be displayed in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

Also, only in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. In cases other than the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second indication may also be displayed in the second notice. The first display may be displayed in some embodiments.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, only the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first indication in the first manner is displayed in the second notice. It may be omitted if a display other than the display is displayed. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is always displayed in the first mode in the second notice. Or, in the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the first indication is not displayed in the first manner in the second notice. There may be cases.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed only in the first mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first indication is displayed in the second manner in the first notice, the second indication is displayed in a manner other than the first aspect in the second notice. If the first display is displayed, it may be omitted.

In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode only in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in a notice other than the second notice. If the first display is displayed, it may be omitted.

Also, in the second case, after only the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. In the second case, after a display other than the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the second display in the first mode is displayed in the second notice. In the case where the first indication is displayed, it may not be necessary, or in the second case, after the first indication is displayed only in the second manner in the first notice, the second notice is displayed. In the case where the first indication is displayed in the first aspect, it is not necessary, or in the second case, the first indication is displayed in a manner other than the second aspect in the first notice. In the case where the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice after the second notice, the first display may not be displayed.

Also, in the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode only in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in a notice other than the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. If the first display is displayed, it may be omitted.

In addition, "During the execution of the first notice, a second display [for example, a red map with the words "Chance!!" displayed in a red oval frame as shown in FIG. 86(b''') pattern, etc.] may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"),
The first display and the second display are at least partially different displays,
If the certain effect is executed after the first case occurs, the jackpot is more likely to occur than if the certain effect is executed after the third case occurs [for example, The reliability of the jackpot is higher when SP1 reach is executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview than when SP1 reach is executed after the red map pattern is displayed in the dialogue preview. etc],
If the certain effect is not performed after the third case occurs, it is more likely to become a jackpot than if the certain effect is not performed after the first case occurs. For example, if the SP1 reach is not executed after the red map pattern is displayed in the dialogue preview, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than if the SP1 reach is not executed after the lever symbol SLV is displayed in the dialogue preview. High reliability, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, since the level of expectation for a certain performance changes between the first case and the third case, it is necessary to pay attention to which case will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There are cases where it is possible.

Here, only the second display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or a display other than the second display may be displayed while the first notice is being executed. You can. Further, the second display may always be displayed while the first notice is being executed, or the second display may not be displayed while the first notice is being executed.

Furthermore, the second display may be displayed only while the first notice is being executed, or the second display may be displayed at times other than when the first notice is being executed. .

Note that the first display and the second display may be partially or completely different.

In addition, "the certain performance is a certain super reach performance [for example, SP1 reach shown in FIGS. 85(e) to 85(g)],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In addition, ``the first display is a display that is not displayed after the reach effect has started [for example, the lever symbol SLV is not displayed after the reach effect is reached],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Further, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also, in the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control section 300, etc.) that can shift to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The game control means is means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables,
One type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state, etc.],
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a first fluctuation pattern table [for example, a normal time fluctuation pattern table, etc.],
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a second fluctuation pattern table [for example, a crisp time fluctuation pattern table, etc.],
The first fluctuation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state [for example, as shown in FIG. Until the fluctuation display is executed, the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used],
The second fluctuation pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state [for example, as shown in FIG. When the fluctuation display is executed, the crisp time fluctuation pattern table is used for the 201st to 540th special symbol 1 symbol fluctuation display],
When a first condition is satisfied during use of the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in a symbol variation display that starts thereafter. [For example, as shown in FIG. 66(g), if the jackpot game ends while the normal time variation pattern table is in use in the special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state, When the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is executed 200 times after that, the crisp time time variation pattern table is used in the symbol variation display that starts after that],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the game control means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine with characteristics in the game control means.

Further, according to this game machine, since the variable pattern table is changed when the first condition is met, variations can be made in the performance, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the game control means may be capable of shifting only to one of the plurality of gaming states, or may be capable of shifting to a gaming state other than one of the plurality of gaming states. It may be something. Further, the game control means may always shift to one of the plurality of gaming states, or may not shift to one of the plurality of gaming states. It may be.

Further, the game control means may determine only the variation time of the symbol variation display using one of the variation pattern tables of the plurality of variation pattern tables, or may decide only the variation time of the symbol variation display using one of the variation pattern tables of the plurality of variation pattern tables. One of the variation pattern tables may be used to determine something other than the variation time of the symbol variation display. Further, the game control means may always determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables, or may be one that always determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables. The variation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using one of the variation pattern tables.

Further, the game control means may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using only one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables, or may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using only one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be determined using something other than one of the fluctuation pattern tables.

Further, the first variable pattern table may be selected only in the first gaming state, or may be selected in gaming states other than the first gaming state. There may be. Furthermore, the first variable pattern table may be one that is always selected in the first gaming state, or may be one that may not be selected in the first gaming state.

Further, the second variable pattern table may be selected only in the first gaming state, or may be selected in gaming states other than the first gaming state. There may be. Further, the second variable pattern table may be one that is always selected in the first gaming state, or may be one that may not be selected in the first gaming state.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table to display the symbols in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. It may be that only the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is determined, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the first fluctuation time in the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that is determined. The second variation pattern table may be used to determine a time other than the variation time of symbol variation display. Further, when the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table to display the symbols in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. The variation time of the variation display may always be determined, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the variation time of the symbol variation display that starts after that may be determined. The variation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using the second variation pattern table.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses only the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after that. It may be something that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, then the The variation time of the symbol variation display may be determined using a variation pattern table other than the second variation pattern table.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table only in the symbol variation display that starts after that. It may be something that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, or if the first condition is satisfied while using the first fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that is determined. In the symbol variation display, the second variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, when only the first condition is satisfied while using the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after that. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, and if a condition other than the first condition is satisfied while using the first fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation will start after that. In the display, the second variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

In addition, ``When the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table than when the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. [For example, as shown in Fig. 67, when the quick time fluctuation pattern table is used than when the normal time fluctuation pattern table is used, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is likely to be shorter. Fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, such as no-reach or miss, are more likely to be selected, so fluctuation times tend to be shorter, etc.]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to adjust the pace of the game, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table is better than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. However, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be easily shortened, or the second fluctuation pattern table may be used rather than the first fluctuation pattern table to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display. When the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined by doing so, the time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened. Also, the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table is better than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. , the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may always be easily shortened, or the second fluctuation pattern table may be used to determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display rather than the first fluctuation pattern table. There may be cases where the variation time of the symbol variation display is not easily shortened when the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Also, it is better to use only the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be easily shortened, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be determined using the second fluctuation pattern table rather than the first fluctuation pattern table. The variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened in cases other than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Also, the case where only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table is better than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be easily shortened, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be determined using the second fluctuation pattern table rather than the first fluctuation pattern table. The variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened when a time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Also, the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using only the second variation pattern table is better than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be more likely to be shortened, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be more likely to be shortened than when the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the first fluctuation pattern table. When the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table, the variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened.

Also, the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table is better than the case where only the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be more likely to be shortened, and the second fluctuation pattern table may be used to determine a time other than the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using the first fluctuation pattern table. When the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using , the variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened.

Also, the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table is better than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using only the first variation pattern table. However, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be more likely to be shortened, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display may be shorter than the case where the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using a fluctuation pattern table other than the first fluctuation pattern table. When the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table, the variation time of the symbol variation display may be more likely to be shortened.

In addition, ``a certain display [for example, Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 81(l)] is displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table. [For example, as shown in FIG. 81(l), in Sakusaku Time where the Sakusaku Time time variation pattern table is used, when the number of symbol variation displays remaining until play time reaches 300, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to notify that time efficiency has improved, and it may be possible to increase the player's desire to play.

Here, only a certain display may be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or the second fluctuation pattern table may be used. A display other than a certain display may be displayed during the period in which the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined. Furthermore, a certain display may always be displayed during a period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or a symbol fluctuation display may be performed using the second fluctuation pattern table. A certain display may not be displayed during the period in which the fluctuation time of is determined.

Furthermore, a certain display may be displayed only during a period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or A certain display may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined.

Also, a certain display may be displayed during a period in which only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using the second fluctuation pattern table, or a certain display may be displayed using the second fluctuation pattern table. A certain display may be displayed during a period in which a time other than the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined.

Further, a certain display may be displayed during a period in which the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined using only the second fluctuation pattern table, or a fluctuation other than the second fluctuation pattern table may be used. A certain display may be displayed during a period in which the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the pattern table.

Furthermore, ``the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 82(h) In addition, if the ram is cleared when the power is turned on, it will not shift to crisp time even if the symbol variation display of special drawing 1 is executed 200 times],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is initialized when the power is turned on, and it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on. Conditions other than the first condition may not be satisfied in one gaming state. Furthermore, the first condition does not necessarily have to be satisfied in the first gaming state that is initialized when the power is turned on, or the first condition that is started when the first gaming state is initialized when the power is turned on. There may be cases where the first condition is satisfied in the gaming state of.

In addition, the first condition may not be satisfied only in the first gaming state that is started when the power is initialized when the power is turned on, or the first condition is established when the first gaming state is started when the power is initialized when the power is turned on. There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in a gaming state other than the gaming state.

Also, it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, which starts only when the game is initialized when the power is turned on, or when the game starts even when the game state is not initialized when the power is turned on. There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in the first gaming state.

Furthermore, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the game is initialized only when the power is turned on, or when the first condition is started when the game is initialized other than when the power is turned on. There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in the first gaming state.

In addition, "a first symbol display means capable of displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, etc.],
A second symbol display means capable of displaying a second symbol variation display [for example, second special symbol display device 214, etc.];
Equipped with
In the first gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions after the end of the jackpot game, when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times [for example, 200 times, etc.], the first condition is satisfied [for example, As shown in FIG. 81(f), when the symbol variation display of special symbol 1 is executed 200 times after the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern table to be used is switched to the quick time variation pattern table.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to reduce the discomfort felt when the player does not win a jackpot for a long time.

Further, according to this game machine, by improving the time efficiency until a certain state is reached, it may be possible to improve the player's desire to play.

Here, the first symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the first symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. good. Further, the first symbol display means may always display the first symbol variation display, or may not display the first symbol variation display in some cases.

Further, the second symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the second symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display. . Further, the second symbol display means may always display the second symbol variation display, or may not display the second symbol variation display in some cases.

In addition, in the first game state that transitions after the jackpot game ends, only the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or when the jackpot game ends. In the first gaming state to which the game will be transferred later, if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, a condition other than the first condition may be satisfied. In addition, in the first game state that is transferred after the jackpot game ends, the first condition may always be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the first condition may be satisfied when the jackpot game ends. In the first gaming state to which the game will be transferred later, the first condition may not be satisfied if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

Furthermore, in the first game state to which the jackpot game transitions after the end of the jackpot game, the first condition may be satisfied when only the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the first condition may be satisfied when the jackpot game ends. In the first gaming state that will be transferred later, the first condition may be satisfied if a symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

Further, only in the first game state that is transferred after the jackpot game ends, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the first condition may be satisfied when the jackpot game ends. Even in a game state other than the first game state to which the game state will be transferred later, the first condition may be satisfied if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

In addition, in the first game state that transitions only after the jackpot game ends, the first condition may be satisfied when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, or the first condition may be satisfied when the jackpot game ends. In the first gaming state to which the transition is made other than later, the first condition may be satisfied if the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times.

In addition, ``Equipped with performance means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of performing multiple performances,
The content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are common [e.g. , as shown in FIG. 67, both the normal time variation pattern table and the quick time variation pattern table have a common variation pattern that can be selected.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it may be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the game machine has been initialized.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the user from mistakenly thinking that the mode has shifted to a highly anticipated mode.

Here, the presentation means may be capable of performing only a plurality of presentations, or may be capable of performing other operations besides a plurality of presentations. Further, the presentation means may always perform a plurality of presentations, or may not execute a plurality of presentations.

Furthermore, even if only the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are the same, Good, the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are the same except for the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table. Good too. Furthermore, even if the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are always the same, Yes, if the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are not the same. There may be.

In addition, ``the game control means is configured to perform a second condition [for example, the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 1 for the 540th time after the end of the jackpot game] while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state. 66 (g ), when the number of symbol fluctuations of special pattern 1 reaches 540 after the end of the jackpot game while using the crisp time time-varying pattern table in the special pattern low probability state, the symbol fluctuations that start after that In the display, a normal time variation pattern table is used to determine the variation pattern],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, by securing a certain performance time, it becomes possible to execute a performance for transitioning to a certain state, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, when the second condition is satisfied while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first fluctuation pattern table in the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that. It may be that only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display is determined, or if the second condition is satisfied while the second fluctuation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation display that starts thereafter The first variation pattern table may be used to determine a time other than the variation time of symbol variation display. Further, when the second condition is satisfied while using the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table to display symbols in the symbol variation display that starts thereafter. The variation time of the variation display may always be determined, or if the second condition is satisfied while the second variation pattern table is used in the first gaming state, the variation time of the symbol variation display that starts thereafter may be determined. The variation time of the symbol variation display may not be determined using one variation pattern table.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied while using the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses only the first variation pattern table in the symbol variation display that starts after that. It may be something that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, and if the second condition is satisfied while the second fluctuation pattern table is being used in the first gaming state, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that starts thereafter may be determined. The variation time of the symbol variation display may be determined using a variation pattern table other than the one variation pattern table.

Further, when the second condition is satisfied while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first fluctuation pattern table only in the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that. It may be something that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, and if the second condition is satisfied while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, other than the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that, The first variation pattern table may also be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, when only the second condition is satisfied while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first fluctuation pattern table in the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that. It may be something that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, or if a condition other than the second condition is satisfied while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation starts after that. In the display, the first variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, if the second condition is satisfied only while using the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first fluctuation pattern table in the symbol fluctuation display that starts after that. It may determine the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display, and if the second condition is satisfied other than during the use of the second fluctuation pattern table in the first gaming state, the symbol fluctuation display will start after that. The first variation pattern table may be used to determine the variation time of the symbol variation display.

Further, "one type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, etc.],
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state,
There are cases where the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state without becoming a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). When a variable display is performed, the game shifts from the normal gaming state to the play time (b time saving state) without hitting the jackpot, etc.]
In the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends [for example, when the playing time ends and the normal gaming state [Sakusaku Time does not start after switching to],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the second game state ends, the number of changes to a certain state is short, so it may be possible to prevent excessive improvement in time efficiency to reach a certain state. .

Here, there may be a case where the first gaming state only shifts to the second gaming state without hitting a jackpot, or a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state without hitting a jackpot. There may be a case where the game state changes to a game state other than the current state. Alternatively, the first gaming state may always transition to the second gaming state without hitting a jackpot, or the first gaming state may not transition to the second gaming state without hitting a jackpot. There may be cases.

In addition, in the first case, it is not necessary that only the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends, and in the first case, the second condition does not have to be satisfied. There is no need for conditions other than the first condition to be satisfied in the first game state that is started after the game state ends. In addition, in the first case, the first condition does not necessarily have to be satisfied in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends, and in the first case, the second condition does not necessarily have to be satisfied. There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in the first game state that is started after the game state ends.

Furthermore, in the first case, it is not necessary that the first condition is satisfied only in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends; There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in a game state other than the first game state that is started after the end of the game state.

Furthermore, in the first case, the first condition does not have to be satisfied in the first gaming state where only the second gaming state ends and is started, and in the first case, the second condition does not have to be satisfied. There is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started after the gaming state other than the gaming state ends.

Further, only in the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that starts after the second gaming state ends, or in cases other than the first case. However, there is no need for the first condition to be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started after the second gaming state ends.

Further, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``Symbol display means that can perform variable display of special symbols [e.g., first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.];
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.],
A production means capable of performing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state) etc.],
The second time-saving state is a variable display of special symbols that does not continue to become a jackpot even after the jackpot game ends and shifts to a certain game state [for example, a special pattern low probability state, etc.] without becoming a jackpot. It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times the result is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "number of stuck times") reaches the first number [for example, 555 times, etc.]
A presentation in a manner that at least suggests the number of variable displays of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining number of times") until the number of times the special symbol gets stuck reaches the first number of times [for example, until the play time shown in FIG. 76(b) It is possible to perform a fluctuating number of times display, including displaying the remaining number of starts, displaying the number of starts between jackpots, etc.
The first condition [For example, a symbol variation display of special figure 2 executed after transitioning to the time saving state and the normal gaming state shown in FIGS. 75(a) to 75(b) (one symbol variation of When the execution of display) is completed, etc., the variable number of times performance is started,
The remaining number of times suggested at least when the fluctuating number of times performance is started is a number smaller than the first number of times [For example, as shown in FIG. 76(b), When the symbol variation display of 1st round ends and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 starts, the number of symbol variation displays required from the end of the jackpot game to the start of play time (555 times) is less than The display starts at the number of times (545 times, etc.)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine with characteristics in the performance means.

Moreover, according to this game machine, it may be possible to make the player feel a little advantageous.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of only variably displaying the special symbols, or may be capable of performing things other than variably displaying the special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always display the special symbols in a variable manner, or may not always display the special symbols in a variable manner.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the gaming state, or may be capable of controlling the state of the gaming state corpse. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be capable of executing only a plurality of presentations, or may be capable of executing operations other than a plurality of presentations. Further, the presentation means may always perform a plurality of presentations, or may not execute a plurality of presentations.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting time saving states other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the second time-saving state may be a state in which the state shifts when the number of times of getting stuck reaches only the first number of times, or a state in which it may shift when the number of times of getting stuck reaches a number other than the first number of times. It may be. Further, the second time-saving state may be one that always transitions when the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number, or it may be one that does not shift even if the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number. good.

Further, it may be possible to execute only a variable number performance that includes a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a performance other than a variable number of performance that includes a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times. Good too. Further, a varying number of times presentation that includes a presentation that at least suggests the remaining number of times may always be executed, or a variable number of times presentation that includes a presentation that at least suggests the remaining number of times may not be executed.

Further, it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes only effects that at least suggest the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes effects other than those that at least suggest the remaining number of times. Good too.

Further, it may be possible to perform a variable number of times effect that includes a mode that only suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes a mode that at least suggests something other than the remaining number of times. Alternatively, it may be possible to perform a variable number of times performance including a type of performance that always indicates the remaining number of times.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied, only the variable number of times performance may be started, or when the first condition is satisfied, a performance other than the variable number of times performance may be started. Further, the varying number of times presentation may always be started when the first condition is met, or the varying number of times presentation may not be started when the first condition is met.

Furthermore, the variable number of times effect may be started when only the first condition is satisfied, or the variable number of times effect may be started when a condition other than the first condition is satisfied.

Further, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the varying number of times performance is started may be smaller than only the first number of times, or the remaining number of times suggested at least when the varying number of times performance is started. may be a number smaller than the number of times other than the first number of times. Further, the remaining number of times suggested at least when the varying number of times performance is started may always be smaller than the first number of times, or the remaining number of times suggested at least when the varying number of times performance is started. may be a number that is not less than the first number of times.

In addition, the remaining number of times suggested when the variable number of times performance is started may be a smaller number than the first number of times, and the remaining number of times notified when the variable number of times performance is started may be a number smaller than the first number of times. The number may be less than one.

Further, "the game control means is a means capable of starting a normal game state [for example, a special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state, etc.],
The game control means is a means capable of starting a first time saving state [for example, a time saving state, etc.],
The normal gaming state is a gaming state including a non-time saving state,
The first time-saving state is a time-saving state that may shift after the end of the jackpot game,
Even in the first time-saving state, the number of times the machine gets stuck is counted every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed;
When the first time-saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition is satisfied and the variable number of times effect is started [For example, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, a time-saving state When the symbol change display for one tear ends, the display of the remaining number of starts until play time starts], etc.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it may be possible to make the player concentrate on saving time.

Here, the game control means may be capable of starting only the normal gaming state, or may be capable of starting a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. Further, the game control means may always start the normal gaming state, or may not start the normal gaming state.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the first time saving state, or may be capable of starting a game state other than the first time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the first time saving state, or may not start the first time saving state.

Further, the first time-saving state may be a state that may be entered only after the end of the jackpot game, or may be a state that may be entered other than after the end of the jackpot game. Further, the first time saving state may be one that always shifts after the end of the jackpot game, or may be one that does not shift after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, even in the first time saving state, only the number of times the special symbol gets stuck may be counted each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, or even in the first time saving state, the number of times the special symbol gets stuck every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. A number other than the number of times may be counted. In addition, the number of times the special symbol gets stuck may be counted every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first time saving state, or the number of times the special symbol gets stuck in the first time saving state may be counted every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. There may be cases where the number of times is not counted.

Also, in the first time saving state, the number of times the special symbol gets stuck may be counted each time only the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or even in the first time saving state, a display other than the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The number of times it gets stuck may be counted every time.

Further, the number of times the special symbol gets stuck may be counted each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner only in the first time saving state, or the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be counted in game states other than the first time saving state. The number of times the device gets stuck may be counted each time the device gets stuck.

Furthermore, when the first time-saving state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the first condition may be satisfied and only the variable number of times performance may be started, or the first time-saving state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs. Once the transition occurs, the first condition may be satisfied and a performance other than the varying number of times performance may be started. Furthermore, when the first time-saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times performance may always be started, or the first time-saving state may end and the normal gaming state returns. Once the transition occurs, the first condition may be satisfied and the varying number of times effect may not be started.

Further, when the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state is entered, only the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times performance may be started, or the first time saving state ends and the normal gaming state returns. When the transition occurs, a condition other than the first condition may be satisfied and the varying number of times effect may be started.

Furthermore, when the first time saving state ends and the transition is made to the normal gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times performance may be started, or when the first time saving state ends and the transition is made only to the normal gaming state. When the game state shifts to the gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number performance may be started.

Furthermore, when only the first time-saving state ends and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the first condition may be satisfied and the variable number of times performance may be started, or when the gaming states other than the first time-saving state end, When the game shifts to the normal gaming state, the first condition may be satisfied and the varying number of times performance may be started.

Furthermore, when the first condition is met, the fluctuation includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. The number of times production is started [For example, as shown in FIG. The number of symbol fluctuation displays required from the end to the start of the play time (555 times) minus the number of symbol fluctuation displays in the a time saving state and crying (9 times) is the number of times the symbol fluctuation display is required until the play time starts. displayed as the number of remaining starts],
The first condition is a condition that includes transitioning from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state when the first time saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, if the first condition is met, only the variable number performance that includes information that at least suggests that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. or, when the first condition is met, the fluctuation includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. A performance other than the number of times performance may be started. In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is always started. Alternatively, when the first condition is met, the number of fluctuations that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times that the special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. There may be cases where the performance does not start.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number production that includes only information that at least suggests that the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number as the remaining number of times starts. Alternatively, if the first condition is satisfied, information other than information that at least suggests that the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number is set as the remaining number of times. A fluctuating number of times presentation may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least suggests that only the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is started. Alternatively, when the first condition is met, information that at least suggests that the remaining number of times is a number other than the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. A fluctuating number of times presentation may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is started. Alternatively, when the first condition is met, information that at least suggests that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the number of times other than the first number of times. A fluctuating number of times presentation may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number obtained by subtracting only the number of variable display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game from the first number of times is started. Alternatively, when the first condition is met, information that at least suggests that the remaining number of times is the number obtained by subtracting the number of times other than the number of variable display of special symbols executed after the end of the jackpot game from the first number of times. A fluctuating number of times presentation may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed by subtracting the number of times the special symbol is displayed only after the end of the jackpot game from the first number of times is started. or, if the first condition is met, at least includes information that suggests that the remaining number of times is the number of special symbol fluctuation displays executed other than after the end of the jackpot game, subtracted from the first number of times. A varying number of times performance may be started.

In addition, when only the first condition is met, a variable number performance that includes information that at least indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is started. Alternatively, if a condition other than the first condition is satisfied, at least information indicating that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol fluctuation display executed after the end of the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times. A fluctuating number of times presentation may be started.

In addition, when the first condition is met, a variable number display including information that indicates that the remaining number of times is the number of times the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot game is subtracted from the first number of times is started. Alternatively, when the first condition is met, a fluctuating number performance including information that notifies the remaining number of times after subtracting the number of times of special symbol fluctuation display performed after the end of the jackpot game from the first number of times is started. may be done.

Further, the first condition may include only the transition from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state when the first time saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot game. , when transitioning to the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, it may include things other than the transition from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state. Further, the first condition may necessarily include that when the first time saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot game, the first time saving state is shifted to the normal gaming state. , the transition to the first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game may not include the transition from the first time-saving state to the normal gaming state.

Further, the first condition may include transitioning from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state only when the first time saving state is entered after the end of the jackpot game. , it may include a transition from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state in a case other than the case of transitioning to the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game.

Further, the first condition may include, in the case of transitioning to the first time saving state only after the end of the jackpot game, transitioning from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state. , it may include a transition from the first time saving state to the normal gaming state when the first time saving state is entered other than after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, ``the presentation means may include a time saving number notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the first time saving state ends [for example, FIG. 74(a) to FIG. 74(f) 74(k) to 74(m), etc.).
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player may be able to concentrate on the first time-saving state.

Here, the presentation means may be capable of only executing a time saving number notification presentation including a presentation that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the first time saving state ends; It may be possible to execute performances other than the time saving number notification performance including a performance that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the time saving state ends. Further, the presentation means may be one that always executes a time saving number notification presentation that includes a presentation that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the first time saving state ends; There may be cases where the time-saving number notification effect including the effect of notifying the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the end of the time saving effect is not executed.

Further, the presentation means may be capable of executing a time saving number notification presentation that includes only a presentation that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the first time saving state ends; It may be possible to execute a time saving number notification performance that includes a performance other than a performance that notifies the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the time saving state ends.

Further, the presentation means may be capable of executing a time saving number notification presentation including a presentation that notifies only the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the first time saving state ends; It may be possible to execute a time saving number notification performance including a performance that notifies a number of times other than the number of variable displays of the special symbol until the time saving state ends.

Further, the presentation means may be capable of executing a time saving number notification presentation including a presentation notifying the number of variable displays of the special symbol until only the first time saving state ends; It may be possible to execute a time saving number notification performance including a performance that notifies the number of variable displays of special symbols until a game state other than the time saving state ends.

In addition, "variable winning means into which game balls can enter [for example, first variable winning hole 234a, second variable winning hole 235a, etc.],
a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable winning means can pass [for example, V passing switch SW2, etc.];
The variable winning means is a means that can change state between a first state [e.g., closed state, etc.] and a second state [e.g., open state, etc.],
Between the first state and the second state, it is easier for the game ball to enter in the second state,
The variable winning means is configured to perform the above-mentioned variable winning means in connection with the result of the variable display of the special symbol being a small hit [for example, a small win that occurs when "special pattern b" to "special pattern d" are stopped and displayed]. It is a means for changing the state to the second state [for example, the second variable prize opening 235a opens when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed],
When the game ball passes through the specific area, the jackpot game can be started [For example, as shown in FIGS. When the played game ball passes through the V passing switch SW2, a jackpot game starts, etc.]
If the variable display of the special symbol is executed a second number of times (e.g., 200 times, etc.) without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state ends [e.g. If the symbol fluctuation display is executed 200 times without hitting the jackpot after entering the play time, the system will then shift to the normal gaming state, etc.]
The number of times the special symbol is varied and displayed (e.g., 8 times, etc.) from the start of the first time saving state until it ends without becoming a jackpot is smaller than the second number of times;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the second time-saving state has a structure in which it is easy to win a jackpot, it may be possible to have the player play the game with the aim of reaching the second time-saving state.

Here, the variable prize winning means may be one in which only game balls can enter, or may be one in which objects other than game balls can enter. Further, the variable winning means may be one in which the game ball always enters, or may be one in which the game ball does not enter in some cases.

Further, the specific area may be one through which only game balls that have entered the variable winning means can pass, or may be one through which objects other than game balls that have entered the variable winning means can pass through. Further, the specific area may be one through which the game ball that enters the variable winning means always passes, or may be one through which the game ball that enters the variable winning means may not pass through.

Further, the variable winning means may be capable of changing its state only between the first state and the second state, or may be capable of changing its state to states other than the first state and the second state. It may be. Further, the variable winning means may always change the state between the first state and the second state, or may not change the state between the first state and the second state. You can.

Further, the variable winning means may change the state only to the second state in relation to the small win as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, or the variable winning means may change the state only to the second state in relation to the result of the variable display of the special symbol. The state may change to a state other than the second state in connection with a small hit. Further, the variable winning means may always change the state to the second state in connection with the result of the variable display of the special symbol becoming a small hit, or the variable winning means may always change the state to the second state in connection with the result of the variable display of the special symbol. The state may not change to the second state in connection with a small hit.

Further, the variable winning means may change the state to the second state only in relation to the fact that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit, or the variable winning means may change the state to the second state only in relation to the fact that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small hit. The state may change to the second state in connection with something other than a small win.

Further, only the jackpot game may be started when the game ball passes through a specific area, or games other than the jackpot game may be started when the game ball passes through the specific area. Furthermore, the jackpot game may always be started when the game ball passes through a specific area, or the jackpot game may not start when the game ball passes through a specific area.

Further, the jackpot game may be started only when the game ball passes through a specific area, or the jackpot game may be started when the game ball passes through a specific area.

Further, if the variable display of the special symbol is executed a second number of times without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the second time saving state, only the second time saving state may end, or the second time saving state may end. If the variable display of special symbols is executed a second number of times without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the state, the game state other than the second time saving state may end. Further, the second time saving state may always end if the second time changing display of the special symbol is executed without becoming a jackpot after transitioning to the second time saving state, or the second time saving state may end. If the variable display of special symbols is executed a second number of times without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the state, the second time saving state may not end.

Further, the second time saving state may end if only the second number of variable display of special symbols is executed without hitting the jackpot after shifting to the second time saving state, or the second time saving state may end. The second time saving state may end if a display other than the variable display of special symbols is executed a second number of times without hitting the jackpot after transitioning to the state.

Further, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also, in the above description,
``Symbol display means that can perform variable display of special symbols [e.g., first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, etc.];
A game control means that can control the game state [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, etc.],
A production means capable of performing multiple productions [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means capable of starting a second time saving state [for example, play time (b time saving state) etc.],
The second time-saving state is a variable display of special symbols that does not continue to become a jackpot even after the jackpot game ends and shifts to a certain game state [for example, a special pattern low probability state, etc.] without becoming a jackpot. It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times the result is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the "number of stuck times") reaches the first number [for example, 555 times, etc.]
A variable number display including a display in a manner that at least suggests the number of variable displays of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "remaining number") until the number of times the special symbol gets stuck reaches the first number [for example, FIG. 76(b)] It is possible to display the number of starts remaining until the play time shown in
The remaining number of times can be stored and retained even if the power is cut off,
If the backup is restored after the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the game will start with the remaining number of times before the power was cut off,
If the power is initialized and restored after the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the remaining number of times is set to the first number of times and the game is started,
The fluctuating number of times effect is started in the same manner in the first case and the second case [For example, as shown in FIG. 76(e) and FIG. Even if you do so, the display of the number of starts remaining until the play time starts in the same manner],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the performance means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine with characteristics in the performance means.

Also, according to this gaming machine, since the behavior is the same in the first case and the second case, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the first case is the one (the remaining number of games is small). There is.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the special symbols, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the special symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always display the special symbols in a variable manner, or may not always display the special symbols in a variable manner.

Further, the game control means may be capable of controlling only the gaming state, or may be capable of controlling states other than the gaming state. Further, the game control means may always control the game state, or may not control the game state in some cases.

Furthermore, the presentation means may be capable of executing only a plurality of presentations, or may be capable of executing operations other than a plurality of presentations. Further, the presentation means may always perform a plurality of presentations, or may not execute a plurality of presentations.

Further, the game control means may be capable of starting only the second time saving state, or may be capable of starting game states other than the second time saving state. Further, the game control means may always start the second time saving state, or may not start the second time saving state.

Further, the second time-saving state may be a state in which a transition occurs when only the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number, or a state in which it may be shifted when a number of times other than the number of times of getting stuck reaches the first number. It may be. Further, the second time-saving state may be one that always transitions when the number of times the vehicle gets stuck reaches the first number, or it may be one that does not shift when the number of times that the vehicle gets stuck reaches the first number.

Further, it may be possible to execute only a variable number performance that includes a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a performance other than a variable number of performance that includes a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times. Good too. Further, a variable number performance including a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times may always be executed, or a variable number of times performance that includes a performance that at least suggests the remaining number of times may not be executed.

Further, it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes only effects that at least suggest the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes effects other than those that at least suggest the remaining number of times. Good too.

Further, it may be possible to perform a variable number of times effect that includes a mode that at least suggests only the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to execute a variable number of times effect that includes a mode that at least suggests other than the remaining number of times. good.

It should be noted that it may be possible to execute a variable number performance that includes a presentation that suggests the remaining number of times, or it may be possible to perform a variable number presentation that includes a presentation that notifies the remaining number of times.

Further, even if the power is cut off, only the remaining number of times may be stored and retained, or even if the power is cut off, the number of times other than the remaining number of times may be stored and retained. Further, the remaining number of times may always be stored and retained even if the power is cut off, or the remaining number of times may not be stored and retained even if the power is turned off.

In addition, if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the game may be started only for the remaining number of times before the power was cut off, or if the power is returned to the backup after the power is cut off, the game may be restarted. The game may be started for a number of times other than the remaining number of times before being cut off. In addition, if the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the game may always start with the remaining number of games before the power was cut off, or if the power is returned to the backup after the power is cut off, There may be cases where the game does not start with the remaining number of times before being cut off.

Also, only when the backup is restored after the power is cut off, the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power was cut off, or if the backup is returned after the power is cut off Alternatively, the game may be started with the remaining number of games before the power is cut off. In addition, if the backup is restored only after the power is cut off, the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power was cut off, or if the backup is returned other than after the power is cut off. , the game may be started with the remaining number of times before the power is cut off.

In addition, if the power is initialized and restored after the power is cut off, the game may be started with only the remaining number of times as the first number, or the game may be started after the power is cut off and the game is initialized. When the power is restored, the number of times other than the remaining number of times may be set as the first number of times and the game may be started. In addition, if the power is initialized and restored after the power is cut off, the remaining number of times may be set as the first number and the game will always start, or the game may be started without fail after the power is cut off and the game is initialized. When the power is restored, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number of times and the game may not be started.

Further, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number of times and the game may be started only when the power is initialized and the power is restored after the power is cut off. Even in cases other than the case where the power is restored, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number of times and the game may be started. In addition, if the power is initialized and the power is restored only after the power is cut off, the remaining number of times may be considered as the first number and the game may be started. If the power is restored after the game is turned on, the remaining number of times may be set to the first number of times and the game may be started.

Further, only the variable number of times effect may be started in the same manner in the first case and the second case, or effects other than the variable number of times effect may be started in the same manner in the first and second cases. may be done. Furthermore, the variable number of times effect may always start in the same manner in the first case and the second case, or the variable number of times effect may not start in the same manner in the first and second cases. There may be.

Furthermore, ``Neither the variable number performance that starts in the first case nor the variable number performance that starts in the second case does not directly suggest the remaining number of times. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 76(e) and 76(e'), whether the backup is restored or the ram is cleared, the display of the number of starts remaining until the play time is changed to "play time". "Until ??? times" is displayed, making it difficult to recognize the number of starts remaining until play time]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, in both the variable number performance that starts in the first case and the variable number performance that starts in the second case, only the performance starts in a manner that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times. In both the variable number performance that starts in the first case and the variable number performance that starts in the second case, the performance is performed in a manner that does not directly indicate the remaining number of times. Other performances may be started. In addition, in both the variable number performance that starts in the first case and the variable number performance that starts in the second case, the performance is always started in a manner that does not directly indicate the remaining number of times. Alternatively, in both the variable number performance that starts in the first case and the variable number performance that starts in the second case, the performance is performed in a manner that does not directly suggest the remaining number of times. It may not start.

Furthermore, in both the variable number of times performance that starts in the first case and the variable number of times performance that starts in the second case, the performance is started in a manner that does not directly suggest only the remaining number of times. Alternatively, in both the variable number performance that starts in the first case and the variable number production that starts in the second case, the number of times other than the remaining number of times is not directly suggested. The performance may be started.

In addition, when the second condition [for example, when the symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on] is satisfied, the fluctuation number performance is performed in a manner that directly suggests the remaining number of times. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 76(e) to 76(h), when the symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, "until play time ??? times"] The display of the number of starts remaining until the play time that was displayed has changed to "292 times until the play time", and the number of remaining starts will be announced],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to make the player expect the first case until the second condition is satisfied.

Here, when the second condition is met, only the performance that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times performance, or when the second condition is met, the remaining number of times is directly indicated in the variable number of times performance. A presentation other than the presentation in the manner suggested may also be started. Furthermore, when the second condition is met, a performance that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the fluctuating number of times performance, or when the second condition is met, the remaining number of times is directly indicated in the fluctuating number of times performance. There may be cases where the presentation is not started in the manner suggested in .

Furthermore, when the second condition is met, a performance that directly suggests only the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times performance, or when the second condition is met, a number of times other than the remaining number of times in the variable number of times performance is started. A presentation may also be started in a manner that directly suggests this. Furthermore, when the second condition is met, a production that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started only in the variable number production, and when the second condition is met, the remaining number of production may be started even in production other than the variable number production. A presentation may be started in a manner that directly suggests the number of times.

Furthermore, if only the second condition is satisfied, a performance that directly suggests the remaining number of times may be started in the variable number of times performance, or if a condition other than the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times is indicated in the variable number of times performance. A presentation may be started in a manner that directly suggests the following.

Further, in the first case, the second time saving state may be started before the second condition is satisfied [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77(c) to 77(f). If the number of symbol fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot game reaches 555 before the symbol fluctuation display is executed 100 times after the power is turned on, the remaining number of starts until play time The display will continue to show "Until play time ??? times" and move on to play time, etc.)
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it may be possible to give a surprise to the player.

Here, in the first case, only the second time saving state may start before the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, before the second condition is satisfied. A gaming state other than the second time-saving state may be started. Furthermore, in the first case, the second time saving state may always start before the second condition is met, or in the first case, the second time saving state may start before the second condition is met. There may be cases where the state is not started.

Furthermore, in the first case, the second time saving state may be started only before the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, the second time saving state may be started other than before the second condition is satisfied. The second time saving state may also be started. Furthermore, in the first case, the second time saving state may be started before only the second condition is satisfied, or in the first case, a condition other than the second condition is satisfied. The second time-saving state may be started before the above-mentioned period. In addition, the second time saving state may be started only in the first case before the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition may also be started in cases other than the first case. The second time-saving state may be started before the situation is established.

In addition, in the first case, the jackpot game may be started before the second condition is satisfied.
A game machine characterized by:
It may be.

In addition, ``a display means capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
In the first case and the second case, the combination of decorative patterns displayed as the initial pattern is the same [For example, as shown in FIGS. 76(e) and 76(e'), The combination of decorative symbols displayed as the initial symbol (first roll in the morning) when the power is turned on is displayed as a combination of decorative symbols on the outskirts of "Decoration 1 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" in both cases and when the ram is cleared. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative pattern variation display, or may not display the decorative pattern variation display in some cases.

Further, "the gaming machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The following is an additional description including what has been explained so far.

(Additional note 0)
a symbol display means capable of performing variable display of special symbols;
a game control means capable of controlling the game state;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means capable of starting a second time saving state,
The second time-saving state refers to the number of times the result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol that is a loss has been displayed continuously without becoming a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to a low probability state (hereinafter referred to as the number of times the result of the fluctuating display of the special symbol is displayed without becoming a jackpot). It is a time-saving state that may shift when the number of times) reaches the first number,
If the result of the variable display of the special symbol that is out of the third number of times is displayed without hitting the jackpot after the second time saving state is started, the second time saving state ends,
The second time saving state does not start until the jackpot is reached after the second time saving state ends;
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 1)
A production means capable of performing multiple productions,
A notice means capable of giving multiple types of notice;
A game machine comprising:
One type of notice among the plurality of types of notice is a first notice,
There is a case where the first display is displayed while the first notice is being executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
If a certain performance is performed after the first case occurs, it is more likely to become a jackpot than if the certain performance is performed without the first case.
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
A certain suggestion display is displayed that suggests that the first display is displayed in connection with the first case.
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 2,
When the certain production is started after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the certain suggestion display is erased after the certain production has started,
If the certain production is not started and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is displayed, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the certain suggestion display is erased;
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 4)
The game machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3,
One type of notice among the plurality of types of notice is a third notice;
The first notice and the third notice are different notices,
If the certain performance is executed after the first case occurs, the third notice is executed,
If the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed without executing the certain effect after the first case is reached, the third notice is not executed;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4,
One type of notice among the plurality of types of notice is a second notice,
The first notice and the second notice are different notices,
The first display may be displayed while the second notice is being executed;
In one symbol variation display, when both the first notice in which the first display is displayed and the second notice in which the first display is displayed are executed (hereinafter, "second notice") ).
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine described in appendix 5,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a first manner,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect are at least partially different aspects,
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the second mode in the second notice as well. The display may appear;
In the second case, after the first display is displayed in the second mode in the first notice, the first display is displayed in the first mode in the second notice. is not displayed,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6,
There may be cases where a second display is displayed during the execution of the first notice (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"),
The first display and the second display are at least partially different displays,
If the certain effect is executed after the first case is reached, the jackpot is more likely to be won than if the certain effect is executed after the third case is reached,
If the certain performance is not performed after the third case is reached, the jackpot is more likely to be won than if the certain performance is not performed after the first case is reached.
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 8)
The game machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7,
The certain production mentioned above is a certain super reach production,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8,
The first display is a display that is not displayed after the reach effect has started,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
The game machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
A game machine equipped with a game control means capable of shifting to one of a plurality of types of game states,
The game control means is means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display using one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables,
One type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state,
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a first fluctuation pattern table,
One type of fluctuation pattern table among the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables is a second fluctuation pattern table,
The first variable pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state,
The second variable pattern table is a table that may be selected in the first gaming state,
When a first condition is satisfied during use of the first variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the second variation pattern table in a symbol variation display that starts thereafter. is a means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 12)
The gaming machine according to appendix 11,
The case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table is better than the case where the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the first variation pattern table. , The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display tends to be shortened,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 13)
The game machine according to appendix 11 or 12,
A certain display may be displayed during a period in which the variation time of the symbol variation display is determined using the second variation pattern table,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 13,
The first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started when the power is turned on.
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 15)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 14,
a first symbol display means capable of displaying a first symbol variation display;
a second symbol display means capable of displaying a second symbol variation display;
Equipped with
In the first gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions after the end of the jackpot game, when the first symbol variation display is executed a certain number of times, the first condition is satisfied;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 16)
The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 15,
Equipped with a production means that can perform multiple productions,
The content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the first variation pattern table and the content of the effect in the symbol variation display executed using the second variation pattern table are common;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 17)
The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 16,
When a second condition is satisfied during use of the second variation pattern table in the first gaming state, the game control means uses the first variation pattern table in a symbol variation display that starts thereafter. is a means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 18)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 17,
One type of gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state including a non-electric support state,
The second gaming state is a gaming state including an electric support state,
There is a case where the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state without hitting the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"),
In the first case, the first condition may not be satisfied in the first gaming state that is started after the second gaming state ends;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 19)
The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 11 to 18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game machine characterized by:

FIG. 88 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game media ejected from the ejection means 901 to the game area 902 can be ejected from the game area 902 and supplied to the ejection means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game machine. An upper plate 126 and a lower plate 128 shown at 58 are not provided.

Note that an embodiment may be adopted in which the above-described display means 903 is further provided on the upper tray 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 58, and a touch panel may be further provided in this display means 903. You can. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operation means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a continuous press operation, or a long press operation on the touch panel, and if the long press auto continuous press function is enabled, the touch panel It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel while the touch panel continues to be touched. Further, the configuration may be such that the long-press auto-repeat function is not enabled. Further, in some performances, the long-press auto-repeat function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-repeat function may be activated or not activated on the touch panel, or may be configured to activate more or fewer effects. . Furthermore, there are multiple performances based on repeated tap operations on the touch panel, and when performed on the touch panel, the configuration may be such that the long-press auto repeated tap function is often not enabled, or may be configured to be configured to be less effective. .

As explained above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 88 is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine. may be performed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (spindle gaming machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be explained using FIG. 89. Here, FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 89 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 89), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is configured so that it can rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 1013, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 1010 to 1012 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 1014 that becomes valid. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line becomes valid, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line will become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, Five lines, including the down winning line and the right up winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he is playing a bonus game. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the medal input button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are input when the medal input button 1031 is pressed, and three coins are input when the medal input button 1032 is pressed. It is now ready to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 will also be referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1041 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. It is. The stored medal number display 1025 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout token number display 1027 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1041 or when the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take on a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the valid operation period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting personal game history information of a player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

A title panel 1062 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 1036 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 1060 is disposed at the top of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided at the top of the presentation device 1060. This production device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. However, when winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and if Cash Out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt containing a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 2010. It may be.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3(b), a mobile phone 3000 is equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 that includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that implements the present invention, and a home video game machine 5000 that includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that implements the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. The game computer includes a storage section that stores electronic data for realizing the invention, and a control section that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage section and operations of the operation section.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. The game controller includes a storage section that stores electronic data (electronic data that realizes the above), and a control section that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage section and operations on the operation section. The home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 2(d) includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data (such as a DVD). The game controller includes a storage section that stores electronic data (electronic data that implements the present invention), and a control section that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage section and operations on the operation section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6(e), the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that implements the present invention. There is a case where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from this data server 6000 to a home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 4(d) via an Internet line.

Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a game program that simulates the operations of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In this case, the recording medium for recording the game program may be a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium.

Further, although the present invention has been exemplified as a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game machine, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a junk ball game machine, a smart ball, etc.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may not be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, or a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 91 to 111. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 91 to 111 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 91 to 111, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 111, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 91 to 111.
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 91. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and a main body open sensor 1041 is provided to detect when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening. A clerk at the game parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are provided on the front side. is installed. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. The front frame door 106 corresponds to an example of a door body. Note that in this embodiment, a device whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes a ball storage tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a ball extraction button 130 that allows the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to be ejected from the ball storage tray 126 by the player's operation, and a ball removal button 130 that allows the game balls that have been guided to the firing device 110 by the player's operation to be ejected from the game board. A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices according to the player's operation, and a button lamp 138 that is built into the performance button 136 and causes the performance button 136 to emit light. , and a ball lending operation button 140 for issuing a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game parlor. Although not shown in FIG. 91, a return operation button is also provided on the right side of the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 in which a cross key and a decision button are arranged is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110 shoots a game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player. This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

FIG. 92 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 91 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 94). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach a ball storage tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the granting conditions, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the granting conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 94) that performs overall control processing of the game, and a main board case 158 that stores the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 94) that performs control processing for the overall game. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 constituting a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 94) that performs control processing regarding production based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 94) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (that performs control processing related to payout of game balls). A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 (see FIG. 94) and is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error by the operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 94 A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the launch board 174 (see FIG. 94), and a power switch that constitutes a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 94) that supplies power to various electrical game machines and turns the power on and off by operation by a game store clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. An interface section 606 for transmitting and receiving information is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode allows setting at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities. can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board that is mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 911(A), the accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a portion of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 93(a) is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left, and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom. Although not shown in FIG. 93, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side facing the player is sometimes referred to as the front side or the front side, and the back side is referred to as the rear side. Or sometimes called the back side.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a game board 201 serving as a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 201. When detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas other than the gaming area 124 of the gaming board 200 may be referred to as non-gaming areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performances, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the performance display area 208d displays images used for performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be changed freely within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) type display, a leaf type display, a plasma display, and a projector.

A main control lamp board 254 is provided below the gaming area 124.

FIG. 93(b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in FIG. 93(b), on the main control lamp board 254, there are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol holding lamp 216. , a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, a high accuracy medium lamp RK, an electric support medium lamp RD, a right-hand hit lamp RM, and a round display lamp RR are arranged. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and in this embodiment is configured with two vertical LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment, each is configured with eight LEDs in two stages, upper and lower.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation games are held until a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do so. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are on hold, and in this embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is said that In addition, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are on hold, and in this embodiment, it is possible to hold the special figure variable games up to a predetermined number (for example, four). is possible.

Further, the high probability medium lamp RK is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state. The electric support mode lamp RD is a lamp for shortening the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol and indicating that the blade member 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is in the electric support state where it is easy to open for a long time. . The right-hand hitting display lamp RM is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain benefits by playing right-handed, in a jackpot gaming state, a variable probability state, and an electric support state. The round display lamp RR is a lamp for indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won.

A game board 200 shown in FIG. 93(a) is provided with a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where game balls can roll. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 208 to the stage 244 from the warp exit 242b. The stage 244 is provided below and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is a stage on which the game ball that has passed through the warp device 242 exhibits movements such as reciprocating motion and rotational motion. In this stage 244, the game ball reciprocates or rotates, which increases the residence time of the game ball.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 124, the first effect movable body 7 is disposed so as to be supported by the main body 104. The first effect movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light emitting section 71 in which a plurality of light emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Further, on the right side of the game area 124, a second performance movable body 8 imitating a person's right arm is arranged. This second effect movable body 8 consists of an upper arm part 81 and a forearm part 82, including an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm to the shoulder position, and a forearm (not shown) that rotates the forearm to the elbow position. It includes a motor and a finger motor (not shown) that bends and extends the five fingers. The second effect movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a movable region by an upper arm motor and a forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 93(a), a part of the upper part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. Further, the upper right part of the game area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and a regular figure starting opening 228 is arranged at the back (rear side) of the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one installed in The ball that has passed through the normal game starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, but when it enters, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one) are paid out, and the entered game ball is It is also possible to guide it to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and discharge it to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one first special figure start opening 230 is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped production lamp 206 is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230. Furthermore, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 is arranged on the left side of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 92 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4 balls) of balls are stored as prize balls. At the same time as discharging it onto the tray 126, a special symbol variation game using the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Further, in this embodiment, an attacker unit 23 is provided at the lower right portion of the game area 124, and this attacker unit 23 is also separately provided with an electric chew type first special figure starting opening. Hereinafter, the first special figure starting hole 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 will be referred to as the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230, and the electric chew type first special figure starting hole provided separately in the attacker unit 23 will be referred to as the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230. The opening is sometimes referred to as the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231 to distinguish between the two. The blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 advances and retreats in the front and back direction, and in the advanced state it forms a ball path and is in a difficult winning state, and in the backward state it is in an easy winning state. In the following description, the advancing state of the blade member 2311 may be referred to as "closed," and the retracting state thereof may be referred to as "opening." Furthermore, a light emitting diode (not shown) capable of emitting light in full color is also arranged in the attacker unit 23.

In addition, the attacker unit 23 is provided with, in addition to the first special figure starting hole (variable) 231, a second special figure starting hole 232, a first variable winning hole 234, and a second variable winning hole 235. These variable winning openings are sometimes referred to as "attackers". The first door member 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacker) 234 advances and retreats in the front and back direction, and in the advanced state it forms a ball passage and is in a difficult winning state, and in the backward state it is in an easy winning state. In the following description, the state in which the first door member 2341 is advanced is sometimes referred to as closed, and the state in which the first door member 2341 is retreated is sometimes referred to as open. The second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacker) 235 also advances and retreats in the front and back direction, but unlike the first door member 2341, in the advanced state, it forms a ball passage and is in an easy winning state, and retreats. In this state, it becomes difficult to win a prize. In the following description, advancing the second door member 2351 may be referred to as opening, and retreating the second door member 2351 may be referred to as closing.

Due to its arrangement, the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center shown in FIG. 93(a) has a configuration that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter when the game ball is hit to the right. . On the other hand, in the center of the stage 244 mentioned above, there is a special route 244a that makes it easier for the ball that has reached the stage 244 to enter the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200. It is provided. Note that it is also possible to aim at the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 from the left side without passing through the stage 244. Therefore, the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230 provided at the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting hole through which a ball can be expected to enter by hitting the ball to the left.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, the gaming area 124 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes. When a ball enters the general winning hole, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and, assuming that the ball has entered the general winning hole, drives the payout device 152 and releases a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4 balls) as prize balls. It is discharged into the ball storage tray 126. The balls that enter the general winning hole are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, the game area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 there are no winning holes or starting points. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls that have not entered the mouth to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and the firing rod is activated. Then, the ball passes through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and is launched into the game area 124 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball hitting direction conversion member 236, a game nail, etc., and either enters various winning holes or starting holes, or enters any winning hole or starting hole. The player reaches the out port 240 without winning the starting port or only by passing through the regular pattern starting port 228. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect passage of a game ball received in the ejected ball receiving port. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, Although it is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge path, only the game balls discharged from the out port 240 may pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using FIG. 94. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also receives signals output by various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a ball storage tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the like. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the second special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular symbol display device 210, and various status display sections 328 (for example, , regular map holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp RK, electric support medium lamp RD, right-handed lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.) drive circuit 330 and a predetermined movable member, for example, a driving means for driving the blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 as a normal electric accessory, and a first variable winning prize as a special electric accessory. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the opening 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

In addition, when the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has won in the first special figure starting port 230, 231, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output to. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230, 231 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value memory corresponding to the special figure 1. stored in the register. Furthermore, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special figure 2.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (eg, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control section, which will be described later), is started.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600, and with this configuration, the Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Further, the configuration may be such that the ROM 406 is included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped performance lamp 206, a light emitting section 71 provided on the first performance movable body 7, a light emitting diode (not shown) disposed on the attacker unit 23, etc. There is. Further, the gaming machine frame lamp 452 includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, a button lamp 138 that causes the production button 136 to emit light, and the like.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a first effect movable body 7 on the upper part shown in FIG. A drive circuit 422 for controlling the motors of various performance devices such as the performance movable body 8, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is a basic circuit that receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of various presentation devices, etc., and button sensors 426 that detect presses of various buttons that constitute the presentation button 136 and the operation key unit 190. 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (VDP) reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub-liquid crystal display device 207. It is equipped with a video display processor) 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control section 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface section 606. The payout control unit 600 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 receives control signals output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output by a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Based on the control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount, the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 is controlled, and the ball feeding device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the firing device 110 is controlled. Take control.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 connects the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500 with each other. Although power at a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 95(a) to 95(d), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed to stop. We will explain the types of special and regular maps.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting hole sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting hole 230, 231, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting hole 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the ball. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 causes some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. "Fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 causes a part of the eight lamps (for example, the first lower lamp from the left) to blink. 2 fluctuation display" (special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 After lapse of time, the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in a row.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specification (such as Pachinko machines with similar specifications are sometimes called ``simultaneous variable machines.'')

FIG. 95(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1. In FIG. 95(a), four types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure D" are shown. In FIG. 95(a), the white portions in the figure represent lamps that are turned off, and the black portions represent lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols ("special pattern A" and "special pattern B") are prepared as the stop pattern mode of the special pattern 1. "Special drawing A" is a 6th round (R) normal jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing A" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, the jackpot game state is entered, and the jackpot game ends. After that, the control state becomes a special pattern low probability regular pattern high probability state. In addition, "Special drawing B" is a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing B" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control The state becomes a special map high probability state and a regular map low probability state. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared. Further, a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the decision as to whether or not it is a jackpot in the special figure variable game is made by drawing hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether it is a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot is made by drawing software random numbers. The difference between a normal jackpot and a variable probability jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special symbol variable game is high (probability variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high will be referred to as the special pattern high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special pattern probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low will be referred to as the special pattern high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special pattern probability change" or simply "probability change"). This is called a low probability state. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, there is almost no difference in the jackpot probability between the special pattern low probability state and the special pattern high probability state, and the fluctuation of the special pattern between the special pattern low probability state and the special pattern high probability state. The times are structured very differently. Further, after the end of the jackpot game, the game may shift to a time saving state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot, etc. Refers to the state. Although time saving will be described in detail later, a time saving state is referred to as a high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "probability state"), and a state that is not in a time saving state is referred to as a low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on the condition that the jackpot game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is only a state related to regular cards, and the "time saving state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to general cards and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is an electric support state and a normal rate high probability state. In a state with a high probability of a common figure, it is easier to win a variable game of a common figure compared to a state with a low probability of a common figure (a certain probability of a common figure). For example, the probability of winning a general figure fluctuation game is 0/100 (in other words, you will always lose) in a general figure low probability state (non-electronic support state), but in a general figure high probability state (electronic support state) ), it increases to 100/100 (that is, it is always a hit). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (general figure change short). For example, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is 10 seconds in the non-electric support state, but is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. In addition, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (the electric chew opening period is extended). For example, an electric chew open period of 0.5 seconds in the non-electric support state is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the electrically supported state, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2311 that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one winning in the general drawing starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then again for 2 seconds). open). By extending the opening period of the electric chute and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of a ball entering the special map 1 starting hole (variable) 231 increases. Note that the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is especially true in jackpot games when game balls are picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the first variable prize opening 234 or the second variable prize opening 235 decreases. This is because disadvantages may arise. In addition, in this embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), all of the following are performed: changing the regular figure, changing the regular figure, shortening the electric chew, extending the electric chew opening period, and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened. If any one of them is performed, the player will be in a state with a high advantage, and may be placed in an electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if one of the following is performed, which increases the probability of a ball entering the special map 1 starting port (variable) 231, an extension of the electric chute open period or an increase in the number of times the electric chute is opened, the electric chute is set as an electric support state (time saving state). Good too. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As mentioned above, the special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231 changes between the difficult winning state where it is difficult for game balls to enter and the easy winning state where it is easy for game balls to enter. In this special figure 1 starting opening (variable) 231, the entrance is in an easy-to-win state for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while the Special Figure Variation Game is played 50 times after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, and the non-electric support state is maintained for the 51st time. Shifts to support state (general low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support ("special map B") is won, the state does not shift to electric support after the jackpot game ends.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the "special pattern A" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state after the jackpot game ends. Further, when the "special pattern B" is stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to the special pattern high probability normal pattern low probability state.

Further, in this embodiment, for the special drawing 1, a small winning pattern ("special drawing C") is also prepared in addition to the jackpot pattern. When a small hit is made with "Special Figure C", the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbols stop. Note that the opening time and number of openings of the second door member 2351 can be set as appropriate. In the small winning game, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the second variable prize opening 235, or if a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, the small winning game will start. is completed, and the second door member 2351 is not opened thereafter. During the small winning game, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, it returns to the control state before the start of the small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, since it is a simultaneous changing machine, when it becomes a small hit with special figure 1 and moves to a small winning game, a situation may occur where special figure 2 is being displayed in a variable manner. . In this case, when a small win occurs in the special figure 1, the variable display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and when the small win game related to the small win ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 is restarted. In addition, when special figure 1 becomes a jackpot and moves to a jackpot game, special figure 2 is displayed in a variable manner, or special figure 1 becomes a jackpot and moves to a jackpot game, and special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. A certain situation may occur, but in this case, if one of the special symbols hits the jackpot, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol will be forcibly terminated, the result of the fluctuation display will be discarded, and the result of a loss will be displayed. That will happen.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. “Special drawing D” is a losing pattern.

FIG. 95(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 2. This figure 95(b) shows five types of special patterns from “special pattern a” to “special pattern e”, and three of them are jackpot patterns (“special pattern a” to “special pattern e”). Figure c"). "Special drawing a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing a" is stopped and displayed, the first variable prize opening 234 is opened to enter the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state will be in a state of low probability of special and high probability of regular symbols. In addition, "Special drawing b" is a 6R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "Special drawing b" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, the control The state becomes a special map high probability state and a regular map low probability state. "Special drawing c" is a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot symbol, and when "special drawing c" is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the first variable prize opening 234 is opened, and after the jackpot game ends, The control state becomes a special pattern high probability/regular pattern low probability state. Note that a jackpot that is substantially difficult to win in some rounds (for example, it is difficult to win due to a short opening) may be prepared. Further, in the special drawing 2, three types of jackpot symbols are prepared, but three or more types of jackpot symbols may be prepared.

Also, in the special pattern 2, a small winning pattern ("special pattern d") is prepared in addition to the jackpot pattern. When a small hit is made with "special pattern d", the second door member 2351 of the second variable prize opening 235 opens only once for 0.06 seconds after the symbol stops. Here, when compared with the small winning symbol ("Special Drawing C") of Special Drawing 1, the small winning pattern ("Special Drawing C") of Special Drawing 1 is smaller than the case of a small winning ("Special Drawing d" is displayed) of Special Drawing 2 (stop display). When "Figure C" is displayed (stop display), it is easier for more game balls to enter the second variable winning hole 235, and more balls can be won. In other words, the game is such that a small hit on special map 2 does not give a ball out, but a small hit on special map 1 gives a ball out. Note that the opening time and number of openings of the second door member 2351 can be set as appropriate.

Furthermore, even in the special figure 2, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. “Special figure e” is a losing symbol.

FIG. 95(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns in this embodiment: "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10". The ball has won in the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or the special figure 2 starting hole 232, that is, the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 or the special figure 1 starting hole (Variable) The condition is that the first starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the starting port 231, or that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. , "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... A ``fluctuating display of decorative patterns'' may be performed in which the display is changed in the order of ``decoration 9'' → ``decoration 10'' → ``decoration 1'' →... That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, a stop pattern mode that is a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and electric support state in which the special figure 1 is mainly displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 1, and the special figure 2 is mainly displayed in a variable manner. In a variable probability state where a variable display is performed, a variable display of decorative symbols is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2. On the other hand, in the normal game state and the electric support state, even if the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and only in the fourth symbol or the second special symbol display device 214, which will be described later, is the variable display of the symbol. is carried out, and in the probability change state, even if the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner, and only in the fourth symbol or the first special figure display device 212, the variable display of the symbol is carried out.

A mode other than when the first special pattern display device 212 confirms a 6R probability variable jackpot in the normal gaming state or the electric support state, and when the second special pattern display device 214 confirms a 10R probability variation jackpot in the probability variation state. When notifying a jackpot or small hit, three decorative patterns with the same number other than "decoration 3 - decoration 3 - decoration 3" and "decoration 7 - decoration 7 - decoration 7" are displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns arranged in rows (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1", "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4", etc.) is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the first special pattern display device 212 confirms a 6R probability variable jackpot (“special pattern B”) in the normal gaming state or electric support state, the second special pattern display device 214 in the probability variation state indicates a 10R probability variable jackpot (“special pattern B”). When confirming that it is a "special figure c"), "Decoration 3 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. In addition, when notifying a losing pattern of "special pattern D" or "special pattern e", a combination of decorative patterns other than the combinations of decorative patterns described above (for example, a random pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. (eyes) to stop display.

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "fluctuating display of decorative patterns" to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the decorative pattern will be referred to as the variable display of decorative patterns (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuating decorative pattern display"). ). The variable display of decorative patterns is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 95(d) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of the common symbol. There are two types of stop display modes of common symbols in this embodiment: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the normal pattern display device 210 causes the normal pattern display device 210 to alternately light two LEDs arranged vertically. ``Fluctuating Display'' (Fluctuating Game of Common Figures). After the variable time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the losing symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 95(d), the white part in the figure shows the location of the lamp that is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the lamp that is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "fluctuation display of a common symbol" until the stop display of the stop symbol mode of a common symbol may be referred to as a variable display of a common symbol.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 94 will be described using FIG. 96. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 94 stores a special figure random value, a special figure round determination random value, a special figure electric support determination random value, a special figure pattern determination random value, etc. Further, this RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special symbols on hold, special symbol winning random numbers, various judgment (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the reserved number of special symbols storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage section for special symbols that is divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) in which the start of the winning/failure judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary figures is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are made into one set and these starting information are stored one set at a time in each area in order of winning (in order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 94 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 96 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power cutoff (before the power cutoff), and if the state before the power cutoff is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state will return to the state before the power cut (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 92 was operated by a clerk at the game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the RAM clear switch 180 has been operated). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115). If it is determined that the setting is correct (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio/setting display 196 flash and indicate "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments on the setting monitor are incremented, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor are showing "6". When it does, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select any one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, and by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. Thereafter, after the settings are finalized, the setting values can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output. good. Further, in this embodiment, the settings are set in six stages, ie, settings 1 to 6, but settings other than the six stages may be used, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Good too.

Further, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side, ( Step S115; No), the process proceeds to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and if this power status information does not indicate suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (e.g. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0). (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Note that in this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command described later, is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the regular figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, respectively, are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery processing, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). Further, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage are read out, and after being reset to each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 92 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 94 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger for main control. 2. Starts timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area partitioned for each sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned into the previous detection signal storage area, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 94 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). (Information indicating that ) 231 and the ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 or passing through the regular figure starting port 228. That is, it is determined that the ball has entered the general winning hole, these variable winning holes 234, 235, and these starting holes 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal for the past three times in the first starting hole sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting hole (fixed) 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, It is determined that a prize has been won in the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and subsequent processing associated with winning in the first special figure starting opening (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process associated with the subsequent winning to the first special drawing starting opening (fixed) 230 is not performed. Branch to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, next time it will be determined whether it matches the entered award judgment pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the general figure winning random number value and the Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting the random number counter for generating the winning random number, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating the winning random number has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random number winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it also determines that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211, performance random number updating processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and stopping display of symbols on the regular symbol display device 210, a symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning performance time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end performance period, etc. Update timer.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 234, 235 or the starting holes 230, 231, 232, the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read the value, add 1 to it, and set it in the original award ball count storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, multiple types of starting information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage section provided in the RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of reservation).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. is the power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption information. The number of payout requests after conversion processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the two LEDs constituting the normal pattern display device 210 are turned on and off alternately. Performs drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of normal symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the two LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device 210 are turned on and off so as to be in the display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the display mode of the losing symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of two LEDs. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 95(d)) or the losing symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 95(d)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the general figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds). With this setting, the fixed and displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the solenoid (various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 94 ), a signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the attacker unit A signal for holding the blade member 2311 in the closed state is sent to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 94) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special figure starting port (variable) 231 provided in the first special figure starting port (variable) 231. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general figure inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on as described later. If this general figure loss flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set "Normal map inactive" in the setting area of RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general drawing variable game and the first special drawing starting port (variable) 231 is not performed (the general drawing state is inactive), and the holding general drawing When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is determined to be a win or a non-win by random number lottery based on the random number winning random number stored in the random value storage area mentioned above. A winning determination is made to determine whether the game is won, and if the winning is determined, a winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. Note that regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general figure timer random value, and based on the acquired general figure timer random value, the general figure display device 210 selects a normal figure from among a plurality of variable times. One time period for displaying the figure in a variable manner is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variable display time. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in a storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Subsequently, special figure pre-reading processing (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the starting information that has increased in each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and variation time before the validity determination process, and performs the preliminary determination. The result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), a predetermined number of the eight LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 Performs lighting/light-off drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the LED. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special pattern probability variation flag, and a regular pattern probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, the special pattern c and 6R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 95(b) are on, the special pattern probability fluctuation flag is also on, and the general pattern probability fluctuation flag is off. In this case, special pattern b, 6R jackpot flag is on, special pattern probability fluctuation flag is off, regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is on, special pattern a, small hit flag is on, special pattern d, loss. When the flag is on, the LEDs constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 are controlled to turn on and off so that the mode of each special figure e is displayed, and the special figure 2 stop display is displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Configure settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol e), a 6R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol b), a 6R regular jackpot symbol (special symbol a), and a small winning symbol (special symbol). d) and the losing symbol (special symbol e) are displayed as confirmed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, which is a simultaneous variation machine, the variation display of special figure 1 may be performed while the variation display of special figure 2 is being displayed, but when the variation display time of special figure 2 has elapsed. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing, regardless of the lottery result of special symbol 1, the lottery result will be discarded and the losing symbol will be stopped and displayed in special symbol 1 at the timing of the jackpot symbol display of special symbol 2, regardless of the lottery result of special symbol 1. It will be done. In addition, when the variable display of special figure 1 is being performed while the variable display of special figure 2 is being displayed, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed, the special figure 2 The progress of the variable display time of special figure 1 will be interrupted at the timing of the small winning symbol display, and as a result, the time from the start of the variable display of special figure 1 until the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed will be interrupted. The time will be extended by the time from the stop display of the small winning symbol of special drawing 2 to the end of the small winning game.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time saving times stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 0 and the time saving flag is on, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 2 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is Set the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, and wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. For this purpose, information indicating the prize-winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for special figure 2 standby time management provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the first variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the open state (retracted state) is output to a part of the various solenoids 332), and information indicating the open period is stored in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the first door member 2341 in the closed state (advancing state) is output to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 94) for opening and closing the first door member 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234. At the same time, information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (in this exemplary embodiment, 10 rounds or 6 rounds) and starts at the timing when it ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) is performed. In other words, in order to set the decorative symbol display device 208 to stand by while displaying an image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot, the performance standby is stored in the storage area of the performance standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the period. In addition, if the regular pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the number of time reductions (for example, 50 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and Turn on the time saving flag. Incidentally, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage section, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. Further, if the special symbol probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned ON at the same time as the end of the jackpot game.

The time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player because the time from ending the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to starting the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, the state is in a high probability state (probability variation). In the high probability state of common symbols, the probability of winning in the common symbol fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 2311 of the special figure 1 starting port (variable) 231 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, the blade member 2311 is more likely to open in the high-probability state of a common figure than in the low-probability state of a common figure. The state in which any of these ``Fuzu definite change'', ``Furuzu change shortness'', and ``Electric tulip expansion'' is set is called the ``den support'' (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the normal ball is in a high probability state during the jackpot game, the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231 will be activated until a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning hole 234 during the jackpot game. There is a problem that many game balls enter the jackpot, and the number of game balls that can be obtained during a jackpot (number of balls played) increases, which increases the gambling nature, and this is to solve this problem. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of prize balls for winning the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is "1", the number of balls that come out during the jackpot game does not increase substantially, so there is no chance of winning the jackpot. The time saving flag may be left on even during the game.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inactive setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Although the example of the jackpot game using the first variable winning hole 234 has been described above, the same applies to the small winning game using the second variable winning hole 235.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process, except that "special figure 2" is read as "special figure 1", so the explanation is Omitted. In addition, the order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. The special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) is performed when the variable game of special drawing 2 is not being performed, the state of special drawing 2 is inactive, and the jackpot game of either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 is not in progress. , and the number of pending special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more as a starting condition, using the first special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area. is executed. The special drawing 1 related lottery process is performed when the variable game of special drawing 1 is not being performed, the state of special drawing 1 is inactive, the jackpot game of either special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 is not in progress, and the lottery process is suspended. The starting condition is that the number of special figure 1 variable games being played is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random value storage area. . That is, in this embodiment, special figure 1 can start a variable game regardless of whether special figure 2 is in a variable game, and special figure 2 can start a variable game when special figure 1 is in a variable game. It is configured so that a variable game can be started regardless of whether there is a variable game (simultaneous variable machine).

The first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the determination of the validity of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the present embodiment, in the probability variable state, the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is not notified. The notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the lottery based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is given priority over the notification of the drawing result of the drawing based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting hole (fixed) 231, and the normal game state is And in the time saving state, notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231 is different from notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 2 starting hole 232. This will take priority over the announcement of the lottery results. However, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 variable game in the variable probability state becomes a jackpot, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting hole 232 is announced, or once the special figure 2 starts. The notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the opening 232 is interrupted, and the notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting opening (fixed) 230 and the special drawing 1 starting opening (variable) 231 is executed. There may be cases. In addition, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable game in the normal game state and the time saving state is a jackpot, a lottery based on winnings in the special figure 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special figure 1 starting hole (variable) 231 will be performed. In parallel with the notification of the lottery results, or after interrupting the notification of the lottery results based on winnings in the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 and the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231, the special pattern 2 starts. In some cases, notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the slot 232 is performed.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most past stored) pending position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2 (set of winning random number and special chart 2 random number), and based on the special chart 2 winning random number in the obtained special chart 2 starting information and the value of the special chart probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308, It is determined whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss (win/fail judgment) using the win/fail judgment table stored in . Next, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 using the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined validity judgment result. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the results in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined result of the determination, the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of determination of the validity, the acquired random value for determining the special symbol fluctuation time, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and Subtract 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You can do it like this.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the above-mentioned special figure status update process and special figure-related lottery process are performed independently for special figure 1 and special figure 2, so that multiple special figures are changed simultaneously. The present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the state of one special symbol, a lottery process or a variable game regarding the reservation of the other special symbol may not be performed. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variable display of the special symbol 1 in the normal game state and the time saving state. On the other hand, no effect display is performed regarding the variable display of special figure 2, and in the variable probability state, the decorative pattern display device 208 is made to perform an effect display that matches the variable display of special figure 2, while regarding the variable display of special figure 1. Although the effect display is not performed, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special pattern, or a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may display the lottery results of each special pattern. may be provided, and the results of each lottery may be displayed separately. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special symbols are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command type (in this example, basic command, winning opening command, out ball command, firing position command, special figure fluctuation start command, special figure fluctuation stop command, special figure stop type command (special figure 1 and special figure 2) A command sent at the start of variation, which specifies which of special map 1 and special map 2 will be stopped and displayed first), special map start command, special map end command, big prize opening opening command, jackpot round number designation command, power restoration command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, setting command, and other information that can identify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) ).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure fluctuation start command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in special figure-related lottery processing, etc. In the form, when the special symbol fluctuation start command is set, stop symbol information that can specify the stop symbol is included. In the case of a special figure fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, loss flags, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds, etc. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence or absence of a prize in the special drawing 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, presence or absence of winning in the special drawing 1 starting hole (variable) 231, and special drawing 2 starting. This includes whether or not there is a prize in the opening 232, whether there is a prize in the first variable winning hole 234, whether there is a prize in the second variable winning hole 235, etc. In the case of a prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage section. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308, selected in the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small win flags, loss flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Performance control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 and is output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Performance control information, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-described big winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described big winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase process, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (advance notice information, fake Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error, is monitored. do. When a front frame door opening error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, a device that indicates the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a ball storage tray full error in transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set information. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the regular map display device 210, the special map 1 display device 212, the special map 2 display device 214, the various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it becomes HALT state.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The determination table will be explained with reference to FIG. 98. Here, FIG. 98(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols, and FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the table for determining the validity of special symbols 1 and 2. Yes, and FIG. 98(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special symbol determination distribution table.

The table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols shown in FIG. 98(a) is a table for determining the validity of ordinary symbols used when determining the validity of ordinary symbols. Note that this table is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 98(a), when this correctness determination table is used, there is no winning value in the low probability state of the normal figure, that is, the probability of winning is 0%, and the probability of winning is 0%. In the high probability state, the possible range of the random number is 0 to 65,535, and the winning value is 0 to 65,535. That is, the probability of winning is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, in a low probability state (when time saving is not activated), the probability of winning may be set to a certain level (for example, 1%), and in a high probability state (when time saving is activated), there is a constant probability of winning. It may also be possible to set it to be a failure with a probability of (for example, 1%).

The table for determining the validity of special figures 1 and 2 shown in FIG. The record to be referred to is selected depending on whether it is in a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 1, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/200) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of the special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (approximately 1/193) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the determination of the validity of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 3, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (approximately 1/181) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the determination of the validity of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 4, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (approximately 1/175) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174).

In the special pattern low probability state of setting 5, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (approximately 1/146) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawings 1 and 2, and in the special pattern high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145).

In the special figure low probability state of setting 6, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (approximately 1/94) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and in the special figure high probability state, As a result of the success/failure determination of the jackpot lottery for special drawings 1 and 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93).

In addition, regardless of any of settings 1 to 6, and regardless of whether it is in a special pattern high probability state or a special pattern low probability state, 6580/65536 will be determined as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special pattern 1. A small win that opens and closes 12 times is selected with a probability (approximately 1/10), and a small win that opens and closes once is selected with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10) as a result of the judgment of the jackpot lottery of special drawing 1. be done. In addition, it is also possible to prevent a small win from occurring in special figure 1, and to cause a small win to occur only in special figure 2 (a small win that opens 12 times and a small win that opens and closes once). Further, the probability of a small hit may be made different for each setting.

In this way, in this embodiment, in any of Settings 1 to 6, the jackpot probability in the special pattern high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the special pattern low probability state, but this is considered to be almost the same probability. It is set so that it is noisy. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, and the higher the setting, the easier it is to hit the jackpot, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to hit the jackpot. Therefore, the lower the setting is, the harder it is to get a jackpot, but when the state shifts to a variable probability state, the number of small wins tends to be greater than when the setting is high, and it may be possible to provide different game characteristics.

In this embodiment, in any setting, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in the special pattern high probability state and the special pattern low probability state, but the major difference is the variable display time of special pattern 2. It will be done. In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure high probability state is such that, for example, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds is selected. In the special pattern high probability state, when the ball is hit to the right, many game balls are likely to enter the second special pattern starting port 232, and a large number of variable displays of the special pattern 2 can be displayed, and as a result, , the system is designed to increase the frequency of small wins. In this embodiment, the special figure high probability state can be said to be a state in which the frequency of occurrence of small wins increases, so it may be referred to as a "small win rush." In addition, in a state where there are four (full) symbol fluctuation displays of special map 2 on hold, one time of special map 1 is longer than the time required to digest all the symbol fluctuation displays of special map 2. Since it takes longer to digest the symbol variation display, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in special drawing 1. On the other hand, the variation time of the special figure 2 in the special figure low probability state is such that, for example, a variation time of 580 seconds is selected. Therefore, in the low probability state of the special chart, if you hit the right ball, the frequency of balls entering the special chart 2 starting port 232 and the small hit probability will not change, but the time until the result of the variable display of the special chart 2 is displayed is approximately Since this happens every 10 minutes, even if the player plays right-handed, it is actually disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in the special pattern low probability state, the fluctuation time of special chart 2 is set to 580 seconds for misses and small hits, but the fluctuation time for jackpots is shorter than that, for example, It is set to 227 seconds.

FIG. 98(c) shows an example of the distribution table for special symbol determination, and the stopping symbols are determined based on the validity determination result of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 as described above. Note that this table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this special pattern determination allocation table, a random number range corresponding to the stopping pattern mode of the special pattern (see FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b)) is defined for each validity determination result.

First, if the result of the special figure 1 judgment is a jackpot, one of "special figure A" and "special figure B" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special drawing A" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, and "Special drawing B" is a 6R certain variable jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234. Each selection rate is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Moreover, if the result of the special figure 1 correctness determination is a small hit, "special figure C" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special Figure C" is a small win in which the second variable winning hole 235 repeats short openings up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of the special drawing 2 judgment is a jackpot, one of "special drawings a" to "special drawings c" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special drawing a" is a 6R normal jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, "Special drawing b" is a 6R definite strange jackpot opened by the first variable winning hole 234, “Special drawing c” is a 10R variable jackpot that the first variable prize opening 234 opens. Regardless of the settings, each selection rate is 60/100 for "special map a", 5/100 for "special map b", and 35/100 for "special map c".

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 judgment is a small hit, "special figure d" is selected. As mentioned above, "special drawing d" is a small win in which the second variable prize opening 235 is briefly opened once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 99(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 99(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and according to the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform the process to change to .

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do. In this way, the button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light emitting section 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7, and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23. Light emission control is performed.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 includes a command to the first performance movable body 7 at the top shown in FIG. 93(a) or the second performance movable body 8 located on the right side, This command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 99(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 99(c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 100(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 100(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, the effect data (effect data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and effect data displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207) corresponding to this command is stored in the ROM ( (not shown), and if the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 100(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 100(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 100(d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 of VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or the sub-liquid crystal display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. VDP 516 transfers image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 101. Here, FIG. 101(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 101(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the first It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning hole 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls won by winning into the first variable winning hole 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that are due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the first special figure starting opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the 2. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the variable winning hole 235 and winning a prize. In addition, the first variable winning hole 234, the second variable winning hole 235, the first special pattern starting hole (fixed) 230, the first special pattern starting hole (variable) 231, and the second special pattern starting hole 232 for the number of out balls. It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls that are won by winning in the general winning slot.

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, if it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous accessory ratio is displayed blinking, and then A security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the emitted light color may be changed. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 101(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 is not opened in the jackpot game, but only in the small winning game, but a jackpot that is opened by the attacker of the second variable winning opening 235 is prepared. You can. For example, as the jackpot for special drawing 2, a 3R jackpot (actually 1R jackpot), a 6R jackpot, etc., opened by the attacker of the second variable winning hole 235 instead of the first variable winning hole 234, may be prepared. .

Further, although small winnings were provided for both special drawings 1 and 2, small winnings may be provided only for special drawings 2. In other words, only for the special drawing 2, the second variable winning hole 235 may be provided with a small win in which the short opening is repeated a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) at maximum, and a small win in which the short opening is only made once. . By doing this, in the special pattern high probability regular pattern low probability state, the special pattern 1 starting opening (variable) 231 does not become the winning easy state, and the attacker of the first variable winning opening 234 is in the winning difficult state, and the first If the attacker of the 2 variable winning hole 235 is also in a difficult-to-win state, most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the 2nd special pattern starting hole 232 and win the jackpot or small hit in the special pattern 2 variable game. be able to. In particular, since the winning probability of a small winning game is higher than the winning probability of a jackpot game (for example, about 10 times higher), the second variable winning opening 235 can be used a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) at maximum. It is easy to win a small winning game that repeats short openings, and you can expect to earn a lot of balls in this small winning game.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91 will be explained.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91.

FIG. 102 shows a decorative pattern display device 208. Note that illustration of the first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, normal symbol display device 210, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and general figure holding lamp 216 is omitted. (This is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 109).

Further, FIG. 102 shows a star-shaped performance lamp 206, which is one of the lamps 442 for the game board.

Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Note that although the background here is white with no pattern, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is white and has no pattern, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images depending on the mode, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, a mini symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and a variable display and a static display are performed in accordance with the decorative symbol displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and also informing the number of reservations. A number display area is provided, and a reserved number display area for special drawings 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, at the upper right of the display area, a notification area for the symbol variation of the special figure 1 is provided, and at the lower right, a notification area for the symbol variation of the special figure 2 is provided. It should be noted that a notification area during symbol change for common symbols and a display area for the number of pending symbols for common symbols may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 220. It is consistent with the number of reservations indicated by . In addition, in the symbol change notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a jackpot, "○" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a small hit, "△" will be displayed. The mark will be stopped and displayed, and if it is off, it will be stopped and displayed as "x". In addition, while the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner, the "-" display may blink, and it may be possible to recognize that the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is also the same as the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and this display mode corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display and stop display of special figure 2. changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol, and changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, you can receive a preview notice and a notice regarding the symbol change display in progress. You may go. The fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 described above is also the same up to the example shown in FIG. 109.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 102 is a normal gaming state (special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this normal game state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 (this is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 109). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 in the normal game state, the display area of the reserved icon of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided.

In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 281, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations for special drawing 1 is expressed by the number of reservation icons of special drawing 1, in addition to the number of lights on the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 and the numerical value shown in the number of reservation display area of special drawing 1, and the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 The number of reservations is represented by the number of lit special figure 2 reservation lamps 220 and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2. In addition, it may be made to represent also by the number of reservation icons of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the startup information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information as a second hold icon, etc. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, hold icons are displayed side by side, and hold icons on the right side have older winnings.

In FIG. 102(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and both of these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are , is displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91. Although the hold icons shown in FIG. 103 are all round, they may be deformed from this round shape, for example, they may be deformed into a character icon.

FIG. 103(a) shows a hold icon in display mode A (default display mode). Display mode A (default display mode) is a patternless and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the pre-read preview depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the jackpot in the symbol variation display that is performed after the reservation represented by the reservation icon is exhausted. Display mode A (default display mode) suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 5%. Note that it may be suggested that the jackpot expectation level is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the first place.

FIG. 103(b) shows a hold icon in display mode B. Display mode B is a patternless and green display mode. On the drawing, green is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 25%.

FIG. 103(c) shows a hold icon in display mode C. Display mode C is a display mode with no pattern and red color. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross hatching. This display mode C suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 50%.

FIG. 103(d) shows a hold icon in display mode D. Display mode D is a display mode consisting of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background. Note that in the drawing, yellow is represented by vertical hatching. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that manufactured the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91. In other words, this second display mode is one in which most players imagine a particular pachinko machine manufacturer, and it can be said that this second display mode is a display mode that allows the player to recognize the pachinko machine manufacturer. In other words, this is a display mode that is famous for being used by a certain pachinko machine manufacturer. It can also be said that the display mode is unique to each pachinko machine manufacturer, and if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, it can also be said that the display mode is a display mode in which the same manufacturer's pattern is commonly used across multiple models. This second display mode is called a maker pattern. Manufacturer's patterns include patterns that imitate animals such as animal patterns, patterns that imitate plants such as flowers and fruits, fireworks patterns, striped patterns (striped patterns), plaid patterns (plaid patterns), and other geometric patterns. Examples include repeating patterns in which constituent units are arranged regularly (or irregularly). Furthermore, since the manufacturer's pattern is a pattern expressed using a plurality of colors, it is included in "color" when interpreted in a broad sense. Note that a certain color may symbolize a pachinko machine manufacturer, and in this case, it becomes the manufacturer's color. This second display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 75%. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, the information may be a pachinko machine sales maker (company), or even the model (model) instead of the manufacturer.

FIG. 103(e) shows a hold icon in display mode E. Display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color is a mode in which the displayed colors change continuously one color at a time to display each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet). However, here, it refers to a mode in which the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the display area. On the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines. This display mode E suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 100%. In other words, it suggests that the jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, as the display mode F, a display mode with no pattern and a gold color, which suggests that the jackpot expectation level is 70%, may be further prepared.

For the five display modes explained above, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the lower the frequency of appearance, but for display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the appearance frequency is lower than display mode E (rainbow color). Good too. That is, the hold icon of display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear least frequently.

Furthermore, the five display modes shown in FIG. 103 are also used for a variable icon in which a pending icon changes, and function as a notice (normal notice) of a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable icon.

Furthermore, the star-shaped production lamp 206 provided directly below the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a light emitting manner representing the display manner of the hold icon and the variable icon.

At the right end of FIG. 103, the light emission mode of the star-shaped production lamp 206 is shown. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in a light emitting mode A (white light emitting mode) representing a display mode A (default display mode) of the pending icon and the variable icon. Furthermore, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode B (green light emitting mode) representing display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode C (red light emitting mode) representing the display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. Furthermore, the effect lamp 206 can also emit light in a light emitting mode D (rainbow light emitting mode) representing the display mode E (rainbow color display mode) of the hold icon and the variable icon. The rainbow-colored light emitting mode in the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which seven colors constituting the rainbow are displayed at once by dividing the light emitting area. These lighting modes also suggest the same expectation level of a jackpot as the display modes of the pending icon and the fluctuation icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, that is, the colors of the pending icons and variable icons, and the emitted light color of the production lamp 206 have different hues because the display media are different. Both colors will be described as being included in the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the production lamp 206 is not provided with a light emitting mode representing the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern) of the hold icon and variable icon, and the production lamp 206 may emit light in the same or similar light emission mode as the manufacturer's pattern. There isn't.

Note that, as the light emitting mode E, a golden light emitting mode that suggests that the jackpot expectation is 70% may be further prepared.

Further, other displays (for example, title background display, etc.) on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 103. In other displays, the expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by the display mode, or the display mode in other displays may be unrelated to the expectation level of a jackpot.

Further, the display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (for example, a lord's kimono, etc.) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 103, excluding the second display mode (manufacturer's pattern). The display on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 may also indicate the expectation level of a jackpot depending on the display mode, or may be unrelated to the expectation level of a jackpot.

Further, lamps other than the performance lamp 206 (game board lamp 442 and game table frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. 94) can also emit light in a light emission mode representing a display mode other than the second display mode. For example, the light emitting section 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7 and the light emitting diode (not shown) arranged on the attacker unit 23 can also emit light in white, green, red, and rainbow colors. In addition, rainbow colors can be displayed by emitting light from the seven colors that make up the rainbow at once by dividing the light-emitting area, or by changing the emitted light color one by one continuously and displaying each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow. It may also be displayed with luminescence. Such rainbow-colored changing light emission may also be performed as light emission mode D of the production lamp 206. The lighting mode of the lamps other than the performance lamp 206 may also indicate the same expectation level of the jackpot as the display mode of the pending icon and the fluctuation icon, and the lighting mode of the lamps other than the production lamp 206 may indicate the expectation level of the jackpot. The light emission mode may be unrelated to the above.

Furthermore, except for display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) and display mode E (rainbow color), it is also used as a color for decorations.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing decorations included in the second effect movable body 8.

In the second effect movable body 8 that imitates a human right arm, four fingers excluding the fifth finger (little finger) serve as decorative bodies. It is difficult to see these four fingers when they are bent, but when they are stretched out, the decorations on the palm side become visible.

FIG. 104(a) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 extended with the forearm portion 82 lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 104(a), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. That is, it is painted white.

FIG. 104(b) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the forearm portion 82 lifted and the third finger (middle finger) 823 extended. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 104(b), decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. That is, it is painted green.

FIG. 104(c) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the second finger (index finger) 822 extended with the forearm portion 82 lifted. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 104(c), a decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. That is, it is painted red.

FIG. 104(d) shows the second effect movable body 8 with the forearm portion 82 lifted and the first finger (thumb) 821 extended. In the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 104(d), a decoration D (gold color) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. That is, it is painted gold.

In addition, in the second effect movable body 8, no decoration is applied to the palm side of the fifth finger (little finger) 825.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the colors of the decorations are different in hue because the display media are different, but these colors are not included in the same or similar range. I will explain it as if it were.

Further, each decoration applied to the second performance movable body 8, like the pending icon and the variable icon, suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, when the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is 5%, and when the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, the expectation of a jackpot is 25%. If something is suggested and the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, it is suggested that the expectation of a jackpot is 50%, and if the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended, the expectation of a jackpot is 50%. It is suggested that this is 70%.

On the other hand, as decorations, there are no manufacturer's pattern decorations or rainbow-colored decorations. Therefore, a high-probability prediction with a jackpot expectation of 75% or more is not made with the decoration.

It should be noted that, like the pending icon and the variable icon, the value of the expectation level may be different from the value of the pending icon and the variable icon, although it suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to FIG. 102 and continuing the explanation, in FIG. 102, in order to make it easier to understand that four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of special drawing 1, they are not actually displayed. The hold icon is also shown with a dotted line.

On the other hand, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is 0, and there is no reservation of the special figure 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. This is because the winning time (for example, 500 seconds) is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds), and winning in the special drawing 2 starting slot 232 does not make much sense. In the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in FIG. 102, the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of special figure 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of special figure 2 remains in the stopped display of "x". .

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 whose display results are more likely to be displayed is displayed. That is, in this embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state), the display result of special pattern 1 is likely to be displayed as described above. , as shown in FIG. 102(a), the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and when the control state is in a probability variable state (special figure high probability regular figure low probability state), , On the contrary, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but may be different.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 102(a) is lit in a default light emission mode (white light emission mode), which is a light emission mode representing the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed in the following order: start of variation on the special symbol display device → start of variation display of the fourth symbol → start or deletion of movement animation of the pending icon → start of variation of the decorative symbol However, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 102(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has also started, the movement of the pending icon has ended, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted one place to the right, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as a change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 102(c), one ball enters the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of the special figure 1 increases. This increased number of pending icons is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-read notice. In synchronization with the start of display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (appearance sound) represented by an eighth note. In addition, in response to the increase in the number of holds represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) increases. The display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the hold that has been placed changes to light emitting form C (red light emitting form). That is, the lighting mode of the production lamp 206 is the same as or similar to the red color of the hold icon h12. The timing at which the display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12 starts and the timing at which the star-shaped production lamp 206 changes to the light emitting mode C may be the same, or the hold icon h12 may be displayed earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster (the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 109). In the figure, the size of the hold icon h12 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be approximately the same, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the hold icon h12, and the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, it may be possible to give the player a stronger expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red color. Note that the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 has been increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(d), the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 102(e), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon has been moved one place and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Furthermore, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(f), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 8 - decoration 1 - decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "814". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In FIG. 102(g), the hold indicated by the red hold icon (display mode C) has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has started. That is, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the red (display mode C) pending icon is displayed as a red (display mode C) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode C. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking.

In FIG. 102(h), the variable display of the decorative pattern enters the reach state, and in FIG. 102(i), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1 The pending icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 102(i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 is hidden, and in accordance with the non-display of the variable icon h0, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off. In FIGS. 102 to 107, the state where the effect lamp 206 is off is shown in a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 is hidden and the timing at which the star-shaped production lamp 206 turns off may be at the same time, or the variation icon h0 may be earlier, or the production lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 109). Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 102(j), it has developed into a super reach (old reach). The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(j). Here, the reach title LT1 is displayed as "Grand Reach" written in black characters on a green background display. In this reach title LT1, the background is the same or similar color to the green that indicates the expectation of a jackpot with a pending icon or decoration. Any color other than green will not be selected as the background color. In other words, the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and it can be said that this green color does not suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

An old man character appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(k), and then an animation of the old man character is displayed. Following the animation display of the old man character, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(l) displays a depressed looking old man character. Further, in the display of fluctuations in the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, fluctuation fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" are displayed. In addition, although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains hidden, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. The mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner until the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative patterns is displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "434". Although the background is hidden in FIG. 102(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

The star-shaped production lamp 206, which was turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, remains turned off until the decorative pattern is confirmed to be displayed. (until the timing) Light emission according to light emission mode C may be continued. Alternatively, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the background display is switched and the variable display of the reduced decorative pattern in the lower right corner starts to fluctuate (until the timing shown in FIG. 102(l)). Furthermore, the light emission according to the light emission mode C may be continued until the final display of the decorative pattern is performed (until the timing shown in FIG. 102(m)).

The example shown in FIG. 102 described above is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped performance lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442, are related.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background in the display of the reach title are related.

FIG. 105 also shows a decorative pattern display device 208 and a production lamp 206. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in FIG. 105(a), one hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and this hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Displayed. Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 105(a) is lit in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode representing the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 105(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has also started, the movement of the pending icon has ended, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 changes from 1 to 0, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking. Further, the hold icon is shifted one place to the right, and the hold icon h11, which had been at the display position of the first hold icon, is now displayed as a change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. When the hold icon h11, which was the default display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the variable icon h0 is It is displayed in aspect D (manufacturer's pattern). The variable icon h0 that has changed to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) normally functions as a notice. In synchronization with the display start timing (timing of display mode change) of the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern), a performance sound (variation sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the star-shaped production lamp 206, which has been emitting light in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode), changes to light emission mode C (red light emission mode) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern). (emission mode) has changed. In other words, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and is not emitting light in a light emitting mode with a pattern that is the same as or similar to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern). . More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light emitting mode that suggests a lower expectation level of the jackpot than the display mode D of the variable icon h0 suggests. Note that the production lamp 206 may change to a lighting mode (lighting mode D (rainbow color)) that suggests a higher expectation level of a jackpot than the display mode D of the variable icon h0 suggests, or may change to a lighting mode (lighting mode D (rainbow color)), or a pending icon. It may be possible to emit light in a color that is not used in the hold icon or the fluctuation icon, or it may be emitted in a different manner even if the color is used in the hold icon or the fluctuation icon (for example, red flashing light, etc.). Further, the timing at which the variable icon h0 starts displaying and the timing at which the effect lamp 206 changes may be the same, the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier. (The same applies to the example shown in FIG. 109). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be the same as the hold icon, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. Therefore, if the effect lamp 206 is more conspicuous than the variable icon h0, and if the change timing of the effect lamp 206 is earlier, the player will first recognize the jackpot expectation level indicated by the red color, and then the variable icon By looking at the h0 manufacturer's pattern, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases even more. In addition, the production lamp 206 does not emit light in the same or similar pattern to the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), thereby improving the rarity of the manufacturer's pattern, which has a high degree of expectation, and giving the manufacturer's pattern a sense of anticipation and specialness. can be increased.

In FIG. 105(c), the variable display of the decorative pattern enters the reach state, and in FIG. 105(d), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special figure 1. The pending icon display area 281 has disappeared. That is, in FIG. 105(d), the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is hidden, and the star-shaped production lamp 206 is also turned off in accordance with the non-display of the variable icon h0. Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 105(e), it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105(e). Here, the reach title LT2 is displayed as "Swordsman Reach" written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display. That is, the same display mode used as the display mode of the pending icon and the variable icon is also used for the background display of the reach title LT2, suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Further, the first performance movable body 7, which was placed above the decorative pattern display device 208, has been lowered to a position in front of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 and overlaps with the display screen. Further, the rectangular light emitting section 71 arranged on the first effect movable body 7 is lit in a light emitting mode D representing rainbow colors (rainbow light emitting mode). That is, the light emitting part 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in a light emitting manner that is the same as or similar to the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, indicating the expectation of a jackpot. Further, the background display of the reach title LT2 may be a display mode representing display mode E (rainbow color), which is a display mode of a pending icon or a variable icon. In other words, the background display of reach title LT2 is the same as or similar to display mode E (rainbow color), and is, for example, one color different from display mode E (rainbow color) used as the display mode of the pending icon and the fluctuation icon. Even if the shape of the display area is slightly different, if the player can imagine display mode E (rainbow color), the display mode will become similar to display mode E (rainbow color) (see FIG. 107(j) described later). (The same applies to Reach Title LT3).

The background color of this reach title LT2 is selected from "white", "red", "manufacturer's pattern", and "rainbow color" as shown in FIG. 110(a). The expectation level for a jackpot is ``20%'', the expectation level for a ``red'' jackpot is ``35%'', the expectation level for a ``manufacturer pattern'' jackpot is ``75%'', and the expectation level for a ``rainbow color'' jackpot is `` 100%. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "old reach", the type of background color of the reach title LT2 suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the emitted light color of the light emitting unit 71 is selected from "white", "red", and "rainbow color", and the expectation level of the jackpot for "white" is is "20%", the expectation level for the "red" jackpot is "45%", and the expectation level for the "rainbow" jackpot is "100%". In other words, unlike the type of background color of the reach title LT2, "manufacturer pattern" is not set for the type of emitted light color of the light emitting unit 71. Note that the background color of the reach title LT2 and the emitted light color of the light emitting unit 71 may be related to each other (the same color). However, even in that case, the "manufacturer's pattern" is not set as the emitting color of the light emitting unit 71, and the light is emitted in another color (for example, "gold lighting" or "gold lighting" instead of the "manufacturer's pattern"). (Blinking red).

In the state shown in FIG. 105(e), the first effect movable body 7 that has descended does not overlap the background display in the reach title LT2, but the first effect movable body 7 is located at a position where it overlaps with the background display. If the display mode of the background display is a manufacturer's pattern, the display will descend only to a position that does not overlap with the background display. Furthermore, it is configured so that the effect movable body does not cover not only the background display but also the manufacturer's pending icons and variable icons.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be a manufacturer's pattern, but the light emitting section 71 in the first effect movable body 7 cannot be lit in a light emitting mode that represents the manufacturer's pattern, and in addition, It may be arranged so that the light cannot be turned on even in a rainbow-colored light emission mode. In such a case, the light emitting section 71 may remain off, or may emit light in a red light emission mode.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105(f) has started displaying an animation of a duel scene between the main character lord and the enemy swordsman. This animation continues until FIG. 105(i). In FIG. 105(i), the main character, the lord, has won against the enemy, the master swordsman, and in the display of the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, the fluctuation of the combination of decorative patterns of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is shown. is displayed. In addition, although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the 4th symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. The mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner until the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105(j), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative patterns is displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is hidden in FIG. 105(j), a background image different from the default one is actually displayed.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of a zone effect in which an animation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device.

FIG. 106 also shows a decorative pattern display device 208 and a production lamp 206. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state. Moreover, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 106(a) is in a state of being turned off. In addition, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207 placed on the left side of the first special figure starting port (fixed) 230 is also displayed in FIG. The sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. 106(a) is in a state where nothing is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 106(a), two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area 281, and these two special drawing 1 holding icons h11 and h12 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 106(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has also started, and the movement of the pending icon has also been completed. The hold icon is shifted to the right by one position, and the hold icon h11, which had been the first hold icon, is changed to the change icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280 in the default display mode without changing the display mode in this example. is displayed as. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(b), variable display of decorative patterns has started in each of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. A zone title ZT representing the title of the zone effect is displayed so as to overlap the fluctuating display of the symbols, making the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols difficult to see. The zone title ZT is displayed as "Training Zone" written in red letters on a plain blue oval background. In this zone title ZT, "Training Zone" is written in a color that is the same as or similar to red, which indicates the expectation level of a jackpot with a pending icon or decoration. However, this red color does not indicate the level of expectation of a jackpot. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, "Training Zone" is always written in red letters, and "Training Zone" is never written in other colors. Note that neither the font color of the reach title LT1 shown in Figure 102 (j) nor the font color of this zone title ZT suggests the expectation of a jackpot, but the font color can indicate the expectation of a jackpot. It may be suggested. On the other hand, the manufacturer's pattern only indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and there are no cases where it does not indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the manufacturer's pattern is not used in the display of various settings that the player can change on the gaming machine (for example, the tone from the speaker 120, the game mode, etc.), the display of the number of games played, the display of the number of consecutive jackpots, etc. do not have. When a manufacturer's pattern is displayed, it always suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to expect a jackpot with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer's pattern with high expectations is used without indicating the expectation of a jackpot, players will mistakenly believe that the expectation of a jackpot is high and have excessive expectations. If this is not the case, by avoiding using manufacturer patterns with high expectations, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that they have high expectations for a jackpot, and to avoid excessively arousing expectations. It can be reduced.

In FIG. 106(b) in which the zone title ZT explained above is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the display of the zone production animation has started on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, and the main character wearing a red kimono is displayed. An animation of a lord training in swordsmanship is shown. The color of this lord's kimono is selected from "white," "green," "red," and "rainbow," as shown in Figure 110(c). The expectation level is 20%, the expectation level for the green jackpot is 30%, the expectation level for the red jackpot is 45%, and the expectation level for the rainbow jackpot is 100%. It becomes. Note that the "manufacturer pattern" is not displayed. This animation continues until FIG. 106(i). In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. has started blinking.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(c), the background display has been switched to the background display of the wilderness, which is the background display of the training zone. This wilderness background display also continues until FIG. 106(i). Moreover, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(c), the variable display of decorative patterns performed in each of the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c can be visually recognized. . In addition, in FIG. 106(c), one ball enters the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of the special figure 1 increases. This increased hold icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) at the display position of the second hold icon, and functions as a pre-read notice. In synchronization with the start of display of the green (display mode B) hold icon h12, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (appearance sound) represented by a sixteenth note. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not light up in response to the increase in the number of holds represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. Note that the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 has been increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(d), the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 106(e), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The green (display mode B) hold icon has been moved one place and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). Furthermore, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(f), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 8 - decoration 1 - decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "814". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 remains off.

In FIG. 106(g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 has started. That is, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the green (display mode B) pending icon is displayed as a green (display mode B) variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The star-shaped production lamp 206, which was in the off state, responds to the start of symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 based on the reservation represented by the green (display mode B) reservation icon that has been displayed so far. , starts emitting light according to light emission mode B (green light emission mode) representing green (display mode B). That is, the effect lamp 206 starts emitting light in a light emitting manner in a color that is the same as or similar to the green color of the variable icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not start emitting light until the change that is the subject of the notice starts. The timing at which the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 starts displaying and the timing at which the star-shaped production lamp 206 starts emitting light according to the light emission mode B may be the same, or the variable icon h0 may be displayed earlier. Alternatively, the effect lamp 206 may be faster. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking.

In FIG. 106(h), a reaching state is entered in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, but this example does not develop into a super reach state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106(i) displays "Decoration 4 - Decorative 3-Decoration 4", the losing decorative pattern combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "434". Further, the green (fifth display mode) variable icon h0 is hidden when the first special symbol display device 212 finishes displaying the symbol variation. The end timing of the symbol fluctuation display and the timing at which the fluctuation icon h0 is hidden may be the same, the symbol fluctuation display may be earlier, or the fluctuation icon h0 may be earlier. Further, the effect lamp 206 is also turned off in response to non-display of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0.

The effects executed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 (second display means) are not limited to displaying the animation of the zone effect described above, and various effects may be performed. For example, when a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped and displayed is changed again in a pseudo-continuous notice, a lord is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, and the color of the lord's kimono is used to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot. You can. Even in this case, the "manufacturer's pattern" should not be displayed. In other words, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 does not display the "manufacturer's pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "manufacturer's pattern" on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the rarity of the maker's pattern with high expectations can be improved, and the sense of anticipation and specialness of the maker's pattern can be increased. . In addition, "pseudo-continuous notice" means a notice in which, during the variable display of special symbols corresponding to one jackpot lottery, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then changed again. This is a notice that may display a variable display and a temporary stop display multiple times.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a performance in which the display mode of the hold icon is related to the light emission mode of the star-shaped performance lamp 206, and furthermore, a super reach is performed.

FIG. 107 also shows a decorative pattern display device 208 and a production lamp 206. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in FIG. 107(a), two special figure 1 reserve icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area 281, and these two special figure 1 reserve icons h11 and h12 are Both are displayed in the default display mode.

Further, the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. 107(a) is lit in a default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode), which is a light emitting mode representing the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In FIG. 107(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has also started, the movement of the pending icon has ended, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 changes from 2 to 1, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking. Further, the hold icon is shifted one place to the right, and the hold icon h11, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as a change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280.

In FIG. 107(c), one ball enters the first special figure start opening (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons of the special figure 1 increases. This increased number of pending icons is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second pending icon h12, and functions as a pre-read notice. In synchronization with the start of display of the red (display mode C) hold icon h12, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (appearance sound) represented by an eighth note. In addition, as in the example shown in FIG. 102, in this example as well, the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode) is changed to the display mode of the hold icon h12 representing the increased hold. The light emission mode C (red light emission mode) is displayed. Note that the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 has been increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(d), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "358". The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light according to the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 107(e), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. The red (display mode C) hold icon has been moved one place and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon (hold icon h11). When the hold icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the hold icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern). ) is displayed. In synchronization with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note. On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 that has been emitting light in a red light emitting mode (light emitting mode C) maintains that light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode does not change even if the display mode of the hold icon changes. The lighting mode of the production lamp 206, which is more conspicuous than the hold icon, does not change, but if you look closely, you will see that the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which appears the least frequently, is displayed, and the player who discovered this In some cases, the interest in playing games can be greatly improved. In addition, in response to the change of the hold icon h11 to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the effect lamp 206 also changes to a light emission mode different from the light emission mode representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern) (for example, light emission mode F (gold). The light emission mode)) may change.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(f), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 8 - decoration 1 - decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "814". The hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the production lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode C.

In FIG. 107(g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 of the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 has started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(g), variable display of decorative patterns has started, and the pending icon h11 is displayed as a variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. In this example, when the pending icon h11, which was display mode D (manufacturer pattern), is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, that is, when it changes to the variable icon h0, the display mode changes to display mode E (rainbow color). , the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in display mode E (rainbow color). The variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color) functions as a normal notice of confirmation of the jackpot. Even in synchronization with the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon, the effect sound (change sound) represented by a half note is output from the speaker 120. In addition, in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in the display mode E (rainbow color), the star-shaped production lamp 206 that has been emitting light in the light emission mode C until now is changed to the light emission mode D representing the rainbow color (display mode E). (Rainbow-colored luminescence mode). That is, it starts emitting light in a light emitting manner in a color that is the same as or similar to the rainbow color of the variable icon h0. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking.

In this example, the display mode changes from display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) to display mode E (rainbow color); There is no change (change rate is 0%), and display mode E (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) except display mode D (manufacturer pattern) It may also be configured to change to a rainbow color. Alternatively, the rate of change from the other display aspect to display aspect E (rainbow color) may be higher than the rate of change from display aspect D (manufacturer's pattern) to display aspect E (rainbow color).

In FIG. 107(h), the variable display of the decorative pattern enters the reach state, and in FIG. 107(i), the background image is switched from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and special figure 1 The pending icon display area 281 has disappeared. In FIG. 107(i), the variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped production lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode D (rainbow color light emission mode). In this way, the production lamp 206 may continue to emit light even if the variable icon h0 is hidden, only when it emits light in the light emitting mode D (rainbow light emitting mode) that confirms a jackpot. Note that, regardless of the lighting mode, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or may be turned off based on the result of the effect lottery. Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 107(j), it has developed into a super reach (buttock reach). The star-shaped performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color). Moreover, reach title LT3 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(j). Here, the reach title LT3 is displayed as "Tono Reach" written in black letters on a rainbow-colored background display. The background color of this reach title LT3 is selected from "white", "red", "manufacturer's pattern", and "rainbow color", as shown in Figure 110(a). The expectation level for a jackpot is ``20%'', the expectation level for a ``red'' jackpot is ``35%'', the expectation level for a ``manufacturer pattern'' jackpot is ``75%'', and the expectation level for a ``rainbow color'' jackpot is ``100%''. %”. That is, unlike the above-mentioned "old reach", the type of background color of the reach title LT3 suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, the light emitting mode D (rainbow light emitting mode) which is the light emitting mode of the production lamp 206 is the same or similar to the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT3.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(k) displays an animation of the lord's character, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(l) displays a proud-looking lord's character. ing. Further, in the display of fluctuations in the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, fluctuation fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" are displayed. In addition, although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the 4th symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. The mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner until the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107(m), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative patterns is displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is hidden in FIG. 107(m), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 107, the effect lamp 206 that continues to emit light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even when the super reach (buttocks reach) starts, emits light in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) even during the super reach. Even when the combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, the light emission is continued, and the light emission in the light emission mode D (rainbow color) is continued until the subsequent jackpot game start performance is started. Note that the production lamp 206 may be turned off in response to the end of the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decoration provided in the second effect movable body 8 are related.

A decorative pattern display device 208 is also shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 108, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is not shown, and instead, the second effect movable body 8 disposed on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown. As for the production lamp, as described above, the lighting mode may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the pending icon or the variable icon, and the lighting may be emitted. Alternatively, in this example, the effect lamp 206 may remain off, or may remain in the default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(a), the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in FIG. 108(a), one hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, and this hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Displayed.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 108(a) is located at the initial position. The second effect movable body 8 located at the initial position is located at a position that does not overlap the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side and avoids the display screen, and whether it is the upper arm portion 81 or the forearm portion 82. facing downward.

In FIG. 108(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 has started. That is, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variable display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol has also started, the movement of the pending icon has ended, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 changes from 1 to 0, and in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1, the display of "-" has started blinking. Further, the hold icon is shifted one place to the right, and the hold icon h11, which had been at the display position of the first hold icon, is now displayed as a change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even if it changes to the variable icon h0.

The second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 108(b) remains at the initial position.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 where the variable display of decorative patterns has started, a button effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(c) displays an operation promotion notification image 136P that urges the user to press the production button 136 within the valid period. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the performance button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 representing the remaining time of the validity period are displayed on the right side of the lord's character image. Although the changing display of the decorative symbols is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special symbols are changing from the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, etc. . Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 108(d), the valid period is decreasing, and in FIG. 108(e), the player has pressed the performance button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned validity period, the success or failure result of the button effect is notified. In this example, it is a success if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is ranked up, and the variable icon display area 280 shown in FIG. 108(f) shows a variable icon that has changed from the default display mode to display mode C (red). h0 is displayed. That is, the button presentation has been successful and the normal notice has started. In synchronization with the change timing of the display mode of the variable icon h0, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (change sound) expressed as an eighth note. Further, the button lamp 138 of the production button 136 may also emit light in a red light emitting manner. Note that if the button presentation fails, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change even if the presentation button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned validity period. In addition to this, the button performance may also notify you that if you succeed, you will enter a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 108(f), even if the success or failure result of the button effect is notified, the second effect movable body 8 remains at the initial position, but as shown in FIG. 108(g), When the variable display of decorative symbols enters the ready-to-reach state, the second performance movable body 8 starts operating. That is, the upper arm portion 81 starts rotating upward, and the forearm portion 82 also starts rotating upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 begins to overlap a part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front side. In the subsequent FIG. 108(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 have disappeared. As a result, the variable icon h0 of display mode C (red) is also hidden. The upper arm part 81 of the second effect movable body 8 further rotates upward, and the forearm part 82 is raised significantly. Note that the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c has been moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. On the other hand, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 108(i), it has developed into a super reach (buttock reach). The reach title LT4 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(i). Here, the reach title LT4 is displayed as "Tono Reach" written in black characters on a red background display. In addition, in the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 108(i), the forearm part 82 vibrates with the forearm part 82 raised high, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is further extended, and the decoration C (red) is visible. This decoration C is a display mode representing red, and is the same or similar to the display mode C (red) that was the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 are the same or similar display mode, but may be different display modes.

Further, the background display of the reach title LT4 may be in a display mode showing red. That is, the background display of reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to display mode C (red), and for example, has a slightly different color tone from display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the pending icon and the fluctuation icon. However, if the player can visualize display mode C (red), the display mode will become similar to display mode C (red).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(j) displays an animation of the character of the lord, and a second effect in which the second finger (index finger) 822 is stretched with the forearm 82 raised high. The movable body 8 has started a return operation toward the initial position. In the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(k), a proud-looking lord character is displayed, and the second effect movable body 8 has returned to its initial position. Further, in the display of fluctuations in the decorative patterns reduced and displayed in the lower right corner, fluctuation fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" are displayed. In addition, although the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, the 4th symbol/reserved number display area 284 and the mini symbol are displayed. The mini symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner until the symbols are displayed in a fixed manner.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(l), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the combination of decorative patterns is displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c. is displayed as stopped. Here, the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed as a combination of "444". Although the background is hidden in FIG. 108(l), a background image different from the default is actually displayed.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a production similar to the production in which the second production movable body 8 operates as shown in FIG. .

109(a) to FIG. 109(e) are the same as FIG. 108(a) to FIG. 108(e), and button effects are being executed.

The button effect is also successful in FIG. 109(f), and the variable icon h0 that has changed from the default display mode to the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in accordance with the timing of the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, the speaker 120 outputs a performance sound (change sound) represented by a quarter note. Note that the button lamp 138 of the production button 136 may not emit light in a light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern, but may emit light in a red light emitting mode.

In the subsequent FIG. 109(g), similarly to FIG. 108(g), a ready-to-reach state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols, and the second effect movable body 8 starts operating. Note that, for example, when the variable icon h0 is displayed in display mode B (green), the second effect movable body 8 may not operate and may still remain stationary at the initial position. That is, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the motion performance of the second effect movable body 8 is more likely to be performed than when the display mode B (green) is displayed. You can. Furthermore, when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is displayed, the second effect movable body is better than when the display mode C (red) shown in FIG. 8 may be made easier to perform. In other words, it is preferable that the higher the expectation level of a jackpot, the more likely it is that the motion performance of the second performance movable body 8 will be performed. It should be noted that when the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern) is being displayed, the motion effect of the second effect movable body 8 may be performed without fail.

In FIG. 109(h), as in FIG. 108(h), the background image is switched from the default background image to hidden, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. It has become. Further, as in FIG. 108(h), the forearm portion 82 of the second effect movable body 8 is raised significantly.

In FIG. 109(i), the reach has developed into a super reach (donto reach), and the reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the reach title LT5 is displayed as "Tono Reach" written in black characters on the manufacturer's pattern background display. Also, the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 109(j), like the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 108(j), vibrates the forearm part 82 in a state where the forearm part 82 is raised high, Furthermore, the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, the decoration C is visible, but the decoration C is a display mode that represents red, and a display mode D (manufacturer pattern) that is the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed by the button effect. are different types of decoration. In other words, it is a decoration that is one level lower in terms of the expectation of a jackpot. Note that the first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended so that the decoration D (see FIG. 104(e)), which has a jackpot expectation of 70%, becomes visible. However, even in this case, it is lower than the jackpot expectation level (75%) suggested by display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The player can see the variable icon h0 in the display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), which has the lowest appearance frequency, and can also see the manufacturer's pattern in the display mode of the background display in the reach title LT5. In some cases, the player may be feeling very excited, and the decoration of the second performance movable body 8 may be able to calm down the player's feelings a little.

Note that the background display of the reach title LT5 may be a display mode representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is a display mode of a pending icon or a variable icon. In other words, the background display of the reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the manufacturer's pattern, and for example, the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), which is the display mode of the hold icon and fluctuation icon. Even if there is, if the player can visualize display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the display mode will be similar to display mode D (manufacturer pattern).

The subsequent figures 109(i) to 109(l) are the same as figures 108(i) to 108(l), and the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is It will stop and be displayed, and you will win the jackpot.

FIG. 110(a) is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the ready-to-reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 110(a) in the production control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 100(a). At this time, as described above, green is always selected as the background color of the reach title LT1 of "Grand Reach", and this background color does not indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot. On the other hand, the background color of the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the background color of the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Tono Reach" suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and the CPU 504 controls the first sub-control unit 400 Determine the background color based on the command received from. Both the reach title LT2 of "Swordsman Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Tono Reach" include the manufacturer's pattern in the background color. Note that both reach titles LT2 and LT3 use a common relationship between background color and jackpot expectation level, but different relationships may be used.

FIG. 110(b) is a diagram showing a luminescent color determination table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 99(a), the CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 uses the light emitting color determination table shown in FIG. 110(b) to Determine the luminescent color of 71. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 71 indicates the expectation level of a jackpot, and the CPU 404 determines the color of the light emitted from the main control unit 300 based on the command received from the main control unit 300. Emission colors are white, red, and rainbow colors, and there are no manufacturer-specific emission colors. Further, the degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red luminescent color and the degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by the red background color of the above-mentioned reach title are different in magnitude of expectation. Furthermore, the magnitude of the expectation level is different from the jackpot expectation level suggested by the red display mode of the pending icon and the fluctuation icon, which was explained using FIG. 103.

FIG. 110(c) is a diagram showing the lord's kimono color determination table stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table becomes a table for determining the color of the lord's kimono displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 in the zone production described using FIG. 106. Similar to the background color determination described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the lord's kimono based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the production control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 100(a). Determine the color of. At this time, the determination table shown in FIG. 110(c) is used. As described above, since the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, no manufacturer's pattern is prepared for the color of the lord's kimono. The color of the lord's kimono also suggests the level of expectation of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the above explanation, the effect sound such as the appearance sound of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon and the change sound of the display mode is output from the speaker 120, but the shortest sixteenth note corresponding to display mode B (green) is output from the speaker 120. A production sound is output (FIG. 106(c)), and a short production sound of an eighth note is output corresponding to display mode C (red) (FIG. 102(c), FIG. 107(c), FIG. 108( f)), a longer quarter note sound is output corresponding to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) (Fig. 105(b), Fig. 107(e), Fig. 109(f)), and display mode E( The longest performance sound of a half note was output corresponding to the rainbow color (Fig. 107(g)). That is, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the longer the output time of the effect sound is output. Note that the sound effects differed depending on the display format, but there are display formats with relatively high expectations for a jackpot (display format D and display format E that are higher than 50%) and displays with a relatively low expectation for a jackpot. The effect sound may be made different depending on the mode (50% or less display mode B and display mode C). That is, the special performance sound may be output only when the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively high. Furthermore, only the appearance sounds of pending icons and variable icons in display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), and the sound of changes to display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), are outputted with specific performance sounds that are different from those for other display modes. You may also do so. The specific effect sound here may be a effect sound related to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or a effect sound representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern). For example, when the manufacturer pattern is an animal pattern, , the sound of the animal with the animal pattern may be output as the specific performance sound.

Furthermore, in the above explanation, the font color of the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 102(j) and the font color of the zone title ZT shown in FIG. 106(b) do not indicate the expectation of a jackpot, but on the contrary , the background display of the reach title LT2 shown in FIG. 105(e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in FIG. 107(j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 108(i), and the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in FIG. 109(i). The background display of the reach title LT5 suggested the degree of expectation of a jackpot. However, the display style of the title characters may indicate the level of expectation of a jackpot, and in this case, the title characters will be displayed in different display styles depending on the level of expectation of a jackpot. . Conversely, the background display of the title may not indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and in this case, the background display of the title will always be displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display format of the title text and background display, the display format of the cut-in preview display text, background display, and frame display, or the display format of the dialogue preview text, background display, and speech bubble line display, such as the hold icon and The degree of expectation of a jackpot may be indicated by the display mode (color or pattern) of the variable icon. For example, in these previews, a second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the display of the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demonstration performance.

In addition, during the jackpot game, the light emitting means (the production lamp 206, the light emitting part 71 of the first production movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, The right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, the game machine frame lamps 452, etc., such as the button lamp 138) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light-emitting manner. Therefore, unless the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode (light emitting mode D) may not indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Note that even during a jackpot game, the light emitting means does not emit light in the light emitting mode representing the manufacturer's pattern (display mode D).

Further, the appearance frequency of the manufacturer's pattern may be higher in the second game state (for example, the special pattern high probability state) than in the first game state (for example, the special pattern low probability state). Furthermore, the appearance frequency of the manufacturer's pattern may be a specification that cannot be changed by the player's setting operation, but if it is a specification that can be changed in the custom mode, the frequency of appearance of the manufacturer's pattern may be specified in the first mode (for example, in the non-custom mode (normal mode )) The manufacturer's pattern may appear more frequently in the second mode (for example, custom mode) than in the second mode (for example, custom mode).

In addition, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the special pattern is hit right in a low probability state, it takes a long time until the result of the variable display of the special pattern 2 is displayed, which is disadvantageous to the player. It may be arranged so that there is a possibility that the manufacturer's pattern will appear in a special pattern high probability state where a rush of small wins can be expected without appearing. Alternatively, in a 1-type, 2-type mixed machine that wins a V prize via a small win, the manufacturer's pattern does not appear in the variable performance where the small win is won in the normal gaming state, and the small win is won in the time-saving gaming state. In the variable performance, the manufacturer's pattern may appear.

Further, although the manufacturer's pattern appears the least frequently, its appearance frequency may be made the same as the appearance frequency of rainbow colors. Alternatively, the appearance frequency of the manufacturer's pattern may be lower than the appearance frequency of red, but higher than the appearance frequency of rainbow colors. Note that, as described above, this appearance frequency may be changeable depending on the player's setting operation.

Further, what has been displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 instead of the decorative pattern display device 208.

Furthermore, as a display means in place of the sub liquid crystal display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 is installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. You can. This light guide plate is an optical member that emits light that has entered from the side forward, and can change the light emission mode depending on the color of the incident light. It is possible to display a picture. Note that even when a light guide plate is used in place of the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the manufacturer's pattern is not displayed.

In addition, in the explanations from FIG. 102 to FIG. 109, white, green, red, gold, rainbow colors, which may (or may not) represent the expectation of a jackpot, manufacturer patterns that always represent the expectation of a jackpot, Although the colors are described using blue, which does not represent the expectation of a jackpot, other colors and patterns may be used.

In addition, when changing the display mode of pending icons and variable icons, we will avoid cases in which the default display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer's pattern), while changing from the default display mode to display mode E (rainbow color). In this case, display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be changed only from display mode C (red), or display mode C (red) may change. It may also be possible to change from display mode B (green). In addition, on the other hand, it is possible to prevent cases in which the default display mode changes to display mode E (rainbow color), but to allow cases in which the default display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer's pattern). good. In this case, display mode E (rainbow color) may be changed only from display mode C (red), or may be changed from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green). It may be possible to do so. Further, the display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may also be changed from the default display mode, display mode C (red), and display mode B (green).

As mentioned above, various performances using colors have been explained, but the predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (the predetermined colors displayed in the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the fluctuation icon, and the zone title) ), a light emitting means (the production lamp 206, the light emitting part 71 of the first production movable body 7, the game board lamp 442 such as a light emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacker unit 23, the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R , the upper frame lamp 122U, the game table frame lamp 452 such as the button lamp 138, etc.), the predetermined color (lord's kimono) displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, and the second effect movable body. Strictly speaking, the predetermined color of the decoration of the decoration provided in 8 differs depending on the display medium and presentation, so strictly speaking, the hue will be different in each display.

However, even if the colors are slightly different, if the player can imagine that it is a "predetermined color" (for example, red), then the "predetermined color" in each display represents the same "predetermined color". It can be said that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors."

FIG. 111 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the front side (player side).

This slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 111), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is configured so that it can rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111, a suitable number of symbols are printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and this strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 1013, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Further, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111 is equipped with three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown in FIG. 111) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back side of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 1010 to 1012. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 1014 that becomes valid. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line becomes valid, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line will become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, Five lines, including the down winning line and the right up winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) in an internal lottery, or that he is playing a bonus game. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. Three pieces are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 1034, and "insertion" includes both. be. The stored medal number display 1025 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed to determine which of the multiple types of winning combinations has been won. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or relatively disadvantageous state.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key is inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111, an operation key unit 1090, which is the same as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, a performance button 1091, which is the same as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, is provided, and this performance button 1091 also has a button lamp (not shown). Emits light.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This production device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 consisting of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 disposed on the back side of this door member 1063. It is equipped with the same effect movable body 1058 as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. When opened, a display screen of a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (on the player's side), and a performance movable body 1058 also appears on the right side thereof. Light emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting light in full color are arranged on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b. Furthermore, the effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 111 is also provided with the decorative body described using FIG. 104. It should be noted that the device does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a device consisting of a projector and a screen. It may also be a display device or the like. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may also be a square flat surface. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

Note that also in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111, a sub-liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the liquid crystal display device 1057.

The liquid crystal display device 1057 and/or the sub-liquid crystal display device displays display modes A to E, such as title character display, title background display, preview background display, preview frame display, and preview text display. used. That is, the manufacturer pattern display of display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each of the displays in display mode A to display mode E becomes a suggestive image that suggests the degree of expectation of transitioning to the AT state and the degree of expectation of obtaining a bonus. In addition, the side lamp 1044, the unillustrated light emitting diodes disposed on the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, the unillustrated button lamp that makes the production button 1091 emit light, etc. can emit light in light emission mode A to light emission mode E. However, it does not emit light in the lighting mode that represents the manufacturer's pattern.

Furthermore, the present invention is also applicable to enclosed type pachinko machines. In an enclosed type pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means into the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game machine, as shown in FIG. The ball storage tray 126 shown is not provided. This enclosed type pachinko machine is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine.The enclosed balls are used as firing balls, and the payout of balls is performed by credits. It may be.

According to the above description,
`` Suggestive images that suggest the degree of expectation that will give the player an advantage [e.g., degree of expectation of winning a jackpot, degree of expectation of transition to AT state, degree of expectation of obtaining a bonus, etc.'' [e.g., pending icon, variable icon, title text display] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, sub-liquid crystal display device 207, liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] ,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light emission modes [for example, for game boards such as the effect lamp 206 shown in FIG. Lamps 442 (see FIG. 94), lamps 452 for game machine frames such as the left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 93 (see FIG. 94), and the lamps 452 shown in FIG. side lamps 1044, unillustrated light emitting diodes disposed on the right door 1063a and left door 1063b, unillustrated button lamps that cause the production button 1091 to emit light, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays the suggested image in a first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 110(a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 103(b), or the c), the red display mode shown in FIG. 110(a)],
The display means is capable of displaying the suggested image in a second display mode [for example, the display mode of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIGS. 103(d) and 110(a)]. It is a thing,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The light emitting means has a first light emitting mode representing the first display mode [for example, a white light emitting mode shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 110(b), a green light emitting mode shown in FIG. 103(b), 103(c), FIG. 110(b), etc.],
The light emitting means does not emit light in a second light emitting mode representing the second display mode [for example, a light emitting mode of green and yellow polka dots on a white background];
A gaming machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 91, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 111]. ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which is highly anticipated, may be improved, and the sense of anticipation and specialness of the second display mode may be enhanced.

Note that the expectation level may be an expectation of a jackpot.

Further, the light emitting means may be a panel lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light emitting body provided on an accessory such as a movable means.

Further, even if the first light emitting mode is slightly different from the first display mode, it is sufficient if the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the light emitting means does not emit light in a light emitting mode that is generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

Further, the display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode that does not suggest the above-mentioned expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow color display mode shown in FIG. 103(e) and FIG. 110(a)],
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the second display mode [for example, 100%],
The light-emitting means may emit light in a third light-emitting mode representing the third display mode [for example, the rainbow-colored light-emitting mode shown in FIGS. 103(e) and 110(b)]. ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The first light emitting mode is the same or similar light emitting mode to the first display mode,
The second light emitting mode is the same or similar to the second display mode,
The third light emitting mode is the same or similar to the third display mode,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the first display mode, the second light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the second display mode, and the third light emission mode is a light emission mode related to the first display mode. The light emitting mode may be a light emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first light emitting mode and the first display mode are different only due to a difference in medium such as the light emitting means and the display means, the first light emitting mode is different from the first display mode. It can be said that the third light emitting mode is the same light emitting mode as the display mode, and the third light emitting mode can be said to be the same light emitting mode as the third display mode.

Also,
“The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, yellow and green],
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple)].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 100%,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests confirmation of a jackpot.

Also,
``The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturing company or sales company of the gaming machine [for example, the manufacturer's pattern or manufacturer's color],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or sales company of the gaming machine to be recognized.

According to the above description,
`` Suggestive images that suggest the degree of expectation that will give the player an advantage [e.g., degree of expectation of winning a jackpot, degree of expectation of transition to AT state, degree of expectation of obtaining a bonus, etc.'' [e.g., pending icon, variable icon, title text display] , title background display, notice background display, notice frame display, notice character display, etc.] [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 93, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207 shown in FIG. a liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.], and
Movable means whose movable area is closer to the player than the display means [for example, the first effect movable body 7, the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 93, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. 111, the effect movable body body 1058] and
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays the suggested image in a first display mode [for example, the white display mode shown in FIGS. 103(a) and 110(a), the green display mode shown in FIG. 103(b), or the c), the red display mode shown in FIG. 110(a)],
The display means is capable of displaying the suggested image in a second display mode [for example, the display mode of a green and yellow polka dot pattern (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIGS. 103(d) and 110(a)]. It is a thing,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher [for example, 75%] than the first display mode,
The movable means displays a first decoration according to a display mode representing the first display mode [for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 104(a), a green decoration shown in FIG. 104(b), or a first decoration shown in FIG. 104(c). ) includes the red decoration shown in
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer's pattern) on a white background] [for example, FIG. 104 reference],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, the rarity of the second display mode, which is highly anticipated, may be improved, and the sense of anticipation and specialness of the second display mode may be enhanced. Furthermore, since the movable means whose movable area is closer to the player than the display means does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings that the second display mode has appeared, and to improve expectations. It is possible to reduce excessive excitement.

Note that the expectation level may be an expectation of a jackpot.

Further, the movable means may be a performance movable means (accessory object).

Further, even if the first decoration is somewhat different from the first display mode, it is sufficient if the relationship with the first display mode is generally recognized. Furthermore, the movable means is not provided with any decoration that is generally recognized to be related to the second display mode.

The decoration may be a portion painted with a color or pattern. In other words, it may be a part whose color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a part that displays a color or pattern (such as a liquid crystal display device or a light emitting diode), or a part that can display a different color or pattern.

Further, the display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode is a display suggesting that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. It may be an aspect. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, that is, a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, or a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode that does not suggest the above-mentioned expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, the rainbow color display mode shown in FIG. 103(e) and FIG. 110(a)],
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the second display mode [for example, 100%],
The movable means does not include a third decoration [for example, rainbow-colored decoration] according to the display mode representing the third display mode [for example, see FIG. 104],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The movable means is provided with a first portion [for example, the second finger (index finger) 822] on which a display according to the display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means is a state in which the first part is invisible to the player and a state in which the first part is visible to the player, and the movable means represents the second display mode. The second part on which the display according to the display mode is displayed may not be provided. Furthermore, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion on which a display according to the display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 104).

Also,
“The first decoration is a decoration in a display mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
The second decoration is a decoration in a display mode that is the same as or similar to the second display mode,
A game machine characterized in that the third decoration is a decoration in a display mode that is the same as or similar to the third display mode. ”
Also explained.

Note that the first decoration is a decoration in a display mode related to the first display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration in a display mode related to the second display mode, and the second decoration is a decoration in a display mode related to the second display mode. The third decoration may be a decoration according to a display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the first decoration and the first display mode are different only due to the difference in media such as the movable means and the display means, the first decoration is different from the first display mode. It can be said that the display mode is the same as that of .

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode using a plurality of colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using a plurality of colors.

Furthermore, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 100%.

Also,
``The movable means displays the suggestion image in the second display mode on the display means rather than the suggestion image in the first display mode [for example, FIG. 108(g)]. [For example, Fig. 109(g)] is easier to move.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``A game machine characterized in that the second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes a manufacturing company or a sales company of the game machine. ”
Also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or sales company of the gaming machine to be recognized.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are not described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the descriptions of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, etc. explained above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may also be applied to various examples. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent features included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even if it is applied to various examples, it still stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Next, a game machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 112 to 136. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 112 to 136 are used only for explanations using FIGS. 112 to 136 in principle, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 136, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 112 to 136.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine in which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is met, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, and a ball storage tray door 108. A device 110 and a game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member in a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (such as an island facility) provided at a game machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge part 112, and serves as a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body. . Further, the main body 104 is formed into a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (gaming parlor) in which this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close this main body 104, and is provided with a main body open sensor 104S that detects when the main body 104 is opened.

The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. This is a door member with an opening 116. A clerk at the gaming parlor can also open and close this front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 106S is also provided to detect when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which a game area 124 is provided. Note that in this embodiment, a device whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 at the front of the Pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be openable and closable. This ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pushing a release lever 1080 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. Further, a ball storage dish door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage dish door 108 is opened. The ball storage tray door 108 includes an upper tray 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with a passageway for guiding the game balls to the firing device 110. , a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for ejecting game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, A ball ejection lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box), and a ball discharge lever 132 that, when operated, ejects the game balls stored in the lower tray 128, into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box); A ball firing handle 134 that launches the ball into the game area 124, a performance button 136 that changes the performance mode of the various performance devices 2 to 4 (see FIG. 114) by the player's operation, and A chance button lamp 138 that causes a button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that instructs a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game parlor to lend balls, and an instruction to the card unit to return a player's balance. The player has a return operation button 142 for performing the above operations, and a ball lending display section 144 for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112 is provided with a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 190 is also provided.

The firing device 110 includes a firing rod 146 that is attached below the main body 104 and rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and a firing mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , is provided. This firing device 110 shoots a game ball into the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the ball firing handle 134 is continuously operated by the player. This corresponds to an example of a firing means.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the gaming area 124 is not shown in FIG. 112, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 114.

FIG. 113 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 112 seen from the back side.

The upper part of the back of the pachinko machine 100 has a ball tank 150 which has an opening opening upward and is used to temporarily store game balls. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding balls falling through the formed communication hole to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152 is detachable and connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when attached to a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and descended into the payout device 152, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to the payout control section 600 (see FIG. 115). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach an upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 receives a predetermined amount of Based on the fulfillment of the condition, the game value (game balls) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is awarded (paid out) to the player using this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 115) that performs overall control processing of the game, and a main board case 158 that stores the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 115) that performs control processing for the overall game. A first sub-board case 162 that houses a first sub-board 160 that constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 115) that performs control processing related to presentation based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. A second sub-board case 166 that accommodates a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 115) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls). 115) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 that is equipped with an error release switch 168 that cancels an error when operated by a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls (see A launch board case 176 houses a launch board 174 constituting the launch board 174 (see FIG. 115), and a power switch that constitutes a power control unit 660 (see FIG. 115) that supplies power to various electrical game machines and turns the power on and off by operation by a game store clerk. 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 houses a power supply board 182, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface section 606 for transmitting and receiving is provided.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the setting change mode allows setting at least one of a plurality of settings with different jackpot probabilities. can be moved to. In the setting change mode, the current settings are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the settings by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed when the power is turned on.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and placed inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. As shown in FIG. 121(A), the accessory ratio/setting display 196 has 2-digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, and a 1-digit 7-segment LED on the right side as a module. The accessory ratio monitor is an indicator that notifies the accessory ratio (YH) and the continuous accessory ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current settings. The accessory ratio/setting display 196 is composed of, for example, a single-color red LED, but it may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. Note that at least a part of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 may be provided on the game board 200 so as to be visible to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

FIG. 114 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 seen from the front. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the near side sometimes referred to as the front or front, and the back side sometimes referred to as the back or rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes called the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand is sometimes called the left and the right hand is sometimes called the right. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher one being referred to as the top and the lower one being referred to as the bottom.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the game area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted as the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104, but for example, the left side part 200a of the game board 200 in the front view is inserted into the left side of the main body 104 in the front view (hinge part 112 side), and the left side part 200a in the front view is inserted here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the right side 200b of the game board 200 when viewed from the front is pressed against the main body 104 while rotating the game board 200 with the center of rotation as the rotation center. There are cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which characters of the pachinko machine 100 are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged on the lower right side of the main body 201. If detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by image or sound, stopping of the game to make it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor.

The game board 200 is provided with an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 to define a game area 124 in which game balls can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that is detachable from the main body 104. In the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the shot game ball.

Areas of the game board 200 other than the game area 124 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished using the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, at least the area inside the area through which the game ball passes when the game ball launch intensity is maximized can be called the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of a production device or the like within the game area 124. The game area 124 is called a downstream area in that game balls flow down during a game, and the non-gaming area is sometimes called a non-drift area in that game balls do not flow down during a game except for maintenance or accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 can be called a downstream area, but the area where the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of a presentation device or the like may be called a non-flow area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged approximately in the center of the gaming area 124. Below the gaming area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol retention lamp 216, a first special symbol retention lamp 218, A second special symbol holding lamp 220 is provided. Note that, hereinafter, the ordinary pattern may be referred to as a "normal pattern" and the special pattern may be referred to as a "special pattern".

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performances, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a production display area 208d. , and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be changed freely within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , a 7-segment display, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display, a reel (drum) type display, a leaf type display, a plasma display, and a projector.

The ordinary figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying ordinary figures, and in this embodiment is configured with 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment are configured with 7-segment LEDs.

The general pattern holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general pattern fluctuation games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general pattern fluctuation games are held until a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do so. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special figure variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure variable games. It is possible. In addition, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, special symbol variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four). This makes it possible.

Also provided are a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-hand hitting indicator lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL. The time-saving medium lamp TL is a lamp for indicating that the time-saving game state is in which the fluctuating display time of the normal map is shortened and the blade member 232a of the electric tulip (electric chew) described later is easy to open for a long time. The right-hand hitting display lamp RL is a lamp for indicating that the player is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state and can obtain benefits by hitting the right hand. The high probability medium lamp HL is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur, or a high probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrance openings, for example, general winning openings 226a, 226b, a regular symbol starting opening 228, a first special symbol starting opening 230, and a second special symbol starting opening 232. , a variable winning opening 234 is provided.

One or more general winning holes 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning hole placed on the left side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226a, and the general winning hole placed on the right side of the gaming area 124 is referred to as a general winning hole 226b. When a ball enters the general winning hole 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and, assuming that the ball has won in the general winning hole 226a, drives the payout device 152 and awards a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls). When the ball is discharged to the upper tray 126 as a ball and enters the general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that it has won a prize in the general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls ( For example, one ball is discharged onto the upper tray 126 as a prize ball. The players can freely take out the balls discharged onto the upper tray 126, and with these configurations, prize balls are paid out to the players based on winnings. In this embodiment, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 226a and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226a are provided on the left side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. In addition, if a plurality of general winning holes 226b are provided on the right side of the gaming area 124, the ball paths that guide the entered game balls may be merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, they may be detected by separate ball detection sensors. The balls that entered the general winning holes 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal figure starting port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in this embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one installed in The ball that passes through the general figure starting port 228 is different from the ball that enters the general prize winning port 226, and is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal pattern fluctuation game using the normal pattern display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, it drives a payout device 152, which will be described later, and selects a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of balls as prize balls from the upper tray 126. At the same time, the first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure fluctuation game. The ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting hole 230, when the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting hole 230. In this embodiment, the specification is such that the variable display of the special figure 2 is started in priority to the special figure 1 (a pachinko machine with such a specification is sometimes referred to as a "special figure 2 priority variable machine"). has been done.

The second special figure starting port 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric tube), is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230, and is equipped with a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and when the wing member 232a is closed. It is impossible for a ball to enter the inside, and when a winning pattern is won in the normal pattern variation game and the normal pattern display device 210 stops displaying the winning pattern, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of balls into the upper tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time, a special figure fluctuation game using the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that enters the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the regular game starting hole 228 (due to a game nail not shown), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the regular game starting hole 228 when the game ball is hit to the left. . Therefore, while the player is playing left-handed, there is no chance of winning the normal pattern variation game, and therefore, there is no opening or closing of the blade member 232a in principle. On the other hand, if the ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be expected to enter the normal pattern starting port 228, so the blade member 232a may open and close due to winning in the normal pattern fluctuation game. That is, it can be said that there is almost no possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the left hand, but there is a possibility of winning a prize in the second special figure starting hole 232 while hitting the right hand.

The variable winning hole 234 is called a big winning hole or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one variable winning hole 234 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning hole 234 is equipped with a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and when the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and when the special pattern variable game is won, the special pattern display device stops the jackpot pattern. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (eg, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (eg, 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning hole 234, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls into the upper tray 126 as prize balls.

In this embodiment, the variable winning hole 234 and the general winning hole 226b are integrally formed in the ball entry unit U1, and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V shutter VS and a V passing switch VC. The V passage switch VC opens upward and allows the game ball to pass from top to bottom. This V passing switch VC is for detecting passing game balls. The V-shutter VS is arranged above the V-passing switch VC, and is moved forward and backward by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above, and is driven by a drive circuit 334. When the V shutter VS is in a forward state (corresponding to a closed state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passing switch VC, and when the V shutter VS is in a backward state (corresponding to an open state), the game ball cannot pass through the V passing switch VC. It becomes possible to pass through the passage switch VC. The game ball that enters the variable prize opening 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front side, then rolls to the V shutter VS, and sometimes passes through the V passing switch VC and sometimes does not pass through. There are cases where the player is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The V passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 described above, and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects passage of the game ball to the V passage switch VC, it is determined that there is a V winning prize.

In this embodiment, from the start of the jackpot game until a specific round (for example, the final round), the V-shutter VS maintains a closed state (advanced state), and in the specific round, the V-shutter VS opens (retreats). , V prizes can be won. If it is possible to obtain a V winning prize, the control state shifts to the special pattern high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and if it is not possible to obtain a V winning prize, the control state shifts to the special pattern low probability state after the jackpot game ends. It remains as it is. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 in this embodiment, the transition to the special figure high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS.

Furthermore, in the game area 124, a disc-shaped ball hitting direction converting member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged. An out port 240 is provided for guiding balls, etc. that have not won a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and controls the firing rod and The ball is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 using a firing mallet. The ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing its traveling direction by the ball-hitting direction conversion member 236, game nails, etc., and enters the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234) and starting. If you win a prize at the opening (1st special pattern starting port 230, 2nd special pattern starting port 232), or without winning in any winning port or starting port, or by just passing through the regular pattern starting port 228, you will be out. Reach 240. In addition, in this embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward. An out ball detection sensor SWout is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104 to detect passage of a game ball received in the ejected ball receiving port. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls ejected from the game board 200 (including the game balls ejected from the out port 240 and the game balls that have entered various winning holes) are received in this ejected ball receiving port, and are passed through a predetermined ejection path. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

In addition, a presentation device 2 is placed at the top of the game area 124, a presentation device 3 is placed at the bottom, and a presentation device 4 is placed on the left and right sides, respectively. In the case of this embodiment, these presentation devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 115. Note that this figure shows a functional block diagram of the control section. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, and a main control unit 300 that mainly controls the performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) sent by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 performs control; a second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400; A payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control section 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The main control section 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control section 300 . The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a timer. a counter timer 312 for measuring times and times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit is assumed to have two counters built-in). It is equipped with Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the number in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is built into the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also receives signals output from various sensors 320, including a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each starting opening, winning opening, and variable winning opening, and a lower tray full sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the 2. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the special symbol display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the regular symbol display device 210, and a various status display section 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of ordinary drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, as a normal electric accessory. Various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting opening 232, a door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, a driving means for driving the V shutter VS, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected thereto. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

Note that when the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230 at that timing, and transfers the latched value to the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting opening 230. Store in value storage register. Furthermore, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting hole 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting hole 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (eg, game status) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the pachinko machine 100.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the start signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting commands to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Note that the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control section 300 and the payout control section 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but it is configured such that the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. are doing. However, the information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but it is configured such that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good too.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands and the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game table frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 also includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the production devices 2 to 4, etc., and a sensor circuit. 428 and a volume switch 163 that adjusts the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 receives detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the production devices 2 to 4, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects the press of the production button 136 and various buttons constituting the operation key unit 190. Output to basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control commands. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A VDP (Video Display Processor) that reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. It is equipped with 516. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, connected to the basic circuit 502 is a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like. In this embodiment, a memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and the memory 508 is constituted by a recording medium (for example, an EEPROM, a flash memory, etc.) that can maintain a stored state even if the power is cut off. Thereby, for example, information for displaying a display related to the jackpot history can be retained even when the main control unit 300 initializes or changes settings. Note that a RAM whose stored information evaporates when the power is cut off may be used.

Next, the payout control section 600, firing control section 630, and power supply control section 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be explained. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the CR interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also provides prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls have been paid out. Ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor 106S that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. When 106 is open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, it outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 receives control signals output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs to permit or stop firing, and the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output by a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148 and the control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the ball from the upper tray 126 to the firing device 110 based on a control signal that instructs the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply each device. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 includes a power storage circuit (for example, , capacitor). In addition, in this embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 connects the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500 with each other. Although power at a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, power at a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 116(a) to 116(d), the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and general symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed to stop. We will explain the types of special and regular maps.

The special pattern 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, and the ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game starts, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the one segment in the center in the "special figure 1 variable display" (special figure 1 variable display). play a variable game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the one segment in the center in the "special figure 2 variable display" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 1 has elapsed, the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of special figure 2 After lapse of time, the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be performed several times in a row.

FIG. 116(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 1. This FIG. 116(a) shows three types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure c". In FIG. 116(a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols ("special pattern a" and "special pattern b") are prepared as the stop pattern mode of the special pattern 1. "Special pattern a" is a 3-round (R) variable probability jackpot symbol that is expected to be obtained with variable probability, and "special pattern b" is a 3R normal jackpot symbol with no chance of obtaining variable probability. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, variable probability acquisition (transition to the special pattern high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V passing switch VS. When the special figure a is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, when the third round which is the final round of the jackpot game starts, the V shutter VS opens (retreats) and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. It becomes possible. If the game ball passes through the V passage switch VS (if the V prize is won), after the jackpot game ends, the control state will shift to the special pattern high probability state, and the shifted special pattern high probability state will indicate that the jackpot game is It is maintained until the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times after the end. In this embodiment, once the V-shutter VS is opened, there is sufficient time for it to remain open, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through the V-passing switch VS. It can be said that this is a planned jackpot (the same applies to "Special Map A" and "Special Map B" described later). On the other hand, when special figure b is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, the V shutter VS does not open even if the third round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, is entered, and the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS. There is nothing to do (V winning cannot be won), and after the end of the jackpot game, the control state remains in the special figure low probability state. In this way, the transition to the special pattern high probability state requires V winning, but the transition to the regular pattern high probability state is started on the condition that the jackpot game ends. In other words, if you hit the jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, you will move to the normal pattern high probability state, and the transferred normal pattern high probability state will be the same even if the symbol fluctuation display of the special pattern is special pattern a after the jackpot game ends. This is maintained for 120 times in the case of special symbol b, and 50 times in the case of special symbol b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of losing symbol ("special symbol c") is prepared as a stop symbol mode of the special symbol 1.

FIG. 116(b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special drawing 2. This figure 116(b) shows four types of special patterns from “Special Pattern A” to “Special Pattern D”, and two of them are jackpot patterns (“Special Pattern A” and “Special Pattern D”). Figure B"). "Special pattern A" is a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol that is expected to be obtained with a probability variation, and "Special pattern B" is a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol that is planned to be obtained. In other words, if special figure A wins the V prize in the 10th round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state shifts to the special figure high probability state and the general figure high probability state, and after the jackpot game ends, the special figure This state is maintained while the symbol variation display is performed 120 times. For special pattern B, if you win a V prize in the second round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state shifts to the special pattern high probability state and the general pattern high probability state, and after the jackpot game ends, the special pattern symbol This state is maintained while the variable display is performed 120 times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of losing symbols ("special pattern C" and "special pattern D") are prepared as stop pattern modes of the special pattern 2. "Special pattern C" is the same general losing pattern as "special pattern c", but "special pattern D" is a special pattern called a time-saving pattern, which will be described in detail later.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot in the special symbol variation game is performed by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol to be stopped is determined by a software random number lottery. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable game during a specific period, it is determined whether or not you have won the "sudden time saving" by lottery of hardware random numbers, and if you win the "sudden time saving", the second special figure will be displayed. The “time saving symbol” is stopped and displayed on the device 214. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the state shifts to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game. The general figure high probability state is called a time-saving gaming state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving gaming state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-time-saving gaming state by shortening the time from the end of a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot, etc. Refers to the state. Strictly speaking, the "electronic support state" is only a state related to general cards, and the "time-saving game state" is a state related to special charts or a state related to general cards and special charts. A time-saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, it is a time-saving gaming state and a state with high probability of winning. In a state with a high probability of a common figure, it is easier to win a variable game of a common figure compared to a state with a low probability of a common figure (a certain probability of a common figure). For example, the probability of winning a regular figure variable game is 1/100 in a regular figure low probability state (non-time-saving game state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in a regular figure high probability state (time-saving game state). In addition, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the regular figure variable game is shorter than in the non-time-saving game state (general figure variable short). For example, the fluctuation time of the regular figure fluctuation game is 10 seconds in the non-time saving game state, but is shortened to 2 seconds in the time saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving game state, compared to the non-time-saving game state, the opening time for one opening of the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (the electric chew opening period is extended). For example, the electric chew open period of 0.2 seconds in the non-time-saving game state is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving game state, the blade member 232a is more likely to open (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases) compared to the non-time-saving game state. For example, the blade member 232a, which opens only once in the non-time-saving game mode per winning entry to the common figure starting port 228, opens twice in the time-saving game mode (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds again). open). By extending the opening period of the electric chute and increasing the number of times the electric chute is opened, the probability of the ball entering the special map 2 starting hole 232 increases. Note that the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the non-time-saving game state is maintained. This is because, especially in jackpot games, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, and the number of game balls entering the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is simply described as "non-time-saving gaming state", the period during jackpot gaming is excluded.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the following are performed: normal pattern change, normal pattern change short, extension of the electric chew opening period, and increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, but at least one of these is performed. If this happens, the player will be in a highly advantageous state, which may lead to a time-saving gaming state. In this case, in each of the time saving game states of a time saving, b time saving, and c time saving described later, change the one that is executed from the following: normal drawing fixed change, normal drawing changing shortening, electric chew opening period extension, and electric chew opening frequency increase. Good too. For example, in the case of a time reduction, all of the following are carried out: ``Puzu definite change'', ``Puzu change shortening'', an extension of the electric chew open period, and an increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened; , extension of the electric chew opening period, and increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened. One or two of these may be executed. Alternatively, if either one of an extension of the electric chew release period or an increase in the number of electric chew openings, which increases the probability of a ball entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, is performed, the time saving game state may be set. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 starting opening 232 changes between the difficult winning state where it is difficult for game balls to enter and the easy winning state where it is easy for game balls to enter. This special figure 2 starting opening 232 is in a winning easy state for a longer period of time in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when "Tokuzu A", "Tokuzu A", and "Tokuzu B" are stopped and displayed, after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the 120 special symbols change. The time-saving gaming state (normal pattern high probability state) is maintained until the display is performed, and at the 121st time, it shifts to the non-time saving gaming state (normal pattern low probability state). In addition, when "special pattern b" is stopped and displayed, after the end of the jackpot game that is played after that, the time-saving gaming state (normal pattern high probability state) is maintained until the variable display of the special pattern is performed 50 times, and the 51 At the second time, the game shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (normal pattern low probability state). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot symbols of all the special symbols are set to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, but even if a jackpot symbol (non-time-saving jackpot symbol) that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state is provided. Often, when a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the non-time-saving gaming state may be maintained without shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, small winning symbols may be prepared in addition to the jackpot symbols, and in the small winning game, the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 234a operates once. When activated, the open state is maintained for only 0.1 seconds at most. In addition, when the door member 234a is opened for a small win, for example, when the door member 234a is opened for the first time, if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this happens, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small winning game, the state shifts to a special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, it returns to the control state before the start of the small win game.

FIG. 116(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 11 types of decorative patterns in this embodiment: "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 11". The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230 or the special pattern 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting port 230, or the special pattern 2 On the condition that the second starting port sensor detects that a ball enters the starting port 232, each of the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208 In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... "Fluctuating display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative pattern display device 208 is for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, a stop pattern mode that is a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed.

When notifying a normal jackpot (3R normal jackpot of "special pattern b"), a combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns with the same number are lined up (for example, "decoration" 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1", "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", etc.) are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying a variable probability jackpot (3R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map A", 10R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map A", 2R probability variation jackpot for "Special Map B"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "Decoration 3 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying a losing pattern of "special pattern c" or "special pattern C", a combination of decorative patterns other than the combinations of decorative patterns described above (for example, a loose pattern) is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. (eyes) to stop display. Furthermore, when suddenly winning a time saving prize, three "decorations 11" are displayed side by side instead of a combination of "decorations 1" to "decorations 10".

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "fluctuating display of decorative patterns" to the stop display of the stop pattern mode of the decorative patterns may be referred to as the variable display of decorative patterns. The variable display of the decorative patterns is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 116(d) shows an example of the stopping pattern mode of the ordinary symbol. There are two types of stop display modes of common symbols in this embodiment: "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol, and "common symbol B" which is a losing symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the general pattern starting port 228, the general pattern display device 210 lights up all seven segments and lights up one segment in the center. Perform a "fluctuating display of common figures" (fluctuating common figures game) that repeatedly lights up. Then, after the variable time has elapsed, either one of the winning symbol "Public symbol A" and the losing symbol "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 116(d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "fluctuation display of a common symbol" until the stop display of the stopped pattern of a common symbol may be referred to as a variable display of a common symbol.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 shown in FIG. 115 will be described using FIG. 117. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 115 stores a special pattern random number, a special pattern round determination random value, a special pattern electric support determination random value, and a special pattern pattern determination random number. Further, this RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random numbers, various judgment (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the reserved number of special symbols storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage section for special symbols that is divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) in which the start of the winning/failure judgment (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary figures is also provided. As will be described later, in the starting information storage unit for special figures, a plurality of types of starting information are made into one set and these starting information are stored one set at a time in each area in order of winning (order of reservation).

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 115 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this startup signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 117 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. In this embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 is supplying to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. is less than a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that even if the supply voltage does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value that determines the cycle for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process of setting a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing to output a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400, setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, etc. are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power cutoff (before the power cutoff), and if the state before the power cutoff is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to execute initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state will return to the state before the power cut (step S109; No), the cause is whether the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 113 was operated by a clerk at the game store or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is on (indicating that the RAM clear switch 180 has been operated). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (step S113; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side (step S115). If it is determined that the setting is correct (step S115; Yes), a setting change process is executed (step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor on the accessory ratio/setting display 196 flash and indicate "1", indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, each time the setting change button 194 is pressed, the 7 segments on the setting monitor are incremented, and when the setting change button 194 is pressed while the 7 segments corresponding to the setting monitor are showing "6". When it does, it returns to "1". In this embodiment, it is possible to select at least one of settings 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities, and by operating the setting change key 192 to the OFF side after changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed. At this time, the setting values displayed on the setting monitor are erased. Thereafter, after the settings are finalized, the setting values can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. In this embodiment, the set value is displayed on the setting monitor of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, but it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or notified by audio output. good. Further, in this embodiment, the settings are set in six stages from settings 1 to 6, but settings other than the six stages may be used, or the settings may not be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, the initial value of the setting displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1", but the setting value before the power is turned off is retained, and the retained setting value is displayed. Good too.

Further, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 is operated to the ON side, ( Step S115; No), the process moves to step S119 without executing the setting change process of step S117.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to bring the basic circuit 302 into an initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and if this power status information does not indicate suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 (e.g. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0). (whether the checksum result is normal or not), and if the checksum result is other than a specific value (for example 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal) executes an initialization process to bring the pachinko machine 100 into an initial state. In this initialization process, interrupts are disabled, a stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (main setting), and all storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Note that in this embodiment, even if initialization is performed, the setting values set in the setting change process (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, here, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command described later, is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S119) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. , is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S121, after setting the interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the regular figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter, respectively, are updated. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121, except while performing a timer interrupt process that starts at every predetermined cycle.

On the other hand, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read out and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S121) that was executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power outage. Further, a RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 113 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at power-off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 118. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 115 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger for main control. 2. Starts timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The information is stored in a signal state storage area partitioned for each sensor 320. To explain using the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process before the previous time (approximately 4 ms ago) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read from the previous detection signal storage area divided into sections, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two previous detection signal storage areas partitioned for each ball detection sensor. ) is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, partitioned for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area described above. to be memorized. Further, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of a detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the storage area of the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times, repeating activation at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is checked. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before the previous time, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area described above. That is, when the game ball begins to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In this embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 115 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, there is a detection signal this time). (information indicating that it is), the ball enters the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special drawing starting hole 230, and the second special drawing starting hole 232, or the general winning hole 228. is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there has been a win in these winning holes 234, 226 and these starting holes 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first starting hole sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting hole 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there has been a winning at the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winnings at the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, the processing branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning to the first special symbol start opening 230. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two days ago, there was no detection signal last time, and there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a prize has been won once, it is not determined that a prize has been won until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, then it will be determined whether or not it matches the entered award determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S121 above is updated, and then the general figure winning random number value and the Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as the winning random number is 0 to 99, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained, and the value is stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and 1 is added to the obtained value, and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is the same as the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number winning random number, and the value is set as the initial value. In addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating winning random numbers, the initial value set this time is stored in the initial value storage area mentioned above in order to determine when the random number counter for generating winning random numbers has made one round. I'll keep it. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating random numbers for winning random numbers for general drawings has completed one round, it is also determined that the random number counter for generating random numbers for special drawings has completed one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this performance random number update process, a random number counter for generating a random number value for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, a regular symbol display symbol update timer is used to measure the time for fluctuating and stopping display of symbols on the regular symbol display device 210, a symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and a second special symbol display device 214. Various types including a special display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation/stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined prize-winning presentation time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end presentation period, etc. Update timer.

In step S215, winning opening counter updating processing is performed. In this winning hole counter update process, when a prize is won in the winning holes 234, 226 or the starting holes 230, 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or each starting hole in the RAM 308 is updated. Read it out, add 1, and set it in the original prize ball number storage area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the prize acceptance process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, multiple types of starting information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage section provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (pending order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. is the power-on information (if it is on, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are the encryption information. The number of payout requests after conversion processing is shown.

In step S221, a normal figure state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the ordinary figure. For example, in the normal pattern state update process during the normal pattern fluctuation display (when the value of the above-mentioned normal pattern display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210 repeatedly turns on and off. Performs light-off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of common symbols (a common symbol variable game).

In addition, in the normal pattern state update process at the timing when the normal pattern fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the winning pattern will be displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on and off so that the normal symbol display device 210 has a display mode, and when the winning flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the losing symbol. Controls the lighting/extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area in which various settings are made not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-described lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and settings are made in the setting area to indicate that the normal figure is being displayed in a stopped state. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 116(d)) or the losing symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 116(d)). Perform display. Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 m seconds), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of a timer for managing stop time provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the regular symbol variation game is notified to the player.

Further, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a hit, the normal pattern hit flag is turned on as described later. When this ordinary figure per flag is on, in the ordinary figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 is In addition to setting the normal figure operating state in the setting area, the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 is set to open the blade member 232a for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). At the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of a timer for managing the blade opening time provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the closed state is output to the opening/closing drive solenoid (332) of the blade member 232a, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the general figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general figure inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal pattern fluctuation game is a loss, the normal pattern loss flag is turned on as described later. If this general figure loss flag is on, even in the general figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set the normal pattern inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the ordinary figure state update process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the routine moves to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, a common map related lottery process is performed. In this general pattern related lottery process, the opening/closing control of the general pattern fluctuation game and the second special pattern starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general pattern is inactive), and the pending general pattern fluctuation game is not controlled. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general pattern fluctuation game is a win or a non-win by a random number lottery based on the general pattern winning random number stored in the random number storage area mentioned above. A winning flag is set in the RAM 308 if the winning is determined. In case of non-winning, the winning flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a random value of the general figure timer, and based on the acquired random value of the general figure timer, the general figure display device 210 selects a normal figure from among a plurality of variable times. One time during which a figure is displayed in a variable manner is selected, and this variable display time is stored as a general figure variable display time in a general figure variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. The number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored in the storage area for the number of normal pattern fluctuations provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit is determined, the number of pending normal pattern fluctuation games is stored. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this ordinary figure reservation number storage area. It also erases the random numbers used for hit determination.

Subsequently, special figure pre-reading processing (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased starting information for each of the special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, pre-determines the stop symbols and variation time before the validity determination process, and performs the preliminary determination. The result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the RAM 308.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed depending on the state of the special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 2 display device 214 turns on and off. Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a loss flag, a special symbol probability variation flag, and a regular symbol probability variation flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, is special symbol A shown in Figure 116(b), special symbol B when the 2R jackpot flag is on, special symbol C when the loss flag is on, and special symbol when the common symbol probability fluctuation flag is on. The lighting/extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is performed so that each mode of D is achieved, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 displays a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a loss symbol (special symbol C), and a time-saving symbol (special symbol D). A final display of one of the symbols is performed.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time savings stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings, and if the result of the subtraction is from 1 to 0, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol that stops the fluctuating display is special figure 2. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is present in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 settings To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing special figure 2 standby time provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning performance period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). It outputs a signal to keep the member 234a open, and also sets information indicating the opening period in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (a part of the various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

Furthermore, in the special pattern 2 state update process in the final round of the jackpot with variable probability (10 rounds for special pattern A, 2 rounds for special pattern B), the V shutter is activated for a predetermined opening period (for example, 10 seconds). A signal for holding the V shutter VS in the open state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the VS (a part of the various solenoids 332), and an open period is stored in the storage area of the V shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information to be displayed. Then, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening/closing the V-shutter VS ( A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in a closed state is output to some of the various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, data is stored in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and won a winning prize (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)). Information indicating the V winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 2 standby time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag will not be turned on.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member 234a a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round excluding the first time) and starts at the timing when the opening/closing control of the door member 234a ends, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds ) In other words, in order to set the decorative symbol display device 208 to wait for the period in which the image notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed, the effect is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the waiting period.

In addition, if the 10R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (120 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. Even when the 2R jackpot flag is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the time saving number (120 times) is set in the time saving number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal pattern probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of time reductions (950 times) is set in the time reduction number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is turned on.

The time saving mentioned here means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player because the time from ending the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation game to starting the next jackpot is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to on, the state is in a high probability state (probability variation). In the high probability state of common symbols, the probability of winning in the common symbol fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state of common symbols. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation game is shorter in the normal pattern high probability state than in the normal pattern low probability state (normal pattern variable short). Furthermore, in the regular figure high probability state, compared to the regular figure low probability state, the opening time for one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer (electric chew spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the high-probability state of a common figure than in the low-probability state of a common figure. The state in which any of these ``Fuzu definite change'', ``Furuzu change shortness'', and ``Electric tulip expansion'' is set is called the ``den support'' (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the jackpot game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the normal pattern low probability state is maintained. This means that if the regular game ball is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a predetermined number of game balls will enter the variable prize opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many game balls will enter the special pattern 2 starting hole 232 during the jackpot game. This is intended to solve the problem that there is a case where the number of game balls that can be acquired during a jackpot is increased and the game becomes more gambling.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 inoperable setting area of the RAM 308 is Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special map 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) regarding the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 1.

For example, in the special figure 1 state update process during the special figure 1 variable display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED that constitutes the special figure 1 display device 212 turns on and off. Performs lighting/extinguishing drive control that repeats. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a loss flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbols in the special drawing 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, if the 3R jackpot flag A is on 116(a), special map b is displayed when the 3R jackpot flag B is on, and special map c is displayed when the loss flag is on. The 7-segment LED constituting the device 212 is controlled to turn on and off, and a setting is made in the setting area of the RAM 308 to indicate that the special figure 1 is being stopped and displayed. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 determines one of the following: 3R sure-change jackpot symbol (special symbol a), 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), or loss symbol (special symbol c). Perform display.

Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed special figure 1 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of time savings stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings, and if the result of the subtraction is from 1 to 0, the time saving flag is turned off. . Furthermore, the time saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (during a special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the symbol for which the fluctuation display is to be stopped is special figure 1. The process ends after additionally storing special figure 1 identification information indicating that there is a special figure 1 identification information in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

Further, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 settings To set the special figure 1 in operation in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image notifying the player that a jackpot will start. Then, information indicating the winning performance period is set in the storage area of the timer for managing special figure 1 standby time provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined prize-winning performance period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening opening setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

In addition, in the special map 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for keeping the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening/closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of the various solenoids 332), and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is output. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. Further, in the command setting sending process (step S233), predetermined sending information indicating that the big prize opening closing setting sending process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned sending information storage area.

Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, in the special figure 1 state update process in the final round (3rd round), the solenoid for opening/closing the V shutter VS (for example, 10 seconds) is A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in an open state is output to some of the various solenoids 332), and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a V-shutter open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Then, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the solenoid for opening/closing the V-shutter VS ( A signal for holding the V-shutter VS in a closed state is output to some of the various solenoids 332). Further, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on. In addition, data is stored in the RAM 308 in order to wait for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the V passage switch VC and won a winning prize (V winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds)). Information indicating the V winning performance period is set in the storage area of the provided special figure 1 standby time management timer. Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VC, the special figure probability fluctuation flag will not be turned on.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that repeats the opening/closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first round) and starts at the timing when it is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative pattern display device 208, information indicating the performance standby period is stored in the storage area of the performance standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set the player to wait for the period during which the image informing the player of the end of the jackpot is displayed. Set. In addition, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (120 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver number (120 times) provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on flag. Even when the 3R jackpot flag B is set to ON, at the same time as this jackpot game ends, the number of time savers (50 times) is set in the time saver number storage section provided in the RAM 308, and the time saver number (50 times) provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on flag. In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process, the regular figure probability fluctuation flag is never set to on.

Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 1 non-operation is stored in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a loss, a loss flag is turned on. If this deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Set special figure 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special figure 1 state update process when the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

When the special figure status update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Also here, the special drawing related lottery process for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related drawing processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special drawing related drawing processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) is performed (step S229). ) is performed (step S231). The special drawing 2-related lottery process is for the special drawing 2 in which the variable game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, the status of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive, and the special drawing 2 is on hold. The starting condition is that the number of variable games is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The special drawing 1 related lottery process is for special drawing 1 where the variable game of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is not being performed, the status of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 is both inactive, and special drawing 1 is on hold. The starting condition is that the number of variable games is 1 or more, and the game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start conditions of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the start conditions for the games are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game starts to fluctuate first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game regarding the reservation of the special figure 1 variable game are not performed. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 notifies the result of the judgment of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting hole 232. , is given priority over the notification of the lottery result based on winnings in the special drawing 1 starting slot 230. In this exemplary embodiment, a special pattern variable game with a high degree of advantage (in this example, the special pattern 2 variable game) is played with priority over a special pattern variable game with a low degree of advantage (in this example, the special pattern 1 variable game). For this reason, it may become easier to create a difference in the advantageousness of the gaming states.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most past stored) pending position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Figure 2 (a set of winning random numbers and special drawing 2 random numbers) is obtained, and based on the special drawing 2 winning random number in the obtained special drawing 2 starting information, etc., using the validity judgment table stored in the ROM 306. A decision is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a miss (judgment of validity). In addition, in determining whether the special drawing 1 is correct or not, it is determined whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Next, the main control unit 300 selects the special figure 2 using the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 starting information and the determined validity judgment result. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the results in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined result of the determination, the stopped symbol, the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of determination of the validity, the acquired random value for determining the special symbol fluctuation time, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random number storage area, and Subtract 1 from the special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area in FIG. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information taken out from the special figure 2 random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision is made based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You can do it like this.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. In addition, the order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special pattern 2 variable game with a high advantage is started with priority over the special pattern 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the reservation of special pattern 2 is prioritized and consumed over the reservation of special pattern 1. As an example, the special pattern 2 priority fluctuation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special pattern 2 fluctuation game with a high advantage, and the reservation of special pattern 1 is changed to the special pattern 2 fluctuation game. It may be a special figure 1 priority variation that is consumed with priority over reservation. In addition, without prioritizing either the highly advantageous special pattern 2 variable game or the low advantageous special pattern 1 variable game, the special pattern variable game related to the reservation of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 will be entered into the starting opening prize. It may also be a starting opening winning order variation that starts sequentially. In the starting opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of special map 1 and special map 2, so compare with priority fluctuation where the upper limit number of reservations is 4 for each of special map 1 and special map 2. In some cases, it may be possible to raise the upper limit on the number of reservations.

In addition, in the above explanation, it is assumed that the lottery process or variable game regarding the suspension of the other special figure is not performed depending on the state of one special figure, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure status update A plurality of special symbols may be changed at the same time by performing processing and special symbol related lottery processing independently for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. In addition, in the case where a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special symbol, or the lottery results of each special symbol are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the respective lottery results separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special symbols are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, where bit 15 is strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), and bits 11 to 14 are strobe information. Command types (in this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information command, Bits 0 to 10 consist of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol fluctuation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, timer numbers selected in special drawing related lottery processing, etc., and symbol fluctuation stop (rotation start) command is included. In the case of a command (rotation stop), it includes the values of various jackpot flags and loss flags, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, it includes the number of jackpot rounds. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence or absence of a prize in the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in the variable winning opening 234, etc. including. In the case of a prefetch result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage section. In the case of a setting command, it includes setting information, etc.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small hit flags, and loss flags stored in the RAM 308, selected in the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process. Information indicating the timer number, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information stored in the RAM 308 indicating the values of various jackpot flags, loss flags, etc. is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figures that are on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure that is on hold. Information indicating the number of 1 variable game or special figure 2 variable game, etc. is set. In the above-described big winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described big winning opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data.

Further, in this step S233, a general command special figure reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase process, the command data includes special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, advance notice information (advance notice information, fake Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower tray full error is included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. , the special figure 2 display device 214, the display data to be output to the various status display sections 328, etc., are set to the output port of the I/O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process moves to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 117 is performed. to return to. On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, it becomes HALT state.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained. FIG. 119(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of FIG. 119(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300 or not.

In step S309 following step S307, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and according to the detection result, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190. Perform the process to change to .

In step S313 following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command for the various lamps 442, 452 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game platform frame lamp drive circuit 450. do.

In step S317 following step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command to the performance devices 2 to 4 in the performance data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, settings are made to output this control command. After that, the process returns to step S303.

FIG. 119(b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 119(c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 explained in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S343 following step S341, the control command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing for updating the random value for effect is performed. etc.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 120(a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of FIG. 120(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), etc. are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 or not.

In step S409 following step S407, production control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If necessary, the performance data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 120(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 120(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S443 following step S441, other processes such as updating the random number value for effect are performed.

FIG. 120(d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S451, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the frame buffer that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. VDP 516 transfers image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453 following step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process advances to step S455. If not (step S453: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S451, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457 following step S455, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S459 following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), The process advances to step S461, and if not (step S459: No), the process waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. Here, FIG. 121(A) is a diagram showing an example of a specific configuration of the accessory ratio/setting display 196, and FIG. 121(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198. It is.

As described above, the accessory ratio/setting display 196 is configured to include the accessory ratio monitor and the setting monitor, and the accessory ratio monitor is configured to display the continuous accessory ratio (RY) and the accessory ratio (RY). YH) is displayed, and the setting monitor is displaying the current setting value.

Here, the continuous accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) to be acquired that is due to the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously (i.e., the variable winnings during the jackpot game) It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls won by winning into the variable winning a prize opening 234 to the number of out balls. In addition, the accessory ratio refers to the number of game balls (i.e., safe balls) that are obtained due to the operation of the accessory (i.e., the number of winnings due to the opening of the second special figure start opening 232 and the variable prize winning opening 234). This refers to the percentage of game balls (number of game balls acquired).

In this embodiment, as a result of calculating the continuous accessory ratio, if it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the continuous accessory ratio is displayed blinking, and then A security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. Note that the signal may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly conduct the type application test for gaming machines.

In addition, as a result of calculating the accessory ratio, if it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, the 2-digit 7-segment LED that displays the accessory ratio will be displayed blinking, and then the security signal (YH ) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED is made to blink, but for example, the emitted light color may be changed. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 121(B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch can be read and the appearance probability of the effect can be changed. You can set the appearance rate, entry rate of production mode, etc.

Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112 will be explained, although some parts overlap with what has been explained so far.

FIG. 122(a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the gaming status after the jackpot game.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112, when setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in FIG. The probability of hitting the jackpot with high probability is 1/91. When setting 2 is selected, the probability of hitting the jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/315, and the probability of hitting a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/90. When setting 3 is selected, the probability of jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/310, and the probability of a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/88. When setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with the special pattern low probability is 1/305, and the jackpot probability with the special pattern high probability is 1/87. When setting 5 is selected, the probability of hitting the jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/300, and the probability of hitting a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the probability of jackpot with a low probability of a special symbol is 1/295, and the probability of a jackpot with a high probability of a special symbol is 1/84. The higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

Further, the probability of winning a common figure with a low probability of a common figure is 1/100, whereas the probability of winning a common figure with a high probability of a common figure is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 122(a), in special map 1, the breakdown of special map a and special map b is equal (50% each), and in special map 2, the breakdown of special map A and special map B is equal. is 7:3.

In addition, in the special figure a of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS opens only in the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passing switch VC. When the game ball passes through this V passage switch VC (when the probability variable operation region is ON), it becomes a probability variable, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, This state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the variable probability operation area is OFF), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state will be , is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times.

In the special figure b of the special figure 1, the V shutter VS does not open even in the third and final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass the V passing switch VC. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special pattern is performed 50 times.

In the special figure A of the special figure 2, the V shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. In special figure B, the V shutter VS opens only in the second round, which is the final round, and the game ball can pass through the V passage switch VC. Regardless of whether it is special pattern A or special pattern B, if the game ball passes through the V passing switch VC (when the probability variable operation region is ON), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be special pattern high probability normal pattern. A high probability state is entered, and this state is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC (when the variable probability operation area is OFF), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and this state will be , is maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 120 times.

In addition, after the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state or the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state is maintained a predetermined number of times, it shifts to the normal state (special pattern low probability general pattern low probability state). The time saving that starts after the jackpot game is called a time saving.

FIG. 122(b) is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112.

In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is recommended to fire the game ball toward the left side area of the game area in order to aim at the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In other words, in the special pattern low probability normal pattern low probability state, even if the ball enters the normal pattern starting hole 228, there is almost no chance of winning the normal pattern fluctuation game, and the player should not play right-handed. The ball should be fired toward the left side (hitting the ball left-handed). Note that the normal state refers to a non-time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state such as the special pattern low probability general pattern high probability state or the special pattern high probability general pattern high probability state, it is easy to win the general pattern fluctuation game, so in order to aim for the general pattern starting opening 228, It is recommended to fire the game ball toward the right side area where the normal figure starting port 228 is provided. In other words, as shown in the breakdown in Figure 122(a), the probability of winning a jackpot (special pattern a) with a probability variation in special drawing 1 is 50%, while in special drawing 2 there is a probability of winning a jackpot with a probability variation. The probability of winning the jackpot is 100%. Further, the number of times the time-saving game state is maintained after the jackpot game is 50 times in special figure 1, but always 120 times in special figure 2. Therefore, since it is easier for the player to obtain a jackpot that is advantageous for the player with special drawing 2 than with special drawing 1, the player should aim for a jackpot with special drawing 2 by placing the prize into the second special drawing opening 232. . Therefore, the player should shoot the game ball toward the right area (hit the ball to the right).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot game, in order to aim at the variable winning opening 234, the game ball is fired (hitting to the right) toward the right area of the gaming area where the variable winning opening 234 is provided. Become. FIG. 122(b) shows that after the end of the jackpot game, there are cases where the time-saving game state is maintained 120 times and cases where it is maintained 50 times.

In addition, in FIG. 122(b), when the special pattern does not hit even once while the symbol variation display of the special pattern is performed 950 times in the special pattern low probability state (time-saving gaming state, non-time-saving gaming state), In other words, if the special symbol loses 950 times in a row, the time-saving gaming state will be maintained while the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed 1100 times. The period in which the time-saving gaming state is maintained as a result of a predetermined series of special figure losses is called play time, and this time-saving is called b-time saving. b The time-saving game state can be shifted only once after the power is turned on and before the first hit, and once the jackpot has been hit, the shift can only be made once before the next jackpot is hit. Therefore, if the special figure is lost 950 times in a row in the b time-saving game state, there is no new transition to the b time-saving game state, the previous b time-saving game state is continued, and the 1100 times the special figure is lost. If it continues, the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state). Note that the count of the number of consecutive losses, which is a condition for transitioning to the time-saving gaming state b, also includes the number of consecutive losses in the time-saving gaming state a and the time-saving gaming state c, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b), the time-saving symbols may be stopped and displayed only in the symbol variation display of special symbol 2. The time-saving game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed is called c-time saving. This time-saving symbol is used to hold the remaining Tokuzu 2 (hereinafter referred to as "Special 2 remaining") at the end of the time-saving gaming state (Tokuzu high probability regular symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability regular symbol high probability state). In the symbol variation display of special drawing 2, which is performed as a result of the symbol (sometimes referred to as "pending") being consumed in a non-time saving gaming state, c time saving may be won. c If the time-saving symbol is won, the time-saving symbol will be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 114), and the decorative symbol display device 208 will display the "decoration 11" (time-saving decorative symbol) shown in FIG. 116(c). ) will be stopped and displayed in a row. Then, while the special pattern symbol variation display is performed 950 times, the time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state) is maintained. In other words, the game shifts to the c time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game. The probability of winning a sudden time reduction is 1/90. In addition, when the time-saving game state that started after the jackpot game ends, the special figure 2 remaining is on hold, and when the 950th special figure loss starts in a row, the special figure 2 when the time-saving game state ends. In addition to the remaining reservation, there is a possibility that the player suddenly wins the time saving again when the special drawing 2 balance is reserved at the time when the time saving game state that was started after suddenly winning the time saving game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol may be won even in the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability general pattern high probability state, and the b time saving game state. In this case as well, the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 114). However, on the decorative pattern display device 208, three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. 116(c) are not displayed in a stopped state in a row, but a random number is displayed in a stopped state to notify a loss. . In this embodiment, in order to give priority to the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the time saving gaming state b over the c time saving gaming state, the second special pattern display device 214 Even if the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving symbol is invalidated and the time-saving game state (c) will not be entered.

Furthermore, if you hit right in the non-time saving game state and win the regular pattern fluctuation game with a probability of 1/100 and win the second special pattern starting opening 232 (Electric Chew), you can also win c time saving. There is a transition to c time-saving gaming state without being invalidated. In other words, not only the remaining special figure 2 pending, but even a new special figure 2 pending may be shifted to the c time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special symbol start opening 232 (electric chew) in the non-time-saving gaming state. For example, even if a game ball enters the normal pattern starting hole 228, the general pattern fluctuation game may not be won, or even if the general pattern fluctuation game is won, the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be changed. It is also possible to use an open pattern in which it is extremely difficult (impossible) to win the second special figure starting opening 232 (electronic chew).

In addition, the condition for transition to the time-saving gaming state b is satisfied by all losses in the c-time-saving gaming state (950 consecutive special drawing losses), and the transition from the c-time-saving gaming state to the b-time-saving gaming state is satisfied. In some cases.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 even in the special symbol high probability regular symbol high probability state, the special symbol low probability regular symbol high probability state, and the b time-saving game state. But it may stop appearing. In other words, except for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 in the non-time-saving gaming state, it may not be displayed in a stopped state.

Next, a specific example of how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112 will be described.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which the time-saving game state ends a little before the time-saving game state ends and shifts to a non-time-saving game state.

Each figure shown in FIG. 123 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving medium lamp TL, a right-hand hit display lamp RL, and a high-accuracy medium lamp HL. For each lamp, the lit state is represented by black, and the unlit state is represented by white (this is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 133). Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a) is provided with a fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) and also informing the number of reservations, and the upper left area displays the number of reservations of special symbol 1. An area is provided, and an area for displaying the number of reserved special drawings 2 is provided at the lower left. Further, in the upper right corner, a notification area for the special symbol 1 during symbol fluctuation is provided, and in the lower right corner, a notification region for the special symbol 2 during symbol fluctuation is provided. It should be noted that a notification area during symbol change for common symbols and a display area for the number of pending symbols for common symbols may be further provided. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 1 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 is matched with the reserved number indicated by the special figure 1 reserved lamp 220. It is consistent with the number of reservations indicated by . In addition, in the symbol change notification area of special figure 1, while the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, if it is a jackpot, it will be stopped and displayed as "○", and if it is a loss, it will be displayed as "x". Stop display. In addition, while the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner, the "-" display may blink, and it may be possible to recognize that the special pattern 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 2 is also the same as the display in the display area during symbol fluctuation of special figure 1, and this display mode corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display and stop display of special figure 2. changes. In addition, by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol, and changing the display mode of the numerical value displayed in the pending number display area, you can receive a preview notice and a notice regarding the symbol change display in progress. You may go. The fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 described above is the same up to the example shown in FIG. 133.

In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a) displays a combination of decorative patterns "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Furthermore, a mini symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the decorative symbol displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d. In the variation icon display area 280, a variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation currently being performed is displayed. In FIG. 123(a), since the symbol variation display of the special symbol has ended, the variation icon disappears and is not displayed.

The control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 123(a) is a time-saving gaming state. More specifically, it is a state of low probability of special symbols and high probability of regular symbols. The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 123(a) is on, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL is off. Further, as explained using FIG. 122(b), right-handed hitting is recommended in the time-saving gaming state, and the right-handed hitting display lamp RL shown in FIG. 123(a) is also lit. In addition, on the left side of the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a), a right-handed first display RH1 is displayed to encourage right-handed batting. This right-handed first display RH1 is a display that continues to be displayed even after the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends during the time-saving game state, and continues to be displayed even when the demo screen is shifted. Note that the right-handed hitting display lamp RL also continues to light up even after the transition to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in FIG. 123(a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) in which the jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the V passage switch VC (time-saving game state a), or a special figure loss continues 950 times. This is the time-saving gaming state (b-time-saving gaming state) that has started. The background of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a) is the background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state. Further, the state shown in FIG. 123(a) is a state in which the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state if the symbol variation display of the special symbol is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(a), the characters "4 remaining" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining number display indicating that the time-saving game state will continue only 4 times remaining. In addition, the time-saving game state (a-time-saving game state) is started after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state is started after 950 consecutive special drawing losses (b-time-saving game state), and the time-saving game state is started after suddenly winning a time-saving game. Depending on the time-saving game state (c-time-saving game state), the background on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different, and the display mode of the time-saving game state remaining count display may also be different. Also, the background in the decorative pattern display device 208 may be different between the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state and the special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state, and the display mode of the remaining number of time saving game state display may also be different. Good too.

In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the time-saving gaming state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2 is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the special figure 2 hold icon display area 282, a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of reservations of the special figure 2 is expressed by the number of reservation icons of the special figure 2 in addition to the number of lit special figure 2 reservation lamps 220 and the numerical value shown in the number display area of the reservation number of the special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the startup information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information as a second hold icon, etc. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2, hold icons are displayed side by side, and hold icons closer to the variable icon display area 280 (hold icons on the right side) have older winnings.

In FIG. 123(a), three special drawing 2 holding icons h21, h22, h23 are displayed in the special drawing 2 holding icon display area 282, and these three special drawing 2 holding icons h11, h12, h23 are all displayed in a default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, patternless, and white display mode. On the drawing, white is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the left. The pending icon indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the pre-read preview depending on the display mode. That is, it suggests the degree of expectation of hitting the jackpot in the symbol variation display that is performed after the reservation represented by the reservation icon is exhausted. The default display mode suggests that the jackpot expectation is 5%. Note that it may be suggested that the jackpot expectation level is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the first place. In the following description, if the display mode is the default display mode, the explanation to that effect may be omitted.

In addition, in FIG. 123(a), in order to make it easier to understand that four pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of special drawing 2, pending icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines. .

In FIG. 123(b), the symbol variation display of special figure 2 has started. That is, in this figure, the symbol variation in the second special symbol display device 214 (see FIG. 114) (not shown) is started, the variation display of the fourth symbol and the mini symbol is also started, the movement of the pending icon is finished, and the decoration Variable display of symbols has also started. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted to the right by one position, and the hold icon h21, which was the first hold icon until then, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (round, patternless, white display mode). In addition, the remaining number of time-saving game states displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has been decreased by one to show "3 remaining".

Furthermore, when the symbol variation display of the special figure starts, a music selection display MC that allows you to select the music to be output from the speaker 120 starts to be displayed above the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. Ru. In the song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(b), the song title "Song 1" is displayed, and here, the song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 (not shown). This music output will be explained in detail from FIG. 128 onwards.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(c), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 3 - decoration 5 - decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "358". Note that the music selection display MC temporarily disappears each time the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and is restarted each time the variable display of the decorative symbols starts.

In FIG. 123(d), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 1, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted one place to the right, and only one hold icon h21 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. In addition, the remaining number of time-saving game states displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has been decreased by one to show "2 remaining".

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(e), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 8 - decoration 1 - decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is displayed as an "x", and the mini symbol is also displayed as a combination of "814".

In FIG. 123(f), the symbol fluctuation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has started, and the decorative symbols are fluctuatingly displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one to the right side, and no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2, and the hold number is 0. Further, the hold icon h21 in the default display mode, which had been the first hold icon until then, is displayed as a variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 123(f) has a red display mode that is different from the default display mode. On the drawing, red is represented by diagonal cross hatching. The variation icon h0 in the red display mode indicates that the expectation of hitting the jackpot in the symbol variation display currently being performed is 50%, and a so-called normal notice is being executed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed, and next to it is "", which indicates that it is the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state. "LAST" is displayed. Although the remaining number of time-saving game states displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has disappeared and is not displayed, it may be displayed as "1 remaining". Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(f), a second right-handed display RH2 that encourages right-handed hitting, which is different from the right-handed first display RH1, has started to be displayed. In the right-handed second display RH2, it is written in a right-pointing arrow figure that the reserved special symbol 2 should be stored aiming at the second special symbol start opening 232 (electric chew). This is a notification that recommends that you acquire the special map 2 remaining reservation that will lead to a sudden winning in a short time. At the stage of FIG. 123(f), the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0, but even if the reserved number of special symbols 2 is full (4 pieces), the right-handed second display RH2 is displayed. Further, from the speaker 120, a right-hand hitting notification (audio output of "Play right and save") is started to urge the player to hit right and save the reservation for the special map 2. Additionally, music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120. Note that while the right-handed hitting notification sound is being output, the output sound of music 1 may be lowered, or music 1 may be completely muted. Whether it is right-handed notification by the right-handed second display RH2 or right-handed notification from the speaker 120, execution is started when the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is started. . In addition, the display start timing of the right-handed second display RH2 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variable display of the last special symbol, or the variable display of the decorative pattern may be started. The timing may be later. Further, the start timing of the right hit notification from the speaker 120 may be the same as the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern variable display of the last special symbol, or the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be started. The timing may be after the display of decorative symbols starts, or the timing may be after the start of the symbol variation in the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 114) (not shown) and before the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. good.

In FIG. 123(g), there are two winnings in the second special figure start opening 232, the number of reserved special figures 2 increases by two, and the number display area of the reserved number of special figures 2 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is displayed. The indicated numerical value is 2, and two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2.

In FIG. 123(h), the player has entered the ready-to-reach state in the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, there is one more prize win in the second special figure start opening 232, and the number of reserved special figures 2 increases by one, and the number shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 3. , and the third pending icon h23 is also displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, although the reach state has entered the reach state in FIG. The losing decorative pattern combination of "4" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "434". Further, at the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(i), the word "end" is displayed, indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has ended. . When the symbol variation display of the last special symbol is completed, the right-handed first display RH1 and the right-handed second display RH2 that have been displayed until then disappear and are not displayed. Furthermore, the right-handed hit notification that had been output from the speaker 120 has also ended. Note that these end timings may be at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, or may be after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Alternatively, the timing may be after the end of the fluctuating display of the last special pattern and before the fluctuating display of the decorative design, or the timing before the end of the fluctuating display of the last special design. Good too. The special map number 2 has finally accumulated up to 4 and has reached full capacity. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 shown in FIG. 123(i) is 4, and the fourth reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of special figure 2. h24 is also displayed.

In addition, in response to the accumulation of 4 reservations for special drawing 2, the second right-handed display RH2 is hidden (deleted), and the display indicating that 4 reservations for special drawing 2 have been accumulated ( For example, it may be possible to display text indicating that the tank is full or displaying text indicating that the tank is ready. In this case, if four reservations of special drawing 2 are not accumulated by the end of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, the right-handed second display RH2 will be hidden according to the end of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. You can do this (delete it).

In FIG. 123(j), the time-saving gaming state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state). The time-saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 123(j) is off, and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL is also off. When shifting from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, if there are any special drawings 2 left on hold, the special drawings 2 remaining holding is preferentially cleared because it is a special drawing 2 priority changing machine. As mentioned above, the time-saving symbol shown in FIG. 116(c) may be stopped and displayed only when the special symbol 2 symbol variation display is performed as a result of the special symbol 2 remaining reservation being used up in the non-time-saving gaming state. . During the period in which the special symbol 2 symbol fluctuation display is performed as a result of the special symbol 2 remaining reservation being used up in the non-time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "pullback period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is It becomes a special background. In this example, an animation of the main character, the lord, running is displayed, and the words ``One shot reversal'' are displayed.

In addition, during the pullback period, the remaining reservations for special drawings 2 are exhausted, so in order to more clearly inform you how many reserved special drawings 2 remain, the holding icon display area 282 for special drawings 2 is in the time-saving gaming state. It has been displayed continuously since. In addition, the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 may be displayed together, or the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 may not be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(j), variable display of decorative patterns has started, and three pending icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2. In addition, the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is also 3, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, as explained using FIG. 122(b), left-handed hitting is recommended in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the right-handed hitting display lamp RL shown in FIG. 123(j) is also turned off, and the decoration shown in FIG. 123(j) is turned off. The right-handed first display RH1 is also not displayed on the symbol display device 208. However, during the pullback period, even though the game is in a non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed hitting notification that encourages left-handed hitting is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 123(j), even if the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state, the left-handed hitting notification is not executed during the pullback period. In FIG. 123(k), the player continues to hit to the right, and the game ball is fired toward the right side area of the game area 124. The same applies if you change from right-handed to left-handed, but end up switching to right-handed due to excess momentum. In the non-time-saving gaming state, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 provided in the right side area, a left-handed hit notification (left-handed second display LH2) is executed (Fig. 124(m), etc.). In FIG. 123(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, but the left-handed hit notification is not executed. This is because, as explained using Fig. 116(a), special drawing 1 does not have a time-saving symbol, and even if you hit left-handed, you will not be able to suddenly acquire time-saving. Not recommended. However, even if you play right-handed, it is extremely rare for you to win a regular game and enter the special pattern 2 starting slot 232, so right-handed hitting is also not recommended. After all, it is a good idea not to shoot the game ball during this pullback period.

Note that even during the recovery display when a power outage occurs during the pullback period and the power is restored, the left-handed hit notification is not performed. Further, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 during this recovery, the left-handed hit notification is not executed. On the other hand, when a power outage occurs in a non-time-saving gaming state that is not a pull-back period, and during the recovery display when the power is restored, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228, a left-handed hit notification is executed. . Note that the left-handed hitting notification during this recovery display may be similar to the left-handed hitting notification described later in FIG. Alternatively, the notification may be just a left-handed hitting notification sound. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(m), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and the winning combination was not suddenly won. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed as a combination of "541".

In FIG. 123(n), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the display of "-" has started blinking. In this figure 123(n), the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is reduced by one, and the numerical value shown in the holding number display area of special drawing 2 in the fourth symbol/holding number display area 284 becomes 2, and the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is reduced by one. Two pending icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of .

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(o), the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 2 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and here too, the winning combination of time saving was not suddenly achieved. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "245".

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 123 in a step-by-step manner.

In FIG. 124(a) continuing from FIG. 123(o), the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 has started, and the decorative symbols are being variably displayed. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the display of "-" has started blinking. In this FIG. 124(a), the number of special symbols 2 remaining reserved is reduced by one again, and the numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of special symbols 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the special symbol 2 remaining reserved number becomes 1. Only one pending icon h21 is displayed in the second pending icon display area 282.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(b), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 1 - Decoration 9 - Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and here too, the time saving was not won suddenly. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "195".

In FIG. 124(c), the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 remaining reservation has started, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The 4th symbol of special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 starts blinking "-", the numerical value shown in the reserve number display area of special figure 2 becomes 0, and the number of special figure 2 is reserved. No pending icon is displayed in the icon display area 282.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(d), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 2 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the end, in this example, the winning of the time saving was not suddenly achieved. Ta. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in a combination of "261". The pullback period ends at this point in FIG. 124(d). In this example, the pullback period is the period shown in FIG. 123(j) to FIG. 124(d). It should be noted that the pullback period is a period whose length varies depending on the number of special symbols 2 remaining on hold and the time length of the symbol variation display of the special symbol once.

In FIG. 124(e), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed because the pullback period has ended. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(e) displays a background (white background with no pattern) representing a non-time-saving gaming state. Moreover, since the pullback period has ended, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Further, when the pull-back period ends, a left-handed hitting first display LH1 that encourages left-handed hitting is displayed over the left-handed hitting notification period. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(e), a left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the variable display of the decorative pattern. The display mode of this first left-handed player display LH1 is a display mode in which the characters "left-handed player" are written in a figure that is a deformed left-pointing arrow. Further, the speaker 120 has also started a left-handed hitting notification (audio output of "Please hit left-handed") to encourage left-handed hitting. In FIG. 124(e), the display of the pending symbol of the remaining special figure 1 is started, and the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284, the display of "-" starts blinking, and the numerical value shown in the reservation number display area of the special figure 1 is 0. In addition, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the newly displayed special drawing 1.

The player looks at the left-handed first display LH1, starts left-handed, and aims at the special figure 1 starting opening 230. In FIG. 124(f), the number of reservations for special drawing 1 increases by two, the number shown in the reservation number display area for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 becomes 2, and the reservation icon for special drawing 1 is displayed. Two pending icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the area 281.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(g), the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is displayed as an "x", and the mini symbol is also displayed as a combination of "923". In addition, the number of reservations for special figure 1 increases by one more, the number shown in the number of reservations display area for special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 becomes 3, and the number of reservations for special figure 1 in the reservation icon display area 281 becomes 3. A third hold icon h13 is also displayed.

In FIG. 124(h), the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 has started, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 2, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one to the left, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1. Even if the symbol variation display of the new special figure 1 is started, the left-handed first display LH1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(i) The left-handed player's first display LH1 has disappeared and is no longer displayed. The left-handed notification period that starts when the pullback period ends is a predetermined period with a predetermined time length, and depending on the length of the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol, it may end within one symbol fluctuation display. For example, it may be displayed across multiple symbol fluctuation displays. In addition, the left-handed hit notification period may end with a predetermined number of symbol fluctuation displays (for example, once), or end when a predetermined number of special symbols 1 are reserved (for example, one or four). You may also do so. In such a case, the left-handed hit notification period will be an irregular period.

Note that if a power outage occurs during the left-handed hitting notification period and the power is restored, the left-handed hitting first display LH1 continues to be executed. Further, the left-handed hitting notification during the left-handed hitting notification period may be performed only by the left-handed hitting first display LH1, or may be performed only by the left-handed hitting notification from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 124(i), the number of reservations for special drawing 1 increases by two more, the number shown in the number display area for special drawing 1 in the fourth symbol/reservation number display area 284 becomes 4, and the reservation icon for special drawing 1 Four pending icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the display area 281.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(j), the losing decorative pattern combination of "decoration 7 - decoration 2 - decoration 9" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as an "x", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed as a combination of "729".

In FIG. 124(k), the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started again, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. The numerical value shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 3, and the display of "-" has started blinking in the fourth symbol of the special figure 1. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one to the left, and three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1.

In FIG. 124(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228. That is, right-handed hitting is detected. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a second left-handed display LH2 that urges the player to play left-handed. This second left-handed player display LH2 is a display in a different display mode from the first left-handed player display LH1, and is a text display such as "Please return to left-handed player." The left-handed second display LH2 is displayed for a certain period of time every time a right-handed hit is detected. Note that while this second left-handed batting display LH2 is displayed, a left-handed batting notification (for example, please return to left-handed batting) may be issued from the speaker 120.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124(n), the left-handed second display LH2 disappears, the number of reserved special symbols 1 increases again, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. The numerical value shown in the area is 4, and four pending icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1. In addition, the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol of special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed as "x" in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284. At the same time, the mini symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of "924".

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which the length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 124. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 124 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 124, the number of special symbols 2 remaining on hold is four, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 125, the number of special symbols 2 remaining on hold is only one. That is, in FIG. 125(f), when the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 starts with 0, and the last special pattern 2 symbol fluctuation display that can maintain the time-saving gaming state, a prize is won only once in the special pattern 2 starting port 232. I didn't. As a result, as shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(i) where the symbol variation display of the last special figure has ended The numerical value is 1, and only one pending icon h21 is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 125(j), the time-saving gaming state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state). In FIG. 125(j), the symbol variation display of the only one special figure 2 remaining pending is immediately started, and the decorative symbols are being varied and displayed. That is, the pullback period has started. Even during this pullback period, a right-handed hit is detected (Figure 125(k)), but the left-handed second display LH2 is not executed (Figure 125(l)), and eventually the symbol fluctuation of special symbol 2 remaining pending. After the display ends, the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 125(m). In this example as well, I did not suddenly win the short-time award. The pullback period ends at this point in FIG. 125(m). The pullback period in this example is the period shown in FIGS. 125(j) to 125(m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 124. However, if the period length of the symbol variation display of only one special symbol 2 remaining pending is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 124. Furthermore, even if the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is two or three, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period in the example shown in Figure 124, or shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in Figure 125. There may also be a pullback period.

In the example shown in FIG. 125, when the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the background representing the non-time-saving gaming state (white background with no pattern), as shown in FIG. 125 (n). are doing. Moreover, since the pullback period has ended, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, since the pullback period has ended, the display of the left-handed hit first display LH1 has started. Further, the speaker 120 has also started a left-handed hitting notification (audio output of "Please hit left-handed") to encourage left-handed hitting. In Figure 125 (n), the display of the pending symbol of the remaining special drawing 1 has started, and the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols has also started, and in the same diagram (o), the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols continues. are doing.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 125 in a step-by-step manner.

In FIG. 126(a), which continues from FIG. 125(o), the pullback period ends and the symbol variation display of the first special figure 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3". ” The winning decorative pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state. In this example, from the start of the symbol variation display of special pattern 1 (display of the left-handed first display LH1) to the end of the symbol variation display, a winning entry is made to the special pattern 1 starting port 230. I didn't have one, and I couldn't save up the reservation for special map 1. Therefore, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is not started immediately following FIG. 126(a), and the decorative symbols also remain stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 126(b). Even if the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is not started, the left-handed hit first display LH1 remains displayed until the left-handed hit notification period, which is a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), ends. The left-handed first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 126(b). During this time, the player continues to play left-handed and continues to aim for a prize in the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, but there is still no prize in the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, and the left-handed hitting notification period ends soon. The left-handed player first display LH1 disappears and is not displayed (FIG. 126(c)). Even if the left-handed first display LH1 disappears, there is no winning in the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, and in FIG. The decorative pattern also starts to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 (FIG. 126(g)), as shown in FIG. 126(h), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the following information: A second left-handed display LH2 that encourages left-handed batting is displayed.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example where there is no pullback period. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 124 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 124, the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is four, and in the example shown in FIG. 125, the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is one, whereas in the example shown in FIG. In this case, the number of special drawings 2 remaining on hold is 0. In other words, in FIG. 127(f), the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 starts with 0, and with the final symbol variation display of special pattern 2 that can maintain the time-saving gaming state, no one wins at least once in the special pattern 2 starting hole 232. There was no. As a result, as shown in the reserved number display area of the special figure 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127(i) where the symbol variation display of the last special figure has ended The numerical value is 0, and not a single pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special drawing 2. In this state, when the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state), there is no pullback period and the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes as shown in FIG. 127(j). , the background of the castle town representing the time-saving gaming state changes to a white background with no pattern representing the non-time-saving gaming state. Moreover, instead of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the display of the left-handed player first display LH1 has started. Further, the speaker 120 has also started a left-handed hitting notification (audio output of "Please hit left-handed") to encourage left-handed hitting.

In FIG. 127 (j), the display of the pending symbol of the remaining special figure 1 has started, and the variable display of the decorative symbols has also started, and in the subsequent figure (k), the symbol of that special figure 1 has started to be displayed. The variable display has ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 stops displaying the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3". In the example shown in FIG. 127, as in the previous example shown in FIG. 126, from the time when the symbol variation display of special drawing 1 starts (the display of the left-handed first display LH1 starts) until the symbol variation display ends. During this period, there was no prize entered into the special drawing 1 starting slot 230, and it was not possible to accumulate the reservation of special drawing 1. For this reason, the symbol variation display of the special pattern 1 does not start immediately following FIG. 127(k), and in this example, the predetermined period ( For example, during the period of 30 seconds), there is no winning in the special drawing 1 start opening 230 even once, and the decorative pattern display device 208 starts displaying a demonstration. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 127(l), a pattern demonstration is displayed. In the demonstration display, by operating the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 114, a setting menu is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. From the setting menu, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122 can be adjusted. As shown in FIG. 127(l), even after transitioning to the demonstration display, the left-handed hitting first display LH1 continues to be displayed until the left-handed hitting notification period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 127(m), when the left-handed hitting notification period has elapsed, the left-handed hitting first display LH1 disappears and is not displayed. In this example, there is still no winning in the special drawing 1 starting slot 230, and the demonstration display continues to be displayed. While the demo display is being displayed, the game ball continues to be launched, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port 228 (FIG. 127(n)), as shown in FIG. 127(o), , a second left-handed batting display LH2 that encourages left-handed batting is displayed on the demo display screen. Note that for the left-handed hit notification in the demo display, a sound may be output together with the display, or only a sound may be output instead of the display. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 127, a symbol demo is displayed as a demo display, but the same applies even when an animation demo is displayed.

Further, the right-handed hit notification can be made by blinking the right side lamp of the frame lamp 122 in addition to the display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the audio output from the speaker 120. In addition to the display on the decorative pattern display device 208, the left-handed hitting notification can also be made by outputting audio from the speaker 120 or by blinking the left side lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Furthermore, the display format of the left-handed hitter first display LH1 during the left-handed hitter notification period and the left-handed hitter second display LH2, which is displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the regular pattern starting port 228, was different. , may have the same display mode. Further, although the display period length of the left-handed first display LH1 and the display period length of the left-handed second display LH2 are different, they may be the same period length.

In addition, when a power outage occurs and the game is being restored, notification of how to play will be executed depending on the actual gaming state. For example, if the recovery is during the pullback period, the left-handed hit notification will not be executed even if a right-handed hit is detected. On the other hand, in the case of recovery during the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol in the non-time-saving gaming state, if a right-handed hit is detected, a left-handed hit notification is executed.

Next, the selection of songs will be explained in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 112, music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. The songs that can be selected vary depending on whether predetermined conditions are met. Note that in the following description, a description regarding the establishment of a predetermined condition can be read as saying that the predetermined condition is met, and a description about not meeting the predetermined condition can be read as saying that the predetermined condition is not met. In this pachinko machine 100, setting values with different jackpot probabilities can be changed by pressing a setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 113. Usually, the player does not know which setting value is set. Which setting value is set is an important concern for the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, setting suggestions that suggest the setting value are made using music. The above-mentioned predetermined condition is not satisfied until the jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reserve of the special figure 2 being used up in the non-time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 in the time-saving gaming state, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In other words, the predetermined condition is that the jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of being consumed in the non-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, as a predetermined condition, instead of hitting the jackpot with the special drawing 2 remaining on hold, or in addition to hitting the jackpot with the special drawing 2 remaining on hold, the jackpot will be hit again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during the jackpot game. It may also be that there is a reservation (so-called reservation series). Alternatively, the player may win the most advantageous jackpot (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is special map A, which is a 10R probability-variable jackpot. On the other hand, the most disadvantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the smallest number of rounds (special drawing B, which is a 2R probability variable jackpot), or the jackpot with the smallest number of time savings (special drawing B, which is a 3R regular jackpot) It may be about winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.Alternatively, it may be about winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.Alternatively, it may be about the case where conditions advantageous to the player are satisfied.

In addition, instead of or in addition to setting suggestions that suggest setting values, music that suggests that there is a hold that will become a jackpot again as a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game (so-called hold consecutive games) It may be a song that suggests the type of win (for example, whether or not it has a probability change, or that a round promotion will occur, etc.), or it may be a song that suggests that it is the 10th consecutive jackpot. It may be a song. Furthermore, if the game information suggested by the music is game information that the player cannot normally know, the content of the suggestion becomes useful.

FIG. 128(a) is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not met.

The times when music can be selected are the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state, and the non-time-saving game state. It is not possible to select a song while the special symbol is stopped, and therefore it is not possible to select a song even while a demo is being displayed. However, the music may be selected from the above-mentioned setting menu.

Note that music may be selectable even when the special symbol is stopped.

Further, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, songs that suggest the setting value cannot be selected, so the songs that can be selected remain the same regardless of which setting value (settings 1 to 6) the pachinko machine 100 is set to.

There are five songs, song 1 to song 5, that can be selected when the predetermined condition is not met. Music 1 is the default music, and this music 1 is set when the RAM is cleared. Moreover, this music 1 is set every time the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 123, song 1 remains set from the beginning, but if a song other than song 1 is selected, song 1 will be set at the timing shown in FIG. 123(j).

FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing a list of songs to be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The predetermined condition is established when a jackpot is won in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the special drawing 2 remaining reservation being used up in the non-time-saving gaming state, and one song is played in the internal lottery during the winning jackpot game. Result selected and configured. That is, the selection is not made by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in FIG. 128(b) corresponds to the distribution rate by lottery. The songs selected here include songs that suggest setting values. Song 6 is not a song that suggests a setting value like songs 1 to 5, but song 7 is a song that suggests a setting of 3 or higher, and the pachinko machine 100 actually has a setting of 3 or higher. It will not be selected if it is not set. Song 8 is a song that suggests setting 5 or 6, and will not be selected unless pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 5 or 6. Note that if the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, song 6 will be selected with a 100% probability.

Even after the predetermined condition is met once, the predetermined condition may be met again, and even if the predetermined condition is met the second time or later, a song is selected by lottery in the same way. If the predetermined condition is met multiple times, the same song may be selected. Note that it is also possible to increase the number of songs and to prevent songs that have been selected once from being selected.

The number of songs described above using FIG. 128 is an example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from the speaker 120 is smaller when the predetermined condition is met than when the predetermined condition is not met. Further, as long as this relationship holds, songs 1 to 5 may include songs 6 to 8. Furthermore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, only one song is selected by lottery, but based on the above relationship, multiple songs may be selected by lottery and the player ultimately selects one song. good.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a list of songs to be selected after the predetermined condition is met at least once. Note that the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is met is referred to in FIG. 128(b), and the jackpot gaming state in FIG. 129 is the jackpot gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met after the predetermined condition is met even once. It is about.

In the non-time saving game state, as explained using FIG. 128(a), songs 1 to 5 can be selected by the player operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190. . In addition, if song 6 is selected by lottery at least once in a jackpot game that is started when a predetermined condition is met, this song 6 will be released until the RAM is cleared, and songs 1 to 5 will be released. Similarly, selection can be made by operating the operation key unit 190. Note that even if the predetermined condition is satisfied even once and song 7 or song 8 is selected, song 7 and song 8 are not released in the non-time saving game state and cannot be selected by the player's operation. That is, when song 6 is released, if you repeat the operation of the upper button 191, the song titles of songs 1 to 6 will be displayed in order on the song selection display MC, and the song title of song 6 will be displayed. If the up button 191 is operated in the state where the user is playing, the title of the song 1 is returned to, and the song title of the song 7 and the song 8 are never displayed on the song selection display MC.

In the time-saving game state or the jackpot game state in which the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (for example, the jackpot game state started by winning the jackpot in the symbol variation display of special figure 2 in the time-saving game state), songs 1 to 5 are played. Up to this point, the selection can be made by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same way as in the non-time-saving gaming state. Furthermore, if song 6 is released, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190 in the same way as songs 1 to 5. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, songs 7 and 8 will not be selected by lottery even if the predetermined conditions are met, and therefore will not be released. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 3 or 4, song 7 may be selected by lottery if a predetermined condition is met, and if selected, it will be released and the operation key unit 190 will be operated. However, since song 8 is never selected by lottery, it is never released. If the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 5 or 6, song 7 or song 8 may be selected by lottery when a predetermined condition is met, and if selected, it will be released and the operation key unit 190 You can select by operating . As explained above, songs 6 to 8 can be selected by the player from then on if they have been selected once in the lottery in the time saving game state or the jackpot game state where the predetermined conditions are not met. However, if it has not been selected at least once in the lottery, the player cannot select it. Similarly here, if song 6 is released and songs 7 and 8 are not selectable, if you repeat the operation of the upper button 191, the song names of songs 1 to 6 will be displayed on the song selection display MC. If the upper button 191 is operated while the song title of song 6 is displayed, the song name will return to song 1, and the song title of song 7 and song 8 will be displayed on the song selection display MC in the first place. Never.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example different from the example shown in FIG. 123, continuing from FIG. 123(h).

Similar to the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 123(i), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(a) continuing from FIG. The combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a stopped state, and the word "end" is displayed, indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state has ended.

Further, the third hold icon h23 shown in FIG. 130(a) has changed from the default display mode to a gold display mode. On the drawing, the gold color is represented by crosshatching of vertical and horizontal lines. A pending icon in a golden display mode corresponds to a so-called pre-read notice that indicates that the expectation of hitting the jackpot is 75% in the pending symbol variation display represented by the pending icon.

In FIG. 130(b), as in FIG. 123(j), the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state), the time saving medium lamp TL is off, and the high accuracy The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to a special background on which the characters "one shot reversal" are displayed, and the display of the music selection display MC has started. Music piece 1 is continuously being output from the speaker 120.

Furthermore, the display mode of the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 130(b) has changed from the default display mode to the time saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a display mode of a pre-read notice that suggests that you will suddenly win a time-saving prize, and with the transition to a non-time-saving gaming state (entering the end of the special drawing 2 remaining reservation), the default This is a display mode changed from the display mode. In other words, the pre-read notice suggesting that the winner will suddenly win in a short period of time is triggered by the start of the pullback period. Note that the hold icon in the golden display mode is the second hold icon h22.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(c), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the subsequent figure (d), the special pattern 2 is displayed. The symbol fluctuating display has started again, and the decorative symbols are now fluctuating. In the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon h0 in a time-saving display mode is displayed, indicating that a normal notice is being executed. That is, it is suggested that the expectation level of suddenly winning a prize in a short time in the symbol variation display currently being performed is 75%. Note that the hold icon in the golden display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In FIG. 130(e), the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 116(b) is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 214. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(e), the character "Success" is displayed, and three "decorations 11" (time-saving decorative patterns) shown in FIG. 116(c) are displayed in a line and stopped. In other words, you are suddenly notified that you have won in a short period of time. However, although he suddenly won the time saving, he did not win the jackpot, so the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 in the fourth symbol/retention number display area 284 is stopped and displayed as "x". Furthermore, the mini-designs are stopped and displayed not at the combination of decorations 11 but at a specific combination of numbers (321). Note that this particular combination is a combination that is stopped and displayed only when winning a time-saving symbol that is not stopped and displayed when there is a loss or a jackpot.

By suddenly winning a time-saving game, the state shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a jackpot game. The time saving medium lamp TL shown in FIG. 130(f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the background of the castle town representing the time saving game state. Further, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "949 remaining" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining count indicating that the time-saving game state will continue 949 more times. Furthermore, due to the transition to the time-saving gaming state, the right-hand game first display RH1 is displayed, and the right-hand game display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the golden display mode icon, which has been the first pending icon h21, has become a variable icon h0, and variable display of decorative patterns has started. The variation icon h0 in a golden display mode is a normal notice indicating that the expectation level of hitting the jackpot in the symbol variation display started here is 75%. Note that the song 1 is being continuously output from the speaker 120, and the display of the song selection display MC has also started.

In FIG. 130(g), the player has entered a ready-to-reach state in the variable display of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 130(h), it develops into a super reach, and the pending icon display area 282 and variable icon display area 280 of special drawing 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of time-saving game states such as "949 remaining". It's gone. Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, instead of the song 1 that has been outputted up until now, a song A exclusively for super reach is being output.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(i), the reduced display at the lower right returns to the original size, and the decorative patterns are displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. The combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state, and a 2R probability-variable jackpot (special map B) has been won. In addition, in the fourth symbol/pending number display area 284, the fourth symbol of the special drawing 2 is stopped and displayed as "○", and the mini symbol is also stopped and displayed as a combination of "777". Although the jackpot here is a jackpot with the special drawing 2 remaining on hold, the predetermined condition is not satisfied because the player suddenly won the game in a time-saving manner and entered the time-saving gaming state.

In FIG. 130(j), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the text "Congratulations on the jackpot." Moreover, since the variable winning a prize opening 234 is arranged in the right side area, the right-handed hit first display RH1 is displayed, and the right-handed hit display lamp RL is also lit. Note that the time saving lamp TL is off. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening performance), a second right-handed display RH2 that encourages right-handed hitting is also displayed in addition to the right-handed first display RH1. This second display for right-handed players RH2 is a display format in which the words "Play to the right" are displayed between right-pointing arrows arranged vertically with an interval, and is larger than the first display for right-handed players RH1. be. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound indicating that the player is hitting the ball to the right.

Furthermore, since this is a jackpot game that was started without the predetermined conditions being met, at least songs 1 to 5 can be selected, and the song selection display MC is displayed except for a part of the period during the jackpot game. A display UD imitating the upper button 191 and lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 112 is displayed on the music selection display MC, and during the period when the music selection display MC is displayed, the upper button 191 or A song can be selected by operating the down button 192. In the song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(j), the song title "Song 1" is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs the song 1 along with the audio output of the right-handed hit notification. ing. Note that while the right-handed hitting notification sound is being output, the output sound of music 1 may be lowered, or music 1 may be completely muted.

In FIG. 130(k), the first round has started, and the second right-handed player display RH2 has disappeared and is not displayed, but the right-handed player first display RH1 is still displayed. Further, the right-handed hit notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only music 1 is output. Further, a music video corresponding to the music 1 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started. The song video here is an animation in which the main character, the lord, shows off his sword skills to the tune of song 1, and the lyrics of song 1 are also displayed. A music selection display MC is also displayed.

In FIG. 130(l), the second round has started. In the 2R fixed-variable jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. At the start of the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the words "Aim for V" to urge the game ball to pass through the V passing switch VS, and the music video continues to be displayed. However, the song selection display MC has disappeared and is not displayed. That is, in the round (final round) in which it is possible to win a V prize, music selection cannot be performed. The speaker 120 continues to output the song 1, and the decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the song video corresponding to the song 1 (animation matching the song 1 and display of the lyrics of the song 1). Note that when a round in which a V prize can be won starts, the music video corresponding to the output music may be hidden.

In FIG. 130(m), the game ball passes through the V passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a V winning notification to notify that the player has won a V winning. In other words, it is reported that the state will shift to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. When the V-winning notification is given, the song video is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed together with the V-winning notification. On the other hand, although song 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, the V winning notification sound may also be output from the speaker 120 along with song 1, or the V winning notification sound may be output instead of song 1. . Also, even after winning a V-win, you will not be able to select a song until the end of the 2nd round, but once you have won a V-win, you will be able to select a song during the remaining period of the 2nd round. You can.

In FIG. 130(n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying text indicating jackpot end. Further, the right-handed first display RH1 is continuously displayed during the period of the jackpot game, and is also displayed at this end effect. Moreover, music 1 is also continuously outputted from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also outputted at this end effect. However, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not display a music video corresponding to the music 1 (animation tailored to the music 1 and display of the lyrics of the music 1). Furthermore, in the end effect, the display of the song selection display MC is restarted, and a song can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192. However, it may also be possible to disable song selection in the ending performance, as in the round where V-winnings can be obtained. In this way, during a part of the jackpot game that is started without the predetermined condition being satisfied, music selection cannot be performed. That is, music selection cannot be performed during some periods such as the period when aiming for a V prize, the execution period of the opening performance of the jackpot game, the execution period of the end performance of the jackpot game, and the period of the interval between rounds. Note that during the period when music selection is not possible, the music selection display MC may be hidden, but the music selection display MC may continue to be displayed. Alternatively, it may be possible to select songs even during a part of the period, but in that case, the song selection display MC (display UD imitating the song title and the upper button 191 and lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190) is restricted ( It is preferable to erase the data. Furthermore, even during the period when music selection is not possible, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192.

However, music selection is performed during the entire period of a jackpot game that is started without the predetermined conditions being met (for example, the entire period from the start of the opening performance of the jackpot game until the end of the end performance of the jackpot game). It may be possible to do so. In this case, the music selection display MC may continue to be displayed for the entire period, or may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a round in which V winnings can be obtained.

Moreover, during the period in which the super reach shown in FIG. 130(h) is being performed, music selection cannot be performed. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130(a), 130(c), and 130(i), music selection cannot be performed even when the special symbol is stopped. Note that music selection cannot be performed even when the specific mode is set or when the settings menu is displayed. The specific mode referred to herein may be a prefetch mode in which there is a possibility that a prefetch notice may be given. Alternatively, it may be a mode in which a specific song is being played. Since a specific song is played purposely, changing to other songs is prohibited.

By hitting right during the jackpot game, a prize is also won in the second special figure start opening 232, and up to four reserved special figures 2 are accumulated. When the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, the hold of the special pattern 2 that has been accumulated up to four is exhausted, and a variable display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 130(o), a background of a castle town representing a time-saving game state is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns has started. In addition, in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the words "119 remaining" are displayed as a time-saving game state remaining count indicating that the time-saving game state will continue for 119 more times. Furthermore, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 130(o) are also lit. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a right-handed game first display RH1, and a right-handed game indicator lamp RL is also lit. In addition, a song selection display MC displaying the song title "Song 1" is also displayed, and Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120. Music 1 may be output from the beginning when the jackpot game ends, or may be output from where it left off when the jackpot game ends. In this way, the same music as in the jackpot gaming state is output in the normal gaming state (more precisely, the time-saving gaming state), which is a non-jackpot gaming state, but in the jackpot gaming state that is started when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In contrast, in the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the same animation as the music video corresponding to the song 1 displayed in the jackpot game state.

In the time-saving game state (in the example shown in FIG. 130, the state after (o) in the same figure) after the end of the jackpot game that was started without the predetermined condition being satisfied, music selection can be performed. However, during the period when Super Reach is being carried out, during the stop display period when the decorative symbols are not fluctuating (which can also be seen as the stop display period of the special pattern), or after the start of Super Reach, the decorative symbols are fixed. Music selection cannot be performed during a predetermined period such as a period until the display is performed. Even during such a period when music cannot be selected, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192. Note that music selection may be made possible throughout the entire period of the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the song selection display MC may continue to be displayed for the entire period, or may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a period when super reach is being performed or a stop display period. good.

FIG. 131 shows step-by-step an example in which the first pending icon h21 among the pending icons of special pattern 2 is in a golden display mode at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is finished. It is a diagram.

In the example shown in FIG. 130, the third reservation icon h21 among the reservation icons of special symbol 2 at the time when the symbol variation display of the last special symbol was finished was in a golden display mode, but in this example, the first The pending icon h21 is displayed in gold. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 130 will be mainly explained, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

The first reservation icon h21 in the golden display mode shown in FIG. (See FIG. 131(b)).

Here, to show the result of pre-reading, the currently executed special figure 2 symbol variation display (the symbol variation display to which the variation icon h0 in the golden display mode corresponds) is a jackpot symbol variation display. In addition, in the special figure 2 symbol variation display that starts next (the symbol variation display to which the first reservation icon h21 shown in FIG. 131(b) corresponds), you suddenly win in a short time. As a result of this pre-reading, the jackpot will be won in the preceding symbol variation display, so the symbol variation display to which this first pending icon h21 corresponds will be performed in the time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state won by the jackpot. Instead of suddenly updating the time-saving game, the sudden time-saving winning is invalidated in order to give priority to the time-saving gaming state obtained by winning the jackpot. Therefore, the first hold icon h21 shown in FIG. 130(b) is not displayed in a time-saving display mode, and in FIG. 131(b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. has been done. That is, even if there is a pending winning schedule for the time-saving symbol, if there is a pending possibility of winning a jackpot before the pending is extinguished, advance notice for the time-saving symbol is prohibited.

In FIG. 131(c), the player has entered the ready-to-reach state in the variable display of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 131(d), the music has developed into super reach, and the speaker 120 is outputting music A exclusively for super reach, instead of music 1 that has been output until now. Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 131(e), the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern B) is won. are doing. The jackpot here is a jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 that was made as a result of the special drawing 2 remaining reservation being used up in the non-time-saving gaming state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 131(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection decision display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 8 is displayed on the song selection decision display MD, and it is reported that this song 8 has been selected by lottery. Furthermore, music 8 is being output from the speaker 120. Song 8 is a song that suggests setting 5 or 6, and a player who knows this will know that the pachinko machine 100 he is currently playing is a pachinko machine with a high setting. In addition, song 8 is a song that may be selected only on pachinko machines 100 that are actually set to setting 5 or 6, and the selection rate is low, making it a rare song. In some cases, the interest in the game may be improved. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131(f) displays a first right-handed display RH1 and a second right-handed display RH2, and the speaker 120 emits the song ``Hit to the right'' along with song 8. There is also an audio output to notify you of a right-handed hit.

In FIG. 131(g), the first round has started, and the second right-handed player display RH2 has disappeared and is not displayed, but the right-handed player first display RH1 is still displayed. Furthermore, the right-handed hit notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only music 8 is output. Furthermore, a music video corresponding to the music 8 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started. The song video here is an animation of a loincloth-style bancho posing in time with song 8, and the lyrics of song 8 are also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 130(k) and 130(l), the lyrics of song 1, which does not suggest a setting, are displayed in text in the first color (for example, black letters), but the lyrics of song 8, which suggests a high setting, are displayed. is a text display of a second color (for example, a gold text display). Note that the lyrics of the song 7 may be displayed in characters of a third color (eg, red characters). Further, the music selection decision display MD is also displayed in FIG. 131(g).

In FIG. 131(h), the second round has started. In the example shown in FIG. 131, the text "Aim for V" is also displayed, and although the music video continues to be displayed, the music selection decision display MD has disappeared and is no longer displayed. The speaker 120 continues to output the song 8, and the decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display the song video corresponding to the song 8 (animation matching the song 8 and display of the lyrics of the song 8). Note that when a round in which a V prize can be won starts, the music video corresponding to the output music may be hidden.

In FIG. 131(i), the game ball passes the V passing switch VS, a V winning notification is made on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the player has won a V winning, and the music video is hidden. Further, the song selection decision display MD also remains hidden. On the other hand, music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 131(j), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection decision display MD has been restarted. Moreover, music 8 is also continuously outputted from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also outputted at this end effect.

In FIG. 131(k), the state has shifted to the time-saving game state, the suspension of the special drawing 2 has been exhausted, and a variable display has started, and the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the song 8 is selected by lottery, the display of the song selection display MC in which the song title of the song 8 is displayed in the time saving game state is also started. In other words, even in the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state when the predetermined condition is met (you win the jackpot with the special figure 2 remaining on hold), there is a period during which you can select the music to be output from the speaker 120. . The music 8 may be output from the beginning when the jackpot game ends, or may be output from where it left off when the jackpot game ended. In this way, the same music as in the jackpot game state is output in the normal game state (more precisely, the time-saving game state), which is a non-jackpot game state, but in the jackpot game state that is started when a predetermined condition is met. Unlike, in the time-saving game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the same animation as the music video corresponding to the music 8.

In FIG. 131(l), the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 is displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . The symbol fluctuation display of the special drawing 2 that is stopped and displayed is the symbol fluctuation display of the pending symbol represented by the first pending icon h21 at the time when the remaining reservation of the special drawing 2 has started (at the time when the pullback period has started). be. As mentioned above, originally the symbol fluctuation display would have suddenly resulted in a time-saving win, but since the time-saving jackpot was won first, the time-saving symbol was not stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. , it does not shift to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbols. That is, in the time-saving game state, the stop display of the time-saving symbols is regulated, and the time-saving symbols can be said to be symbols that are stopped and displayed only in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, the time-saving symbols may be stopped and displayed even in the time-saving game state.

The display of the music selection display MC that was displayed in FIG. 131(k) disappears during the stop display of the variable display of decorative symbols. In the time-saving game state, the period in which music output from the speaker 120 can be selected is limited to the period when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and the period in which the music cannot be selected is while the decorative symbols are being displayed in a static manner. However, during the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display of the music selection display MC simply disappears, and the music output from the speaker 120 cannot be changed by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 112. It may also be possible to select by.

In FIG. 131(m), which continues from FIG. 131(l), the number of remaining times in the time-saving game state is decreased by one, the words "118 remaining" are displayed, the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the song selection display is displayed. MC display has been resumed. Subsequently, in FIG. 131(n), the losing decorative pattern combination "Decoration 8-Decoration 1-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the music selection display MC is hidden again.

In addition, in FIG. 131(o), the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state is further decreased by one, the characters "117 remaining" are displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols has started. Note that the display of the song selection display MC on which the song title of song 8 is displayed has also started, and the output of song 8 is continued from the speaker 120 as well.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 131, in a jackpot game state started when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a music video corresponding to the music being output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 for a part of the period. However, in a jackpot game state where a predetermined condition is not met, a song video corresponding to the song being output is displayed for part or all of the period, and in a jackpot game state when a predetermined condition is met, a song video corresponding to the song being output is displayed. The music video corresponding to the music may not be displayed for the entire period. Alternatively, in the jackpot game state where the predetermined condition is not met, the music video corresponding to the song being output is not displayed for the entire period, and in the jackpot game state where the predetermined condition is met, the music video corresponding to the song being output is not displayed. may be displayed for part or all of the period.

In addition, in the time-saving game state ((k) to (o) in the example shown in FIG. 131) after the end of the jackpot game that was started when a predetermined condition was met, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition to the stop display period (which can also be seen as the stop display period of the special map), it is not possible to select songs even during the period when Super Reach is being performed. Even during the period when music cannot be selected, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192. However, music selection may be made possible throughout the entire period of the time-saving gaming state. In this case, the song selection display MC may continue to be displayed for the entire period, or may be hidden during a predetermined period such as a period when super reach is being performed or a stop display period. good.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the music selection display MC is displayed.

In the previous examples, the operation key unit 190 was not operated even when the music selection display MC was displayed, but in the example shown in FIG. 132, the operation key unit 190 was operated. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 131 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 132(a), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed in a stopped state, and the symbol fluctuation display of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving gaming state is displayed. has ended.

In FIG. 132(b), as in FIG. 123(j), the time-saving gaming state shifts to the non-time-saving gaming state (special pattern low probability regular pattern low probability state), the time saving medium lamp TL is off, and the high accuracy The middle lamp HL is also off. Further, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a special background on which the characters "one shot reversal" are displayed, and the display of the song selection display MC on which the song title of song 1 is displayed has started. Music 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 132(c), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 132(d), the song title of song 2 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and the song 2 is displayed from the speaker 120 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the upper button 191 was pressed. Output begins. That is, the song is determined after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the operation key unit 190 was operated. Note that if the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed, the name of the song in the song selection display MC is changed, and the song output from the speaker 120 is also changed. Further, even before a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the song may be determined if the OK button on the operation key unit 190 is pressed.

In FIG. 132(e), the state enters the reach state in the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, and in the subsequent figure (f), it develops into the super reach state, and from the speaker 120, the newly set song 2 is replaced by the super reach state. Dedicated song A is being output. Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 132(g), the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and the 2R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern B) is won. However, the predetermined condition is satisfied.

In FIG. 132(h), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started. Since the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music selection decision display MD is displayed instead of the music selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 6 is displayed on the song selection decision display MD. Furthermore, music 6 is being output from the speaker 120. Music 6 is a music that does not suggest any setting. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 132(h) displays a first right-handed batting display RH1 and a right-handed batting second display RH2, and the speaker 120 emits the message "Hit to the right" along with music 6. There is also an audio output to notify you of a right-handed hit.

In FIG. 132(i), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the right-handed hit notification sound, and only music 6 is output. Furthermore, a music video corresponding to the music 6 output from the speaker 120 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has started. The song video here is an animation of Bancho of Gakuranan Style posing in time with song 6, and the lyrics of song 6 are also displayed. Also, in FIG. 132(i), the music selection decision display MD is displayed.

In FIG. 132(j), the second round has started. In the example shown in FIG. 132, the text "Aim for V" is also displayed, and although the music video continues to be displayed, the music selection decision display MD has disappeared and is no longer displayed. Note that the speaker 120 continues to output music 6.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V passage switch VS, so the V winning notification is not performed, and in FIG. 132(k), the end effect of the jackpot game is started. At the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection decision display MD is restarted. Music 6 is also continuously output from the speaker 120 during the period of the jackpot game, and is also output at this end effect.

In FIG. 132(l), the state has shifted to the time-saving game state, the suspension of the special drawing 2 has been exhausted, and a variable display has started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. Note that since there was no V win, there is no probability change state, and the high/medium accuracy lamp HL remains off.

Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the song 6 is selected by lottery, the display of the song selection display MC in which the title of the song 6 is displayed is started in the time saving game state. In other words, music selection becomes possible. Music 6 is being output from the speaker 120 continuously from the jackpot game.

In FIG. 132(m), a song selection operation is actually performed, and the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in FIG. 132(n), the title of the default song 1 is displayed on the song selection display MC, and when the song 1 is selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the output of the song 1 is output from the speaker 120. will be started. In this example, songs 7 and 8 have not been released, and song 1 is returned to after song 6.

Note that if a specific operation (for example, pressing the lower button 192 or long pressing the OK button) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening performance during the jackpot game shown in FIG. 132(h)), a predetermined Music 6 may be released even if the condition is not satisfied. Even in this case, it is desirable that setting suggestion songs are not released.

FIG. 132(l') is a modification of FIG. 132(l) continued from FIG. 132(k). In this FIG. 132(l'), the state has shifted to the time-saving game state, the hold on special drawing 2 has been exhausted, and a variable display has started, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state. The display of decorative patterns has started. Further, since the predetermined condition is satisfied and the song 6 is selected by lottery, the speaker 120 continues to output the song 6 from the jackpot game. However, the song selection display MC is not displayed, and song selection is not possible. In this modification, in the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output from the speaker 120 can be played using the upper button 191 or the lower button 190 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. There is no period that can be selected by operating . In the time-saving game state, a song selection decision display MD may be displayed, and the speaker 120 may output a song selected by lottery. In this modification, music selection by the player's operation is not possible until the time-saving game state ends.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that is started without the predetermined condition being satisfied.

In FIG. 133(a), unlike the previous example in FIG. 131, the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4". The winning decorative pattern combinations are stopped and displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(a), a reserved icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1 is displayed on a white plain background representing a non-time-saving gaming state. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, three hold icons h11 to h13 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a golden color. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL, right-hand hitting indicator lamp RL, and high-accuracy medium lamp HL are all turned off. Furthermore, music 1 is being output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 133(a).

In FIG. 133(b), the pending symbol fluctuation display represented by the first pending icon h11 in the golden display mode is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(b), the decorative symbol fluctuation display is started. has been done. Further, in the variable icon display area 280, a variable icon h0 in a golden display mode is displayed, indicating that a normal notice is being given.

In FIG. 133(c), a ready-to-reach state is entered in the variable display of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 133(d), the music has developed into super reach, and instead of music 1, music A exclusively for super reach is output from the speaker 120. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(e), the jackpot decorative pattern combination "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7" is displayed in a stopped state, and if you win the 3R probability-variable jackpot (special pattern a), There is. Since the jackpot here is not the jackpot in the special drawing 2 remaining reservation, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, in this example, this jackpot is the first hit, and the predetermined condition has not been satisfied even once since the power was turned on (after the RAM was cleared).

In FIG. 133(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game has started. Since the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music selection display MC is displayed instead of the music selection decision display MD. In the song selection display MC shown in FIG. 133(f), the song title "Song 1" is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs the song 1 along with the audio output of the right-handed hit notification.

In FIG. 133(g), the first round has started, and the speaker 120 no longer outputs the right-handed hit notification sound, and only song 1 is output. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a song selection display MC displaying the song title of "Song 1," and also displays a song video in which the main character, the lord, appears in accordance with the song 1. .

As shown in FIG. 133(h), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times during the first round. In the song selection display MC, the display switches in the order of the song title of song 2, the song name of song 3, the song name of song 4, and the song name of song 5, and "song 5" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(i). A song selection display MC is displayed in which the song title is displayed, and a song video with lyrics display corresponding to song 5 is displayed. Furthermore, music 5 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 133(j), the player presses the upper button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. At the start of the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(k) displays a song selection display MC displaying the song title of "Song 1", and a song with lyrics display corresponding to Song 1 is displayed. Video is being displayed. That is, the process has returned to the song 1 that was output in the first round, and here, the output of the song 1 is restarted from the continuation of the song 1 that was output halfway in the first round. However, each time a song is selected, it may be output from the beginning of the song.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 133(l) where the third and final round has started, the music selection display MC disappears and music selection cannot be performed. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a music video with lyrics corresponding to the music 1. Furthermore, music 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 133(m), the game ball passes the V passing switch VS, a V winning notification is made on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that a V winning has been won, and the music video is hidden. Moreover, the music selection display MC also remains hidden. On the other hand, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 133(n), the end effect of the jackpot game has started, and the display of the music selection display MC has been restarted. Furthermore, music 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 133(o), the state has shifted to the time-saving game state, the suspension of the special drawing 2 has been exhausted, and a variable display has started, and the background of the castle town representing the time-saving game state is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, The variable display of decorative patterns has started. The decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the song selection display MC displaying the song title "Song 1," and the speaker 120 also displays the song 1 in various states ranging from the jackpot game to the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state. The output continues without interruption when the state changes. In addition, when switching from a jackpot game to a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, even if there is no change in music, the music may not be output continuously and restart after a break, or the non-time-saving gaming state may be When switching to the gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the music may be output again from the beginning.

In addition, in all the examples shown in FIGS. 130 to 133, in the jackpot game state, a music video corresponding to the song being output is displayed, and in the normal game state (non-jackpot game state), or more specifically, in the time-saving game state, Even if the same music as the music output in a jackpot game state is output, a video with the same animation as the displayed music video is not displayed, but an effect display according to a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern of super reach) is displayed. In other words, in the normal game state (non-jackpot game state), no matter which song is selected, a performance display that corresponds to the fluctuation pattern (a performance display that does not correspond to the music that is being output) is displayed. However, if it is a full spin reach or a special super (SPSP) reach, the same music video as the music video displayed in the jackpot game state may be displayed. Alternatively, a music video may be displayed depending on the music, although the animation may be different. Super reach includes a reach pattern called song reach, and in this song reach, a video with an animation different from the animation of the song video displayed in the jackpot game state is displayed.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example of a song reach.

FIG. 134(a) is an example continuing from FIG. 131(o). Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 134(a), the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the pattern variable display of the special pattern 2 in the special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state. Further, the time-saving medium lamp TL and the high-accuracy medium lamp HL shown in FIG. 134(a) are also lit. Furthermore, a right-handed game first display RH1 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a right-handed game indicator lamp RL is also lit. In addition, a song selection display MC displaying the song title "Song 8" is also displayed, and Song 8 is being output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 134(b), the player has entered a ready-to-reach state in the variable display of decorative symbols. Then, in FIG. 134(c), it develops into a super reach, and the pending icon display area 282 and variable icon display area 280 of special drawing 2 disappear, and the music selection display MC also displays the remaining number of time saving game states such as "117 remaining". It's gone. Further, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner. From the speaker 120, instead of the song 8 that has been output until now, the lord's lines such as ``Drinking competition'' that announce the development to Super Reach are being output.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 134(d) to 134(g) displays an animation of a drinking competition scene. Moreover, the speaker 120 outputs a song 1, which is a song that is the most popular song in the drinking competition. That is, the drinking comparison reach is a song reach in which song 1 is always output. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lyrics of the song 1 along with an animation of the drinking competition scene. In addition to this drinking comparison reach, there are other music reaches, and songs that can be output in the jackpot game state may be adopted as songs in the music reach. However, the animation of the song video displayed in the jackpot game state and the animation of the reach effect video displayed in the song reach are different.

In FIG. 134(h), a temporary stop display of the super reach performance based on the drinking competition reach is performed, and three "decorations 7" are displayed in a swaying state. The speaker 120 outputs a song 1, which is a song that is popular in the drinking competition.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 134(i), the drinking comparison reach effect has been completed, and the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" has been confirmed and displayed. Since the drinking comparison reach performance has ended, the output of music 1 from the speaker 120 has also ended.

Note that among songs 1 to 5, the song used for song reach may be only song 1, or all songs 1 to 5. Alternatively, there may be only two songs, song 1 and song 2. In the song reach, a moving image corresponding to the song to be output is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected in the non-time saving state.

FIG. 135(a) is a modification of the song list shown in FIG. 128(a), and is a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time-saving state where the predetermined condition is not yet satisfied. That is, the song list shown in FIG. 128(a) is a song list common to the normal gaming state, which is a non-jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state, and the normal gaming state includes the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. ing. In the song list shown in FIG. 128(a), songs 1 to 5 can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 112.

On the other hand, only in the non-time-saving gaming state of the normal gaming state, the list shown in FIG. 135(a) is used instead of the list shown in FIG. 128(a). In the list shown in FIG. 135(a), in addition to songs 1 to 5, song 6α can also be selected. This song 6α is a song that is a different version of the song 6 that can be selected in the jackpot game that is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 128(a). Specifically, song 6 is a song with lyrics as shown in FIGS. ) is a song. Note that the relationship between song 6 and song 6α is not limited to this relationship; song 6α may be a song that removes deep bass or sound effects from song 6, or conversely, music 6 that has heavy bass or sound effects removed. It may be an added song, a song that changes the tempo of song 6, or a song that changes the melody of song 6 (for example, a song that changes from a pop style to a rap style). good. In addition, in this embodiment, the song 6α was provided, but instead of the song 6α, an instrumental (no lyrics) song (for example, the song 1α or Song 8α, etc.) may be provided, or in addition to song 6α, instrumental (no lyrics) songs other than song 6 (such as song 1 and song 8) (such as song 1α and song 8α). may be provided.

FIG. 135(b) is a modification of the song list shown in FIG. 129, and is a list of songs that can be selected in a non-time-saving state after the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, this is a list that replaces the "non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" list on the upper side of the song list shown in FIG. 129. In the list shown in FIG. 135(b), in addition to songs 1 to 5, song 6α can also be selected without the release condition. Therefore, regardless of whether the predetermined condition is met or not, music 6α can be selected by operating the upper button 191 or the lower button 192 of the operation key unit 190 in the non-time-saving gaming state in the normal gaming state. In other words, this song 6α cannot be selected when the player is in the jackpot game state or in the time-saving game state even if the player is in the normal game state. In a jackpot game state started when a predetermined condition is met, song 6 may be selected by lottery, and after the predetermined condition is met, song 6 can be selected on the condition that it has been released.

Note that the music 6α may be selectable (outputable) in the normal gaming state, regardless of whether the predetermined condition is met or not. That is, it may be selectable (outputable) even in the time-saving gaming state.

Further, the music 6α may be selectable (outputable) in the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state after a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, all songs that can be output in the non-time-saving gaming state (songs 1 to 5, songs 6α), and all songs that can be output in the jackpot gaming state (songs 1 to 8) regardless of whether predetermined conditions are met or not. are different in part, but may be different in whole.

Furthermore, when a highly expected reach (for example, super reach) is executed in the normal gaming state, a certain element (song, heavy bass, etc.) is changed from a certain song Nα (for example, song 6α) to a certain song Nα. The song may be changed to an additional song N (for example, song 6) with . By doing this, you can further boost the reach that has high expectations.

In addition, in the normal gaming state (non-jackpot gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game that was started when the predetermined condition was met, or more specifically in the time-saving gaming state, the output is in the jackpot gaming state that was started when the predetermined condition was met. It is also possible that the music that has been selected continues to be output and that music selection is not possible.

In addition, there may be a relationship in which the lyrics of the song being output are displayed during a jackpot game, and the lyrics of the song being output are not displayed in the normal game state (non-jackpot game state), or more precisely, in the time-saving game state. be. However, this relationship may be limited to a specific song.

In addition, even in the normal gaming state (non-jackpot gaming state), or more precisely in the time-saving gaming state, the lyrics of the song may be displayed during the full rotation reach or special super (SPSP) reach, or the lyrics of the song may be displayed in a predetermined manner. In a jackpot game that is started when a condition is met, the lyrics of the song that is being output may not be displayed.

In addition, even if you are playing a jackpot game, there will be some periods (for example, a period when the V aim notification is being performed, a period when the start performance of the jackpot game is being performed, a period when the end performance of the jackpot game is being performed) The lyrics of the song may not be displayed during a specific period (e.g., etc.).

In addition, during a jackpot game that is started without a predetermined condition being met, the lyrics of the song that is being output are displayed, and during a jackpot game that is started when a predetermined condition is met, the lyrics of the song that is being output are not displayed. You can do it like this. In addition, in some cases, the opposite is true; during a jackpot game that is started without the predetermined condition being met, the lyrics of the song that is being output are not displayed, and during a jackpot game that is started when the predetermined condition is met, The lyrics of the song being output may also be displayed.

Furthermore, the music selection can be changed with a single operation of the operating means such as the up button 191 or the down button 192, but the volume and light intensity cannot be changed with a single operation. That is, when the volume and light intensity are operated once, the current values are displayed by the current value call display, and when the volume and light intensity are operated twice, the values (current values) are changed for the first time.

In addition, various modes are available, such as a no-look-ahead mode where no look-ahead notice is given, and a premiere UP mode where premiere effects are more likely to appear.Mode change allows you to select and change one mode from the various modes If an operation is performed, the new selection mode will not be reflected from the symbol variation display in progress, but will be reflected from the next symbol variation display, or after the currently stored hold has expired. . On the other hand, music selection is reflected from the symbol variation display being executed.

In addition, the predetermined condition regarding music selection was to win the jackpot in the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special drawing 2 being consumed in the non-time-saving gaming state, but for example, the jackpot of the 10R jackpot During the game, music can be selected as shown in FIGS. 133(h) and 133(j), but during the 2R jackpot game, music cannot be selected as shown in FIG. 131(f), etc. Good too.

Further, the present invention can be applied to a so-called one-type, two-type mixed machine in which a small hit is made in the time-saving gaming state and a jackpot is obtained by entering the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first gaming state [for example, jackpot gaming state, bonus gaming state, ART state],
The sound output means is configured to generate a sound in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state), a normal gaming state (a non-jackpot gaming state)]. It is capable of outputting songs,
The first gaming state is a state advantageous to the player,
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) In the gaming state, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 133(f) to FIG. 133(k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed. ].
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, in FIGS. In the period shown in FIG. (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operating means [e.g. In FIG. 133(o), a music selection display MC is displayed, and during the period from FIG. 131(k) to FIG. There is a period of
Even in the second game state after the end of the first game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means. For example, in the period from FIG. 132(l) to FIG. 132(n), the music selection display MC is displayed, and in FIG. 132(m), the selection operation is actually performed],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, song selection may be disabled and the current song may be suggested as a special song (for example, a song that suggests information). On the other hand, by providing a period in which music can be selected in the second gaming state, the game can be played using music that matches the player's preference, which can improve the interest of the game. There are cases where it is possible.

Note that the predetermined condition may be that the player wins a gaming state advantageous to the player as a result of a lottery (the same applies below).

Further, the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied are the same game state even though they are the first gaming state. They may be in the same state (for example, the same 2R jackpot gaming state) or different gaming states (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state and a 2R jackpot gaming state) (the same applies below).

Further, a first number of songs that the sound output means can output in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met, and a first number of songs that can be output by the sound output means in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is met. The number may be different from the second number of songs that can be output by the sound output means (the same applies below).

Also, in the above explanation,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first gaming state [for example, jackpot gaming state, bonus gaming state, ART state],
The sound output means is configured to generate a sound in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state), a normal gaming state (a non-jackpot gaming state)]. It is capable of outputting songs,
The first gaming state is a state advantageous to the player,
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) In the gaming state, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 133(f) to FIG. 133(k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed] There is,
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, in FIGS. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operating means. For example, in FIG. 133(o), the music selection display MC is displayed, and during the period from FIG. 131(k) to FIG. is the period displayed],
In the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operating means. For example, FIG. 132(l')],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, song selection is disabled, and the current song is a special song (for example, a song that suggests information). In some cases, it is possible to emphasize the fact that this is the case, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also,
“When the predetermined conditions are met, the music output by the sound output means in the first gaming state may be used to generate game information [e.g., set value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot will be played again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation (so-called a reservation series), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive titles.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

Note that the game information may be information related to a game that the player cannot normally know (the same applies below).

Also,
``During the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``During the entire period of the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music to be output by the sound output means can be selected using the operating means. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Also,
``During the entire period of the second gaming state after the end of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music to be output by the sound output means can be selected using the operating means. be,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first gaming state [for example, jackpot gaming state, bonus gaming state, ART state],
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a second gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (non-jackpot gaming state), more specifically, a non-time-saving gaming state],
The first gaming state is a state advantageous to the player,
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) In the gaming state, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 133(f) to FIG. 133(k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed] There is,
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, in FIGS. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
A certain piece of music that can be output by the sound output means in the second gaming state [for example, music 6α shown in FIG. The sound output means can output a first number of songs that can be outputted [for example, songs 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 128(a)] and the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. is a song that is not included in the second number of songs [for example, songs 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 128(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Since the music that can be output differs depending on the gaming state, the variety of games increases and it is possible to prevent players from getting bored.

In addition, in the first gaming state, it is possible to output a song (additional song) in which certain elements are added to a certain song that can be output in the second gaming state, which is a relatively advantageous state for the player. A certain first game state can be made more exciting. Note that the certain song and the additional song are different songs.

Note that the certain song may be a specific song (for example, an instrumental song (without lyrics)).

Also, all songs that can be output by the sound output means in the second gaming state and all songs that can be output by the sound output means in the first game state regardless of whether the predetermined condition is met or not. , some or all of them may be different.

Also,
“When the predetermined conditions are met, the music output by the sound output means in the first gaming state may be used to generate game information [e.g., set value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot will be played again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation (so-called a reservation series), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive titles.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

Also,
``During the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first gaming state [e.g., jackpot gaming state, time-saving gaming state, bonus gaming state, ART state],
The first gaming state is a state advantageous to the player,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) In the gaming state, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 133(f) to FIG. 133(k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed] There is,
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, in FIGS. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
Even if the first gaming state does not meet the predetermined conditions, the first period in the first gaming state [for example, the period for aiming for a V prize, the execution period of the opening performance of a jackpot game, the jackpot during the execution period of the game end effect and the period of the interval between rounds, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The first period may include a period during which important notifications are being made, and by making songs unselectable, it is possible to reduce the likelihood that the player will miss the important notifications. You can expect it.

The important notifications mentioned here include, for example, notification that a jackpot game has started, notification that a period for aiming for a V prize during a jackpot game has started, and notification that a jackpot game has ended. When a jackpot game starts, when the period for aiming for a V prize begins, or when a jackpot game ends, the way you play changes, so these important notifications include notifications that the way you play will change, and It may be an announcement related to a change in the situation.

The first period may be, for example, a period during which a V aim notification is being performed, a period during which a jackpot game start performance is performed, or a period during which a jackpot game end performance is performed. It may be a period in which a menu is being displayed, a period in which a menu is being displayed, or the like.

Also,
“When the predetermined conditions are met, the music output by the sound output means in the first gaming state may be used to generate game information [e.g., set value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot will be played again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation (so-called a reservation series), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive titles.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

Also,
``During the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first gaming state [for example, jackpot gaming state, bonus gaming state, ART state],
The sound output means is configured to generate a sound in a second gaming state [for example, a time-saving gaming state (a special pattern high probability normal pattern high probability state, a special pattern low probability normal pattern high probability state), a normal gaming state (a non-jackpot gaming state)]. It is capable of outputting music,
The first gaming state is a state advantageous to the player,
The second gaming state is a state different from the first gaming state,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) In the gaming state, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, the period from FIG. 133(f) to FIG. 133(k) in which the music selection display MC is displayed] There is,
In the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, in FIGS. In the period (k), there is a period in which the music selection decision display MD is displayed, but there is no period in which the music selection display MC is displayed],
The display means displays a period [for example, FIG. 132 131(i) to (k) in the same figure and the period in FIG. 131(f) to (j) in the same figure], a moving image corresponding to the first song is displayed. Yes [for example, FIGS. 132(i) to 132(j) and FIGS. 131(g) to 131(h)],
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music piece during the entire period during which the first music piece is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. 130(o)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

In the first gaming state (for example, a jackpot game), the game can be enlivened by displaying a moving image corresponding to the first music along with the output of the first music, and in the second gaming state ( For example, in a normal gaming state (non-jackpot gaming state) or a more limited time-saving gaming state), the first music piece is output to audibly enliven the game, but the video corresponding to the first music piece is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce visual interference with the fluctuating effect that informs whether or not the winner is a winner.

The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the first music piece during the entire period during which the first music piece is being output from the sound output means in the second gaming state. Good too.

Further, the sound output means may be capable of outputting a first number of songs in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and the first song is This is a song included in the first number of songs. Further, the sound output means may be capable of outputting a second number of songs in the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second number of songs is: The number of songs may be different from the first number of songs.

The video image corresponding to the first song may include a video image that corresponds to a variation pattern (for example, a reach pattern) although the first song is being output, or a video image that corresponds to a fluctuation pattern (for example, a reach pattern) although the first song is still being output. Video images unrelated to the first song are not included. On the other hand, a video in which the first song is output and the lyrics of the first song are also displayed (for example, a video of the song reach described using FIG. 134) is Included in video images. Depending on the song reach, a video image corresponding to a certain song (for example, song 1) is displayed in the second game state, but a song other than the specific song (first song) is displayed. In this case, the moving image corresponding to the first song is not displayed in the second gaming state.

Further, the display means may not display a moving image having the same animation as the moving image during the entire period during which the first music is output from the sound output means in the second gaming state. good.

Also,
“When the predetermined conditions are met, the music output by the sound output means in the first gaming state may be used to generate game information [e.g., set value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot will be played again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation (so-called a reservation series), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive titles.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By suggesting game information related to the game when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game to satisfy the predetermined condition.

Also,
``During the entire period of the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not met, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a notification means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.],
In the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means provides a first notification that prompts the firing of the game ball toward the first game area [for example, a left-handed notification such as a left-handed first display LH1 and a left-handed second display LH2, etc. ] may be executed,
When the first condition [for example, there are four special drawings 2 remaining on hold] is satisfied when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the notification means
During the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, the symbol variation display of the special drawing 2 is being performed as a result of the remaining reservation of the special drawing 2 being consumed in the non-time-saving gaming state. period (pullback period), in which the first notification is not performed during the period of FIG. 123(j) to FIG. 123(o) to FIG. 124(d) [for example, FIG. 123(l)] ,
After the first period ends, the first notification [for example, the left-handed player first display] is displayed over a second period [e.g., the left-handed player notification period in FIGS. 124(e) to 124(h)]. LH1 left-handed hit notification].
A game machine with this feature. ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide appropriate notifications depending on the gaming situation.

Note that during the second period, the first notification is always performed.

Further, the notification means may not perform the first notification even when a power outage occurs during the first period and the power is restored thereafter.

Also,
``The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] is configured when a second condition [for example, there is only one special drawing 2 remaining pending] is satisfied when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. If established,
The first notification is made during a third period shorter than the first period [for example, the period from FIG. 125(j) to FIG. 125(m)] after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state. [For example, FIG. 125(l)]
After the third period ends, the first notification [for example, the left-handed hitting notification period in FIG. 125(n) to FIG. 125(o) to FIG. 126(b)] For example, the left-handed batter first display LH1's left-handed batter notification] is executed.
A game machine with this feature. ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine also makes it possible to provide appropriate notifications depending on the gaming situation.

Also,
``The notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208] is configured to notify the user when the first condition and the second condition are not satisfied when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, When the special figure 2 remaining reservation is 0], the second period [for example, the period from FIG. 127(j) to FIG. 127(l)] after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state When executing the first notification [for example, the left-handed game notification of the first left-handed game display LH1] [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in FIG. In some cases, the left-handed first display LH1 may not be executed immediately.
A game machine with this feature. ”
Also explained.

This gaming machine also makes it possible to provide appropriate notifications depending on the gaming situation.

Also,
“A second starting opening [for example, second special figure starting opening 232] disposed in the second gaming area [for example, right side area];
A second symbol display means [for example, the second special symbol display device 214] that can perform a second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special symbol 2] based on the winning in the second starting hole. and,
Equipped with
In the time-saving game state, the notification means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] provides a second notification [for example, right-handed first display RH1] that urges the firing of a game ball toward the second game area. is to be carried out;
The notification means provides a number of reservations notification indicating the number of reservations in the second symbol variation display [for example, a number notification in the reservation number display area of the special symbol 2 which is located at the lower left of the fourth symbol/number of reservations display area 284]. is to be carried out;
The notification means is configured to operate during execution of the last second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "last second symbol variation display") in the time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 123(f) to FIG. h)], execute a third notification [for example, right-handed second display RH2] that is in a notification mode different from the second notification and urges the firing of the game ball toward the second game area. It is a thing,
The notification means executes the third notification in the last second symbol variation display, while the notification means executes the pending number that has been executed before the last second symbol variation display is started. A game machine characterized in that the notification is executed without changing the notification mode [for example, FIGS. 123(f) to 123(h)]. ”
Also explained.

In the last second symbol variation display, if the player does not save up the reserve for the second symbol variation display, the player will suffer a loss. First, since the pending number notification is executed without changing the notification mode, the player can confirm the pending number in the second symbol variation display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, it is possible to emphasize the firing of the game ball toward the second gaming area and prevent the player from losing money.

In addition, the said notification means may always perform the said third notification while the said last second symbol variation display is being performed.

Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state after the second period ends, the notification means is configured to control the notification means in response to the detection that a game ball is being fired toward the second gaming area. It carries out the first announcement,
The notification means does not perform the first notification during the first period even if it is detected that a game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

Also,
“A first starting port [e.g., first special figure starting port 230] disposed in the first gaming area [e.g., left side area];
A first symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212] capable of performing a first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display of special symbol 1] based on the winning in the first starting hole. and,
Equipped with
The first symbol display means does not stop displaying the time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 116(b)] in the first symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state. It is a thing,
The second symbol display means may stop displaying the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving gaming state [for example, FIG. 130(e)],
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the time-saving game state is entered without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 130(f)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even in the same non-time-saving gaming state, in the second symbol variation display, if there is a hold, the time-saving symbol may be won, and compared to a case where there is no hold, the time-saving gaming state returns to the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state. likely to migrate. Therefore, by not giving the first notification, it is possible to prevent the player from aimlessly aiming at the first start opening.

Further, the present invention includes a pre-read notice means capable of giving a pre-read notice indicating that the time-saving symbol will be stopped and displayed,
The pre-reading notice means is configured to win a certain type of jackpot with a reservation that is extinguished earlier than the second symbol variation display suspension (hereinafter referred to as "second reservation") that stops displaying the time-saving symbol. In this case, the pre-read notice may not be executed for the second suspension.

In addition, in the case where a reservation that is extinguished before the second reservation has won a probability-variable jackpot, even if the second suspension is exhausted after the jackpot game of the probability-variable jackpot, the time-saving pattern based on the time-saving symbol It may be one that does not transition to the gaming state.

That is, the time-saving game state is entered after the end of the probability-variable jackpot game, and even if the second hold is exhausted, the time-saving symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, at the time when the second hold is extinguished, the time-saving game state is already in place.

Furthermore, the present invention is also applicable to enclosed type pachinko machines. In an enclosed type pachinko machine, a predetermined number of game media (eg, game balls) are circulated inside the game machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the ejection means into the game area can be ejected from the game area and supplied to the ejection means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area on the front of the game machine, as shown in FIG. The illustrated upper plate 126 and lower plate 128 are not provided.

As explained above, this enclosed type pachinko machine is used by enclosing balls and circulating the enclosed balls within the pachinko machine. It may also be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as a gaming machine applicable to the present invention will be explained using FIG. 136. Here, FIG. 136 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 136), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored. It is configured so that it can rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136, a suitable number of symbols are printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 1013, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbol combinations. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. Furthermore, although the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136 is equipped with three reels inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back side of each reel 1010 to 1012 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 1010 to 1012. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 1014 that becomes valid. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line becomes valid, and when two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 lines are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line will become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right horizontal winning line, Five lines, including the down winning line and the right up winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he is playing a bonus game. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the medal input button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are input when the medal input button 1031 is pressed, and three coins are input when the medal input button 1032 is pressed. It is now ready to be loaded. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 will also be referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals have been inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1041 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the term "insertion" includes both. It is. The stored medal number display 1025 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136, the stored coin count display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout coin count display 1027 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 1041 or when the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key is inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operation means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can perform operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take on a plurality of states similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the valid operation period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting personal game history information of a player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to operation means.

A title panel 1062 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 1036 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp that lights up the title panel 1062. At the bottom of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 1060 is disposed at the top of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided at the top of the presentation device 1060. This production device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed on the back side of this shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (game display device). The structure is such that it appears on the person's side).

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Further, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

Further, although the present invention has been exemplified as a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game machine, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a junk ball game machine, a smart ball, etc.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136, the predetermined conditions for music selection include winning the n-th consecutive bonus, winning the bonus with specific symbols (for example, 7 red symbols), and winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on the winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT, winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of additional games, An example of this is winning an AT that has the same combination of roles.

Further, the jackpot game state in the examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 133 is the bonus game state, ART state, AT state, etc. in the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 136. In addition, when the jackpot game state is changed to the bonus game state, the time-saving game state becomes the ART state, AT state, etc., and when the jackpot game state is set to the ART state, it becomes the AT state, RT state, etc. .

In addition, although the music release information was reset at the time of clearing the RAM, it may be reset when a power outage recovery is performed across dates, or at a certain specific time even when dates are crossed (for example, If the power is restored before 6:00 a.m., the reset may not be performed.

Furthermore, when the device returns from the power outage, the initial music set in advance is selected as the selected music.

In the above description,
``Sound output means [e.g., speaker 120] capable of outputting music;
An operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
A game machine comprising:
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first advantageous state [for example, jackpot game state, bonus game state, ART state],
The first advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , if the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) The first number of songs that the sound output means can output in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. )] and a second number of songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 88(b). Unlike the song “1”],
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, there is a period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is no period during which the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Note that the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the first gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied are the same game state even though they are the first gaming state. They may be in the same state (for example, the same 2R jackpot gaming state) or different gaming states (for example, a 3R jackpot gaming state and a 2R jackpot gaming state).

Also,
“In the first advantageous state when the predetermined conditions are met, the music output by the sound output means provides game information [for example, setting value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot is played again. It is possible to suggest that there is a reservation (so-called a reservation series), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive titles.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

In the above description,
``A game machine equipped with a sound output means [for example, a speaker 120] capable of outputting music,
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first advantageous state [for example, jackpot game state, bonus game state, ART state],
The first advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player,
Predetermined conditions [for example, winning a jackpot in the symbol variation display of special drawing 2 that is performed as a result of the remaining reservation of special drawing 2 being used up in a non-time-saving gaming state, winning the jackpot again as a result of pre-reading while on hold during a jackpot game It is possible to win the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, the jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the jackpot with the largest number of time savings); Winning an unfavorable jackpot (for example, a jackpot with the minimum number of rounds or a jackpot with the minimum number of time savings), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, specific Winning a bonus by aligning the symbols (for example, red 7 symbols), winning a bonus by aligning the symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the middle horizontal winning line), winning the 10th consecutive AT. , when the predetermined AT start condition is not satisfied (e.g., winning a predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that matches a predetermined combination of hands, etc.) is not satisfied. The first number of songs that the sound output means can output in an advantageous state [for example, "5" in FIG. )] and a second number of songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied [for example, determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 128(b) ``1'' of one song] is different from
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined condition is achieved, the number of songs is different from that when the predetermined condition is not achieved, thereby increasing the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, and improving the game. It can improve your interest.

Also,
“The second number of songs [e.g., 1] is smaller than the first number of songs [e.g., 5 or more and 8 or less],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, the special feeling in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved is increased, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

Also,
``Equipped with display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208],
The sound output means is capable of outputting music even in the second advantageous state,
The second advantageous state is a state that is different from the first advantageous state and is advantageous to the player [for example, when the time-saving gaming state and the first advantageous state are the bonus gaming state, ART state, AT state, AT state or RT state when the first advantageous state is the ART state],
The display means does not display a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state [for example, FIG. 123(a) to FIG. 123(i), FIG. 131(k) ~ Same figure (o)],
In the first advantageous state, the display means displays a moving image corresponding to the music output by the sound output means [for example, FIGS. 131(g) to 131(h), FIG. 133(g) ~Same figure (k)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, in the first advantageous state, the game can be enlivened by displaying a video together with the output of music, and in the second advantageous state, while the game can be enlivened by the output of music, for example, It is possible to prevent interfering with the variable performance that informs whether or not a winner is won.

Also,
"In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met, the music output by the sound output means provides game information [e.g., setting value, a result of pre-reading during a jackpot game on hold, and a jackpot again. It is possible to suggest that there is a hold (so-called held consecutive wins), the type of win (with or without probability variation), and the number of consecutive wins.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by suggesting game information when the predetermined condition is achieved, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the game to achieve the predetermined condition.

Note that the game information may be information related to games that the player cannot normally know.

Also,
``Equipped with operation means [for example, operation key unit 190],
In the first advantageous state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the music output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 133(h) or FIG. j)] is in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the music output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means [for example, FIG. 132(h) etc., the music selection decision display MD is displayed and selection is impossible],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by making the song unselectable in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is achieved, this song is a special song (a song that suggests information). This can improve the interest of the game.

Note that the game may include a display means, and the display means may be capable of displaying a music selection display representing music that can be selected by the player.

Further, the display means does not display the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
The display means may be capable of displaying the music selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

Further, the display means does not display the lyrics of the song being output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state,
The display means may display lyrics of a song being output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first song [for example, song 7 or Song 8] is added, and the first song can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first song cannot be selected in the normal game state [e.g., non-time saving game state]. [For example, FIG. 129].

During a part of the period in the first advantageous state [e.g., jackpot gaming state] [e.g., a round (final round) in which it is possible to win a V prize], it is not possible to select a song using the operating means. You can.

Some periods in the second advantageous state [e.g., time-saving gaming state] [e.g., during the Super Reach period, during the period when the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, during the period during which the demo display is being executed, or during the demo display. Even during the period in which the menu display is being executed, the selection of music using the operating means may not be possible.

Alternatively, the mode may be such that during a part of the period in the normal gaming state [for example, the non-time-saving gaming state], it is not possible to select a song using the operating means.

Alternatively, if a power outage occurs while a song is selected and the power is restored thereafter, a preset initial song may be treated as the selected song.

The following is an additional description including what has been explained so far.

(Additional note 1)
It is possible to output music during special games (for example, jackpot games, etc.),
The number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied is a specific number,
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
the specific number is a number less than the predetermined number;
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
It is possible to output a predetermined number of songs even during advantageous games (for example, time-saving games, etc.),
During special games, videos corresponding to the type of music being output are displayed, but during advantageous games, videos corresponding to the type of music being output are not displayed.
A game machine characterized by:

(Additional note 4)
The game machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3,
Music output during a special game when a predetermined condition is met may suggest predetermined information related to the game;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 5)
The gaming machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4,
During the special game when the predetermined condition is not met, the player can select the music to be output using the operating means, but during the special game when the predetermined condition is met, the player can select the music to be output using the operating means. It is not possible to select songs,
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 6)
In the non-time-saving gaming state,
This is a game state in which the game ball should be fired towards the first game area (left side area),
The time saving game state is
It is a game state in which the game ball should be fired towards the second game area (right side area),
If the first condition is met when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
Regulating the execution of the first hitting method notification (left hitting notification) that notifies that the shot should be fired to the first gaming area in the first period after the transition from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state,
After the first period ends, the first method notification is executed for a third period.
A game machine with this feature.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine described in appendix 6,
If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied when transitioning from a time-saving gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state,
regulating the execution of the first playing method notification in a second period shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state;
A game machine characterized in that, after the second period ends, the first playing method notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
The game machine according to appendix 6 or 7,
If the first and second conditions are not met when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state,
The first playing method notification may be executed over the third period after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 6 to 8,
The first condition is to remember the first number special second reservation,
The second condition is that you remember a second number of special reservations that is smaller than the first number.
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 10)
The game machine described in any one of Supplementary Notes 6 to 9,
When transitioning from a non-time-saving gaming state to a time-saving gaming state, a second hitting method notification (right-handed hitting notification) is executed to notify that the game should be fired to the second gaming area,
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving gaming state,
A third playing method notification (pending accumulation notification) that is different from the second playing method notification that was executed in the variation before the final variation and notifying that it should be emitted to the second game area. while executing, displaying a numeric hold in the same manner as the numeric hold that was displayed in the change before the last change;
A game machine characterized by:

(Appendix 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 6 to 10,
In the special game judgment based on the special 1 in the non-time saving gaming state, the special symbol (time saving symbol) will not be won, while in the special game judgment based on the special 2 (special pattern 2 remaining pending) in the non-time saving gaming state, it is applicable. You may win a special design,
A game machine characterized in that when the special symbol is won, the game machine shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a special game.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may not be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 208 Decorative pattern display device 190 Operation key unit 191 Upper button 192 Lower button MC Music selection display MD Music selection decision display TL Time saving medium lamp RL Right-hand hitting indication lamp HL High precision medium lamp

Claims (2)

a first performance means capable of executing the first action;
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means;
a display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first presentation means;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of performing a certain effect during execution of the variable display,
The first performance means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain performance,
The second performance means is capable of performing a second action,
The display means may display a second image regarding the validity determination result after displaying the first image,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image,
The second image is also a different image from the decorative pattern image,
a first case in which the first action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
a second case in which the first action is performed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
There is a third case in which the first action is not performed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image;
The first effect means ends the first action before the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. and
The first image has a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started;
A game machine characterized by: a first performance means capable of executing the first action;
a second presentation means different from the first presentation means;
a display means capable of displaying a first image related to the first presentation means;
A game machine comprising:
The display means is capable of displaying a variable display of decorative patterns,
The display means is capable of performing a certain effect during execution of the variable display,
The first performance means may start executing the first action after the first image is displayed in the certain performance,
The second performance means is capable of performing a second action,
The display means may display a second image regarding the validity determination result after displaying the first image,
The first image is an image different from the decorative pattern image,
The second image is also a different image from the decorative pattern image,
a first case in which the first action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
a second case in which the first action is performed at a second timing later than the first timing after the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
There is a third case in which the first action is not performed even if the display of the first image is started in the certain production;
In the first case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
Even in the second case, the display means displays the second image after starting to display the first image,
In the third case, the display means does not display the second image after starting to display the first image;
The first effect means ends the first action after the end of displaying the second image in either the first case or the second case. can be,
The first image has a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect,
The first operation is easier to perform when the first image of the second aspect is displayed than when the first image of the first aspect is displayed,
The display means does not display an image related to the second presentation means before execution of the second action is started;
A game machine characterized by:

Images